Benguet State University

Table of Contents

Introduction & Acknowledgement iii

Part I: Organization and Management 1

Part II: Reference and Bibliography 45

Part III: Cataloguing and Classification 88

Part IV: Selection and Acquisition 138

Part V: Indexing and Abstracting 169

Part VI: Information Technology 197

References 232

Appendices 233

ii
 Acknowledgment
This Librarians Licensure Examination (LLE) Reviewer was initiated from our desire
to provide affordable and accessible options to LLE takers during this pandemic. We
opted to collate all available LIS resources to augment existing available LLE
reviewers. The questions were adapted and extracted from other review materials,
textbooks, and books carefully consolidated into a six-part reviewer. Other key sources
and practice sheets are also appended.

This reviewer would not have been a reality without the contributions of the
following librarians and specialists. They shared their knowledge through notes,
outlines, questionnaires, resources, and guides that created these compiled notes and
questions.
Andrew Ducas Indexing and Abstracting
Brenda Marie Dogup & Noel Cabfilan Cataloguing and Classification
Leonila Reyes Selection and Acquisition
Michelle Ambloza & Buford Laruan Information Technology
Nolie Enem Organization and Management
Rhodora Las Marias & Jennifer Gumihid Reference and Bibliography

We express gratitude to the following contributors who served as peer reviewers.

Arlene Bayeng 2018 LLE Top 9
Catarina Oloan 2011 LLE Top 4
Geraldine Hernandez 2019 LLE Top 3
Jocelyn Dar-Dagusen 1999 LLE Top 10
Kryztalhyn Mae Ramos 2019 LLE Top 10
Roana Marie Flores 2016 LLE Top 5
Appreciations also go to our coleagues who have supported us in this endeavor.

Compilers:

Daniel Jr Balbin
College Librarian I, BSU

Lauren Kipaan
College Librarian IV
Director of Libraries

iii
LIBRARY ORGANIZATION AND MANAGEMENT
Management is the activity of directing people’s work to achieve organizational goals or simply getting things done through
people. As an art, the mere application of the general principles can be subjected to personalized interpretations of each individual.
That there can be many means to achieve the end target. It requires skills from the manager for these means to work out. For
example, communicating, leadership, and goal-setting tasks need skills derived from theoretical principles. As a science,
management starts with observation and follows organized steps. The scientific approach to management is applied during the
decision-making process, planning, and integrating technological innovations into library operation.

Evolution of Management Theories

Things to Remember Persons to Know

Scientific ● Also known as machine model
Management
Movement ● Assumed that workers are economically
motivated
● Intending to increase production with less time,
proponents of this movement introduced several
studies to help companies to become more
efficient through changing procedures and using
inventions.
● The task bonus system is modified from Taylor’s
“a fair day’s pay for a fair day’s work” premise,
which means a worker should get “a fair day's
pay for a fair day's work”—no more, no less. If
the worker didn’t work the fair day’s work, he
doesn’t deserve a fair day’s pay. Task bonus
system is also called a progressive rate system
preferred by workers willing to work harder for
additional wages.
● Frederick Taylor is the Father of the Scientific
Management Movement.
● Along with Frank and Lillian Gilbreth, Taylor
conducted the Time and Motion study to find out
how to work as efficiently as possible. While Taylor
focused on reducing time to increase production and
profit, the Gilbreths worked on reducing the work,
or the motions are made in a task, focusing more on
the worker.
● Henry Gantt also approached the goal of increasing
efficiency scientifically. Gantt devised a task and
bonus system, where workers finishing the standard
task assigned for the day received a bonus on top of
their daily wages. Underperforming workers were
not penalized, and they still received their daily
wage, irrespective of the work they had completed
that day.

● With the introduction of standard time for a task

to be done, the Gantt chart was the tool used to
provide a graphic representation of the tasks to
occur in a specific period of time.

Classical ● Also called the traditional or Universalist school,
movement focusing on a holistic view of the organization
resulting in a body of knowledge called the
administrative management theory. Both the
founders of the theory of management, Henry
Fayol and Frederick Taylor, believed that
workers are naturally lazy, and they can be
motivated by higher wages.
● Henry Fayol is the father of the classical
movement.
● Max Weber designed the bureaucratic mode
and the rules and procedures for a theory of structure
in organizations.
● Max Weber divided organizations into
hierarchies, establishing strong lines of authority
and control.

● Lyndall Urwick and Luther Gulick set the

organization and system movement, which
distinguished administration and scientific
management applicable to the operational level.
They also devised the acronym POSDCORB
known in management.

Human ● The maxim in human relations school is "a happy ● Elton Mayo founded the human relations
relations workforce is a productive workforce." Because movement.
school management is getting things done through
people, management study should center on

1
 interpersonal relations, thus making personnel
administration prominent.
1) One of the movements under the human
relations school is the human behavior
movement which assumes that if
management makes employees happy,
maximum performance will be achieved.
2) Another movement is the self-actualizing
movement which encourages employees to
develop social groups, move toward
employees' participation in management, and
allow democracy within the organization.
System ● The systems approach regards the
Approach organization as a total system; divided into three
movements - decision theory movement, general
systems theory movement, and psychological
theory movement.
1) Decision theory movement - This
movement introduced mathematical
methods and quantitative models to serve
as the basis for all management decisions.
This movement also leads to the
introduction of management information
systems (MIS) and decision support
systems (DSS).
2) General systems theory movement -
General systems theory movement
integrates knowledge from the biological,
physical, and physical sciences.
2
● With his famous Hawthorne study, which led to the
Hawthorne effect being coined as an increase in
worker productivity produced by the psychological
stimulus of being singled out and made to feel
important, four general conclusions were drawn:
1) The aptitudes of individuals are imperfect
predictors of job performance.
2) Informal organization affects productivity. The
Hawthorne researchers discovered a group life
among the workers.
3) Work-group norms affect productivity.
4) The workplace is a social system.
● Chester Barnard's idea of contribution-satisfaction
equilibrium is one key concept in this movement.
Barnard emphasized the role of communication as
the first function of managers.
● Peter Drucker introduced MBO or Management by
Objectives.
● Abraham Maslow proposed that hierarchy of
needs, saying people have a complex set of needs.
Self-actualization is the highest need in the
hierarchy.
● Douglas McGregor contributed Theory X and
Theory Y.
1) Theory X assumes that employees dislike work,
are lazy, and dislike responsibility, and must then be
coerced to perform.
2) Theory Y assumes that employees like work, are
creative, and like responsibilities, and can exercise
self-direction.
● Chester Barnard is the first person to utilize
the systems approach in the field of management.
Apart from being considered a behaviouralist as he
emphasized the psychological aspects of
management such as “contribution-satisfaction
balance,” he is regarded as a systems theorist
simultaneously as he viewed organizations as a
social system.
● Early contributors of systems approach
include Ludwing Von Bertalanfty, Lawrence J.
Henderson, W.G. Scott, Deniel Katz, Robert L.
Kahn, W. Buckley, and J.D. Thompson.
● Ludwig van Bertlanffy is the father of general
systems theory movement. He was the first to talk
about the "system theory of organisms." At this
point, a system refers to a set of elements standing
in interrelation among them and with the
environment.
 3) Psychological theory movement - This ● The psychological theory movement was
movement views the human being as a based on the personality theory.
complex organism metamorphosing
through physiological and psychological
stages to maturity. This movement
includes a contingency
approach/management-situational
approach.

Management Functions

PLANNING ORGANIZING

● The function of management involves an assessment of
the future, the determination of desired objectives, and the
development of alternative courses to achieve such
objectives.
● The function of management determines the specific
activities necessary to accomplish the planned goals.
It is aimed to group the activities into a logical
framework of the structure, assigning authority and
responsibilities to people for their accomplishment.

LEADING CONTROLLING

● The managerial function enables managers to ● It is the function of monitoring performance and
communicate with and influence subordinates towards undertaking corrective action(s) to assure the
the achievement of organizational goals. An important attainment of predetermined goals and objectives of
ingredient of this function is motivation - the willingness the organization.
to exert high levels of effort towards organizational goals,
conditioned by the effort's ability to satisfy individual
needs. Also called Directing.

Managerial Levels

3
PLANNING

Planning is a never-ending or continuous process because after making plans, one has to be in touch with the changes in changing
environment and selecting one best way.

One of the things done in planning is assessment. It is the first thing done to better understand what might affect the organization
while implementing its plans.

▪ SWOT (Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities, Threats) analysis

SWOT analysis is one of the most popular strategic analysis models. It involves looking at the strengths and weaknesses
of an organization and any opportunities and threats to the organization. It allows planning based on the internal
environment to be prepared for the external environment.
▪ TOWS (Threats, Opportunities, Weaknesses, Strengths) analysis
TOWS Analysis is a variant of the classic business tool, SWOT Analysis. Instead of just identifying strengths,
weaknesses, opportunities, and threats, it allows you also to identify certain directions on how to put together each factor
into context—for example, maximizing strength to maximize opportunities, maximizing strength to minimize threats,
minimizing weaknesses by taking advantage of opportunities, or minimizing weaknesses while avoiding threats.
▪ PESTLE (Political, Economic, Social, Technological, Legal, Environmental) analysis
PESTLE analysis is a fundamental tool for planning. It is a method of assessing your business environment and its
possible impact on the organization’s performance. This analysis helps determine the effect of the six external factors
on the organization in terms of duration of impact, type of change, rate of impact, and importance.
▪ SOAR (Strength, Opportunities, Aspirations, Results) analysis
SOAR is an acronym standing for Strengths, Opportunities, Aspirations, and Results. Strengths and opportunities focus
on your present situation, whereas aspirations and results focus on your desired future situation. It is a strategic planning
tool that can help your organization create and execute its strategy by focusing on your strengths and leveraging your
organization’s opportunities.

Several planning techniques

• Standards – the use of guidelines developed by various professional groups to have a definite target on planned actions
to be undertaken.

• Forecasting – library manager predicts based on the assumption about the future.

• Projections – library manager, outlines a trend of events based on some type of analysis or qualitative judgments.

• Predictions – library manager, formulates an opinionated event to happen or plan of action based on the facts and
information available.
4
VMGO (Vision, Mission, Goals, Objectives)

Planning is manifested in the VMGO of the organization. Although it is not the only time where planning is done, VMGO draws
the lines of limitations and targets of an organization. It formalizes the planning that has been done.

Vision - the object of imagination of the library or an act of foresight.

Mission - it is the self-imposed duty of the organization.

Goals - general statement referring toward which efforts the library is directed.

Objectives - measurable actions to be achieved by the organization.

Activities - predetermined act toward achieving library objectives.

Procedures - standard operations performed by the library staff in dealing with specific activities.

Strategies - These are long-term objectives, state course/courses of action adopted, and allocation of resources needed.
They serve as a framework that will guide thinking and action.

Policies - verbal, written, or implied overall guide sets up limits and directions around which managerial action occurs.

a. Originated policy - This type of policy is developed to guide the general operations of the organization. They flow
mainly from the objectives and are the primary source of policymaking in an organization.

b. Appealed policy - This forces a decision or policy. These are made out of snap decisions.

c. Implied policy - This type of policy is unwritten and is developed from actions that people see about them and believe
to constitute policy.

d. External imposed policy - This type of policy comes through several channels. They dictate the working in an institution.

ORGANIZING

Organizing is manifested in the organizational chart as it is the basic tool to show authority relationships. It identifies the line of
command and which tasks are to be done by each person in the chart. It is the process or function of determining the structure
for allocating individual tasks and coordinating activities.

Organizing Principles

•Centralization - This indicates that authority is concentrated at the highest echelon of the hierarchy and that those at
the top make most decisions.

•Decentralization - Contrast to centralization, authority to make decisions is pushed down in the organizational
structure.

•Delegation - This is the downward transfer of formal authority from one person to another within prescribed limits.

•Departmentation - This is the basis on which work and individuals are grouped into manageable units. It could be
either based on the number of workers, function, territory, product, customer, or process/equipment.

•Line and staff positions - Line positions are responsible and accountable for the organization's objectives. Staff
positions provide support to the line position.

•Scalar principle of hierarchy - This determines the chain of authority ranging from the ultimate to the lowest ranks.

•Span of control - This refers to the number of people and/or activities a manager can efficiently manage.

•Unity of command - The main idea here is that every person within the organization should order from and report to
only one person.

Staffing is the function that involves recruitment, selection, hiring, placement, and development of human resources
required by the organization. It is also called human resource administration. It sees to it that a qualified person is
selected for each position.

5
 The Staffing Process

1. Human Resource Planning

2. Recruitment
3. Selection
4. Induction and Orientation
5. Training and Development
6. Performance Appraisal
7. Transfers
8. Separation

LEADING

It is a leadership and management function that is highly humanistic; enables managers to get things done through people
– both individually and in groups. It instills both a sense of responsibility and accountability to every member of the organization.

Responsibility and Accountability

Responsibility - is the obligation to do an assigned task.

Accountability – means the obligation and initiative to carry out established plans.

**Leading is not simply making people do a task or carry out plans; they must also have a reason why they must
accomplish something and contribute to the organization. That is where motivation enters.

There are several approaches through various theories in motivation.

1. Maslow's Hierarchy of Needs - Abraham Maslow proposed that people have a complex set of needs arranged in a
hierarchy of importance. They do not operate at once but are organized in successive levels, and one need has to be satisfied
sufficiently before the need becomes operative.

2. Hertzberg's Two-Factor Theory - Frederick Hertzberg and his associates distinguished between lower-level and
higher-level needs and said that the best way to motivate someone is to rearrange the job to make the job more interesting
and challenging. This is a way to develop a sense of satisfaction in accomplishing the challenge on the task.

3. McGregor's Theory X and Y - Theory X assumes that workers are lazy, dislike work and responsibility, and must be
coerced to perform. Theory Y assumes that workers are creative and like work and responsibility, and they can exercise
self-direction.

4. Victor Vroom’s Expectancy Theory – This assumes that it is not enough to offer the person something to satisfy his
or her important needs, but the person must also be reasonably sure that he can obtain the reward. It could be summed into
the formula of motivation which is Motivation = (Expectancy)x(Instrumentality)x(Valence).

Expectancy is the belief that effort leads to performance

Instrumentality is the belief that performance leads to an outcome

Valence is the extent to which one values the outcome.

5. David McClelland’s Achievement-Power-affiliation Theory - This was developed by David McClelland. It is focused
on three (3) crucial needs; need to achieve, power, and affiliation.

6. B.F. Skinner’s Behavioral Modification – Skinner believed behavior is shaped through systematic reinforcement and
that punishment has limited effects. The use of positive reinforcement to control or modify the behavior of individuals or
groups. It is encouraged that desired behaviors should be reinforced.

7. Clayton Adlerfer’s ERG Theory - Clayton Adlerfer reworked Maslow's hierarchy of needs theory. He argued that
there are three groups of core needs: existence, relatedness, and growth. In contrast to Maslow, ERG theory assumes that
more than one need may be operative simultaneously. If the gratification of a higher-level need is hushed, the desire to
satisfy a lower-level need increases.

Leadership is an essential tool for leading or directing. It is the ability to influence people toward the attainment of goals. An
effective leader has the ability to influence others in the desired direction and thus can determine the extent to which both
individual employees and organizations as a whole reach their goals.

6
The leadership grid is a measure that involves two primary concerns in the organization: concern for production and concern for
people.

James McGregor Burns identified two types of leadership styles:

•Transactional leader - This is a leader who sees job performance as a series of transactions with subordinates. The
transactions consist of exchanging rewards for services rendered or punishments for inadequate performance.

•Transformational leader - This type of leader is skilled at getting subordinates to transform their self-interest into the
interest of the largest group. They bring out the best in their subordinates.

According to Fred Fiedler, three situational variables determine how favorable any particular situation is for a leader. These three
constitute Fiedler's Leadership Contingency Model.

1.Leader-member situation - the degree to which members like and trust a leader and are willing to follow him/her

2.Task structure - the clarity and structure of the elements of the tasks to be accomplished

3.Power position - the power and authority that are associated with the leader's position

Communication is another essential tool for leading or directing. It provides cohesiveness and direction in an organization. The
typical elements of this process include the following.

1.Source - This is the sender of the message. The source has some thought, need, or information to communicate.

2.Message - The source has to encode the information in some form that both sender and receiver can understand.

3.Channel - This is the link between the source and the receiver.

4.Receiver - This is none other than the recipient of the message.

5.Feedback - This is the receiver's response and the nature of activities carried out by the receiver.

Forms of Communication

•Written communication - This form of communication provides a lasting record and ensures uniformity in matters like
policy.

•Oral/verbal communication - In this form of communication, there is instant feedback through which clarifications can be
accomplished.

•Non-verbal communication - Unwritten or unspoken; this can provide many clues to an observer. Body language is a
particular type.

How does communication flow?

•Downward - This is the most common type of communication within an organization. It flows from superiors to
subordinates.

•Upward - This consists of messages that flow from subordinates to superiors. Most of these messages ask questions, provide
feedback, or make suggestions.

•Horizontal - This is the lateral exchange of information within an organization. In competitive organizations, information
is not always shared because the employee who possesses the information wants to retain a competitive advantage.

CONTROLLING

Controlling is the function of monitoring performance and undertaking corrective action(s) to ensure the organization’s pre-
determined goals and objectives.

There are several techniques employed in controlling.

1. Evaluation - This identifies areas needing improvement with an aim toward corrective action.

2. Cost-benefit analysis - This is a systematic approach that seeks to

•determine whether or not a particular program or proposal is justified,

7
 •rank various alternatives appropriate to a given set of alternatives, and

•ascertain the course of action needed to attain these objectives.

3. Management information system (MIS) - This is a technical tool to gather data, summarize it, and present it as
information to be used in the control process and decision-making.

4. Decision support system (DSS) - As an extension of MIS, it takes advantage of the continuous development in the
database management and modeling arena to offer software that supports computerized decision-making.

5. Operations research - This is an experimental and applied science devoted to observing, understanding, and predicting
the behavior of purposeful systems. Operations researchers are actively engaged in applying the knowledge to practical
problems.

6. Program evaluation and research technique (PERT) - PERT is a method of planning and scheduling work that involves
identifying all the key activities in a particular project, devising the sequence of activities, and arranging the duration of time
for the performance of each phase of the work to be done.

Budgeting

A special part of the controlling function is budgetary control - the method of rationalization whereby estimates covering different
periods of time are, by the study of statistical records and analytical research of all kinds, established for all, and everything that
affects the life of a business concern can be expressed in figures.

There are various techniques in budgeting that an organization can consider. Here are some of them.

1. Line-item budgeting - This is the most common technique. In this technique, the budget is divided into broad input
classes or categories (such as salaries or wages, materials and supplies, equipment, capital and expenditures, and
miscellaneous), with further subdivisions within these categories. It can be inflexible unless the system allows the
reallocation when there is a need to do so. This budget is easy to prepare. Most of the allocations are done by simply
projecting current expenditures to next year, taking cost increases into account. However, this technique has almost no direct
correlation with the organization's objectives.

2. Lump-sum - In this technique, there is a certain allocation given by the parent institution to its sub-units, and it is up to
the manager of each sub-unit to decide how the sum will be broken into categories.

3. Formula budgeting - This uses pre-determined standards for the allocation of financial resources. It is expressed in terms
of a percentage of the total institutional budget.

4. Program budgeting - Here, the budget is concerned with a particular program with its set of activities and not with the
individual items or expenditures. It maintains that it is possible to relate the programs to accomplishments to time/action
objectives or activities stated in output terms in the strategic planning process.

5. Performance budgeting - In this technique, expenditures are based on the performance of activities and the efficiency of
operations. Therefore, it weighs more on quality over quantity of service. It is based on cost-benefit analysis.

6. Planning Programming Budgeting System (PPBS) - This was developed in the US by Rand Corporation and was
introduced to the Department of Defense by Robert McNamara in 1961. At that time, President Lyndon B. Johnson directed
all government agencies, including government-run universities and colleges, to implement it. By 1965, it was used by all
agencies. The technique combines the best of both program budgeting and performance budgeting. The emphasis is on
planning and evaluation. It begins with the establishment of goals and objectives and introduces controlling measures. PPBS
has the following specific steps:

•Identifying the objectives of the organization

•Presenting alternative ways to achieve objectives with cost-benefit ratios presented for each

•Identifying activities that are necessary for each program

•Evaluating the result so that action can be taken

It combines planning (stating objectives), translating into a program, and stating requirements in budgetary terms (financing).
The key to success is the selection of criteria for evaluating each alternative against relevant objectives.

7. Zero-based budgeting - This focuses on two basic questions:

8
 • Are the current activities efficient and effective?

• Should current activities be eliminated or reduced to fund higher priority new programs or reduce the current budget?

It requires organizations to review and evaluate each of their service programs and activities based on output measures and
costs.

Marketing

Marketing is the analysis, planning, implementation, and control of carefully formulated programs designed to bring about
voluntary exchange of values with target markets to achieve the organization's objectives. The marketing mix consists of the
following:

1. Product - This is the tangible commodity or the intangible service that an organization offers to its customers/clients.

2. Price - This refers to the amount of money customers/clients are willing to part with to avail or use a product or
service being offered.

3. Promotion - This is the provision of relevant information to prospective customers/clients to persuade them to
patronize a product/service.

4. Place - This determines the availability in the right direction of an organization's product/service and the accessibility
of channels of distribution.

School Library and Media Center

I.HISTORICAL DEVELOPMENT OF SCHOOL LIBRARIES

▪ John Newberry (9 July 1713 - 22 December 1767)

- the "Father of Children's Literature." He was the first to conceive the idea of publishing books for children
▪ Late 1800- School library services evolved
▪ 1876- Beginning of the Modem American Library movement
• Creation of the American Library Association (ALA) led by Melvin Dewey.
• School Libraries were made of a small collection
▪ 1910- a High school library section was built within the New York State Teachers Association.
• School Librarian primarily role is clerical
New York- recognized Librarians as Teachers rather than clerks.

▪ 1914- American Association of School Librarians (AASL) begin as the School Library section of the American
Library Association
• Board of education adopted regulations that made salaries of qualified high school librarians comparable to
teachers and also recommended that librarians should be graduate of a one-year course approved library
school (Morris, 2010)
▪ 1915- California School Library Association was formed
• The Committee set the first library standard as a report for schools of different sizes in the United States on
Library Organization and Equipment (CLOE) within the Department of Secondary Education of the National
Education Association (NEA).
▪ 1920- The first effort of evaluating the school libraries was conducted by the Library and education communities.
▪ 1960s- The greatest period of growth and development for school libraries due to the increased support from private
and public funds for education.
▪ 1963-1968- Knapp School Libraries Project- funded the establishment of model School library media centers across
the country.
▪ 1965- passage of Elementary and Secondary Education Act (ESEA)-school libraries received significant federal
support - part of the Great Society legislation, which included Library Services and Construction Act, Higher
Education Act.
▪ 1969- first joint standards entitled "Standards for School Media Programs" published by AASL and NEA Department
of Audiovisual Instruction (DA VI) coordinated by Frances Henne-terms media, media specialist, media center, media
program were used.
▪ 1975- DA VI become Association for Educational Communications and Technology.
▪ 1989- California changed professional Library credential title to Library Media teacher.
▪ Information Power (AASL & AECT, 1998)- standards expanded the role of SLMS to instructional partner &
program administrator aside from the roles of teacher and information specialist.
9
 ▪ 1999- School libraries adopted the IFLA/UNESCO School Library Manifesto
"The school library provides information and ideas that are fundamental to functioning successfully in today's
information and knowledge-based society. The school library equips students with life-long learning skills and
develops the imagination, enabling them to live as responsible citizens."

School Mission:

School library services must be provided equally to all school community members, regardless of age, race,
gender, religion, nationality, language, professional or social status.

✔ Services and materials must be provided for those who are unable to use mainstream library services
and materials.
✔ Access to services and collections should be based on the United Nations Universal Declaration of
Human Rights and Freedoms. It should not be subject to any form of ideological, political, or
religious censorship or commercial pressures.
Goals of the school library: SLMC is "integral to the educational process.” (IFLA/UNESCO School Library
Manifesto, 2006)- latest revision

▪ 2000- School Library Media specialists become instructional partners in curriculum development and assume active
instructional roles in their schools.
- Information literacy advocates

- School Library Media Centers become more virtual

▪ 2007 - First book on the new standards for SLMC, entitled "Standards for the 21st-century learner (AASL, 2007)
▪ 2008- Leaming4life (AASL, 2008)
▪ 2009- Standards for the 21st century Leamer in Action (AASL, 2009b)
-Empowering learners: Guidelines for School Library Media Programs (AASL, 2009a)

5 Roles of SLMS (AASL, 2009a):

1) Teacher
2) Instructional Partner
3) Program Administrator
4) Information Specialist
5) Leader

II. SCHOOL LIBRARY IN THE PHILIPPINES

▪ 1898- end of the Spanish-American war opened a new chapter in Philippine history.
▪ 1898-1945- American government was committed to establishing a public education system and strong public service
in the Philippines, library development made an impact.
Lois Stewart Osborn- introduced the modem concept of a school library in the Philippines.

Pampanga High School Library- First school library in the Philippines

- All other library developments were made possible through the initiative and effort of the American scholars and
librarians who came to work for the US public service and the Filipino scholars who carried a tradition from the
previous century.

▪ 1946 to Today- growth of Modern Libraries in the Philippines.

▪ 1998- each elementary and secondary school must have a functional library. Schools without libraries must establish
them; those with libraries must improve them (DO 6, s. 1998 - Policies and Programs for School Library
Development)

III. 21ST CENTURY SCHOOL LIBRARY

School Librarian

► is responsible for working with teachers to enrich the instruction program through supplementary materials of every
description, provide the necessary materials, organize

them for efficient use, teach the students what the materials are and how they are used.

10
 Ideally, there should be one librarian for every 500 students.

►It must reflect the needs of its school population, it must be properly and adequately equipped to meet the needs of the
curriculum and the users, the set of standards must be followed.

Roles of School Libraries in Education

1. Vital instrument for quality education which helps students and teachers find the information they need to carry out
classroom learning activities and to satisfy their interests.

2. Center of information sources. (Audio-visual center, and instructional materials center whose functions include the
following: systematically collect, classify, store, and retrieve information, and assist in adopting this information to suit
their intended use).

3. It is a learning laboratory for developing critical thinking that promotes multiple literacies.

4. Student Services: Reading, Viewing, and listening; reference; instruction

5. Teachers and administrators services: Curriculum development, assisting in the use of materials

6. Library is a service center, reading center, guidance center, material production center, and most importantly, teaching-
learning center. The library should be the center of a school is an integral and indispensable part of it (DO 6, s. 1998)

Roles and functions of the school library and media center

1) Information Center
• Updates teachers of recent library acquisitions
• Makes teachers aware of materials available for pupils’ use
• Establishes linkages with community and other civic organizations
• Continuously updates library collection
• Continuously promotes reading habits and awakens deeper awareness of the importance of the library
• Provides consultancy services on the preparation and development of information media
• Demonstrates innovations in teaching strategies
• Implements programs to help improve library facilities and service
2) Audio/Video Center
• Makes available to pupils and teachers varied materials like films, slides, filmstrips, etc.
• Makes available to pupils and teachers equipment like projectors, VCR systems, cassette tape recorders, film
projectors, computers, etc.
• Provides a space for teachers to program materials
• Houses the projection area where previewing audio-visual materials is done.
3) Learning Materials Center
• Develops skills in reading, writing, speaking, learning, visual literacy, mathematics, etc.
• Diagnoses learners’ need and evaluates pupil growth and development
• Makes available collection of information media to enhance the teaching-learning process
• Includes general references like encyclopedias, atlas, maps, etc. to the collection, as well as textbooks and
supplementary materials
• Stimulates teachers’ and pupils interest and develop inquiry and reading habit

**School Library main function: is to make instructional materials available and accessible to

teachers and learners to create positive reading/study habits and develop the ability to

use those materials efficiently and effectively as tools of learning (DO 6, s. 1998).

IV. ADMINISTRATION AND STAFFING

1. A unified program integrating library and audiovisual programs under the leadership of a qualified

and competent professional is recommended.

2. Where there are two or more professional librarians, one is appointed as the head to oversee the

smooth implementation of services and the supervision of personnel.

11
 3. The school library media center shall be regularly evaluated in terms of its services, personnel, and

resources, not only by the students but also by the faculty.

HUMAN RESOURCES

1. The SLMC shall be appropriately staffed by full-time licensed librarians and trained clerical

support, the number of which is proportionate to the student population.

2. The professional/licensed librarian shall be given a faculty status, with corresponding privileges

and other benefits comparable to those of the teaching faculty.

3. Participation in seminar workshops, conferences, and other continuing professional education

activities shall be encouraged and subsidized.

SIZE

► For enrollment of 500 or less: 1 full time professional librarian + 1 support staff

► For enrollment of 1,000: 1 full-time professional head librarian/media specialist, one full time librarian/media specialist
+ 2 support staff

► For enrollment of 2,000: 1 full-time professional head librarian/media specialist, 2 full time librarian/ media specialist,+
4 support staff

Note: There shall be an additional librarian and two additional support staff for every additional one

thousand enrollment.

QUALIFICATIONS

Professional Librarian - BLS/BLIS graduate or BSE/ BSE Ed. major or minor in Library Science, &

certified by the Board for Librarians/ RL

Note: The head librarian/media specialist must have graduate units in Library and Information Science (LIS) or related field
(e.g., MA major in Educational Technology) and 5 years experience in the library.

Library Assistant/Clerk - College/ Secretarial graduate

Audiovisual Technician - 2-year course in Electronics

V. PHYSICAL FACILITIES OF SCHOOL LIBRARIES

► The library must accommodate at least 10% of the total school population. The work areas must be provided for among
many types of materials and for library services. The space allowance for each reader must be at least 25 sq. ft.

► The library must be located as central as possible and in a relatively quiet area.

► According to DO 6, s. 1998, there must be a separate building or room properly constructed for a school library which
is well lighted, ventilated, free from noise, centrally located to be accessible to teachers and pupils, with the modified open-
shelf system, and can accommodate at least fifty (50) pupils for library lessons once a week.

PHYSICAL SET UP

1. Building plan
-Building an SLMC Planning an SLMC, whether a new facility or a simple remodeling project, is a
consultative effort between the SLMS, principal, Architect, and stakeholders. Staff, faculty, pupils/students,
and other people who will be the primary users of the library facility should be involved in the planning
(Morris, 2010).

B. Building structure and design

-2016 NEW DEPED SCHOOL BUILDING DESIGNS. COMPLIES WITH THE NATIONAL

12
 Building CODE OF THE PHILIPPINES 2010; DEPED NEW SCHOOL BUILDING DESIGNS
Architectural Features of the School Building will be

upgraded.

Factors to consider in the overall design:

a. Community resources accessibility

b. The technology used throughout the school

c. No. of department or decentralized collections available in the school or district

C. Furniture and equipment (based on the Standards for School Libraries)

a. Reading tables and armless chairs must accommodate 15-25% of the enrollment.
b. Minimum of three dictionary stands
c. At least two bulletin boards or depending on space available
d. Minimum of 4 step stools
e. 2 or 3 book trucks or carts
f. One computer for every 1000 enrollment

VI. SCHOOL LIBRARY COLLECTION

▪ Selection and acquisition of books and other library materials is a cooperative endeavor of the librarian, faculty, and
head of school.
▪ It should be based on a list of approved textbooks, teacher's manuals, and supplementary materials.
▪ Teachers may recommend books and other instructional materials needed in the classroom.
▪ Supplementary materials are also intended to be present in school library collections. These are resources other than
textbooks: relevant and interesting books, newspapers, informational pamphlets, and other materials printed in
mother-tongue and instructional languages reflecting local customs and concerns textbooks and teachers’ manuals.
(either print or non-print materials).

VII. BUDGET

► GOVERNMENT SCHOOL LIBRARY/HUB

- DO 48, s. 2010 - Guidelines for the Allocation of Centrally Procured Supplementary Reading,

Reference and Other Instructional Materials for the Library Hubs

▪ Subject to the release of funds by the Department of Budget and Management (DBM) to DepEd.
▪ The lump-sum budget is allotted sixty percent (60%) for elementary titles and forty percent (40%) for secondary titles.
▪ The number of copies per title depends on the size of the Library Hub are:

Library Size Number of Copies per Title

Large 36

Medium 25

Small 19

▪ Library funds in government schools must be 5-10% of the school funds (based proportionately) as released by the
Schools Division Office (DO 6, s. 1998).
▪ DO 6, s. 1998- Policies and Programs for School Library Development
- School libraries should procure basic print supplementary materials, in addition to adequate copies of textbooks and
teacher's manuals, in accordance with the Guidelines on Supplementary Materials Intended for Public Elementary and
Secondary School

VIII. EVALUATION OF SCHOOL LIBRARIES AND OTHER ISSUES

► The school library should provide for its users’ educational, informational, cultural, and recreational needs. Its collections
should fulfill these needs so that students and teachers will find fulfillment in their desire to learn and be well informed.

13
 ► The following questions can serve as guidelines in evaluating the school library services:

I. Are the materials in the collection appropriate for their users’ ages, abilities, and background?

2. Are the materials accurate and up-to-date?

3. Does the library catch and hold the interest of the users?

4. Are the materials in the library organized and balanced in content?

5. Are the services of the library cost justified?

► Monitoring of school libraries should be done regularly by DECS central office, regional offices, and/or school heads.
(DO 6, s. 1998)

Special Libraries

I.HISTORICAL DEVELOPMENT OF SPECIAL LIBRARIES

▪ July 2, 1909- marked the birth of the Special Libraries Association (SLA). Twenty-six (26) librarians congregated at
Bretton Woods in New Hampshire, U.S.
John Cotton Dana is the founder of the association.

SLA Motto was quoted by John A. Lapp, which is "putting knowledge to work."

▪ 1910- there were already approximately 100 special libraries.

▪ 1920- it grew to 1,000; and
▪ 1935- the number reached 1,500
▪ 1950's- the number increased up to 5,000
▪ 1965- the number was more than twice 10,500
▪ At present - approximately more than 19,000 special libraries and still counting.
▪ 2019- Special Library Association serves more than 12,000 innovative information professionals in 83 countries. Its
members include corporate, academic, and government information specialists and their strategic partners.

II.SPECIAL LIBRARIES IN THE PHILIPPINES

▪ 1954- establishment of the Association of Special Libraries of the Philippines (ASLP)

- ASLP was represented by government and private libraries and established a linkage between the private and public
sectors.

▪ Rufo Buenviaje- father of special Librarianship

▪ Juan C. Buenostro Jr.- writer of the first book published in the Philippines in 1995 entitled" the management of
special Libraries and Information Center."
The growth of special libraries is owed to three basic factors:

1. information explosion

2. advances in computer and information technologies

3. the existence of an information society

▪ Special libraries associations in the Philippines

1. Association of Special Libraries in the Philippines (ASLP)- most popular
-Angelina Cabanero- first president of ASLP

-ASLP Bulletin- Publication of ASLP

2. Medical and Health Librarians' Association of the Philippines (MAHLAP)

3. Agricultural Librarians' Association of the Philippines (ALAP)

Some special libraries

1. Asian Development Bank (ADB)

2. Asian Institute of Management (AIM)
3. Energy Research and Development Center (ERDC) under the Philippine National Oil Company (PNOC)

14
 4. International Center for Living and Aquatic Resources (ICLAR)
5. Southeast Asian Fisheries Development Center / Aquaculture Department (SEAFDEC/AQD)
6. Tebtebba Foundation

III. 21st CENTURY SPECIAL LIBRARIES

► A special library is a library that is established, supported, and administered by a business firm, private corporation,
association, government agency, or other special-interest groups or agencies to meet the members of the parent institution’s
needs pursuing organizational mission and goals.

►A special library is also known as ...

● information center (IC)

● learning resource center (LRC)
● corporate information center
● business information center
● Work-place library (Claravall, 2005)
● Knowledge Management Center

►Special Library goal/s must: (Sabat, 1995)

● Support the information need of its parent organization (Need anticipation)

● Provide information services, and reference advising (Professional staff support)

►Special Library Objectives

● Objectives are set/align with the goals & activities of the organization it serves.
● Objectives are carried out by three basic functions of the library: acquisition, organization, and information
dissemination.

►Types of Special Libraries

● Research
● Corporate or industrial
● Government
● Institutional

►Distinguishing Characteristics of special libraries

● Information function
Special libraries are to provide focused information for their special clientele, continuingly to promote and support
the mission and goals of the parent institution. The information service is tailored to fit the needs of the organization.

● Location
Special libraries are usually found in private and business organizations while others serve the state and its
government, or in non-profit organizations, and so on. They are located in the nucleus of the organization.

● Client
Special libraries serve a well-defined group of users.

IV. ADMINISTRATION AND STAFFING

A special library's place in the organization depends on the size of the organization.

The decision where to put the library in an organization is based on:

1. Service sphere
How many departments will the library serve?

If a single department, the library is within that unit.

If an entire organization, the library is positioned to build and maintain effective communication with all the
departments it will serve. It is sometimes placed in the administrative services division, management division, or may
stand independently.

15
 2. Immediate plans
The organizational position of the library should be determined according to the ultimate goal of service.

Special Library Functions

1. Acquisition
- Published information (print or non-print; electronic; information sources that are publicly available like
books, journals, and vertical file materials; CD-ROM; microforms; maps; and so on)
- Internal information (information or materials produced or generated internally like research reports,
technical memoranda, working papers, correspondences, newsletters, etc.)
- Outside resources
2. Organization
- Cataloging and classification
- Indexing
- Abstracting
3. Dissemination
- Readers' services
- Reference and research service
- Current awareness service (CAS) - routing, acquisition bulletin, library display, newsletters, selective
dissemination of information (SDI)

Special Library Personnel

In hiring professional staff in the library, the following should be considered:

● Education
- Appropriate education (RL) and experience in professional librarianship and subject knowledge are
important.
● Personal qualifications
- must be able to deal and interact with diverse clients and personalities
- must have good communication skills
- must be able to establish priorities for competing demands
- Other characteristics: perseverance, a sense of intellectual sympathy with other persons and their work while
retaining objectivity, and a sincere desire to work with and assist others in furthering the organization's
goals.
● Professional specialties
- technical specialist (good cataloger, indexer, database expert, records manager, archivist, system analyst)
- Or a subject specialist (reference librarian, database searcher, bibliographer, translator, abstractor,
subject/course related earned appropriate to the organization, etc.)

V. PHYSICAL FACILITIES OF SPECIAL LIBRARIES

Space and Equipment

1. Location - The library must be visible and convenient to access.

2. Area - Library space should be allocated and organized by functional activities like:
- library user space (service and information area, lounge area, study carrels, group seating, etc.),
- professional and clerical staff work areas, and
- administrative function areas.
3. Area requirements - Open rectangular area is most desirable. Odd spaces cannot be as efficient but can be designed
to accommodate needs. Examples of some typical area requirements are the following:
- Small libraries -185.8 m2
- Large libraries - at least 929 m2
- For each library worker- 13.9 m2, but the typical is 9.3 m2 for each office worker.
- The ratio of chairs to number of potential users- 1: 25 or 10% of the total clientele population

VI. SPECIAL LIBRARY COLLECTION

Special libraries are established as a result of a perceived need. Compared to other types of libraries, it deals with a
specialized clientele/particular population, or with specialized materials/special collections, or a combination of both. This

16
greatly affects the collection development of every special library. It has a very specialized collection and is very specific to
what the clients need.

- Subject scope of the collection

The scope of the collection of special libraries varies according to the type of organization it serves. It is also
determined by;

✔ the objectives of the organization and

✔ the depth of subject of coverage in each field are governed by the nature of the organization’s work.
The range of the subject scope may be very restricted. It may even be concerned with one narrow subject are. In some
cases, new subject areas are added to the collection as required by the latest projects and new technologies.

- Selection of library materials

The library director/manager uses selection tools in acquiring and selecting library/materials. There are several kinds
of tools that can help in deciding what materials to choose and acquire. Another way is based on the recommendations
and suggestions from his clients. These recommendations and suggestions are a big help because of direct
communication between the selector and the end-user.

- Components of special library collection

1. Published information- in most special libraries, periodicals provide the most up-to-date information and often
form a large and important segment of the collection. Although, books are important in some special libraries,
especially those in the fields with no fast developments such as history, social sciences, language, and literature.
Up-to-date published information are mostly the needed information in special libraries that is why serials and
periodicals such as;
a) magazines,
b) newspapers,
c) journals and
d) technical reports,
because they must always be ahead of developments in their field. The goal of having a special library for an
organization is not just for a repository but for the need for information to achieve the parent organization’s goal.
It is more of a support role than a repository.

2. Internal information- collection of the information generated internally such as;

a) Research reports,
b) Technical memoranda,
c) Laboratory notebooks,
d) Working papers,
e) Correspondence,
f) House organs and newsletters,
g) Sales literature, and
h) Company competitive advertising.

These reflect more the repository function of special libraries. Serving as a record management facility for
the organization and at the same time an information source of previous reports, documents, and
developments.

3. Outside resources- special libraries may strive to be self-sufficient on their primary subject area or heavily used
material. It is said that a special library’s best friend is the local directory of special libraries. Indeed, informal
cooperation with other special libraries is a long-standing tradition in special librarianship.

VII. BUDGET

Budget is considered as the library's primary planning and control device. The librarian prepares

the annual budget and usually exercises full control over its allocation and implementation.

The budget process, structure, and planning will depend upon the type of budget the organization

or institution employs.

Budget preparation variations:

17
 a) Lump-sum budget- budget is part of a larger budgetary unit, without further breakdown.
b) Open-end budget - no definite budget is given.
c) The line-item budget is divided into operating expenses (salaries/wages, materials, supplies, etc.) and capital outlay (
for long-term investments like equipment, renovation, etc.)
d) Others - user estimates, comparison with other organizations, hire consultants, budget ratios

Potential sources of funds for the library are:

- parent organization
- grants and donations
- fee-based services
- projects

VIII. EVALUATION OF SCHOOL LIBRARIES AND OTHER ISSUES

Evaluation and Measurement

Methods that can be considered in performing evaluation:

1. User surveys (formal or informal)- Formal user surveys can be conducted by the management or outside groups.
Informal user surveys can be based on daily interaction with clients.
2. Statistics - This is accomplished by recording all library usage like types of materials borrowed, frequency of use of
a certain material, number of reference questions answered, etc.
3. Objectives - Evaluation must be qualitative rather than quantitative and must not be against accepted guidelines.
4. Annual reports - This compares the library's performance from the previous year in terms of projects accomplished,
objective achievements, etc.
5. 5. Valuing library services - This is defining the economic value of information and information services and the
value added by the information professionals.

Academic libraries

I. HISTORY OF ACADEMIC LIBRARIES

▪ Est. 300 B.C.- Library of Alexandria by Ptolemy Soter

▪ Est. 7th Century B.C.- Library in Nineveh
(Although not specifically ‘academic libraries,’ Library of Alexandria and Nineveh were the known great libraries
that support academicians a long time ago)

▪ Middle Ages- The common word for library in the early Middle Ages was “armarium,” the name for the bookchest
where the books were kept. The librarian of such collection was known as the “armarius.”
▪ 1424- Cambridge University Library had only 122 volumes at the time.
▪ Mid-15th Century- The invention of movable type press by Johan Gutenberg led to the fast development of printing,
leading to the increase of knowledge production.
▪ 18th Century- The ready availability of printed books also led to the establishment of subscription libraries and book
clubs, some of which – like the journals – were based on learned societies.
▪ 1700- Bodleian Library at Oxford University increased 16,000 volumes in 1620 to 30,000 by 1700.

The history of academic libraries is tied with academia and the history of universities.

▪ Ancient Universities- Cambridge, Oxford, St. Andrews, and Aberdeen.

▪ 19th Century- University expansion
The number of universities expanded, and they started to throw off their traditional curricula.

▪ 20th Century- Libraries continued to grow gradually during the early years of the 20th century, but it became apparent
that provision varied enormously between institutions.
▪ 1921- The University Grant Committee investigated the situation and, in a report published in 1921, made one of the
most supportive and appreciative statements about libraries ever to emerge from a quasi-government body:
“The character and efficiency of a university may be gauged by its treatment of its central organ – the library. We
regard the fullest provision for library maintenance as the primary and most vital need in the equipment of a
university.”

▪ 1967- The Parry Report

18
 Due to the severe economic recession followed by WW2, little was done to ensure that a minimum standard of library
provision was made. It was not until the new universities founded that a systematic review of provisions was
undertaken in a thorough investigation by a committee chaired by Dr. Thomas Parry.

Librarians were given a chance to plan a library from scratch. At the end of the investigation, a report was made. It
recognized that libraries are expensive to build and maintain and recommended that universities devote a minimum
of around 6% of their revenue expenditure to the library.

▪ 1975- The Atkinson Report

This reiterated that ‘the library is the core of a university’ and also proposed the concept of a ‘self-renewing’ library
in which new accessions would be relieved by the withdrawal of obsolete or unconsulted material to other stores.

▪ 1992- The Follett Report

The investigation of the Follett committee chaired by Sir Brian Follett took into account the planned expansion of
higher education, the current and potential impact of information technology on information provision, the
possibilities of greater cooperation and sharing of capital and recurrent resources; to investigate the future national
needs for the development of library and information resources including operational and study space requirements
for teaching and research in higher education institutions and to identify ways to meet those needs.

▪ 1994- The Anderson Report

The outcome of the investigation following the Follett is to help further librarians respond to the specific
recommendations of the Follett Report. It led to the establishment of the Research Support Libraries Programme
(RSLP). This major program, funded at 30 million pounds over three years (academic years 1999-2002), has four
strands:

1. Supporting access to major holdings libraries

2. Collaborative collection management projects
3. Research support for humanities and social science collections
4. Targeted retrospective conversion of catalogs.

II. ACADEMIC LIBRARIAN

The Academic Librarian

An academic librarian's success is determined by the control of the library's resources and services. The job of
a college or university librarian is highly political because there is a need to be in touch with the community members
to promote library services and obtain support from the faculty. However, it must be avoided to influence academic
decisions in areas outside the library so that academic librarians will not be perceived as a threat.

Threats in relationships with the academic community include influencing academic decisions in areas outside
the library, and indifference of the faculty, in the action of the chief librarian. The chief librarian must act as leader
for the staff and library matters. It is crucial to be identified with the library. The chief librarian must display good
judgment over organizational and professional matters and must take risks when necessary. In most academic settings,
the chief librarian must relate well with the board of trustees, the president, the library committee, the dean, the
faculty, the students, and the finance officer. Suppose relationship with these people is not good. In that case, the
librarian will find members of groups such as the school forum, the administrative council, or the curriculum
committee, among others, and will be appointed to represent the library outside the institution.

Problems Faced by Academic Librarians

The main problem facing academic libraries is their inability to maintain their acquisitions and services at
previous levels due to:

• budget cuts and inflation

• staff cuts and competencies
• more resource allocations for ICT than acquisitions
• inadequate space
• absence of a strategic development plan
• low image of librarians as compared with the faculty, which might be the reason for lack of cooperation of
faculty
• administration's lack of knowledge and appreciation about the importance of the library to education

19
Organization Culture in an Academic Environment

The parent institution of an academic library may be a small college or a large university. These can be single
site or multi-site and can either be government or private. It is important for the library to keep in constant touch with
its parent institution and determine its objectives based on the parent institution's mission, vision, and goals. For
example, large university libraries are usually more oriented to research than teaching. The library, therefore, provides
information services to support research activities. On the other hand, undergraduate universities are focused on
teaching; thus, the library functions as a book resource.

Today, academic libraries have no monopoly on information resources and services and must compete with other
sources of information for funds and services. Academic libraries, especially university libraries, operate in a political
environment. Academic support is crucial for their success. The librarian must be seen to be exercising legitimate
authority within the framework of governance within the university.

In most academic settings, the library committee forms the central matrix for this relationship. Library
committees, however, must not be controlling bodies but advisory bodies. There is a need for a good relationship
between the librarian and the chair of the committee. The committee is a legitimizing body for policies, rules, and
regulations, but the librarian must see that she controls the minutes. It is very important for the librarian to secure the
minutes by any means.

In academic settings, certain questions are asked, such as:

• To whom is the librarian directly responsible?

• Who chooses library staff?
• Who controls the budget?
• Who represents the staff outside the institution?

III. 21st CENTURY ACADEMIC LIBRARY

The academic library is an institution within an academic parent institution - the college or the university. Its primary purpose
is to support the teaching, research, and extension services functions of the university. In managing the academic library, the
approach is dictated by many factors like

• size of the user population (faculty, students, researchers, administration, and staff)
• the thrust of the parent institution (college or university)
• funding
• presence of a library committee
• position of the librarian in the organization and the duties and responsibilities given to him/her, and so on.

The academic library should have a vision and clear and concise objectives aligned with the mission and vision of the parent
institution. It must be customer/client-based. Also, it must have concern for its staff. The academic library must be efficient.
The imaginative use of information and communications technology (ICT) must be possessed. The academic library must also
have good public relations and should market its services. The academic library must not be hesitant to implement necessary
changes. It must be designed for continual flexibility. These institutions must provide first-class service.

IV. ADMINISTRATION AND STAFFING

Administration of Academic Libraries

▪ Management Issues
Efficient and effective management of academic libraries is affected by several factors like

• administration of the library - functions, and objectives

• collections
• services and use
• cooperation
• staffing and personnel
• evaluation
• finance and budget
• physical facilities
• automation and information technology
• marketing and public relations

20
 ▪ Functions and Objectives
Several factors affect functions and objectives in managing academic libraries. These include:

• size and configuration of the parent institution (small, medium, large, single site, multi-site, etc.)
• policies on staff selection, retention, termination, training, and so on
• funding (source of funds, procedures for payment, budget transfer, policies for money earned by the library,
etc.)
• policies on selection of content
• role of the librarian and the immediate supervisor/authority
• attitude of officials, faculty, and students toward the library
• presence of a library board/committee or any other similar group and its role
• relationship with administration
• technical services versus direct service to users
▪ Staffing and Personnel
Management of staff is a function of management style adopted by the chief librarian. In times of austerity
measures, management styles become more and more autocratic because of the need for control of resources. One
type of authoritative style of management is benevolent management. A tall and narrow organization characterizes
this with centralized decision-making but acknowledges the experience of senior professionals who participate in
planning. Other styles are consultative and participative. An academic librarian needs to have obtained an academic
discipline followed by a postgraduate degree in librarianship.

Issues concerning staffing and personnel management include:

• management style
• functional structure
• recruitment
• promotion
• performance evaluation
• job rotation
• job and management training
• stress
• implications of automation
• impacts of laws regulating the practice of librarianship

V. PHYSICAL FACILITIES

Facilities and Library Automation

Facilities are the following essential property to collections in any library. Facilities can be grouped into the following
categories

• furniture
• lighting
• temperature control
• space
• information and communications technology

The common trend in many libraries at present is automation because it offers many benefits and conveniences. Here are
some important pointers to consider in library automation.

1. Use good quality yet reasonably-priced software applications.

2. Copy catalog materials from online databases from other libraries.
3. Acquire electronic and online reference materials.
4. Design a website for the library. The home page of the website must display hyperlinks to every online
resource available from the library.
5. Train library staff and library users in using ICT equipment, facilities, and resources in the library.
6. Consider the latest developments in ICT, like wireless technology.

VI. ACADEMIC LIBRARY COLLECTION AND SERVICES

▪ Collection

21
 Since the financial resource is finite in academic libraries, academic librarians have to make decisions regarding
the collection. The collection must be guided by the nature of the academic library and the mission and vision of the
parent institution. Some issues related to content are:

• collection versus services

• librarian or faculty selection
• print or online
• the balance between books and journals (60:40 or 40:60)
• the balance between acquisition and preservation (should binding be less than twenty percent (20%) of
combined acquisition and preservation expenditures?)
• preservation or weeding
• completeness versus resource sharing
• security
• collection development policies
• involvement of the faculty and the students in the selection of materials
▪ Services and Use
The idea of service is essential to identify the right objectives. The academic library ideally is customer/client-
based, concerned with and for its staff, efficient in its use of resources, imaginative in its use of technology, well
managed, and visibly and demonstrably a first-class service. Services in an academic library include cataloging and
classification, circulation and reserve, serials management, and reference service to external users.

Several issues concerning different areas of in-library use and services must be taken into account.

1. Cataloging and classification

• manual versus automated
• use of online facilities
• usability
• in-house creation
• quality control
• access
• presentation
2. Reference and information services
• limitation to own stock versus resource sharing
• document delivery service (DDS)
• inter-library loan (ILL)
• level of service
3. Circulation and reserve
• lending policy (category of use, lending time, number of maximum loans)
• retention of stock
• manual versus automated
• user interface
4. Services to external users
• size of stock
• existence of a memorandum of agreement (MOA)
• size of the library
▪ Networking
Because of the increase in the availability of publications, libraries cannot purchase everything in the market.
Instead, they must have policies on which materials must be available from the stock and which ones may be
borrowed from other libraries if they are members of consortia. Certain issues exist in the cooperation of libraries.
They include

• cooperative versus decentralized acquisition

• electronic transmission
• ILL versus DSS
• cost
• nature and specifications in the MOA
• gift and exchange policies

22
VII. BUDGET

Financial management means controlling the amount of money spent and ensuring that it does not exceed the amount of
money available. Academic libraries use several techniques in budgeting. These are:

• line-item budgeting
• lump-sum budgeting
• formula budgeting
• program budgeting
• performance budgeting
• planning programming budgeting system (PPBS)

Academic libraries should initiate projects that earn extra income for the library. The additional income provides
greater flexibility and financial independence. Resources that can be income-generating are special collections that cannot be
found in other libraries. Therefore, it will be of great interest to external users willing to pay a fee for access. The exposure to
external users will also provide contacts and can expand fee-based services. Examples of actual and potential sources of
income include:

• charges to library users (fines, research fees, etc.)

• sales to library users (photocopies, DDS, microfilm copies, withdrawn books, serials, furniture, and
equipment)
• retail selling to library users (bookselling in book fairs or bookstores, stationery, refreshments, library
publications, etc.)
• services to users (bibliographies, information retrieval searches, photocopying, binding, computer repair,
consultancy, research, rentals, seminars and workshops, short courses, etc.)
• other investments (donations, endowments, and bequests, sponsorship, friends of the library, etc.)

When embarking on an income-generating project, be aware of expenses that will be encountered. The parent
institution must be mindful of the project and the income it will generate. Be aware also of pricing charges and account
where the income will be deposited. These depend on expenditures. Expenditure will include:

• staff salaries
• consumables
• communication
• travel
• training
• marketing and publicity
• rentals and other charges
• taxes (if there are any)
• overheads

VIII. EVALUATION

The concept of a good academic library is often difficult to define and describe. There is no absolute perception of
goodness, but there are standards of goodness such as those established by accrediting associations and organizations (e.g.,
PAASCU, PACOCOA, Phi Kappa Phi, ISO, ISA, AACCUP, and others). The rule of thumb is oriented to actual and
potential user needs, with actual users given high priority. Performance is measured in terms of user satisfaction.
Performance measurement is defined as the systematic measurement of the extent to which a library has achieved its
objectives in a certain period of time. It is necessary for internal and external reasons.

The two aspects of goodness - quality and value can be differentiated by the following questions:

• How good is it?

• How much good does it do?

Goodness is also differentiated in terms of effectiveness (doing the right thing well) and benefit.

The evaluation process is coupled with some issues such as:

• objectives and plan

• collection
• services
23
 • staff
• environment
• reporting
• quantitative versus qualitative
• cost-effectiveness (doing the right thing well within a given budget)
• level of information (top and middle management, and operational level)
• inputs, process, and outputs

Public libraries

What is the Public Library?

"The public library, the local gateway to knowledge, provides a basic condition for lifelong learning, independent
decision-making and cultural development of the individual and social groups." (/FLA/UNESCO Public Library
Manifesto, 1994)

A public library is an organization established, supported, and funded by the community, either through local,
regional, or national government or through some other form of community organization. It provides access to
knowledge, information, and works of the imagination through a range of resources and services. It is equally
available to all members of the community regardless of race, nationality, age, gender, religion, language, disability,
economic and employment status, and educational attainment. (IFLA)

▪ Roles/Purpose of Public Libraries (IFLA)

1. Education - supporting both individual and self conducted education as well as formal education at all levels.
2. Information - the public library is the local center of information, making all kinds of knowledge and
information readily available to its users.
3. Personal development - providing opportunities for personal creative growth.
4. Children and young people - creating and strengthening reading habits in children from an early age.
5. Cultural development - an important role of the library is to focus on cultural and artistic development in
the community.
6. Social role - the public library has an important role as a public space and meeting place.

▪ Laws/Policies related to Philippine Public

LAW TITLE

Republic Act No. 7743 An Act Providing for the Establishment of Congressional, City, And Municipal
Libraries and Barangay Reading Centers Throughout the Philippines, Appropriating
the Necessary Funds Therefor and other purposes. The law was passed on June 17,
1992.

Republic Act No. 6966 Philippine Librarianship Act: Regulating the practice of Librarianship and prescribing
the qualifications of librarians. The law was passed on November 19, 1992.

Republic Act No. 7356 An Act Creating The National Commission For Culture And The Arts, Establishing
National Endowment Fund For Culture And The Arts, And For Other Purposes
enacted on April 3, 1992.

Presidential Proclamation Declaring the month of November 1991 and every year as Library and Information
No.837 Services Month. The proclamation was issued in November 1991.

Presidential Proclamation Designating the period from November 24 to 30 each year as the National Book Week
No.109

Professional Regulation Code of Ethics for Registered Librarians issued on August 14, 1992
Commission Resolution
No.02 s. 1992

Professional Regulation Rules and Regulations implementing the Philippine Librarianship Act issued on July
Commission Resolution No. 20, 1992
01 s. 1992

24
Commission on Audit Setting a policy regarding purchases and acquisition of library books and materials,
Circular 94-012 fixing liability and accountability of government librarians., retirement and insurance
of library books and materials, and others.

Commission on Audit Requiring the settlement of and clearance from accountabilities of government
Circular No.155 officials and employees prior to their transfer or acceptance of their resignation issued
on June 1992.

Executive Order No.496 Instituting the procedures and criteria for the selection and the recommendation of
nominees for appointment to vacant positions in the Professional Regulatory Boards
under the Professional Regulatory Commission issued on December 9, 1991.

Executive Order No.118 Creating the Presidential Commission on Culture and Arts issued on January 30,
1987.

Presidential Decree No.812 On Legal and Cultural Deposit issued on October 18, 1975.

Presidential Decree No. 285 On the compulsory licensing or reprinting of educational, scientific or cultural books
as amended and materials as a temporary or emergency measure whenever the prices thereof
become so exorbitant as to be detrimental to the national interest, issued on September
3, 1974.

Presidential Decree No. 373 On tax exemptions for all donations to the National Museum, National Library and
the Archives of the National Historical Institute, issued on January 9, 1974.

Presidential Decree No. 223 Creating the Professional Regulation Commission and prescribing its powers and
functions, issued on June 22, 1973.

Presidential Decree No. 49 Copyright Law: Decree on the Protection of Intellectual Property 1972.

Republic Act No. 3873 Changing the name of the Bureau of Public Libraries to the National Library issued
on June 18, 1964.

Republic Act No. 411 Providing for the establishment, operation and maintenance of municipal libraries
throughout the Philippines and appropriating funds therefor enacted on June 18, 1949.

Republic Act No. 228 Amending the Revised Administrative Code in its provision on data and documents
supplied to the Bureau of Public Libraries enacted on June 5, 1948.

Executive Order No. 94 Renaming the National Library to "Bureau of Public Libraries”
s.1947

Commonwealth Act No. 367 Transferring the National Library from the national Assembly to the Department of
Public Instruction and for other purposes enacted on August 23, 1938.

Commonwealth Act. No. Abolishing the National Museum of the Philippine Islands, transferring its division
4007 of history and fine arts to the National Library, and all its other divisions to the
Institute of Science enacted in 1932.

Commonwealth Act. No. Creating the National Museum of the Philippine Islands providing for its powers,
3477 functions and personnel and funds and changing the name of the Philippine Library
and Museum to the National Library enacted on December 7, 1928.

Act No. 2572 Consolidating the Philippine Public Library, the Division of Archives, Patents,
Copyrights and Trademarks of the Executive Bureau and the Law and Library
Division of the Philippine Assembly to form an organization to be known as
"Philippine Library and Museum: under the administrative control of the Secretary of
Public Instruction issued on February 4, 1916.

Act No. 1935 Consolidating all libraries belonging to any branch of the Philippine Insular
Government for the creation of "The Philippine Library'' and for the maintenance and
regulation of the same issued on May 20, 1909.

25
Act No. 1849 Providing for the establishment of a public library to be known as "The Philippine
Public Library'' making suitable appropriation therefore, and for other purposes
enacted on June 3, 1908.

Additional Laws/Policies:

Republic Act 7160 Local Government Code

Republic Act No. 10087 Changing The National Library to National Library of the Philippines (NLP) enacted
on May 13, 2010.

Republic Act No. 9246 An Act Modernizing the Practice of Librarianship in the Philippines Thereby
Repealing Republic Act No. 6966, Entitled "An Act Regulating the Practice of
Librarianship and Prescribing the Qualifications of Librarians," Appropriating Funds
Therefor and For Other Purposes approved on February 19, 2004.

Republic Act No. 6557 An Act Establishing the Municipality of Batac, Province of llocos Norte, the Crispina-
Marcos Memorial Library and Museum enacted without Executive approval on
September 30, 1972.

Republic Act No. 10124 An Act Changing The Nomenclature of the Tondo Congressional District Library in
Tayuman, Tondo, Manila into Sentro ng Karunungan Library, Appropriating Funds
Therefor and For Other Purposes approved on June 3, 2010

Professional Regulatory Prescription, Adoption, and Promulgation of the "Revised Standards for Philippines
Board for Librarians Public Libraries" issued on July 24, 2015.
Resolution No. 05

▪ Standards for Philippines Public Libraries

1. Mission, Vision, Goals, Objectives
1. Philosophy of service.
2. Service to the needs of the community.
3. Organization and maintenance of service for children, young adults, persons with disabilities
(PWD), senior citizens, and other marginalized sectors.
4. Organization of Friends Group to act as support for the library.
5. Promotion of local history, culture, and arts.
6. Compliance with the mission, vision, and goals of the National Library of the Philippines (NLP)
and Local Government Unit (LGU); and
7. Provision on library development.
2. Library Administration
1. Each library shall operate under the administrative supervision of the local government unit and
the technical supervision of the NLP.
2. The library shall be managed by a librarian and shall be supported by paraprofessional staff.
3. The library shall have as its immediate supervisor, the local chief executive, or any designated
local official in accordance with existing law.
4. The number of staff shall depend on the classification of the local government unit. (see Table
A)
5. Librarians, paraprofessionals, administrative/clerical staff shall be appointed to the plantilla
positions pursuant to the Civil Service and Salary Standardization Laws.
3. Collection Management
1. The collection shall be based on the objectives of the library and the needs of the community
served.
2. The collection shall include materials in all formats and be organized according to existing
standards.
3. The library shall maintain a collection of local history, culture, and arts.
4. The library shall have a written collection development plan.
5. The LGU shall provide a reasonable annual budget for collection development.
6. A minimum collection of three thousand (3,000) volumes and provision of at least five percent
(5%) annual increase of the collection is required.
4. Services and Utilization

26
 1.
The library shall provide basic services free of charge to everyone in its service population.
2.
The library shall provide services with the highest degree of efficiency and integrity.
3.
The library shall practice an open-shelf system.
4.
The library shall have a website to promote its services and activities.
5.
The library shall provide resources for the wholesome development of the community, without
any discrimination.
6. The library must have a children's corner, where children could obtain information through
reading books, focused and unobstructed from other readers and researchers, etc., and where
educational enhancement activities can be held.
7. The library shall observe service hours for the maximum benefit of the community.
8. The library shall have policies covering all of the following:
a) Use of facilities and display areas.
b) Rights and responsibilities of customers (Customer behavior)
c) Children's use of the library
d) Access to the internet, and
e) Access to facilities and materials by a person with disabilities.
5. Physical Facilities
1. The library must be located, preferably in a separate building, and shall be accessible to all users.
2. The library shall always be included as a component unit in the development plan of the LGU.
3. The library shall provide spaces for the following:
a) Librarian/s and staff
b) Collection
c) Reading
d) Multimedia; and
e) other spaces as may be necessary
4. Equipment and furniture shall be sufficiently provided for a conducive learning environment.
5. The library shall have facilities for information technology and communication services.
6. The library shall provide at least five (5) computer units with internet access.
6. Financial Resources/Budget
1. The library shall be provided with adequate and reasonable budgetary appropriation to carry out
effectively its plans and programs.
2. The library budget shall cover the following items:
a) Personal services include salaries and wages and other benefits common and due to all
civil service servants.
b) Maintenance and other operating expenses (MOEE) to include, among others, funds for
travel expenses, attendance to seminars, training, conferences, and other subscriptions.
c) Capital outlay to include funds to purchase library resources, equipment, and furniture.
7. Linkages, Networking, and Collaborations
1. Libraries shall engage in networking, resource sharing, and other forms of partnership.
2. The library shall organize Friends of the Library to support its activities. One staff member is
appointed official friends' liaison to ensure that friends have all they need to carry out a program
of support for the library.
3. The library staff shall pursue continuing library education and membership to professional
associations to further enhance learning.
▪ Standard Personnel to Man Public Libraries

CLASS PROVINCE CITIES MUNICIPALITIES

First Class 2 Fulltime Librarians 2 Fulltime Librarians 2 Full time Librarians

-1 Provincial Librarian -1 City Librarian -1 Municipal Librarian

-1 Assistant Librarian -1 Assistant Librarian -1 Assistant Librarian

-4 Paraprofessionals -4 Paraprofessionals -2 Paraprofessional

Second Class 1 Provincial Librarian 1 City Librarian 1 Municipal Librarian

27
 3 Paraprofessionals 3 Paraprofessionals 1 Paraprofessional

Third-Fifth 1 Fulltime Librarian 1 Fulltime Librarian 1 Fulltime Librarian

Class

Sixth Class Not Applicable Not Applicable 1 Fulltime Librarian

▪ National Library of the Philippines

Mandate

The National Library of the Philippines (NLP) is the repository of the printed and recorded cultural heritage of
the country and other intellectuals, literary, and information sources.

Vision

By 2022, NLP shall have enhanced library facilities, relevant library resources, and dynamic services that
contribute to the intellectual, social, and cultural development of Filipino society.

Mission

Acquire, organize, conserve, and preserve Filipiniana materials and provide equitable access to library resources
through a system of public libraries throughout the country.

Timeline

⮚ 1887- a royal decree Jed to the creation of Museo Biblioteca de Filipinas, the first National Library of the
Philippines.
⮚ 1901- Act No. 22 established the American Circulating Library Division under the Bureau of Education.
⮚ 1928- Act No. 3477 separated the Museum from the Library. After World War II, its location was from the
Legislative Building to the former Bilibid Prison in Manila in 1945.
⮚ 1947- Executive Order No. 94 series of 1947 changed the name of the National Library to the Bureau of
Public Libraries.
⮚ 1964- Republic Act No. 3873 reverted the name to The National Library (TNL).
⮚ 2010- Pursuant to Republic Act No. 10067 and in accordance with International Convention, the library is
now recognized as the National Library of the Philippines (NLP).
⮚ 2012- Since then the National Library of the Philippines building has been undergoing retrofitting and
restoration.

Roles of the NLP

1. Affiliating Regional, Provincial, Congressional, Cities, Municipal Public Libraries, and Barangay
Reading Centers through a Memorandum of Agreement with Local Government Units allocating
materials to the same. As of 2014, there are 1,398 affiliated libraries throughout the country.
2. Collaborating with the National Archives of the Philippines, National Historical Commission of the
Philippines, National Museum, Cultural Center of the Philippines, and the other cultural agencies under
the administrative supervision of the National Commission for Culture and the Arts in the
implementation of Republic Act No. 10066 otherwise known as the National Heritage Protection Act
of 2009.
3. Coordinating with the National Committee of Libraries and Information Services (NCLIS) the Search
for Most Outstanding Library and Library Services for Persons with Disabilities (PWDs) in NLP
Affiliated Public Libraries in the Philippines.
4. Coordinating with the Philippine Librarians Association, Inc. (PLAI) the celebration of the National
Library Day, National Book Week, and the Library and Information Services Month in November of
each year as mandated by Presidential Proclamations.
5. Assisting in the implementation of Republic Act No. 9246 or The Philippine Librarianship Act of 2003
mandating the Licensure Examination for Librarians.
6. Deputizing the Intellectual Property Office (IPO) in the registration of Copyright registration and
receiving deposits to augment the NLP collection as mandated by the Intellectual Property Code of the
Philippines.
7. Serves as the National Center for ISBN, ISSN, and ISMN Numbering System.

28
PART I: ORGANIZATION AND MANAGEMENT
INSTRUCTION: Read the following questions carefully. Shade the box of the letter that corresponds to the best answer.
[] [] [] [] 1. Who believed that “wages motivates lazy workers”?
A B C D
a) Henry Fayol c) Max Weber
b) Elton Mayo d) Peter Drucker

[] [] [] [] 2. Who pioneered Management By Objectives (MBO)?

A B C D
a) Henry Fayol c) Max Weber
b) Elton Mayo d) Peter Drucker

[] [] [] [] 3. Who pioneered the human relations movement?

A B C D
a) Douglas McGregor c) Chester Barnard
b) Elton Mayo d) Frank and Lilian Gilbreth
[] [] [] [] 4. Who developed the motion study?
A B C D
a) Douglas McGregor c) Elton Mayo
b) Chester Barnard d) Frank and Lilian Gilbreth

[] [] [] [] 5. Chester Barnard believes that it is the first function of managers.

A B C D
a) Time c) Management
b) Leadership d) Communication

[] [] [] [] 6. He is the Father of Scientific Management Movement.

A B C D
a) Henry Fayol c) Max Weber
b) Ludwig Van Bertanffy d) Frederick Taylor

[] [] [] [] 7. Introduced the modern concept of school library in the Philippines.

A B C D
a) Theodoro Kalaw c) Andrew Carnegie
b) Lois Osborn d) Helen Haines

[] [] [] [] 8. Total percentage of a school population that must be accommodated in its library at any given
A B C D time.
a) 10% c) 20%
b) 15% d) 25%

[] [] [] [] 9. The Presidential Decree that created the Professional Regulation Commission.

A B C D
a) P.D. 230 c) P.D. 223
b) P.D. 233 d) P.D. 203

[] [] [] [] 10. In a Regional Public Library, how many should be the minimum seating capacity?
A B C D
a) 24-36 c) 48-60
b) 36-48 d) 60-72

[] [] [] [] 11. In a Provincial Library, how many should be the minimum seating capacity?
A B C D
a) 24-36 c) 48-60
b) 36-48 d) 60-72

[] [] [] [] 12. The Act modernizing the practice of librarianship in the Philippines.

A B C D
a) RA 6966 c) RA 411
b) RA 7743 d) RA 9246

[] [] [] [] 13. An Act regulating the practice of librarianship profession in the Philippines.

29
A B C D

a) RA 6966 c) RA 411
b) RA 7743 d) RA 9246

[] [] [] [] 14. Updated Resolution of the PRC-Board for Librarians for the Code of Ethics.
A B C D
a) Resolution No. 6 Series of 2006 c) Resolution No. 3 Series of 2015
b) Resolution No. 5 Series of 2004 d) Resolution No. 6 Series of 2004

[] [] [] [] 15. Resolution of the PRC-Board for Librarians for the Prescription, Adoption and Promulgation
A B C D of National Competency Based Standards for Filipino Librarians

a) Resolution No. 2 Series of 1992 c) Resolution No. 3 Series of 2015

b) Resolution No. 5 Series of 2004 d) Resolution No. 6 Series of 2004
[] [] [] [] 16. What does CHED Memo No. 8 series of 2005 represent?
A B C D
a) Policies and Standards for BLIS Program c) Minimum Standards for Elementary,
Secondary and Tertiary Schools library
b) Prescription and adoption of the syllabi for d) Junior Librarian Appointment guidelines
the subjects in BLEL
[] [] [] [] 17. This was Inclosure No. 3 of the DECS Bulletin No. 1 series of 1988
A B C D
a) Policies and Standards for BLIS Program c) Library Standards for Tertiary Education
b) Prescription and adoption of the syllabi for d) Junior Librarian Appointment guidelines
the subjects in BLEL
[] [] [] [] 18. What is R.A. 8981?
A B C D
a) PRC Modernization c) BFL Modernization
b) Creation of PRC d) Creation of BFL

[] [] [] [] 19. What is R.A. 9150?

A B C D
a) Intellectual Property Code c) Protection of Lay-out Designs
b) Electronic Commerce Act d) Data Privacy Act of 2012

[] [] [] [] 20. What is the R.A. 8792 for?

A B C D
a) Intellectual Property Code c) Protection of Lay-out Designs
b) Electronic Commerce Act d) Data Privacy Act of 2012

[] [] [] [] 21. What is R.A. 9239?

A B C D
a) Optical Media Act of 2003 c) Legal and Cultural Deposit for the National
Library
b) Continuing Professional Development Law d) National Archives of the Philippines Act of
2007
[] [] [] [] 22. What is R.A. 10912?
A B C D
a) Optical Media Act of 2003 c)
Legal and Cultural Deposit for the National
Library
b) Continuing Professional Development Act d) National Archives of the Philippines Act of
of 2016 2007
[] [] [] [] 23. What is the Book Publishing Industry Development Act?
A B C D
a) R.A. 8047 c) R.A. 8074
b) R.A. 7356 d) R.A. 7536

[] [] [] [] 24. The Act that changed the name of the country’s National Library into its current name.
A B C D
a) R.A. 10087 c) R.A. 3873
b) R.A. 1087 d) R.A. 7833

30
[] [] [] [] 25. Who developed the organizational charts, job descriptions, and policy manuals for procedures
A B C D in organization?

a) Gulick and Urwick c) Taylor and Fayol

b) Mooney and Reily d) Frank and Lilian Gilbreth

[] [] [] [] 26. What do you call the analytical process which involves an assessment of the future, the
A B C D determination of desired objectives, and the development of alternative courses, to achieve
such objectives?
a) Planning c) Leading
b) Organizing d) Controlling

[] [] [] [] 27. They are meant to regulate personal and professional behavior for the common good. They are
A B C D flexible and specific, leaving no room for doubt.

a) Rules c) Strategies
b) Procedures d) Budgets

[] [] [] [] 28. A planning technique wherein the library manager predicts based on the assumption about the
A B C D future.
a) Forecasting c) Prediction
b) Standards d) Projection
[] [] [] [] 29. This determines the chain of authority ranging from the ultimate to the lowest ranks.
A B C D
a) Scalar principle c) Decentralization
b) Delegation d) Span of Control
[] [] [] [] 30. The downward transfer of formal authority from one person to another within prescribed limits.
A B C D
a) Scalar principle c) Decentralization
b) Delegation d) Span of Control

[] [] [] [] 31. After the recruitment process, information gathering about the applicants is executed upon the
A B C D objective of arriving at a decision to hire personnel.

a) Selection c) Orientation
b) Training d) Evaluation

[] [] [] [] 32. It is the managerial function that enables managers to communicate with and influence
A B C D subordinates towards the achievement of organizational goals. An important ingredient of this
function is motivation - the willingness to exert high levels of effort towards organizational
goals, conditioned by the effort's ability to satisfy some individual needs. Also called as
Directing.
a) Planning c) Leading
b) Organizing d) Controlling
[] [] [] [] 33. Clayton Adlerfer argued that there are three groups of core needs: existence, relatedness, and
A B C D growth. In contrast to Maslow, this theory assumes that more than one need may be operative
at the same time, and if gratification of a higher-level need is hushed, the desire to satisfy a
lower-level need increases.
a) Two-Factor Theory c) Achievement-power-affiliation theory
b) ERG Theory d) Leadership Grid

[] [] [] [] 34. In the theory developed by David McClelland, there are three crucial needs that could be used
A B C D for motivation. Which of the following does not belong?

a) Need to achieve c) Need to power

b) Need to satisfy d) Need for affiliation

[] [] [] [] 35. It is the function of monitoring performance and undertaking corrective action(s) to assure the
A B C D attainment of predetermined goals and objectives of the organization.

31
 a) Planning c) Leading
b) Organizing d) Controlling

[] [] [] [] 36. It is a method of planning and scheduling work which involves identifying all the key activities
A B C D in a particular project, devising the sequence of activities, and arranging the duration of time
for the performance of each phase of the work to be done.
a) Cost-benefit analysis c) Operations research
b) Evaluation d) Program evaluation and research technique

[] [] [] [] 37. This focuses on two basic questions: Are the current activities efficient and effective? Should
A B C D current activities be eliminated or reduced to fund higher priority new programs or to reduce
current budget?
a) Program budgeting c) Line item budgeting
b) Zero-based budgeting d) Planning Programming Budgeting System
[] [] [] [] 38. Which of the following are the first elements in planning?
A B C D
i Time iv Collecting data
ii Analyzing data v Correcting data
iii Consolidating data vi Resources

a) i only c) vi only
b) ii, and iv only d) iii, and v only

[] [] [] [] 39. What do you call a planning technique which the library adopts by using guidelines developed
A B C D by various professional groups?

a) Developing formula c) Developing standards

b) Developing measures d) Developing action plans

[] [] [] [] 40. What is the object of imagination of the library, or an act of foresight?

A B C D
a) Vision c) Goals
b) Mission d) Objectives

[] [] [] [] 41. What do you call the measurable actions to be achieved by the library?
A B C D
a) Vision c) Goals
b) Mission d) Objectives

[] [] [] [] 42. What do you call the verbal, written, or implied overall guide, which sets up limits and
A B C D directions around which managerial action takes place?

a) Activities c) Procedure
b) Policy d) Process

[] [] [] [] 43. This is a library document that enumerates its policies in relation to its goals and objectives,
A B C D and serves as a guide in decision-making.
a) Library Manual c) Collection Development Policy Statement
b) Policy Manual d) Staff Development Manual

[] [] [] [] 44. When an employee in the library reports to only one supervisor, who gives assignments and
A B C D makes assessments of the said employee, what do you call that principle?
a) Unity in direction c) Unity of supervision
b) Unity of command d) Unity of work assignment
[] [] [] [] 45. The part of a library system that automates the processes of ordering, receiving, and claiming
A B C D materials from suppliers and returns and cancellations of materials. Can it be done online if the
system is linked to an external network?
a) Cataloging system c) Serial publications Control system
b) Circulation system d) Acquisition system

32
[] [] [] [] 46. The part of a library system that automates activities such as lending, returning, renewal and
A B C D place on hold.

a) Cataloging system c) Serial publications Control system

b) Circulation system d) Acquisition system

[] [] [] [] 47. It is the reorganization of operations for the purpose of providing updated and improved
A B C D services. It means the use of computer technology and information communication technology
to provide better services to the users and better working environment for the staff.

a) Re-structuring c) Re-calibration
b) Re-engineering d) Automation

[] [] [] [] 48. IFLA offered this as a series of ethical propositions for the guidance of individual librarians as
A B C D well as other information workers, and for the consideration of the Library and Information
Associations when creating or revisiting their own codes.
a) Code of Ethics and Professional Conduct c) Institution and Bylaws
b) Implementing Rules and Regulations d) Scope and Delimitation

[] [] [] [] 49. An association in the Philippines that upholds the profession of academic and research
A B C D librarianship in the country.

a) PLAI c) PASLI
b) PAARL d) ASLP

[] [] [] [] 50. What percentage of accountability does the manager hold when it comes to organizational
A B C D failures?

a) 5% c) 100%
b) 50% d) 0%

[] [] [] [] 51. It aims to encourage and promote the collection, organization and dissemination of medical
A B C D health information and library service; encourage and cultivate library cooperation, local and
regional; and to enhance and uphold the dignity and ethics of the medical and health
librarianship.

a) MAHLAP c) NCCA-NCLIS
b) SFA d) PRC-BFL

[] [] [] [] 52. Regulatory board for librarians and librarianship.

A B C D
a) MAHLAP c) NCCA-NCLIS
b) SFA d) PRC-BFL

[] [] [] [] 53. Which of the following situations in the organization like the library account for the vigorous
A B C D growth of grapevine?

a) Autocratic leadership c) Poor Communication

b) Secrecy d) All of the above

[] [] [] [] 54. What system is used when salary increase is given to librarians based on who works the hardest
A B C D and contributes more than others?

a) Length of service system c) Seniority system

b) Merit system d) Valuable system

[] [] [] [] 55. Which phase of strategic planning gathers data about the social, political, economic,
A B C D demographic and technological trends which impact the library?

a) Forecasting c) Performance audit

b) Environmental scanning d) SWOT analysis

33
[] [] [] [] 56. “A world class public library providing quality information service through state-of-the-art
A B C D facilities” is a statement of?
a) Vision c) Goal
b) Mission d) Objective

[] [] [] [] 57. “To conduct information literacy training for every college researcher during the first quarter
A B C D of the academic year” is an example of?

a) Vision c) Goal
b) Mission d) Objective

[] [] [] [] 58. “A city with information literate individuals through adequate and sufficient information
A B C D service inspired by credibility, reliability and integrity” belongs to a?

a) Vision c) Goal
b) Mission d) Objective

[] [] [] [] 59. “To support the information initiatives of the city government through providing information
A B C D services, development and implementation of information literacy programs to improve
citizenship” exemplifies a?
a) Vision c) Goal
b) Mission d) Objective

[] [] [] [] 60. It is defined as the social and informal sources of influence that one uses to inspire action taken
A B C D by others.

a) administration c) organizing
b) leadership d) management

[] [] [] [] 61. Republic Act No. 7743 is an important legislation enacted into law in June 17, 1994 is also
A B C D known as?

a) An act promoting universal access to c) An act establishing congressional, district,

quality tertiary education by providing for city, and municipal libraries and barangay
free tuition and other school fees in state reading centers throughout the country
universities and colleges, local universities
and colleges and state-run technical-
vocational institutions…
b) An act establishing the free internet access d) An act institutionalizing the Philippine
program in public places in the country and Qualifications Framework (PQF),
appropriating funds therefore establishing the PQF-National Coordinating
Council (NCC) and appropriating funds
therefor
[] [] [] [] 62. Characteristics of management describing it as being not directly visible but its presence is
A B C D noticed in the form of concrete results.

a) Management is a social process c) Management is intangible

b) Management is action-based d) Management is all pervasive

[] [] [] [] 63. A type of plan that can be best described as the determination of the basic long-term objectives
A B C D of an enterprise and the adoption of courses of actions and allocation of resources necessary to
achieve goals.
a) Policies c) Procedures
b) Strategies d) Rules

[] [] [] [] 64. The following statements best describe “control” , except

A B C D
a) The measurement and correction of c) It is concerned with keeping things on track
performance in order to make sure that the and successful progress toward meeting
objectives and the plans devised to attain specified objectives.
them are being accomplished.
34
 b) It implies the existence of goals and plans d) It is a basis for making important human
and the regulation of the organization’s resource decisions.
activities toward those goals.

[] [] [] [] 65. It is the main goal of most special libraries.

A B C D
a) Research function c) Reader’s advisory function
b) Information function d) Instruction function

[] [] [] [] 66. This refers to the kind of service that the library offers to its clients, which is adoptable and
A B C D very accommodating to the needs of the clients. This covers maintaining both traditional and
electronic resources, getting digital and virtual, more access to databases and electronic
document delivery, use of mobile text messages, referrals, and more use of the internet.

a) Hybrid library services c) Flexible library services

b) Advanced library services d) Automated library services

[] [] [] [] 67. This project aims to facilitate access to all types of library materials nationwide through the
A B C D public library system, and to establish networking and resource sharing among public libraries
by introducing TINLIB and Library Solutions.
a) Philippine Library Information Network c) Philippine e-Library Project
(PHILIN)
b) Public Libraries Information Center d) Association of Academic and Research
(PUBLIN) Library Information Network (ARALIN)
[] [] [] [] 68. Library management and information systems must be able to ________ data from the parent
A B C D organization, as well as from other professional organizations.

a) migrate c) collate
b) integrate d) manipulate

[] [] [] [] 69. Who is the Newbery Medal Winner 2021?

A B C D
a) Meg Medina c) Elizabeth Acevedo
b) Tae Keller d) Sidney Smith

[] [] [] [] 70. Who is the most recent recipient of the Amelia-Frances Howard-Gibbon Illustrator's Award?
A B C D
a) JonArno Lawson c) Sydney Smith
b) Sofie Blackall d) Jackie Morris

[] [] [] [] 71. A university has a student population of 5,500 plus the combined academic and non-academic
A B C D staff which is 1150. How many full time professional librarians are required?

a) 5 c) 7
b) 6 d) 8

[] [] [] [] 72. The academic library shall provide Filipiniana materials equivalent to what percent of the total
A B C D collection?

a) 5% c) 15%
b) 10% d) 20%

[] [] [] [] 73. In a school library, how many newspaper titles of national coverage is required for
A B C D subscription?

a) 1 title c) 3 titles
b) 2 titles d) 4 titles

[] [] [] [] 74. Who is the incumbent PLAI President?

A B C D

35
 a) Emma Rey c) Elvira Lapuz
b) Elizabeth Peralejo d) Michael Pinto

[] [] [] [] 75. Who is the incumbent PAARL President?

A B C D
a) Rosela D. Del Mundo c) Judeelyn S. Bundoc
b) Michael Anthony A. Mojica d) Engracia S. Santos

[] [] [] [] 76. Who is the incumbent IFLA President?

A B C D
a) Barbara Lison c) Antonia Arahova
b) Christine Mackenzie d) Huanwen Cheng

[] [] [] [] 77. When the librarian submits a report to the department head, what flow of communication is
A B C D observed?

a) Downward c) Horizontal
b) Upward d) Grapevine

[] [] [] [] 78. Who said that “workers are economic persons primarily motivated by togetherness and want
A B C D individual recognition”?

a) Elton Mayo c) Max Weber

b) Frederick Taylor d) Peter Drucker

[] [] [] [] 79. Who is the Father of Bureaucratic Model or Hierarchy?

A B C D
a) Henry Fayol c) Max Weber
b) Elton Mayo d) Peter Drucker

[] [] [] [] 80. Who introduced the theory of the opposing attitude of workers towards work?
A B C D
a) Douglas McGregor c) Elton Mayo
b) Chester Barnard d) Frank and Lilian Gilbreth

[] [] [] [] 81. Who conducted the Hawthorne study?

A B C D
a) Douglas McGregor c) Elton Mayo
b) Chester Barnard d) Frank and Lilian Gilbreth

[] [] [] [] 82. Which one of the following has notable contributions in the Human Behavior Movement?
A B C D
a) Douglas McGregor c) Elton Mayo
b) Chester Barnard d) Frank and Lilian Gilbreth

[] [] [] [] 83. He is the Father of the Classical Movement.

A B C D
a) Henry Fayol c) Max Weber
b) Elton Mayo d) Frederick Taylor

[] [] [] [] 84. Pioneered the General Systems Theory Movement

A B C D
a) Henry Fayol c) Max Weber
b) Ludwig Van Bertanffy d) Frederick Taylor

[] [] [] [] 85. First School Library in the Philippines.

A B C D

a) Tarlac Elementary School Library c) Pampanga High School Library

b) Laguna High School Library d) Manila Elementary School Library

[] [] [] [] 86. In a school library, each reader must have at least how many square feet.
A B C D

36
 a) 10 sq. ft. c) 20 sq. ft.
b) 15 sq. ft. d) 25 sq. ft.

[] [] [] [] 87. In a 1st Class Public Library, how many should be the seating capacity?
A B C D
a) 24-36 c) 48-60
b) 36-48 d) 60-72

[] [] [] [] 88. In a Congressional Public Library, how many should be the seating capacity?
A B C D
a) 24-36 c) 48-60
b) 36-48 d) 60-72

[] [] [] [] 89. In a 2nd Class or lower classed Public Library, how many is the required seating capacity?
A B C D
a) 24-36 c) 48-60
b) 36-48 d) 60-72

[] [] [] [] 90. An Act that led to the establishment of Congressional, City, and Municipal Libraries.
A B C D
a) RA 6966 c) RA 411
b) RA 7743 d) RA 9246

[] [] [] [] 91. It is known as the Municipal Libraries Law.

A B C D
a) RA 6966 c) RA 411
b) RA 7743 d) RA 9246

[] [] [] [] 92. Resolution of the PRC-Board for Librarians for the Implementing Rules and Regulation of
A B C D R.A. 9246.

a) Resolution No. 2 Series of 1992 c) Resolution No. 3 Series of 2015

b) Resolution No. 5 Series of 2004 d) Resolution No. 6 Series of 2004

[] [] [] [] 93. Resolution of the PRC-Board for Librarians for the prescription of percentage weights for the
A B C D Licensure examination subjects.

a) Resolution No. 2 Series of 1992 c) Resolution No. 3 Series of 2015

b) Resolution No. 5 Series of 2004 d) Resolution No. 6 Series of 2004

[] [] [] [] 94. What does the BFL Resolution No. 11 Series of 1999 state?
A B C D

a) Policies and Standards for BLIS Program c) Minimum Standards for Elementary,
Secondary and Tertiary Schools library
b) Prescription and adoption of the syllabi for d) Junior Librarian Appointment guidelines
the subjects in BLEL

[] [] [] [] 95. What does the Memorandum Circular No. 1 Series of 1986 state?
A B C D
a) Policies and Standards for BLIS Program c) Minimum Standards for Elementary,
Secondary and Tertiary Schools library
b) Prescription and adoption of the syllabi for d) Junior Librarian Appointment guidelines
the subjects in BLEL
[] [] [] [] 96. What is R.A. 8293?
A B C D
a) Intellectual Property Code c) Protection of Lay-out Designs
b) Electronic Commerce Act d) Data Privacy Act of 2012

[] [] [] [] 97. What is R.A. 10173?

A B C D
a) Intellectual Property Code c) Protection of Lay-out Designs
b) Electronic Commerce Act d) Data Privacy Act of 2012

37
[] [] [] [] 98. What is the PRC-BFL Resolution that led to the creation of the Board for Librarians?
A B C D
a) Resolution No. 2 Series of 1992 c) Resolution No. 3 Series of 2015
b) Resolution No. 5 Series of 2004 d) Resolution No. 1 Series of 1992

[] [] [] [] 99. What is R.A 9470?

A B C D
a) Optical Media Act of 2003 c) Legal and Cultural Deposit for the National
Library
b) Continuing Professional Development Law d) National Archives of the Philippines Act of
2007
[] [] [] [] 100. What is P.D. 812?
A B C D
a) Optical Media Act of 2003 c) Legal and Cultural Deposit for the National
Library
b) Continuing Professional Development Law d) National Archives of the Philippines Act of
2007
[] [] [] [] 101. It is the name of the country’s National Library.
A B C D
a) Philippine National Library c) National Library of the Philippines
b) National Library d) National Public Library of the Philippines

[] [] [] [] 102. Who coined the term scientific management?

A B C D
a) Frederick Taylor c) Louis Brandeis
b) Henry Fayol d) Max Weber

[] [] [] [] 103. Who devised the acronym POSDCORB for executive functions?

A B C D
a) Gulick and Urwick c) Taylor and Fayol
b) Mooney and Reily d) Frank and Lilian Gilbreth

[] [] [] [] 104. This is a set of required methods of handling activities. Specifically, these are chronological
A B C D sequence of steps to guide action.

a) Rules c) Strategies
b) Procedures d) Budgets

[] [] [] [] 105. When the librarian thinks that there is a need to migrate to RDA due to the positive comments
A B C D of his/her fellow librarians, what planning technique is being considered?

a) Forecasts c) Prediction
b) Standards d) Projection

[] [] [] [] 106. Which of the following is an externally imposed policy?

A B C D
a) One user per computer. c) Circulation policy
b) Library Outside visitor’s fee d) Intellectual Property and Copyright

[] [] [] [] 107. This refers to the number of people and/or activities a manager can efficiently manage.
A B C D
a) Scalar principle c) Decentralization
b) Delegation d) Span of Control

[] [] [] [] 108. Recruitment is a process of attracting the appropriate number of qualified individuals to apply
A B C D for vacant positions in an organization. There are three fundamental factors that need to be
considered in the process of recruitment, which of the following does not belong?

a) Job analysis c) Source of application

b) Job description d) Placement

38
[] [] [] [] 109. It determines the specific activities necessary to accomplish the planned goals. It is aimed to
A B C D group the activities into a logical framework of structure, assigning authority and
responsibilities to people for their accomplishment.

a) Planning c) Leading
b) Organizing d) Controlling

[] [] [] [] 110. Frederick Hertzberg and his associates examined the relationships between job satisfaction and
A B C D productivity and showed that dissatisfaction was caused by extrinsic factors such as pay,
supervision, working conditions, and company policies so-called hygiene factors.

a) Two-Factor Theory c) Achievement-power-affiliation theory

b) ERG Theory d) Leadership Grid

[] [] [] [] 111. This was proposed by James McGregor Burns and differentiated two types of leader;
A B C D transactional and transformational.

a) Two-Factor Theory c) Achievement-power-affiliation theory

b) ERG Theory d) Leadership Grid

[] [] [] [] 112. According to Fred Fiedler, three situational variables determine how favorable any particular
A B C D situation is for a leader. What is Fiedler’s contribution to leadership?

a) Leadership Contingency Model c) Achievement-power-affiliation theory

b) ERG Theory d) Leadership Grid

[] [] [] [] 113. It is a systematic approach which seeks to determine whether or not a particular program or
A B C D proposal is justified.

a) Cost-benefit analysis c) Operations research

b) Evaluation d) Program evaluation and research technique

[] [] [] [] 114. The budget is divided into broad input classes or categories (such as salaries or wages,
A B C D materials and supplies, equipment, capitals and expenditures, and miscellaneous), with further
subdivisions within these categories.
a) Lump sum c) Line item budgeting
b) Formula budgeting d) Performance budgeting

[] [] [] [] 115. It is the analysis, planning, implementation, and control of carefully formulated programs
A B C D designed to bring about voluntary exchange of values with target markets for the purpose of
achieving the organization's objectives.
a) Budgeting c) Evaluation
b) Marketing d) Contingency Planning

[] [] [] [] 116. Which of the following are the second elements in planning?

A B C D
i Time iv Collecting data
ii Analyzing data v Correcting data
iii Consolidating data vi Resources

a) i only c) vi only
b) ii, and iv only d) iii, and v only

[] [] [] [] 117. What is the self-imposed duty of the library?

A B C D
a) Vision c) Goals
b) Mission d) Objectives

[] [] [] [] 118. What is the general statement referring toward which efforts is the library directed?
A B C D

39
 a) Vision c) Goals
b) Mission d) Objectives

[] [] [] [] 119. What do you call the predetermined act toward achieving library objectives?
A B C D
a) Activities c) Procedure
b) Policy d) Process

[] [] [] [] 120. These are the standard operations performed by the library staff in dealing with specific
A B C D situations or providing specific service?

a) Activities c) Procedure
b) Policy d) Process

[] [] [] [] 121. Departmentalization covers the issue of centralization. Which best illustrates centralization?
A B C D
a) High degree of delegation c) High degree of control
b) High degree of participation d) High Degree of movement

[] [] [] [] 122. It refers to the use of computers as an aid for library activities.

A B C D
a) Library Mechanization c) Library digitization
b) Library automation d) Library computerization

[] [] [] [] 123. Which area of library automation automates the creation, storage, retrieval and management of
A B C D bibliographic records and indexes?

a) Cataloging system c) Serial publications Control system

b) Circulation system d) Acquisition system

[] [] [] [] 124. Which area of library automation automates the management of placing, canceling, claiming of
A B C D orders; returning defective, unwanted and unordered material; and accounting statistical
information?

a) Cataloging system c) Serial publications Control system

b) Circulation system d) Acquisition system

[] [] [] [] 125. The Standards for Libraries in Higher Education are designed to guide academic libraries in
A B C D advancing and sustaining their role as partners in education students, achieving their
institutions’ missions, and positioning libraries as leaders in assessment and continuous
improvement on their campuses. This standard was developed by ________ .

a) IFLA c) PAARL
b) CHED d) ACRL

[] [] [] [] 126. It is the only nationally accredited professional organization of librarians in the Philippines to
A B C D date. At present, it serves as the umbrella organization for all library groups in the country.

a) PLAI c) PASLI
b) PAARL d) ASLP

[] [] [] [] 127. The association for special librarians and libraries in the Philippines.
A B C D
a) PLAI c) PASLI
b) PAARL d) ASLP

[] [] [] [] 128. It is mandated to formulate policy guidelines, as well as plan, develop, and implement
A B C D programs or projects that will promote the advancement of library and information services in
the country, with particular emphasis on the enrichment of the arts and culture collections of
libraries nationwide.
a) MAHLAP c) NCCA-NCLIS
b) SFA d) PRC-BFL

40
[] [] [] [] 129. An association of archivists in the Philippines.
A B C D
a) MAHLAP c) NCCA-NCLIS
b) SFA d) PRC-BFL

[] [] [] [] 130. When you prepare a strategic plan, you need to do a SWOT analysis to be able to develop
A B C D priorities. How will you do this?

a) Conduct a self-survey c) Interview students

b) Conduct an experimental research d) Involve the administration

[] [] [] [] 131. What is a grapevine in every organization like the library?

A B C D
a) Formal communication system c) Internal communication system
b) Informal communication system d) External communication system

[] [] [] [] 132. A leader who exchanges rewards for services rendered and punishment for inadequate
A B C D performance.

a) Transactional leader c) Benevolent leader

b) Authoritative leader d) Transformational leader

[] [] [] [] 133. “To implement RDA cataloging standard in the every catalog records within 6 months”
A B C D
a) Vision c) Goal
b) Mission d) Objective
[] [] [] [] 134. “To support the research and extension of the agency through maintaining an information
A B C D retrieval system tailored to the overall purpose and intentions of the agency”

a) Vision c) Goal
b) Mission d) Objective

[] [] [] [] 135. “To improve the library system in terms of cataloging standards, authority files and records
A B C D control and management”

a) Vision c) Goal
b) Mission d) Objective

[] [] [] [] 136. “To empower staff through vitalizing workplace, providing development opportunities and
A B C D employing a fair appraisal mechanism”

a) Vision c) Goal
b) Mission d) Objective

[] [] [] [] 137. It is defined as getting things done through people.

A B C D
a) administration c) organizing
b) leadership d) management

[] [] [] [] 138. Republic Act No. 8525, a program that encourages private institutions to support education, is
A B C D also known as ______________ .

a) Adopt a School Program c) Adopt a library program

b) School Library Act d) Philippine Librarianship act

[] [] [] [] 139. Which of the following principles of management describes “unity is strength”?

A B C D
a) Specialization c) Remuneration
b) Esprit de corps d) Span of Control

[] [] [] [] 140. During this period, apprenticeship method is replaced with the factory system in production
A B C D

41
 a) Agricultural period c) Industrial Revolution
b) Modern Period d) Post-modern period

[] [] [] [] 141. A type of power that comes from a formal management position and is based upon authority
A B C D recognized in accordance with position in an organization structure.

a) Legitimate power c) Expert power

b) Reward power d) Coercive power

[] [] [] [] 142. Who is the Father of Special Librarianship in the Philippines?

A B C D
a) Juan Buenrostro Jr. c) Isagani Medina
b) Rufo Buenviaje d) John A. Lapp

[] [] [] [] 143. What is the most desirable shape for a special library?

A B C D
a) Oval c) Square
b) Triangle d) Rectangle
[] [] [] [] 144. It is a collaborative project of the national library and four other institutions - Department of
A B C D Science and Technology (DOST), Department of Agriculture (DA), Commission on Higher
Education (CHED), and the University of the Philippines System (UP System). This was
approved by the Commission on Information and Communications Technology (CICT) under
Chairperson Virgilio Peňa.
a) Philippine Library Information Network c) Philippine e-Library Project
(PHILIN)
b) Public Libraries Information Center d) Association of Academic and Research
(PUBLIN) Library Information Network (ARALIN)
[] [] [] [] 145. It is the full implementation of the Integrated Library Computerization project of The National
A B C D Library. The Information Technology Center of The National Library handles all activities
related to library automation. Online Public Access Catalog (OPAC) is currently installed at
the Filipiniana Division.
a) Philippine Library Information Network c) Philippine e-Library Project
(PHILIN)
b) Public Libraries Information Center d) Association of Academic and Research
(PUBLIN) Library Information Network (ARALIN)
[] [] [] [] 146. Which of the following are the objectives of management and information system?
A B C D
i To assist library staff in routine decision- v To generate internal and external reports
making
ii To improve accountability and control over vi To improve the long-term planning process
resources
iii To modify budget allocations and vii To take over the role of the librarian in
expenditures based on arising situations information management
iv To improve the overall effectiveness of the viii To facilitate activities related to
library by focusing on outcomes performance measures.

a) i, iii, v, vi, vii, viii c) ii, iv, v, vi, vii, viii

b) i, ii, iv, v, vi, viii d) i, ii, v, vi, vii, viii

[] [] [] [] 147. What is the title of the Caldecott Medal Winner 2019?

A B C D
a) Hello Lighthouse c) New Kid
b) Merci Suarez Changes Gears d) The Lost Words

[] [] [] [] 148. Which describes the administration of an academic library?

A B C D

42
 a) The supervision and control of the c) The academic library shall have an
academic library shall be clearly defined advisory library committee composed of
within the organizational structure of the representatives of the faculty, parents and
library. stakeholders.
b) The academic library shall be administered d) The academic library shall formulate a
and supervised by a full time professional development plan which shall include a
librarian with at least Doctorate Degree in program for a continued development and
Library and Information Science or improvement of library resources and
PhEdMan in Library Science or PhD in services.
Library Science.
[] [] [] [] 149. In an academic library, how many percent of the collection shall have been published within
A B C D the last five years?

a) 15% c) 25%
b) 20% d) 30%

[] [] [] [] 150. A university has a student population of 5,500 plus the combined academic and non-academic
A B C D staff which is 1150. How many periodical titles are required?

a) 25 title c) 75 titles
b) 50 title d) 100 titles

43
KEY ANSWER TO PART I: ORGANIZATION AND MANAGEMENT
1. A 51. A 101. C
2. D 52. D 102. A
3. B 53. D 103. A
4. D 54. B 104. B
5. D 55. B 105. C
6. D 56. A 106. D
7. B 57. D 107. D
8. A 58. A 108. D
9. C 59. B 109. B
10. C 60. B 110. A
11. C 61. C 111. D
12. D 62. C 112. A
13. A 63. B 113. A
14. A 64. D 114. C
15. C 65. B 115. B
16. A 66. C 116. B
17. C 67. B 117. B
18. A 68. B 118. C
19. C 69. B 119. A
20. B 70. C 120. C
21. A 71. B 121. C
22. B 72. C 122. B
23. A 73. C 123. A
24. A 74. A 124. C
25. B 75. B 125. D
26. A 76. B 126. A
27. A 77. B 127. D
28. A 78. B 128. C
29. A 79. C 129. B
30. B 80. A 130. A
31. A 81. C 131. B
32. C 82. C 132. A
33. B 83. A 133. D
34. B 84. B 134. B
35. D 85. C 135. C
36. D 86. D 136. C
37. B 87. C 137. D
38. A 88. C 138. A
39. C 89. B 139. D
40. A 90. B 140. C
41. D 91. C 141. A
42. B 92. B 142. B
43. B 93. D 143. D
44. B 94. B 144. C
45. D 95. D 145. A
46. B 96. A 146. B
47. B 97. D 147. A
48. A 98. D 148. D
49. B 99. D 149. B
50. C 100. C 150. D

44
REFERENCE, BIBLIOGRAPHY AND USER SERVICES,
FILIPINIANA MATERIALS
I. Overview
Reference- is the act of referring/ consulting that phase of library work that is directly concerned with assistance to readers
in securing information and in using the resources of a library for study and research.

Reference book- a book designed by its arrangement and treatments to be consulted definite items of information rather
than read consecutively. Example materials are the General Reference. (Encyclopedia, atlas, almanac, bibliographies, etc.)-
contain information in all disciplines.

Reference question- any request for information or aid that requires the use of any or more sources to determine the answer
or which utilizes the professional judgment of the librarian.

Reference Librarian- "the man, who is compelled to be all things to men, who counting and no one trivial spends his days
opening up to the miscellaneous public the stores of the libraries material” (W.W. Bishop).

Reference service- the personal assistance given by the libraries to individual readers in pursuit of information. The role is
to make information available to library customers by delivering service. Whatever librarians do; otherwise known reference
and information service or reader service.

Reference Work - refers to the phase of library work that is directly concerned with assistance to readers in securing
information and in using the resources of the library in study and research (ALA, 1943)

II. History of Reference Work

1871 - Justin Winsor- In a sixty-page brochure published by the American Society of Science, suggested the founding of
free libraries and their information, and the use of reference occurred once.

1876 - Samuel Swett Green- “Father of Reference Work”, identified four components of reference service:
1. Instruct the reader in the ways of the library
2. Assist readers in solving inquiries
3. Aids the reader in the selection of good works
4. Promote the library within the community

1884 – Melvil Dewey- using the "reference library" two years before writing and organizing the Dewey Decimal
Classification scheme.

1910 – John Cotton Dana- He believed that the librarian’s prime duty was not to answer questions but to instruct the
inquirer in the use of materials by which he can secure the answer himself. (Not all information should be given; instead, the
librarian should be the guide of the inquirer) He became a librarian for 4 decades at a Public library. Notable for his
innovations in offering & promoting Library services.

William Warner Bishop- Believed in service rendered librarians in aid of some sort of study." Librarians should provide service
and assist their users in quest of knowledge.” After some time, the term "reference" & "reference service' cropped up in the
profession,' publications & indexes.

III. Reference Service

Why Is It Important?

● Libraries have various information for everyone in the community but work especially hard to meet individual needs.
● Libraries strive to provide equal, objective service for all patrons.
● Libraries promote the value of information for problem-solving in everyday life or for entertainment and enlightenment.

The Reference Constants (Fixed)

1. Purpose- help users in their quest for knowledge (vast pool of knowledge) or, more particularly, in that knowledge that
requires its usefulness and instrument powers.

45
 2. Function- locates answers for users to provide this function effectively; there must be supported duties and action, from
a selection of materials to adequate space and personnel.
3. User- the lifeblood of reference service: who may have many reasons for asking questions but eventually must decide
upon the action he is to take with the data supplied by the reference system.
4. Librarian- serves the intermediate or mediator between the user and his needs and information sources to satisfy the
needs and queries.

Levels of Reference Services

James lngresoll Wyer (1930)

1. Conservative
- assist if she is consulted not giving an exact answer, instruction, and guidance only
- old fashioned, occasional personal assistance
- Limited to instruction and guidance
- Only for its users to be dependent on using the library
2. Liberal
- assists at all cost, will follow you wherever you go
- Librarian approaches users, "may I help you."
- Even the librarian search while the user waits
3. Moderate (middle)

Samuel Rothstein (1960) revived and relabeled Wyer’s Philosophy

1. Conservative = Minimum
2. Liberal = Maximum
3. Moderate = Middling

The Reference Process

Reference work is more than answering questions. Discovering and meeting information needs is a process that involves
finding the real information need behind the questions. The reference process involves open communication between you and
the patron, working until the demands are met.

Role of Reference Services

1. Finding information to answer specific questions

2. Helping customers find information for themselves.
3. Teaching people how to use library resources and how to do library research

Reference process-communication process between the librarian and the person posing the question with reference service,
reference work, and reference sources.

Steps of the Reference Process

1. Encouraging the patron to contact the library when there is an information need (outreach).
2. Finding out what the actual information need is (the reference interview).
3. Finding the information that will meet the need (reference search).
4. Making sure the patron's need has been met (follow-up).

Communication Process

1. Making sure the librarian’s understanding of the question coincides with the actual information needs of the patron.
2. Analyzing, categorizing, or classifying the question on several dimensions to formulate a search query.
3. Translating the terms of the question into the language of relevant parts of the reference system.
4. Making various decisions involved in conducting the search itself.
5. Evaluating the information in terms of the patron and his needs.

Important things during the reference process

a. Encouraging the patron to contact the library when there is an information need
b. Finding out what the patron's real information need is
c. Finding information that will meet the need

46
 d. Following up and making sure the patron's information need has been met
*Communication is the key
Categories of reference questions
1. Directional - tend to identify direction/ where is the location of materials.
a. Common type of query. A good sense of direction and familiarity is needed.
b. Serves as an orientation to familiarize with different parts of the library. Qualifying questions would help the user to
know the information.
2. Ready-reference
a. Comprises the bulk of reference questions.
b. 85-90% of questions asked in libraries and in information centers.
c. Answers are found primarily in the fact-type of reference books.
3. Specific search
a. Variety and number of sources involve which tend to explain in concise easy to understand fashion.
b. Query heard of curious students.
c. Librarians need to exhaust different materials.
4. Research
a. Requires in-depth qualities for information directed to a librarian by an adult who is a specialist, professional, and expert
in that field or who is on her way to becoming a specialist.

Reference Interview

- the key to the reference process

- answers the fundamental question: what does the patron really want to know?

Real Information Needs: Providing Answers to Unasked Questions

The first question a patron asks is often simply a conversation opener -- a way to say "hello." A patron's first question may be
a way to determine if you are approachable and not an expression of the information need.

Steps in Discovering the Real Information Need

1. Make the patron feel comfortable.

2. Be approachable.
3. Be sensitive.
4. Assure confidentiality.

Charles Bunge asserted an outline of what reference librarians must consider when someone asks a question.

1. Ensure the question, as understood by the librarian, coincide with the actual information need of the patron. Analyzing,
categorizing, or classifying the question or a member of dimensions to formulate a search strategy.
2. Translating the terms of the questions into the language of relevant parts of the reference system.
3. Making various decisions involved in conducting the search itself.
4. Evaluating the information in terms of patron and his needs.

Steps in Conducting the Reference Interview (Cassell and Hiremath)

1. Establishing Rapport with the user

- showing the expression of interest, smile, greet
- signals are essential (verbal or non-verbal)
2. Negotiating the question
- find out what the user really wants
- ask clarifying questions (give user chance to express his reference needs)
Two Types of Questions:
a. Open-ended question - questions that encourage the user to talk more
b. Close-ended question - generally leads to short answers like Yes/No
3. Developing a Strategy and Communicating it to the User
- conduct a search, selecting search terms and identifying the most appropriate sources.
- explain the search
4. Locating the information and Evaluating it
- Check the material if it complies with the user need

47
 - Instruction in the use of the material should also be provided if the user is unfamiliar with the source/s
5. Ensuring that the Question is Fully answered (the follow-up)
- Follow-up questions are necessary to check whether their questions are responded to or not
6. Closing the Interview
- Confirmation is needed from the user
- It should be completed on an open note

* Listening - the most crucial part of the reference interview

III. TYPES/FUNCTIONS OF REFERENCE SERVICES

1. Direct reference service - consists of personal assistance provided to library patrons in pursuit of information

a. Reference queries services

a.1 Direction - Focused on the standard "where" questions; answers requires geographical knowledge of key
locations

a.2. Ready reference - queries answered by a simple fact. Answers are found quickly in one or two easy-to-
identify, prepared at hand reference works.

a.3. Specific-search questions (bibliographical inquiry) - answers almost always take the form of giving
the user a document, a list of citations, a book, a report, an internet site, etc.

* Bibliographic verification - Provide facts about publication rather than events, places, or organizations.
(specific about the book, title, and author, etc.)

• Checking information about the book/ material may include but not be limited to the author.

• List of books, journals, or reading materials.

• User’s information about the document is correct and complete.

End Note - end of the chapter.

Foot Note - bottom of the page.

a.4. Research questions - involve answering complex questions that cannot be answered from one source;
usually, queries come from an adult specialist seeking detailed information to assist in specific work.

b. Instruction - the aim is to guide the user in the use of the library and its resources

b.1. Formal bibliographic instruction

b.1.1. Orientation tours

b.1.2. Formal courses

b.1.3. Use of user Guides, and instructional flyers, brochures, and signage.

b.2. Informal bibliographic instructions

b.2.1. Teaching or demonstrating how to use a catalog or any reference tool when the question is
being answered, or material ad located, or even research conducted.

b.2.2. Reference desk

b.3 User Education

b.3.1 The origins of library user education can be traced back more than 170 years. The earliest
evidence of instruction lecturing to undergraduates--was found at Harvard College in the 1820s.

Reitz (2004) has defined User education in Dictionary of Library and Information Science -"all the
activities involved in teaching users how to make the best possible use of library resources, services
and facilities, including formal and informal instruction delivered by a librarian or other staff
member one-on-one- or in a group. Also includes online tutorials, audiovisual materials, and printed
guides and pathfinders. A broader term than 'bibliographic instruction.’"
48
 b.3.2 Components of User Education

a. Library orientation means introducing the users to the general methods of usage and
services and the layout such as building and sections of the libraries, stacking arrangement,
rules and regulations, and facilities available in a particular library.

b. Library instruction means to provide specific education on how to use and understand
specific information sources, information systems, information services, and tools. It gives
instructions to the users on how to select, get and use particular information resources.

c. Bibliographic instruction means to use the bibliographic tools to provide guidance to

understand the features of these tools and their nature of subject coverage.

b.3.3 Need for user education

a. Literature explosion and information explosion

b. E-Resources v Automation

c. Variety of Library Services

d. Multiple Database Searching Techniques

e. Internet

f. Information System and Information Networking

b.3.4 Objectives of user education

a. To familiarize the user with the automated library services such as OPAC.

b. To identify the user’s specific information resources as per their information needs;

c. To enhance and improve the user's abilities to select appropriate information sources;

d. To tram the users in the use of information resources;

e. To extract the information from information system;

f. To train the users to exploit the library resources effectively;

g. To encourage the users to get the assistance of library professionals;

h. To train and develop the skills in the users for independent specific information
searching;

i. To acquaint them with various national and international information networks and
databases.

j. To educate the users in CD - ROM database searching as well as online searching.

c. Reader's advisory/ Guidance

• Giving options to your clients

• Recommend readings

• New acquisitions

• Term paper counseling - sometimes called term paper assistance or research consultation usually offered at
a location other than the reference desk where the librarian can spend more time guiding each student on an
individual basis. It provides a level of flexibility and attention.

• Bibliotherapy - assist with problematic users.

► Personal assistance

► To help users in reading inspirational books that will result in good.

49
 ► A more specialized form of guidance related in its goals to reference advisory works.

► But generally practiced in a group.

Two types of Bibliotherapy

1. Clinical Bibliotherapy is used to encourage self-understanding or behavioral change.

2. Developmental Bibliotherapy is used without need variety of individuals in schools or in public libraries to
promote self-knowledge, personal growth, and the successful completion of developmental tasks associated
with various life stages.

d. Information services - consists of finding information for the user or assisting the user in finding much-needed
information.

- provide the user directly with all the bibliographic or non-bibliographic information needed or with sources
that embody it

-take a variety of form from simple tracking down of bibliographic citations

• Ready reference question- the most basic information service

• Reference desk- deal with more complex questions.

* Even how simple the question is, you still have the responsibility to help the user in her
quest for knowledge.

d.1 Current Awareness Services - aims to let the user know about recently added materials to a collection or
database.

-ensures that library clients are kept up-to-date with information in their interest or subject areas.
Services include:

• Selective dissemination of information (SDI)

• Bibliographies or reading lists

• Journal circulation

• Displays

• New titles lists

• Circulation of the journal title and content pages

• Newspaper clippings

• Bookmarking relevant internet sites

• Current awareness bulletins

d.2 Abstracting and indexing service - provided for easier access of periodical articles, newspapers, and
conference proceedings

d.3 Technical inquiry service / Technology instruction - Teaching library customers how to independently
use online and computer-based resources such as the Internet, the library catalog, subscription databases, and
productivity software provided by the library (ex: word processing). It also includes the use of electronic
equipment provided by the library such as photocopiers, printers, assistive devices, and microfilm/fiche reader-
printers

d.4 Translation service - documents/manuscripts are translated into the language the patron understands

d.5 Reprographic service - includes various types of reproductions through photocopies, photographs,
scanning, printing, electronic storage in databases, digital copying on CDs and DVDs

e. Electronic reference service

50
 e.1. Chat/Instant Messaging

e.2. Videoconferencing

e.3 E-mail (Electronic mail)

e.4. Text messaging

e.5. Fax (Telefacsimile)

f. Retrospective search services– retrieving all relevant materials, on a given topic, by a given author published within
a certain period.

2. Indirect reference service- consists of behind-the-scenes activities that help provide access to the library's collection and
extend the library's services through cooperation with other libraries.

a. Evaluation and selection of reference sources- recognizing various types of materials needed for adequate service.
(Collection Management and Development)

b. Processing and maintenance of library catalogs, bibliographies, and other reference aids- organization and
administration of reference; coordination - on how to trace the material; librarian may spend some time preparing Special
bibliography. (Technical Services)

c. Referral Services- providing the patron with information about the group or agency that can provide needed
assistance.

- Helping put patrons in contact with the best agency for their needs

- staff and materials (Resource sharing; Consortium)

d. Interlibrary loan (ILL)- is a service whereby a user of one library can borrow books or receive photocopies of
documents owned by another library. It has two operations: borrowing and lending.

Purpose of ILL:

*To aid the researcher in acquiring specialized material from other libraries.

*To assist the general reader in borrowing material otherwise inaccessible because of lack of complete library
resources.

e. Document Delivery- the supply of journal articles/references and other copies on a personalized basis.

f. Networks- a formal arrangement whereby several libraries or other organizations engage in familiar patterns, or
exchange of information, materials, services, or all three for some functional purpose ·

IV. LIBRARY USER SURVEY and USER NEEDS

Reasons for user survey:

1. To gauge user satisfaction

2. To assess users' needs (usage)

3. To learn more about outcomes-that is, the end results of using the library

4. To gather demographic information about library users

*Short survey- focuses on customer satisfaction

*Medium survey - add questions about library usage

*Long survey- add questions about library usage; also includes demographics (statistical data)

SURVEY DESIGN

The most important points to consider when designing surveys are:

• What are your organization's information needs, i.e., what do you need to know?

51
 • What are the characteristics of the respondents?

A. Type and Content of Survey

a. Satisfaction
The most common type of survey is designed to determine what the library is doing well in its users' opinions
and what areas can be improved.
b. Usage
Usage refers to patrons' behaviors (e.g., "How often do you use the library in a typical month?").
c. Outcomes
Outcomes can be described as what was accomplished or gained by using the library. Incorporating a question
into your survey which asks whether you may contact respondents at a later date can be an excellent way to
collect outcome information. Alternately, questions about what users hope to achieve by using the library (i.e.,
intended outcomes) can somewhat satisfy these types of research questions.
d. Demographics
Demographics questions assess respondents' educational and cultural backgrounds, age, gender, and so forth.

B. Sample Size Needed for Meaningful Analysis

A good sample should represent the population it speaks for in all characteristics except size (for example,
proportions of male to female, old to young, education levels, etc.).

The sample size must be large enough to be reflective of the general population. Before distributing your survey,
identify your target sample size using a tool such as a sample size calculator.

Consider offering respondents an incentive to reach your sample sizes, such as candy or prizes, to encourage
participation.

C. Method of Distribution

Surveys can be offered in-house, mailed, or accessed electronically.

● In-house surveys are easy to collect and accessible; however, they only capture information from those
already using the library.
● Mailing surveys to everyone in your service area, or a sample thereof, can be an excellent way to hear
from those who do not regularly use the library but is considerably costlier than administering them in-
house. Mail surveys also have lower response rates than other delivery methods.
● Electronic surveys can also reach people beyond the library's walls but exclude those without
computer access or skills. Additionally, if the survey is embedded i.n your library's homepage, it won't
be seen by non-library users. Lastly, electronic surveys can be vulnerable to security risks, which can
compromise the quality of the data you collect.

D. Data Analysis

May use tools, such as Survey Monkey, have built-in features for data analysis, or you might choose to use
databases or statistical software like SPSS, Jamovi, etc.

Comments could be coded and analyzed in-depth unless your goal was simply to pull definitive statements as
sources of anecdotal evidence.

If resources allow, consider hiring a research professional to analyze and present your data.

V. THE REFERENCE LIBRARIAN

Responsibilities of the Modern Reference Librarian

1. Provides information to library users on request.

2. Evaluates selects and weeds reference materials.
3. Assist library users in their own searches in resolving information needs.
4. Counsels library users on effective search strategies.
5. Clarifies information queries and demands throughout the search process.
6. Instructs and evaluates users on search techniques and information resources.
7. Organize print, non-print, and electronic information to promote access.

52
 8. Protects users’ right to privacy, confidentiality, and intellectual freedom.
9. Participates in professional activities to improve the profession and personal knowledge.
10. Part1c1pates m the improvement of the local information system.
11. Teaches fellow library staff to enhance their skills.
12. Creates finding tools and websites to assist information seekers.

Characteristics / Attitude of a Reference Librarian

1. Discipline
• focus
• applies communication techniques
• develop a strategy in a particular case
• self-control and self-strategy
• direct to the point
2. Desire to help
• Commitment to helping people
3. Sensitivity
• limits the relationship between the librarian and users
• respectful
4. Patience
• to deal with cranky, arrogant, insensitive individuals
• to remain calm and persistent
• cordial enough to the users
5. Broad Knowledge
• basic information
• reading is critical
6. Knowledge of reference section
• identifies general and specific information
• know what material to consult

VI. REFERENCE AND INFORMATION SOURCES

THE REFERENCE COLLECTION

1. Book

Today, the term refers to the codex- a set of folded sheets of paper sewn or stapled along one edge and enclosed
with protective covers and written contained within it. It is a non-periodical printed publication of at least 49 pages,
exclusive of the cover page. This may be ordinary stock or sometimes called borderline books.

Reference Books are arranged and treatment intended to be suitable for being referred to or consulted.

The generic 'reference book,’ designed to be consulted for bits of information rather than to be read
consecutively, includes typically: almanacs, bibliographies, bibliography sources, card catalog, union list,
dictionaries, directories, encyclopedias, geographical references, government documentation, guides to the
literature, handbooks, indexes, manuals, monographs and text, non-biographical directories and yearbooks.

2. Serial
These are publications in any medium issued in successive parts bearing numerical or chronological
designations and intended to continue indefinitely. Included are: periodicals, annuals, journals proceedings,
transactions of societies, and numbered monographic series and
other categories.
3. Audiovisual materials
Non-book/non-print) are aids to teaching through ear and eye, come in audio and visual formats which convey
information by sound and image rather than text. These include audio recording, slides, film strips, videotapes,
motion pictures, and models.
4. Report Literature
Report literature is a distinct document form significant in scientific/technical fields. Grey literature form (a
publication unavailable through normal bookselling channels) contains information that may or may not eventually
appear in some conventionally published form but because of its currency. Included are: technical notes and
memoranda, preprints, conference proceedings, and papers, and research and development reports.
53
 5. Government Publications
Originate from and issued at the expense and authority of any office of a legally recognized government or
international organization. These are called government or just documents. Also referred to as grey or gray
literature.
6. Other types of reference collection
Ephemera- current material that is of temporary interest and value. (i.e., posters, tickets, collectibles)
Pamphlets- a short publication, sometimes defined as having at least five or not more than forty-eight pages,
but not part of a serial.
Brochure- a short printed work, consisting of only a few leaves, merely stitched together with thread or cord
and not otherwise bound.
Clippings- a collection of clippings from current newspapers and periodicals and other sources, arranged in
some definite order in a VERTICAL FILE (a case or drawer in which material may be filed vertically).

TIMELINESS OF REFERENCE SOURCES

1. PRIMARY SOURCE is original material that has not been filtered through interpretation, condensation, or
evaluation by a second party.
A primary publication is an original, unpublished report of research or scholarship, usually in its initial,
unedited form. It is usually the first print appearance research and scholarship by an individual or group. Primary
publications are generally the results of experiments or surveys, and maybe unpublished as articles in primary
journals, or as conference proceedings, individually published or unpublished distributed reports, unpublished
dissertations.
a) Theses/Dissertations - an essay or treatise presented by a candidate in partial fulfillment of
the requirement of a degree.
b) Manuscripts are generally documents of any kind written by hand, but a more particularly
original version of literary or musical composition in handwritten or typescript form before
it has been printed. Information professionals distinguish between manuscripts, which might
legitimately form part of the library collection, and official documents or records, which are
regarded as ARCHIVES (anon-current records of an institution, organization, business, or
person, created for working. Purposed and retained by the creator, or successor, for reference
and or historical instances.
c) Patents - when an investor makes a new and valuable invention - that is a technical idea
embodied in a process or product - patent allows him or her to develop and produce this
within the protection of a limited clime monopoly, usually sixteen to twenty years, in. return
the inventor has to deposit in public place protection given is a type of intellectual property.
d) Daily Newspaper Report- a publication usually issued daily or weekly, traditionally
containing the most recent news.
e) College Invisible - an information-sharing group such as those that have existed from many
areas in science and other disciplines; membership of such groups is mainly dependent on
personal communication and often initiated of this college.
f) Other primary sources:
• Artifacts (e.g., coins, plant specimens, fossils, furniture, tools, clothing, all from the
time under study);
• Audio recordings (e.g., radio programs)
• Diaries; • Internet communications on email, listservs;
• Interviews (e.g., oral histories, telephone, e-mail);
• Journal articles published in peer-reviewed publications;
• Letters;
• Original Documents (i.e., birth certificate, will, marriage license, trial transcript);
• Photographs
• Proceedings of Meetings, conferences, and symposia;
• Records of organizations, government agencies (e.g., annual report, treaty, constitution,
government document};
• Speeches;
• Survey Research (e.g., market surveys, public opinion polls);
• Video recordings (e.g. television programs);
• Works of art, architecture, literature, and music (e.g., paintings, sculptures, musical
scores, buildings, novels, poems)

54
 2. SECONDARY SOURCE - are based on primary sources. This has been modified, selected, or rearranged for a
particular purpose or audience; published with explanations on the subject matter bibliographic and substantive
structure.
a) Encyclopedia - a database (essentially, any systematically ordered collection, in whatever
form) containing information on all subjects, or limited to a particular field or subject, arrange
in systematic (usually alphabetical) order.
b) Fact-type books - book of facts.
c) Almanacs - a publication usually appearing annually, containing an assortment of factual
information often having solid statistical content.
d) Directory - a database, traditionally in book form, containing lists of the names, addresses,
sometimes with other information added, of people, organizations or business, in a particular
area, or with some shared interest such as membership of a specific trade or profession.
e) Index - an alphabetical list of topics, names of persons, places, etc., mentioned in a book or
series of books, indicating at what place or places they appear in the source documents/s,
usually by page number.
f) Other secondary sources:
• Bibliographies (also considered tertiary);
• Biographical works;
• Commentaries, criticisms;
• Dictionaries, Encyclopedias (also considered tertiary);
• Histories;
• Journal articles (depending on the disciple can be primary);
• Magazine and newspaper articles (this distinction varies by discipline);
• Monographs, other than fiction and autobiography;
• Textbooks (also considered tertiary);
• Web site (also considered primary).
3. TERTIARY SOURCE - This is thrice removed from the primary source; considered to be a standard reference or
source type; consists of information that is a distillation and collection of primary and secondary sources.
a. Dictionary - a list and explanation of the words of a language or the vocabulary of a
particular subject; the terms are arranged alphabetically in order in information retrieval, it
can be used as synonyms with THESAURUS (a lexicon in which words are grouped by
concept, thus providing a grouping or classification of synonyms or near-synonyms, and
equivalent classes of terminology.
b. Other tertiary sources:
• Almanacs;
• Bibliographies (also considered secondary);
• Chronologies;
• Dictionaries and Encyclopedias (also considered secondary);
• Directories;
• Factbooks;
• Guidebooks;
• Indexes, abstracts, bibliographies used to locate primary and secondary sources;
• Manuals;
• Textbooks (also be secondary).

FORMS OF REFERENCE SOURCES

1. Control-Access-Directional Type
a. Bibliography - the first broad class or form of the reference source. It is the systematic listing
and analytical study of books, manuscripts, and other documents. It is compiled to provide
comprehensive coverage of its chosen field.
● Control - It serves as a control device. It inventories what is produced day-to-day, year-
to-year, in such a way to enable the compiler (and the user) to feel he has control via
the organization of the steady flow of knowledge; This is done through research
(finding specific source}, identification, description, and classification.
● Access - once an item is controlled, the individual items are so organized for easy
access to facilitate intellectual work; the aim of bibliography is to assist inquirer in

55
 discovering the existence or determining which may be of interest to him (by
Robinson).
● Direction - bibliography usually does not give the user a definitive answer but serves
to direct him to the source of a solution.
2. Source Type
a. Encyclopedia - the most used single source; they may be defined as works containing
informative articles on subjects in every field of knowledge; usually arranged in alphabetical
order; these are used to answer specific questions about X person or X topic or general
queries which may begin with "I want something about X ...”
b. Fact sources - (includes yearbooks, almanacs, handbooks, manuals, and directories. All
these types have many different qualities but share a common element: "they are all used to
look up factual material for quick reference work. Together they cover almost every facet of
human knowledge.
● Yearbook - an annual volume of current information in descriptive and or statistical
form sometimes limited to a particular field.
● Almanac - an annual publication containing a calendar, frequently accompanied by
astronomical data and other information; a yearly book of statistics additional
information sometimes in a particular field.
● Handbook - a small reference book.
● Manual - a compact book that treats the essentials of a subject concisely; a book of
rules for guidance.
● Digest - a brief condensation of a written work, often in other words than those of the
original.
● Compendium/compend - a work that presents in condensed form principal points of
a more extensive work or a work that treats a large subject briefly or in outline.
c. Dictionaries - those sources which deal primarily will include all aspects of words from
proper definition to spelling.
d. Biographical sources - those forms which are self-evident sources of information on people
distinguished in some particular field of interest.
e. Geographical sources –
● Atlas - a volume of maps, plates, engravings, tablets, etc., with or without descriptive
letterpress from raised surfaces, such as type, rather than by lithographic process).
● Gazetteer - a geographical dictionary listing and locating, usually through grid
references, the names of places or features, and frequently providing a varying amount
of descriptive, geographical, historical, or statistical information.
● Map - a flat representation usually of the earth's surface or a section of it.
f. Government documents - any printed or processes paper, book, periodical, pamphlet, or
map, originating in, or printed with an imprint of, or at the expense and by the authority of,
any office of a legally organized government.

EVALUATING REFERENCE SOURCES

1. Authority
a. refers to the qualification and reputation of the author
b. who is the contributor of that materials
c. accuracy of the sources
d. check the credibility of the author, the one who created and the one who contributed t
2. Scope
a. the subject matter of the material
b. what is the focus in terms of language, translation, edition purpose
3. Treatment
a. appropriate to the audience in terms of content, approach, artistic and literary quantity
b. considered the readability and objectivity
c. get material suitable to their thinking
4. Arrangement
a. would have alphabetical, logical, depending on the sequence, classified, chronological - retro
- present - back - past - present, geographical, quick and easy to use, adequacy of cross-
reference.

56
 5. Format
a. the physical make-up of the book
b. type, paper, margins, fonts, and layout
c. bibliography and documentation, bibliographical reference, citation (old and new)
d. how and where information was obtained.
e. illustrations - there are pictures (black and white, colored, sketch), well-chosen, compliments
the text
6. Special Features
a. Special Features ' - outstanding qualities of the materials
b. glossy, online link

EVALUATING SERIALS

1. Authority of the author, editor, contributors, and producers

2. Systems of reference when articles assess its quality by its experts - where is the source
3. Inclusion of serials in standard abstracting/indexing tools
4. Balance of the paper; balance of articles and emphasis
5. Report only original articles or also printed one

EVALUATING GEOGRAPHICAL SOURCES

1. Currency - up-to-date; includes the copyright date/ edition

2. Use of color to enable different data
3. Symbols - used standard of symbols
4. Proportion - refers to projections used; some used three dimensional
5. Grid use - key reference square, letters, and number index to these squares to locate places.
Ex. E5. D6 with page no. of map
6. Binding - provide strength to open easily will lay flat. The entire map should be visible and not hidden by the part
of the binding.
7. Marginal Information - at the minimum should include the scale, type of projection, symbols, and significance of
colors.
8. Index - should be comprehensive, alphabetical, and clearly list all places, names, expect plan/reference, exact map,
longitude and latitude, and grid information.

REFERENCE SOURCES

A. DICTIONARIES
a. History
● Glosses: marginal or interlinear notes; inserted into Latin manuscripts to define or render them in
vernacular Teutonic, Romanic, and Celtic tongues; philologically essential and represent the oldest
rudiments of bilingual, or dual-language, dictionaries.
● Dictionarius: Latin term appeared around 1225 when the English grammarian John of Garland (Joannes
de Garlandia) defined the word as the title of a collection of Latin words arranged by subject to use learners.
● Terms:
o Dictionary: a book containing a selection of words of a language or of some particular subjects,
arranged alphabetically with explanations about them (Webster)
o Lexicology: the study of the formation, meaning, and use of words of idiomatic combinations of
two words.
o Lexicon: the vocabulary of a particular language, field, social class, person, etc.; a dictionary of
foreign language t usually of Greek, Latin, or Hebrew (Thorndike)
o Lexicography: the writing, editing, or compiling of dictionaries.
o Lexicographer: a writer, editor, or compiler of a dictionary.
o Jargon: specialized language concerned with a particular subject, culture, or profession
o Glossary: a list of particular, technical, or complex words with explanations or comments
(Thorndike); an alphabetical list of abstruse, obsolete, unusual, specialized, dialectal, or other
terms concerned with a subject field with definitions
o Gradus: a dictionary designed to aid in writing poetry
o Thesaurus or Verborum: a storehouse of treasury knowledge

57
 ●Dictionaries provide information about words. Guide words, headword, part of speech, etymology/origin,
synonym, antonyms, usage, definitions, pronunciation, syllabication, etc.
b. Types of dictionary
● Types of Dictionary according to form
o Descriptive [recording how the language is actually used]
o Prescriptive [advocating how it ought to be used]
● Types of Dictionary according to length
o Unabridged: [300,000-600,000 entries or over 265,000 entries]
▪ Webster’s 3rd New International Dictionary
▪ The Random House Dictionary
o Abridged: [50,000-200,000 entries or 130,000-180,000 entries]
▪ The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language
▪ Webster’s 9th New College Dictionary
▪ Webster’s New World Dictionary of the American Language
▪ The Random House College Dictionary
o Reduced-Word: [limited to under 60,000 entries]
▪ Oxford American Dictionary
▪ Concise Oxford Dictionary of Current English
● Types of Dictionary according to content
o Historical dictionaries provide the history of a word from its introduction into the language to
the present.
o Etymological/Diachronic dictionaries emphasize the analysis of components of words and their
cognates in other languages. These dictionaries emphasize the linguistic and grammatical history
of the word usage.
o Period or specialized scholarly dictionaries focus on a particular place or period.
o Foreign language dictionaries are self-explanatory. We have all looked up words in French or
Spanish or other Western European languages.
o Subject dictionaries focus on word definitions in a subject area, such as finance, law, botany,
electronics, physics, etc.
o Slang dictionaries define terms used in ordinary, informal speech. These terms may include
jargon, obscenities, or short words that quickly go in and out of use.
o Thesaurus. It contains synonyms and antonyms, usually without definitions. Its purpose is to
provide writers with alternate or more specific words.
o Dual-language Dictionary has two sections, the first being a dictionary of terms in one language
with definitions in a second language. The second section is the reverse, with words in the second
language and definitions in the first language.
o Dialect dictionaries give regional variants and usage for words within a language. It may include
some slang.
o Usage Dictionaries prescribe how a word should be used, based on how it has been used in the
past.
o Specialized Dictionaries are dictionaries of specific use, such as The Random House Cross-
Word Puzzle Dictionary or the Collins Scrabble Dictionary.
o Other dictionaries include abbreviations, synonyms, antonyms, acronyms, reversals (A man, a
plan, a canal, Panama0 rhyming, idioms, quotations, phrases, and dictionary of usage and style.

B. ENCYCLOPEDIAS
a. History
● From the Greek word egkuklopaideia, which means instruction in the circle of knowledge
● It is an effort to bring together information from all branches of knowledge from a single subject, arranged
in alphabetical order for ready reference.
● Pliny the Elder (A.D. 23-79) – Natural History – 31 books survive; Most of the material was taken from
other works; 20,000 facts from 100 authors; deals with everything from the universe and zoology to the
fine arts.
● Isidore of Seville (A.D. 560-636): Etymologies: 20 volumes; a gathering of human knowledge; gave the
origins of names and words he wrote about
● Bartholomew de Glanville or Bartholomaeus Anglicus (1360): He taught theology in Paris, and he was the
author of De proprietatibus rerum (first pub. c.1470), a famous medieval encyclopedia of natural history.

58
 ● Diderot (18th Century): the eternal optimist, believed it possible to capture all knowledge in his great
Encyclopedie. This work remains a mystical experience through which the minds of Europe passed (Hugh
Kenner). Kenner then goes on to cleverly. Summarize the content and purpose of an encyclopedia. Today,
the general set serves a variety of purposes. Still, its essential one is to capsulize and organize the world's
accumulated knowledge, or at least that part of interest to readers. Through detailed and brief facts, an
effort is made to include a wide variety of information from all fields.
● 3 Categories of Organization for Encyclopedias
o By format: division of work into volumes (single volume or multivolume)
o By Scope: general or subject
o By audience: for a child, teenager, layperson (general); subject expert of near expert in that field
(subject)
b. Examples of Encyclopedias
● ENCYCLOPEDIA BRITANNICA EDUCATIONAL CORPORATION
o Encyclopedia Britannica: Written by Nobel laureates, historians, curators, professors, and other
notable experts, this is a trusted resource with a balanced global perspective.
o Compton’s Encyclopedia: is a home and school encyclopedia first published in 1922 as Compton's
Pictured Encyclopedia.
o Children's Britannica: Complete set, Volumes 1-20.
o The Annals of America: Twenty-two volume set chronologically organized that consists of a
collection of 2,202 original source materials (including articles, speeches, letters, songs, poems,
official documents, etc.) providing a documentary history of America
o Britannica Discovery Library: lavishly illustrated 12-volume set of "concepts and values" books
specifically created for young learned ages three to six. Children are introduced to various texts and
genres, including rhymes, narratives, puzzles, and riddles. - Key vocabulary words are highlighted
throughout and defined at the back of each book. The set is ideal for pre-readers and early readers as
each volume contain activities to build thinking and comprehension skills necessary to build
language skills.
o Young Children's Encyclopedia: Prepared specifically for children just learning to read and not yet
in elementary school, it consisted of 16 volumes, in which all the illustrations were in color and the
accompanying informative text brief.
o Compton's Encyclopedia and Fact Index
o Great Books of the Western World
o The Bible (In Protestant, Catholic & Jewish)
● WORLD BOOK
o World Book: the most popular among children and young people's set
o Childcraft: a set for beginning readers; not really an encyclopedia
● GROLIER INCORPORATED
o The Encyclopedia Americana
o The Encyclopedia International
o Academic American Encyclopedia
o The Catholic Encyclopedia
● MACMILLAN EDUCATIONAL CORP.
o Collier's
o Merit Students Encyclopedia
o The Encyclopedia of Philosophy
o Harvard Classics, etc.
● FUNK & WAGNALLS
o Funk & Wag nails New Encyclopedia.
● OTHERS
o New Caxton Encyclopedia
o Everyman's Encyclopedia
o New Standard Encyclopedia
c. More examples of Encyclopedia
● ADULT ENCYCLOPEDIAS
o The Encyclopedia Britannica- best known in the Western World
▪ Micropedia (12 volumes)- short, actual, ready-reference materials arranged in alphabetical
order; neologism coined by Mortimer J. Adler from the ancient Greek words for “small” and
“instruction or brief lessons.
59
 ▪ Macropedia (19 volumes)- is the third part of the Encyclopaedia Britannica with 699 articles
arranged alphabetically, with 24 pages per article.
▪ Propedia and 2-volume index:
Propedia- a guide to related items within the 2 works; single volume is arranged by broad
subjects to outline human knowledge and to show relationships between ideas, person and
events; intended as a topical organization of the Britannica's contents
o The Encyclopedia Americana: based on the 7th ed. of the German encyclopedia Brockhaus
Konversations Lexicon. This series is one of the largest general encyclopedias in the English language
with more than 45,000 articles, most of them more than 500 words; covers American, Canadian
geography, and history; written by over 6,000 contributors.
● POPULAR ADULT & HIGH SCHOOL SETS
o Academic American Encyclopedia
▪ 21-volume general English-language encyclopedia published in 1980. It was first produced
by Arete Publishing; Grolier acquired the encyclopedia in 1982. It has also been published
under the names Grolier Academic Encyclopedia, Grolier International Encyclopedia,
Lexicon Universal Encyclopedia, Macmillan Family Encyclopedia, Barnes & Noble New
American Encyclopedia, and Global International Encyclopedia.
▪ An abridged version was known as the Grolier Encyclopedia of Knowledge.
▪ Academic CD-ROM - the first set to take full advantage of the new technologies; in 1990,
illustrations were introduced on CD-ROM only. 1/10 of those printed were included and
excluded maps, flags, diagrams of the human body.
▪ This evolved into 1992 The New Grolier Multimedia Encyclopedia, later named. The Grolier
Multimedia Encyclopedia.
o Collier's Encyclopedia
▪ a general encyclopedia first published in 1950-51 in the United States and continuously
revised. Originally in 20 volumes, Collier's was expanded to 24 volumes for a significant
revision in 1962. It is a well-reputed work with coverage reflecting secondary-school and
college curricula. Its style is concise and readable. Most of the articles are signed, many by
world-renowned scholars.
o Funk & Wagnalls New Encyclopedia
▪ relatively close to the Academic American in content; short articles.
▪ Contains slightly over 9000 illustrations, of which about one-third are in color.
▪ Volume 29 is a detailed index, and in the last part of volume 28, one finds bibliographies,
reading lists, and subject outlines. The bibliographies are both current and representative of
the best material in the field.
o The Canadian Encyclopedia
▪ Originally published in book form in 1985, The Canadian Encyclopedia has been free of
charge online since 1999. The Encyclopedia is the most authoritative and comprehensive
reference of all things Canadian (from Pierre Trudeau and Louis Riel to the Great
Depression) for students, readers, and scholars across Canada and throughout the world. The
content of The Canadian Encyclopedia is updated daily and is available in both official
languages. It is home to more than 40,000 articles, 6,000 interactive maps, graphs,
photographs, and animations.
● CHILDREN AND YOUNG ADULTS’ ENCYCLOPEDIAS
o World Book
▪ more illustrations than any set (29,000 plates, 24000 of which are in color).
▪ An encyclopedia published in the United States; "the number-one selling print encyclopedia
in the world.”
▪ World Books is also published in electronic form for the Microsoft Windows and Apple
Macintosh; available online at http://www.worldbook.com; The Information Finder is its
CD-ROM version.
o Merit Students Encyclopedia
▪ articles do not shy away from controversial issues.
▪ There were twenty volumes, with two volumes of a dictionary in the set.
o Compton’s Encyclopedia and Fact Index
▪ is a home and school encyclopedia first published in 1922 as "Compton's Pictured
Encyclopedia"; "Pictured" was removed from the title with the 1968 edition; the
encyclopedia is now advertised as Compton's by Britannica.
60
 ▪ Unique for its Fact Index in each volume with a cumulative fact index in the final volume to
the whole set; serves both as an index to each volume and as a source of ready reference for
basic queries.
▪ Compton's Multimedia Encyclopedia (CD ROM version) is -the first to include all the
illustrations, including those in color and 60-second sound.
▪ Also features the 65,000 Merriam-Webster Intermediate Dictionary.
o New Book of Knowledge
▪ intended primarily for children in grades three and up.
▪ Based initially on Grolier's older Book of Knowledge, first published by Grolier Publishing
in 1890 and ended in 1963.
▪ presents coverage of a wide range of topics that fulfills the informational and recreational
needs of elementary and middle school students.
o Children’s Britannica
▪ a rival of the New Book of Knowledge.
▪ A revised version of Britannica Jr. which was not successful.
● ONE-VOLUME ENCYCLOPEDIAS
o Concise Columbia Encyclopedia
▪ This comprehensive reference book provides the most current information available in a
concise, portable format. The Third Edition includes 17,000 entries, over 50,000 cross-
references, 210 maps, 100 photographs, and more than 100 tables, charts, and illustrations.
o The Random House Encyclopedia
▪ one-volume encyclopedia, but 13,500, has been illustrated in 11,325 in color.
● FOREIGN PUBLISHED ENCYCLOPEDIAS
o French: Grand Dictionnaire Encyclopedique Larousse
▪ It is an encyclopedia, and a dictionary merged in a single alphabetical listing. Beneath the
standard dictionary (meanings, usages) entry comes to the encyclopedic section.
o German: Brockhaus Enzyklopadie (first issued as Fravenzimmer Lexikon)
▪ The current 21st edition contains about 300,000 entries on 24,000 pages, with about 35,000
maps, graphics, and tables. It is the largest German-language printed encyclopedia in the 21st
century. A digital multimedia encyclopedia based on the Brockhaus Enzyklopadie is
available under the name Brockhaus Multimedia! Premium, which is similar to Microsoft
Encarta.
o Italian: Enciclopedia Italiana
▪ one of the significant European records of the arts; an Italian encyclopedia, generally
regarded as the most authoritative of that language
▪ The encyclopedia is often known as Enciclopedia Treccani, for its developer Giovanni
Treccani. The first edition was published serially between 1925 and 1936. In all, 35 volumes
were published, plus one index volume. The set contained 60,000 articles and 50 million
words.
o Japanese: Kodansha Encyclopedia of Japan
▪ a comprehensive English language encyclopedia first published in 1983 that covers a broad
range of topics on Japan.
▪ First published by Kodansha in 1983, followed by a supplemental volume in 1986, the
encyclopedia was created by both Japanese (680) and non-Japanese scholars (524) from 27
nations. Japanese scholars produced 40 percent of the text, while foreign scholars wrote the
remaining 60 percent. Japanese and American scholars wrote the majority of the articles.
Many articles are English translations from Japanese encyclopedias.
▪ More than 11,000 entries are covering 37 categories of information.
o Russian: The Great Soviet Encyclopedia
▪ is a new universal Russian encyclopedia in 30 volumes, published since 2004
o Spanish: Enciclopedia Universal llustrada Europeo-Americana (Espasa)
▪ also called Enciclopedia Espasa, or Enciclopedia Espasa-Calpe.
▪ 72 volumes published from 1908 to 1930 plus a ten-volume appendix published 1930-1933.
Between 1935 and 2003, 33 supplemental volumes were published plus an index, another A-
Z appendix, and an atlas for 118 volumes.
▪ currently the longest printed encyclopedia with 105,000 pages and 165,200,000 words as of
1986
● SUBJECT ENCYCLOPEDIAS
61
o Encyclopedia of Library and Information Science
▪ 33 published volumes with 2 helpful indexes.
▪ Written by 1300 eminent, international experts-offers, librarians, information/computer
scientists, bibliographers, documentalists, systems analysts, and students, convenient access
to library and information science techniques and tools. Impeccably researched, cross-
referenced, alphabetized by subject, and generously illustrated, the Encyclopedia of Library
and Information Science integrates the essential theoretical and practical information
accumulating in this rapidly growing field.
o ALA Yearbook of Library and Information Services
o More Subject Encyclopedias
▪ Philosophy and Psychology
▪ The Concise Encyclopedia of Western Philosophy and Philosophers
▪ Encyclopedia of Psychology
▪ Religion and Mythology
▪ The Catholic Encyclopedia
▪ The Encyclopedia of Religion
▪ An Encyclopedia of Religion and Ethics
▪ History
▪ Encyclopedia of World History
▪ Education
▪ Encyclopedia of Education and Research
▪ Fine Arts
▪ Encyclopedia of World Art
▪ The Focal Encyclopedia of Encyclopedia of Photography
▪ Literature
▪ Cassells Encyclopedia of Literature
▪ Business
▪ Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance
▪ The Concise Blackwell Encyclopedia of Management
▪ Ethnic Studies
▪ Africana: The Encyclopedia of the African and African-American Experience
▪ History
▪ Encyclopedia of Women's History in America
▪ Encyclopedia of the Victorian World
▪ Encyclopedia of the Holocaust
▪ Encyclopedia of Vietnam War
▪ The Sixties in America
▪ Law
▪ American Justice
▪ Encyclopedia of Gun Control and Gun Rights
▪ Great American Trails
▪ Censorship
▪ Performing Arts
▪ The International Encyclopedia of Dance
▪ The Garland Encyclopedia of World Music
▪ The Film Encyclopedia
▪ Science
▪ McGraw-Hill Encyclopedia of Science and Technology
▪ The Environment Encyclopedia c. The Encyclopedia of Mammals
▪ Macmillan Encyclopedia of Physics
▪ Encyclopedia of Microbiology
▪ Willy Encyclopedia of Energy and Environment
▪ Social Science
▪ The International Encyclopedia of the Social Sciences
▪ Encyclopedia of Family Life
▪ Encyclopedia of Social Issues
▪ Sports
▪ Encyclopedia of Sports Science
62
 ▪ The Cultural Encyclopedia of Baseball
▪ The Official NBA Basketball Encyclopedia
o Comparing Encyclopedia

Encyclopedia Level Special Aids Notable Aspects

Americana Educated adult Bibliography after article, Science, technology,

cross-references, topical index,
maps in text, pronunciation,
signed articles.
evaluation of literary and
artistic works, texts of
historical documents,
information on United States
towns, cities, states, history
of each century.

Britannica Educated adult Bibliography after article, Science, applied science,

cross-references, a detailed and medicine, pre-twentieth
comprehensive index, maps (in century art "covers subjects
atlas volume), signed articles. in depth."

Collier's Junior college, Bibliography (in the last All modern subjects, popular
high school, volume- by subject, not by style
general public article), cross-references, index,
maps in text, pronunciation,
signed articles.

Compton's High school, Bibliography after article, Broad subject area article, the
upper cross-references, fact-index in study outlines with many
elementary each volume, maps and other articles, fact-index,
grades visual aids in text, readability, illustrative
pronunciation, list of material
contributors.

World Book High school, Graded bibliography with some
children home annotations after articles, cross-
references, maps, and other
visual aids in text and signed
articles.
Readability (written for age
and grade levels), reading
and study guide, illustration,
simple, orderly style, study
outlines

Columbia Office, home, Brief bibliography after article, Brevity, United States towns,
general public cross-references, pronunciation obscure people, place, names

C. ALMANACS & YEARBOOKS

Almanacs are a compendium of valuable data and statistics relating to countries, personalities, events, subjects, and the
like. While yearbooks are the annual volume of current information in descriptive and or statistical forms. The
fundamental purpose is to record the year's active activities by country, subject, or specialized area. The essential
difference with almanac is that the almanac will also include considerable retrospective material, which may not be in
the average yearbook.

a. History
● Almanac (Spanish Arabic al manakh, roughly translated "a calendar of the heavens").
● 1200 BC - a book arranged by months, weeks, and days, with pertinent information concerning the sun’s
rising and setting, the time of low and high tides, and calendars of holidays.
● The earliest existing printed almanac is that of the German mathematician and astronomer Regiomontanus
(originally named Johannes Muller), whose illustrated 12- leaf Kalendarium Novum was printed in 1476
in both red (for lucky days) and black in Venice, Italy.
● 16th Century: "Philomath" almanacs, known as such because their editors affixed this word, meaning
"lover of learning," to their names, served as calendars, atlases, agricultural and medical advisers, and
textbooks.
b. Examples of almanacs and yearbooks
63
 Almanacs
● World Almanac and Book of Facts: began in 1868 as a publication of the New York World newspaper;
now available in CD-ROM as part of the Microsoft bookshelf CD-ROM Reference library.
● Information Please Almanac: a single-page statistical profile of the US appears before the title page; has
much in common with the World Almanac; with a quick thumb index.
● The Whitaker's Almanacs: is on standard information about events of the year, foreign countries, and
international statistics; it emphasizes more on emerging nations; founded in London in 1868; published by
Joseph Whitaker.
● Readers Digest Almanacs gravitates more to the methods of encyclopedia yearbooks than to standard
form set by traditional almanacs.
● Official Associated Press Almanacs: stronger on statistical data arranged under such broad categories;
the most vital point is the emphasis on biographical information and current data on the world's nations -
in alphabetical order by country.
● Negro Almanacs: 32 chapters plus selected and useful bibliography on black materials for the library;
sections cover everything from biographical material to civil rights, legal status for blacks, income, and
education.
● Peoples Almanac: series of three books published in 1975, 1978, and 1981; the almanac format departs
from a traditional almanac and included many obscure facts, lists, and esoteric knowledge.
Yearbooks
● Encyclopedia Supplements - are annual or periodic publications issued by an encyclopedia publisher to
supplement encyclopedic information with more recent developments.
o Adult Encyclopedia Supplement New International Encyclopedia: The most extensive continuous
series of any adult encyclopedia supplement found currently on American reference shelves.
o Americana Annual: with a chronological index in front; list of important dates, necrology, list of
prizes and awards, and other tabulations of colleges, universities, societies, and organizations which
considerable data on each agency. The section on sports brings records and scores together.
o Britannica Book of the Year: updates of the New Encyclopedia Britannica; a chronicle of events of
a given year; has The Year in Review section; Surpasses other yearbooks in the number of entries and
attractiveness of format.
o Ten Eventful Years: a record of events preceding, including, and following World War 11, 1937
through 1946.
o Colliers Yearbook: a well-written and well-organized annual; because subjects are treated under
broad headings, the number of entries does not adequately reflect Collier's Yearbook's coverage.
o Story of Our Time: supplement for the Grolier Encyclopedia; provides a good deal for popular
information in a very readable style.
● School Encyclopedia Supplements
o The World Annual Supplement: is paperbound and punched for insertion in a binder supplied to
encyclopedia purchaser; 350 articles are included in each supplement covering subjects selected
because of their interest to young people.
o Book of Knowledge Annual: 80 extensive subjects chosen for interest to children, formerly known as
Children's Book of the Year.
o World Topics: quarterly, paperbound supplement to the American Educator, punched for a loose-leaf
binder.
D. HANDBOOKS & MANUALS
a. Handbooks
● Purpose: ready-reference sources for given fields of knowledge; emphasis is on established knowledge
rather than on recent advances' their value is in-depth information in a narrow field.
● More likely is a miscellaneous group of facts centered around one central theme or subject area; from
German Handbuch, a book which could be held in hand comfortably.
● a book containing rules and regulations
b. Examples of Handbook
● Books of Days and Firsts
o American Book of Days: listed what major or minor event(s) took place each day.
o Chase's Annual Events: published every fall; traces the events of the previous year and marks the
upcoming year's day-by-day celebrations.
o Kane's Famous First Facts: by Joseph Nathan Kane; contains American "first" in everything (first
toothbrush to a first major discovery)
● Etiquette
64
 o Emily Post's Etiquette: the judge of good manners; arranged in question and answer format.
o Miss Manner's Guide for the Turn of the Millennium by Judith Martin: advice on office manners
● Literature
o Magill's Master Plots: by Frank N. Magill; a condensation of almost every important classic in the
English language.
▪ Direct Sources
1. Survey of Contemporary Literature: includes additional plots for 2300 more books
published 1954-1976
2. Magill's Literary Annual: a continuation of the survey set (1976 to present); contains
sketches for 200 fiction and non-fiction titles published the previous year.
▪ Indirect Sources
1. Masterplots II
2. Monarch Literature Notes
3. Cliff's Notes: founded by Cliff Hillegas, who mastered the art of condensing books into
70-90 easy-to-read pages.
● Quotations
o Bartlett, John. Familiar Quotations, 5t,h ed. Boston: Little Brown and Company, 1980.
o Stevenson, Burton E. The Home Book of Quotations, Classical and Modern, 10th ed. New York:
Dodd, Mead & Company, Inc. 1967.
▪ quotes are arranged by subject and there is a detailed author-title index.
o The Oxford Dictionary of Quotations, 3rd ed. New York: Oxford University Press, 1979.
● Concordances
o is an alphabetical index of the principal words in a book - or more likely, in the total works of a single
author - along with their context, BASIC PURPOSE: to enable students of literature to study the
literary style of an author based on the use of given words; more often to run down elusive quotations
▪ Strong's Concordance to the Bible
▪ Alexander Cruden's Complete Concordance to the Old and New Testament (first published
in 1737)
● Other Classifications of Handbooks
o Curiosity Handbook: a collection of miscellaneous facts wherein questions are "fugitive" - or
involved several hours of search.
▪ Kane's Famous First Facts
▪ Tavenner's Brief Facts: abbreviations, animals, art masterpieces, athletic records, battles,
Bible characters, book of the first rank; presented mainly in tabular form.
o Literary and Historical Handbooks: Includes allusions, quotations, holidays, and events.
▪ Oxford Companion to American Literature: short biographies and bibliographies of
American Authors; nearly 1900 summaries and description of the important American novel,
stories, essays, poems, and plays.
▪ Calendar Handbooks: Half literary and half historical, which provides information about
holidays, anniversaries, and festivals.
▪ Anniversaries and Holidays (Chicago, American Library Association, 1983) which
offer succinct data and additional readings;
▪ Book of Days (Ann Arbor: Mich., 1987) summarizing primary events and suggesting
readings and visual sources of particular us to mark the day's event(s).
▪ History Handbooks: Chronologically arranged date books.
▪ Readers Handbook by reverend E. Cobham Brewer
▪ Historic Notebook
o Statistical Handbooks
▪ Cities Supplement ( 1947)
▪ Country Data Book {1947)
▪ Historical Statistics of the United States 1789-1945 (1949)
o Documentary Handbooks
▪ Documents of American History
c. Manuals
● Tends typically to be equated with how-to-do-it.
o Cookbooks
o Home Maintenance
o Health and First aid
65
 o Etiquette and Correspondence
o Recreation, handicrafts, and Hobbies
E. DIRECTORIES
A list of persons or organizations, systematically arranged, usually in alphabetical or classed order, giving address,
affiliations, etc. for individuals and address, officers, functions, and similar data for organizations.
a. History
● The first directory compiled was Domesday Book in 1086 by order of William I or William the Conqueror
b. Categories of Directories
● Local Directories- two types are
o telephone books and
o city directories
● Government Directories- include post offices, army and navy posts, and the thousand and one different
services offered by federal states and city governments.
● Institutional Directories- Includes a list of schools, foundations, libraries, hospitals, etc.
● Professional Directories- mainly list of manufacturers' information about companies, industries, and
services.
● Trade and Business Directories
c. Examples of Directories
● Directories of Directories: provide listings and descriptions of various directories
o Directories in Print: formerly Directory of Directories
o City and State Directories in Print: has little overlap with Directories in Print
o International Directories in Print
o Organizations Master Index
● Associations and Foundations
o Encyclopedia of Associations: lists and dutifully describes over 25000 groups
o The Foundation Directory
● Education
o American Universities and Colleges
o Comparative Guide to American Colleges
o Lovejoy's College Guide
o World of Learning (British)
F. BIOGRAPHICAL SOURCES
It may contain facts about an individual (birth/death dates, childhood, education, accomplishments, etc. Maybe a list of
bibliographical citations leading the user to other works which contain the biographies themselves.
Biography
-a study sharply defined by two definite events, birth, and death (by the writer Edmund Goose)
Genealogy
-defined as the making of a human pedigree through the linkage of primary biological data found in records with name,
date, and places
a. Current Biographical Directories
● Who's Who in America: biennial since 1899
o Who's Who in America Online=Marquis Who's Who
o 79 000 records in Who's Who in America and the 15,000 records in Who's Who in S&T
● Who's Who: first published in Britain on January 15, 1849.
b. Current Biographical Dictionaries
● Current Biography: monthly and cumulated annually; emphasis on 200 international personalities,
primarily those influencing the American scene
● The New York Times Biographical Service: biographies are usually written by individuals who do not
cite sources
● Newsmakers (Gale Research Co.): launched in 1985 to rival the 2 aforementioned
c. Retrospective Biographical Dictionaries
● McGraw-Hill Encyclopedia of World Biography
● Webster's New Biographical Dictionary; brief biographies for about 40000 people from the beginning of
history through the early 1970s
● New Century Cyclopedia of Names: broader in coverage than other biographical reference works,
including entries for places, events, literary works, and fictitious and mythological characters, as well as
for important people from the past.

66
 ● Cambridge Biographical Dictionary (1990); popular culture (sports & music individuals), prominent
women
● Chamber's Biographical Dictionary: 20000 prominent people with emphasis on British and Americans
d. Retrospective Biographical Dictionaries: National
● Dictionary of American Biography (DAB): one must be dead to be included
● National Cyclopedia of American Biography: 76 v. of biographical essays on nearly 70000 Americans;
biographies are grouped by occupation or work area.
● Who Was Who in America: reproduces Who's Who with recently dead individuals; entries that appeared
in Who's Who are transferred here after the person dies.
● Dictionary of National Biography (DNB): covers prominent deceased persons from England, Wales,
Scotland, Ireland as well as those from British colonies and non-British citizens who lived in England
and contributed to its history; about 36,000 entries.
G. GEOGRAPHICAL SOURCES
Geography: comes from two Greek words: GEO meaning the earth and GRAPHEIN meaning to write; it is a science
that describes the earth's surface
a. History
● The Eskimos, without surveying instruments, have drawn maps of Northern Canada and other large areas.
● The Marshall Islander's Sea Charts were made out of the midribs of palm leaves and shells.
● The Babylonians made maps on clays.
● The Egyptians painted their maps on the lid of a sarcophagus plant.
● The Chinese developed a network for location purposes.
● The Greeks speculated that the earth was a sphere.
● Eratosthenes produced a remarkably accurate measure of the Earth's circumference.
● Ptolemy compiled a gazetteer of 8000 places.
● 12th century: The Chinese produced the first printed maps.
● The Arabs, using geographical observations, were able to locate places in terms of latitude and longitude.
● 14th century: Portland chart was made possible through the magnetic compass.
● Martin Berhaim culminated Medieval cartography through his small globe.
● 16th century: Gerhardus Mercator devised projections and produced a great atlas published after his
death.
● The first modern atlas appeared: Theatrum Orbis Terrarum
● 18th century: The French initiated modern topographic surveys on a national scale.
● 19th century: small scale mapping was introduced and developed.
● Recently, man-made satellites have improved our knowledge of the earth.
b. Categories of Geographical Sources
● Maps, Globes, Atlases
o Map: a representation of the outer boundaries of the Earth on a FLAT SURFACE.
o Globe: is the only relatively accurate representation of the earth.
o Atlas: a volume containing a collection of maps.
*CARTOGRAPHY-is the art of map-making. **Cartographer-maker
o Kinds of Map
▪ Chart-map of water
▪ Thematic- a map designed for multiple purposes.
▪ Physical- a map that traces the various features of the land.
▪ Route- shows roads, railroads, bridges, etc.
▪ Political- limited to political boundaries of the present.
▪ Historical- indicate boundary lines of the past.
▪ City- a thematic map of a city
▪ Economic- deals with natural resources, industries, transportation
▪ Topographic- are a detailed record of a land area, giving geographic positions and elevations
for both natural and man-made features.
▪ Cadastral- a large-scale map showing the boundaries of subdivisions of land, usually with
the directions and lengths thereof and the areas of individual tracts, compiled to describe and
record ownership.
▪ Geological- represents the distribution of different types of rock and surficial deposits and
locations of geologic structures such as faults and folds.
▪ Road- a map, especially one designed for motorists, showing the streets of a city, state, or
other areas.
67
 ▪ Meteorological- a map showing the state of the weather over a large area.
Terms
▪ Projection is the systematic transformation of locations on earth (spherical) to a map (flat
surface).
o Cylindrical Map Projections
o Conic Map Projections
o Azimuthal Map Projection
o Mercator
▪ Latitude: vertical distance north or south from the equator
▪ Longitude: horizontal distance east and west from the equator
▪ Equator: imaginary horizontal line that circles the earth.
▪ Prime Meridian: imaginary vertical line that runs through Greenwich, England.
● Gazetteers are geographical dictionaries for finding lists of cities, mountains, rivers, population, etc.
● Travel Guides, a.k.a guidebook; give additional information about a place such as how to get there,
landmarks, historical sites, transportation, center for amusement, recreation, and leisure.
c. Major Size World Atlases
● Times Atlas of the World (London): best single-volume atlas
● The New York Times Atlas of the World: a shorter version of the Times Atlas of the World
● The New International Atlas (Rand McNally): more current than the Times Atlas of the World
d. Intermediate to Small-Scale-Atlases
● Gold Medallion World Atlas: largest of those issued by Hammond
● Citation World Atlas: an abbreviated version of the Medallion
● National Geographic Atlas
● Rand McNally Cosmopolitan World Atlas: heaviest emphasis on American maps
e. Thematic Maps and Atlases
-Focus on a particular aspect of geographical interest
-Usually, historical, economic, political shown graphically on a map
● The Times Atlas of World History: broke a long tradition of Eurocentricity ( emphasis on the history of
Europe)
● William Shepherd's Historical Atlas: covers from about 3000 B.C.; 240 outline maps; no essays; designed
for students 3. Rand McNally Atlas of World History: covers from Prehistory (about 40,000 B.C.); 115
full-page size outline maps, has essays; designed for the general audience
H. BIBLIOGRAPHIES
a. History
● The word bibliography was derived from the two Greek words billion, which literally means book, and
graphein, which means "to write.”
● Its definition as "the writing of books" was used in post-classical Greece.
● Bibliographies lead to other information sources; are lists of books and other materials that provide
author, title, and publication information.
● Annotated bibliographies also include a brief description or summary of the item.
● Bibliographies are sometimes referred to as "Guides to the Literature ... "
b. Historical Development
● 1761: The meaning of bibliography as the writing first writing of books was used as 1761 as indicated by
the definition of the word "bibliographer" in Fenning's English Dictionary of that date as "one who copies
books."
● 1845-1850: Louis Jacob de Saint Charles used the word "bibliographia" in his book with the same title.
● 18th Century: In France, the meaning of the word bibliography emerged as a form of library science.
● 19th Century: Germany, the bibliography was defined as the science of books.
c. Bibliography Types
● Analytical bibliography: also a historical study, based upon the assumption that books, especially those
printed by hand before the first quarter of the 19th century, contain a great deal of evidence about their
own production.
● Historical Bibliography: concerned with the compilation of bibliographies of older books and the
history of the book trade and book production, the history of reading, and the use of books and history of
books as a physical and cultural object.
● Descriptive Bibliography: Used for bibliographies that give extended descriptions based on complete
bibliographical analysis.

68
 ● Textual Bibliography: A bibliography that highlights textual variations between a manuscript and the
printed book or various editions.
● Universal Bibliography: A universal bibliography is an exhaustive inventory of all the works that have
ever been published; It includes everything published, issued, pressed in the field of communications
from the beginning to the present to the future; the concept of universality means that time; territory,
language, subject, or form does not necessarily limit a bibliography.
*Conrad Gesner - "father of bibliography"; first attempt to create a universal bibliography with his work
Bibliotheca Universalis.
● National Bibliography: A bibliography, which is limited to materials published within a given country,
can be limited in scope to a section of a country, a city, or even a hamlet.
o National Library Catalog: Lists down all works which are cataloged by the library and other member
libraries of a system regardless of their country of origin; It is not limited by time, territory, language,
subject, or forms of communication.
o Union Catalog: an inventory common to several libraries that lists some or all of their publications
maintained in one or more orders of arrangement
● Trade Bibliography: A bibliography issued for and usually by the booksellers and publishers of a
particular nation· its emphasis is on the basic purchasing area.
o Books in Print (SIP): Issued on October on each year; Print, Online via DIALOGS database, CD-
ROM disk, Microfiche
o Paperbound Books in Print: by R.R Bowker; list the books that can be purchased from American
Publishers
o American Book Publishing Record: R.R Bowker Company, 1960 - (Monthly; annual accumulation.)
o Cumulative Books Index: The H.W Wilson Company, 1898 - (Monthly- except august, bound
semiannual accumulation)
o Publishers Trade List Annual: R.R. Bowker Company, 1873-(Annual)
● Subject Bibliography: intended for research workers and other special areas.
o Information Sources in Science and Technology
o Information Sources in Science and Technology: A Practical Guide to Traditional and Online
o Use of Social Sciences Literature
o Humanities: Selective Guide to Information Sources
I. INDEXES & ABSTRACTS
a. Index: from the Latin word "indicare" which means "to point out.” It indicates where the information can be
found.; an organized grouping of terms intended to facilitate access to a document or collection of documents
in any medium or format.
● Traditional Indexes
o Periodical Indexes/ Indexes to periodical Literature - These list the large, general subjects treated
and the various subdivisions of each subject. It also indicates where the material can be found on each
of the several aspects of a subject.
o Subject Indexes - The purpose is to index materials in a narrow subject field
▪ Humanities lndex.197 4 to date, quarterly; 350 English language periodicals; Humanities
here is taken to mean archaeology and classical studies, folklore, history, language, and
literature.
▪ Social Sciences Index. 1974 to date, quarterly; 355 English language of periodicals and
anthropology, area studies, economics, and related areas.
▪ General Science Index. 1978 to date, monthly; 111 English language, general, monthly.
b. Abstracts: summary of the essential content of another longer document; a form of current bibliography in
when distributions to periodicals, other collections, and sometimes books are summarized accompanied by
bibliographical citations to enable the publications to be traced frequently arranged in classified order.
● General
o Dissertations Abstracts International: Ann Arbor, Ml: University Microfilms International, 1938.
Monthly
● Periodical
o Periodical Abstract Ondisc. Ann Harbor, Ml: University Microfilms, 1988. Monthly
o Readers' Guide Abstracts: Print Edition. New York: HG.W. Wilson Company, 1983. 10 issues per
year.
o Wilsonline, 1983 to date. Quarterly
o Wilsondisc: CD-ROM, 1983 to date. Quarterly

69
 o Magazine Article Summaries (Formerly: Popular Magazines Review). Birmingham, AL: EBSCO,
1987
● Science and Technology
o Biological Abstracts. Philadelphia: Biosciences Information Service of Biological Abstracts, 1926 to
date, 11 bimonthly. CD-ROM: Publisher, 1989.
o Chemical Abstract.- Columbus, OH: Chemical Abstracts Service, 1907 to date, weekly
● Social Science
o Economics Abstracts. The Hague: Martinuss Nijhoff 1953 to date
● Humanities
o Language Teaching and Linguistics Abstracts. London: Cambridge University Press, 1968. Quarterly.
J. GOVERNMENT PUBLICATIONS
A government document is any publication that is printed at government expense or published by the authority of a
governmental body. Documents may be considered in terms of issuing agencies.
Any publication originating in or issued with the imprint of, or at the expense and by the authority of, any office of a
legally organized government or international organization.
a. Executive Publications - All documents issued from the president’s office and the different departments and
cabinets.
b. Congressional Publications - Congressional publications are basically a record of congressional activities,
from debates in Congress to committee hearings and reports.
● The Congressional Records, Laws, Hearings, Committee Prints, Serial Set
c. Judicial Publications – Judicial publications are primarily publications of the courts; most important consist
of the Supreme court’s decisions. Of all the government documents, the area of judicial publications is the most
highly specialized. Work with these materials requires considerable knowledge of the governmental
organization and, except general questions, is probably best left to the special law library or legislative reference
service.

70
PART II: REFERENCE AND BIBLIOGRAPHY
INSTRUCTION: Read the following questions carefully. Shade the box of the letter that corresponds to the best answer.
[] [] [] [] 1. A graduate student is asking for the wifi password and asks you to help her connect to the
A B C D internet. The library just happened to post an infographic on how to connect to the wifi. What
level of reference service is needed, according to James Wyer?

a) Conservative c) Middling
b) Moderate d) Liberal

[] [] [] [] 2. A graduating student expressed interest in the new service that the library offers. It is a program
A B C D that detects grammatical errors and checks plagiarised statements. The student wanted to avail
the service for a thesis due tomorrow. What level of reference service is needed, according to
Samuel Rothstein?

a) Minimum c) Middling
b) Moderate d) Liberal

[] [] [] [] 3. A freshman student, working on a report about the school’s history and background, asked you
A B C D where the newspaper clippings/vertical files are. What level of reference service is needed,
according to Samuel Rothstein?

a) Minimum c) Middling
b) Moderate d) Liberal
[] [] [] [] 4. An outside researcher visits your special library for the first time and asks for all locally
A B C D published researches about ‘epistemic cognition’. You are certain of what articles and
publications the researcher exactly needs. What level of reference service is needed, according
to Samuel Rothstein?

a) Minimum c) Middling
b) Moderate d) Maximum

[] [] [] [] 5. A librarian from the neighbouring academic library is working on a bibliometric study to

A B C D measure the impact factor of the journal that their university published last year. The librarian
only needed the permission to use your library. What level of reference service is needed,
according to James Wyer?

a) Conservative c) Middling
b) Moderate d) Minimum

[] [] [] [] 6. A student, who had already asked for print resources yesterday for a research background, came
A B C D for another research counselling. When asked for related studies which the student’s research
methodology could be patterned, the city librarian offered online journals and instructed how to
navigate such databases. Which of the following summarizes the reference process?

a) Specific search answered through c) Research question answered through

moderate level moderate level
b) Specific search answered through liberal d) Research question answered through
level liberal level

[] [] [] [] 7. The heart of reference work is the question. Aside from questions requiring answers, some of the
A B C D patron’s queries require a specific service. Which among the following pairs are possible:

i Directional - Conservative vi Specific Search - Liberal

ii Directional - Moderate vii Research question - Conservative
iii Directional - Liberal viii Research question - Moderate
iv Ready-Reference - Moderate ix Research question - Liberal
v Specific Search - Moderate

71
 a) i, iv, v, vi, ix c) i, ii, iii, iv, v, vi, viii, ix
b) i,ii,iv,v,vi,viii,ix d) i, ii, iv, v, vi, vii, viii, ix

[] [] [] [] 8. Similar to a year end review, Google identifies the trending words or search phrases which were
A B C D most searched for the year. What was the top searched word for 2019 worldwide?

a) India vs South Africa c) Iphone 11

b) Avengers : Endgame d) Notre Dame

[] [] [] [] 9. Similar to a year end review, Google identifies the trending words or search phrases which were
A B C D most searched for the year. What was the top searched word for 2019 in the Philippines?

a) Halalan 2019 c) LET result March 2019

b) Pacquiao vs Broner d) Omegle

[] [] [] [] 10. This type of biography lists notable persons from the past sometimes phrased as “distinguished
A B C D yet extinguished”?

a) Universal Biography c) Current Biography

b) Retrospective Biography d) Historical Biography

[] [] [] [] 11. Samuel Swett Green, the Father of Reference Service, introduced the four prime functions of the
A B C D Reference Librarian in his article “Personal relations between librarians and readers” published
in the Library Journal 1876. The following are the four prime functions, except:
a) Instructing patrons how to use the library c) Selecting resources that aids the parent
organization
b) Answering patron’s queries d) Promoting the library within the
community
[] [] [] [] 12. According to this author, reference service is an art to be applied in any given situation rather
A B C D than one static entity capable of finite description.

a) Vavrek c) Wyer
b) Katz d) Rothstein

[] [] [] [] 13. In the book authored by William Katz, titled “Introduction to Reference Work”, he classified
A B C D reference sources into two broad categories. In which category does bibliographies, indexes, and
abstracts belong?

a) Source Type c) Specialized or Subject Reference Books

b) General Reference Books d) Control-Access-Directional Type

[] [] [] [] 14. Which of the following is not a source type category of reference books?
A B C D
a) Manual c) Bibliographies
b) Biographical sources d) Geographical sources

[] [] [] [] 15. With the incorporation of ICT and automation in the library service, new trends arise that
A B C D revolutionize reference work. Which of the following trends are offered by the Library of
Congress by providing a collection of links to online resources for various researches?

a) Digital Reference Service c) Roving Reference Librarian

b) Chat based reference interaction d) Virtual Reference Shelf

[] [] [] [] 16. A library can never be perfect and cannot provide all the answers to queries and provide every
A B C D need of the users. In order to satisfy their information needs, collaboration is needed. As a result,
Collaborative Digital Reference Service (CDRS) was introduced. Which CDRS initiative was
worked together by LC and OCLC?
a) QuestionPoint c) 24x7 Reference Project
b) Union Catalog d) Ask a Librarian

72
[] [] [] [] 17. Louis Shores identified types of question by subject and which specific reference books could
A B C D answer the question. The following are correctly paired except:

a) Encyclopedia = Fact Questions c) Dictionaries = Language Questions

b) Manuals = How to Questions d) Yearbook = Trends Questions
[] [] [] [] 18. It is used by teachers, librarians, and parents; meant to help children grow and develop through
A B C D books involving activities such as reading, writing, and discussion to work through trauma or to
introduce developmentally-appropriate topics.
a) Support Groups c) Developmental Bibliotherapy
b) Clinical Bibliotherapy d) Booktalking

[] [] [] [] 19. What type of directory are you going to refer when looking for state-run Business Schools
A B C D within your locality?

a) Government directories c) Institutional directories

b) Trade & Business directories d) Local directories

[] [] [] [] 20. There are two broad types of bibliographies, namely; Analytic and Descriptive bibliography.
A B C D The following are descriptive bibliography except:

a) Systematic enumerative c) Critical bibliography

b) Selective bibliography d) Bibliography of bibliographies

[] [] [] [] 21. The following are types of Systematic Enumerative Bibliography except:

A B C D
a) Universal bibliographies c) Trade bibliographies
b) National bibliographies d) Bibliography of bibliographies

[] [] [] [] 22. A patron who was apprehended by a police officer yesterday visited the library to fact check the
A B C D law violation verbatim to the video recorded. What type of handbook are you going to use?

a) Statistics handbook c) Parliamentary handbook

b) Documentary handbook d) Curiosities handbook
[] [] [] [] 23. Which reference book is commonly arranged in a tabular format?
A B C D
a) Manual c) Yearbook
b) Dictionary d) Encyclopaedia

[] [] [] [] 24. He is the Father of Universal Bibliography.

A B C D
a) Samuel Swett Green c) Conrad Gesner
b) Samuel Rothstein d) Louis Shores
[] [] [] [] 25. He is the Father of reference work or reference service.
A B C D
a) Samuel Swett Green c) Conrad Gesner
b) Samuel Rothstein d) Louis Shores

[] [] [] [] 26. According to Robinson, reference questions must be answered in

A B C D
a) Less than 5 minutes c) A day to a week
b) 5 minutes to 30 minutes d) Two weeks to one month
[] [] [] [] 27. According to Robinson, research questions must be answered in
A B C D
a) Less than 5 minutes c) A day to a week
b) 5 minutes to 30 minutes d) Two weeks to one month

[] [] [] [] 28. Which of the following is best given to a patron working on a research about food processing
A B C D machines currently patented by Filipinos?

73
 a) Current Awareness Service c) Document Delivery
b) Bibliographic verification d) Selective Dissemination of Information

[] [] [] [] 29. A faculty is asking for reference books needed to complete this semester’s syllabus due
A B C D tomorrow. The request that reached the library included the list of titles specifically needed.
Which is the best service to be given?
a) Current Awareness Service c) Document Delivery
b) Bibliographic verification d) Selective Dissemination of Information

[] [] [] [] 30. The library director asked you to promote the activities for the National Book Week. What best
A B C D service should be given by the librarian?

a) Current Awareness Service c) Electronic Document Delivery

b) Bibliographic verification d) Chat-based reference service

[] [] [] [] 31. The CEO of the company requested for the scanned copy of designs kept in the resource centre.
A B C D What is the best service to be given by the special librarian?

a) Current Awareness Service c) Electronic Document Delivery

b) Bibliographic verification d) Chat-based reference service

[] [] [] [] 32. A resident researcher in your community reached you through ‘messenger’ and would like to
A B C D verify if the following titles are in your library. What is the best service to be given by the
librarian?
a) Current Awareness Service c) Electronic Document Delivery
b) Bibliographic verification d) Chat-based reference service

[] [] [] [] 33. Technical services such as cataloguing and classification organizes the collection and are
A B C D considered as

a) Formal reference service c) Direct reference service

b) Informal reference service d) Indirect reference service

[] [] [] [] 34. Indexing and abstracting services provides easier access and navigation of the libraries’
A B C D collection, thus saving the time of the user. What type of reference service is indexing and
abstracting?

a) Formal reference service c) Direct reference service

b) Informal reference service d) Indirect reference service

[] [] [] [] 35. Pupils in an elementary school library tend to ask the same questions every time. After the
A B C D school librarian answers the question to a pupil, another is expected to ask it again. What
reference service is observed?
a) Formal reference service c) Liberal reference service
b) Informal reference service d) Conservative reference service

[] [] [] [] 36. The librarian conducts library orientation every beginning of the school year. The orientation
A B C D consists of introducing, collection, sections, services, staff, policies and house rules of the
library. What reference service is performed?
a) Formal reference service c) Intensive reference service
b) Informal reference service d) Indirect reference service

[] [] [] [] 37. A student transferred in the middle of the school year and approached your desk and asked for a
A B C D library orientation. Instead of setting up the presentation for your library orientation, you
decided to conduct a library tour for the transferee. What reference service is done?
a) Formal reference service c) Roving reference service
b) Informal reference service d) On-the-spot reference service

[] [] [] [] 38. The librarian is handing out manuals for proper bibliographic citation and even posting
A B C D infographic posters of detailed citation rules and format. What reference service is being
performed by the librarian?

74
 a) Formal reference service c) Roving reference service
b) Informal reference service d) On-the-spot reference service

[] [] [] [] 39. According to Ferguson, it is one of the new roles of librarians to integrate one’s self within
A B C D internal and external organizations by working effectively with others from and within other
organizational cultures.
a) Integrator c) Access engineer
b) collaborator d) leader

[] [] [] [] 40. In the new roles of librarians mentioned by Ferguson, librarians are expected to facilitate change
A B C D by bringing people and resources together in innovative and productive ways. What role is
referred to?
a) Integrator c) Access engineer
b) colleague d) leader
[] [] [] [] 41. It is one of the new roles of librarians which develops gateways, leads research and development
A B C D projects, designs search engines, and repurpose intelligent agents.

a) Leader c) Access engineer

b) collaborator d) Colleague

[] [] [] [] 42. What division of the library work is considered as the library’s information bureaus serving as
A B C D the interpreter between readers and books; interpreting collection to the patrons?

a) Technical Division c) Reference Division

b) Circulation Division d) Acquisition Division
[] [] [] [] 43. What division of the library work is responsible for the selection, ordering, and processing of
A B C D books which are rightfully included into the library’s collection?

a) Technical Division c) Reference Division

b) Circulation Division d) Acquisition Division

[] [] [] [] 44. What division of the library work is responsible for arranging or organizing the books to be
A B C D shelved in a systematic manner for easier location, retrieval and access of materials?

a) Technical Division c) Reference Division

b) Circulation Division d) Acquisition Division

[] [] [] [] 45. What division of the library work is responsible for the distribution and dissemination of
A B C D materials intended for home use, and frequently assumes responsibility for reader’s advisory
service as well?
a) Technical Division c) Reference Division
b) Circulation Division d) Acquisition Division
[] [] [] [] 46. It is a function of reference work that consists of maintaining an efficient reference service
A B C D through proper organization of facilities, selection of materials, direction of personnel, and study
of clientele.
a) Supervision function c) Bibliographic function
b) Information function d) Appraisal function
[] [] [] [] 47. It is a function of reference work that includes the evaluation of the reference department
A B C D through collection assessment, user study, and personnel evaluation.

a) Supervision function c) Bibliographic function

b) Information function d) Appraisal function

[] [] [] [] 48. It is a function of reference work that includes literacy programs and library teaching programs,
A B C D either as orientation or individualized instruction.

a) Instruction function c) Guidance function

b) Information function d) Appraisal function

75
[] [] [] [] 49. It is a function of reference work that promotes library collection through providing
A B C D bibliographies or title lists of recommended books for informational, academic or recreational
reading.

a) Supervision function c) Bibliographic function

b) Information function d) Appraisal function
[] [] [] [] 50. It is a technique used in reference interview to elicit descriptive answers and encourage the user
A B C D to talk about their information need using their own words

a) Using open-ended questions c) Using close-ended questions

b) Using neutral questioning d) Using active listening

[] [] [] [] 51. It is a technique used in reference interview to elicit further information or gain valuable
A B C D background information such as why the information is needed or to what use the information
will be. It is also called sense-making questioning.
a) Using open-ended questions c) Using close-ended questions
b) Using neutral questioning d) Using active listening
[] [] [] [] 52. It is a technique used in reference interview to focus narrowly and distinctly on a particular
A B C D subject or source and help further the librarian understand the information need usually through
presenting the user with options from which to choose.
a) Using open-ended questions c) Using close-ended questions
b) Using neutral questioning d) Using active listening
[] [] [] [] 53. He was the first to hire a staff with the title of “reference librarian” and establish a team of
A B C D librarians to provide personal assistance to users and was the first to use the phrase “reference
department”.
a) Melvil Dewey c) Samuel Swett Green
b) Andrew Carnegie d) Samuel Rothstein
[] [] [] [] 54. “A person’s right to use the library should not be denied or abridged because of origin, age,
A B C D background, or views”. This statement promoting equal access regardless origin, age,
background, or views, is extracted from;
a) Code of Ethics for Registered Librarians c) Library Bill of Rights
b) ALA Code of Ethics d) Code of Ethics for Archivists
[] [] [] [] 55. Which of the following violates the statement above?
A B C D
a) Denying library use for student from other c) Removing the loaning privileges of
schools without referral letter patron’s with overdue fines
b) Limiting the use of the computers in the d) Banning persons from entering the library
library to give chance to others due to alleged leftist affiliation
[] [] [] [] 56. “To promote open and equitable access to their services and the records in their care without
A B C D discrimination or preferential treatment and in accordance with legal requirements, cultural
sensitivities, and institutional policies”. This statement promoting open and equitable access is
extracted from;
a) Code of Ethics for Registered Librarians c) Library Bill of Rights
b) ALA Code of Ethics d) Code of Ethics for Archivists
[] [] [] [] 57. “We provide the highest level of service to all library users through appropriate and usefully
A B C D organized resources; equitable service policies; equitable access; and accurate, unbiased, and
courteous responses to all requests”. This statement concerned with the provision of equitable
resources, services and access, is extracted from;
a) Code of Ethics for Registered Librarians c) Library Bill of Rights
b) ALA Code of Ethics d) Code of Ethics for Archivists
[] [] [] [] 58. “Librarians should not discriminate against any library user. They should always make known to
A B C D the public the resources and services of the library”. This statement warning librarians from
discriminating library users is extracted from:

76
 a) Code of Ethics for Registered Librarians c) Library Bill of Rights
b) ALA Code of Ethics d) Code of Ethics for Archivists
[] [] [] [] 59. The following are examples of a negative closure or when the reference interview is ended
A B C D abruptly without real examination of the user’s question or an adequate attempt to meet the users
need, except:

a) Advising that the user should have c) Helping the user accept that there are
formulated the research topic before asking really scarce resources about the topic
for reference help.
b) Immediately referring the user to a library d) Telling the user to come back tomorrow
or institution that specializes on the topic because the library is about to close.
worked on and could provide better
resources than your library.
[] [] [] [] 60. What is the best thing to say if the patron approached you pissed saying, “You cancelled the
A B C D most important journal in my field! How can the library do that?!”?

a) “Are you sure they were cancelled? Maybe c) “I am so sorry but we are just following the
you were not just able to locate them. Let protocols and policies in the library.”
me help you then.”
b) May I know what journal it is? Maybe it d) “Sorry but we really need to cancel it for
was one of those journals we re-evaluated. budgetary constraints.”
[] [] [] [] 61. It refers to the shortening of words or eliminating some characters from a longer term to pick up
A B C D variants. It is a form of Boolean operator ‘OR’. It is also called stemming.
a) abridgement c) root searching
b) abbreviation d) truncation

[] [] [] [] 62. The following are the three components of a web search system, except;
A B C D
a) spider/crawler c) search engine
b) index d) portal
[] [] [] [] 63. Interlibrary loan is also known as, except;
A B C D
a) Inter-loan c) Direct consortial borrowing
b) Library resource sharing d) interlending

[] [] [] [] 64. In the information literacy standard approved by the Association of College and Research
A B C D Libraries, which of the following is not included?
a) Information literacy c) Social Responsibility
b) Independent learning d) Critical thinking

[] [] [] [] 65. We usually celebrate the Banned Books Week during the last week of which month?
A B C D
a) September c) November
b) October d) December

[] [] [] [] 66. According to ALA, this book was banned and the most “challenged” book from 2017-2018 due
A B C D to addressing sensitive content.

a) This Day in June / Gayle E. Pitman c) George / Alex Gino

b) The hate U give / Angie Thomas d) 13 reasons why / Jay Asher
[] [] [] [] 67. What is the “I’m feeling lucky” option in Google used for?
A B C D
a) Takes the searcher to sites with freebies c) Takes the searcher to a one-stop website
loaded with everything needed
b) Takes the searcher directly to Google’s d) Takes the searcher to the easiest sites to be
single top site for a topic accessed
[] [] [] [] 68. It is the top search engine in China

77
A B C D
a) Google c) Baidu
b) DuckDuckGo d) Yahoo!

[] [] [] [] 69. It is the British counterpart of Robert Balay’s Guide to Reference Books.

A B C D
a) Reference sources for Small and Medium c) Walford’s Guide to Reference Material
Sized Libraries
b) Guide to Reference Materials d) Philosophy: A Guide to the Reference
Literature
[] [] [] [] 70. The following are online current selection aids except;
A B C D
a) Books in Print c) Booklist
b) Choice d) Library Journal

[] [] [] [] 71. It ensures that the national library receives a copy of everything published in the bibliography’s
A B C D country of origin.

a) Legal deposit system c) Publisher’s Licensing Agreement

b) Complimentary Copies d) Book number-Check digit Contract

[] [] [] [] 72. Who classified reference service into ready reference and long range reference?
A B C D
a) William Warner Bishop c) John Cotton Dana
b) S.R. Ranganathan d) William Katz

[] [] [] [] 73. His idea of reference service is to help the user learn by instructing them instead of spoiling the
A B C D user by simply answering queries.

a) William Warner Bishop c) John Cotton Dana

b) S.R. Ranganathan d) William Katz

[] [] [] [] 74. He claims that reference service is the same with that of traditional print resources with that of
A B C D electronic resources.

a) Lipow c) Reeves
b) Bunge d) Guerrier

[] [] [] [] 75. Who categorized information sources into conventional, neo-conventional, non-conventional,

A B C D and meta-documents?

a) William Warner Bishop c) John Cotton Dana

b) S.R. Ranganathan d) William Katz

[] [] [] [] 76. In his book, The Measurement of Reference Service, he pioneered the classification of reference
A B C D questions.
a) Lipow c) Reeves
b) Bunge d) Guerrier

[] [] [] [] 77. In his book, In your face reference service, he described librarians as information therapists.
A B C D
a) Lipow c) Reeves
b) Bunge d) Guerrier

[] [] [] [] 78. He categorized reference activities into 5, namely; instructional, skill maintenance, patron
A B C D service, maintenance and surrogate.

a) Lipow c) Reeves
b) Bunge d) Guerrier

[] [] [] [] 79. According to Louis Shores, these are lists of written, printed or otherwise produced records of
A B C D civilizations, which may include books, serials, pictures, films, maps, records, manuscript and
any other media of communication.”

78
 a) catalog c) shelflist
b) bibliography d) listing
[] [] [] [] 80. According to Ranganathan, it should have all published materials, whether books or parts of tem
A B C D or periodicals or articles in them or combination of them at all times.”

a) Selective Bibliography c) Universal Bibliography

b) Trade Bibliography d) Bibliography of Bibliography

[] [] [] [] 81. According to L.M. Harrods, it is a bibliography which lists the books and other publications
A B C D published or distributed in significant quantity, in a particular country.”

a) Trade bibliography c) Selective Bibliography

b) Current Bibliography d) National Bibliography

[] [] [] [] 82. Which among the following are considered to be the reason why patrons use real-time digital
A B C D reference?

i They can anonymously ask questions iv Allows face to face interaction with
librarians
ii Real-time means no delay so information is v Information are tailored to their personal
conveniently obtained requests
iii Reference could take place anytime and vi Availing the service makes them look
anywhere trendy

a) i, ii, iii, vi c) i, ii, iii, v

b) i, ii, iii, iv d) ii, iii, v, vi

[] [] [] [] 83. The library needs an encyclopaedia suitable for adult users. Due to budgetary constraints, it was
A B C D also decided that the encyclopaedia should be a free online version with numerous illustrations,
maps and videos. Which would be the best to acquire?
a) Encyclopaedia Americana c) Encyclopaedia Britannica
b) WorldBook Online d) New Book of Knowledge Online
[] [] [] [] 84. Encyclopaedia Americana was based from what encyclopaedia?
A B C D
a) Nueva Enciclopedia Cumbre en line c) Kodansha Encyclopaedia of Japan
b) Brockhaus Koversations Lexikon d) Grand Dictionnaire Encyclopedique
Larousse
[] [] [] [] 85. The school principal noticed the lack of encyclopaedia in the library. To avoid missing volumes,
A B C D the principal discouraged multi volume sets but demanded an encyclopaedia full of illustrations.

a) Columbia Encyclopaedia c) Random House Encyclopaedia

b) Compton’s Encyclopaedia d) World Book’s Childcraft

[] [] [] [] 86. The following are free online encyclopaedia, except;

A B C D
a) Free Internet Encyclopaedia c) World Book Online
b) Encyberpedia d) Knowledge Adventure Encyclopaedia

[] [] [] [] 87. He was the first editor of the one volume literature reference encyclopaedia.
A B C D
a) William Benet c) Pierre Larousse
b) John Bartlett d) Friedrich Brockhaus

[] [] [] [] 88. Which of the following almanac is the most preferred based on familiarity and highest sales.
A B C D

a) Whitaker’s Almanac c) World Almanac

b) InfoPlease Almanac d) New York Times Almanac
[] [] [] [] 89. It is a type of specific-entry encyclopaedia stripped of adjectives and adverbs and limited to a
A B C D skeleton of information.

79
 a) Almanac c) Annual
b) Yearbook d) Compendium
[] [] [] [] 90. You were asked to present the notable focal persons of Library organizations in the Philippines
A B C D from the past to present. What reference book are you going to refer?

a) Professional Biographical Dictionary c) Professional Directory

b) Specific Subject Handbook d) Subject-specialized Encyclopaedia

[] [] [] [] 91. Gazetteers are defined as geographical dictionary. It is the index of an atlas found at the end of
A B C D atlases.

a) Both the statements are true c) Only the first statement is false
b) Only the first statement is true d) Both the statements are false

[] [] [] [] 92. Not all geographical sources have scale and projection. For example, what do celestial maps
A B C D have in place of the scale and projection in the mathematical designation area?

a) Altitude and Longitude c) Right Ascension and Declination

b) Inclination and Declination d) Latitude and Longitude

[] [] [] [] 93. What is the most common map projection?

A B C D
a) Gall-Peters c) Mercator
b) AuthaGraph d) Cylindrical

[] [] [] [] 94. Which of the following cartography issues are to be considered when deciding the best
A B C D projection?

i Purpose iv Proportion
ii Least distortion v Angle
iii Symbology and legends vi Geometric Accuracy

a) i, ii, iv c) ii, iii, iv

b) iii, v, vi d) i, v, vi

[] [] [] [] 95. With the rise of electronic and digital products for geographical sources, the library must
A B C D consider library equipment, such as computers, drives, scanners and readers when selecting
materials. What criteria is being considered?
a) Format c) Special Feature
b) Authority d) Style
[] [] [] [] 96. What is being evaluated when the librarian assesses the logical organization or the sequence of
A B C D contents appearing on the material?
a) Format c) Arrangement
b) Treatment d) Style

[] [] [] [] 97. What is being evaluated when the librarian is checking if the book is laser or thermal printed, or
A B C D if it is made of alkaline paper, or if it is hard or soft bound?

a) Format c) Arrangement
b) Special Features d) Style

[] [] [] [] 98. In the 2nd edition CCP Encyclopaedia of Philippine Art, which volume is for Architecture?
A B C D

a) Volume 4 c) Volume 8
b) Volume 6 d) Volume 9

[] [] [] [] 99. In the 2nd edition CCP Encyclopaedia of Philippine Art, which volume is Dance?
A B C D

80
 a) Volume 4 c) Volume 8
b) Volume 6 d) Volume 9

[] [] [] [] 100. In the 1st edition CCP Encyclopaedia of Philippine Art, which volume is for Visual Arts?
A B C D
a) Volume 4 c) Volume 8
b) Volume 6 d) Volume 9
[] [] [] [] 101. In the 1st edition CCP Encyclopaedia of Philippine Art, which volume is Film?
A B C D
a) Volume 4 c) Volume 8
b) Volume 6 d) Volume 9

[] [] [] [] 102. What is the addition in the 2nd edition of CCP Encylopaedia of Philippine Art?
A B C D
a) Broadcast Art c) Installation Art
b) Digital Art d) Index

[] [] [] [] 103. What is in the 1st edition of CCP Encyclopaedia of Philippine Art that was no longer in the 2 nd
A B C D edition of CCP Encylopedia of Philippine Art?

a) Broadcast Art c) Installation Art

b) Digital Art d) Index

[] [] [] [] 104. It is the art and science of mapmaking.

A B C D
a) hydrography c) cartography
b) geography d) chorography
[] [] [] [] 105. The Carta Hydrographica y chorographica de la yslas Filipinas Manila 1743 considered by
A B C D historians as the mother of all Philippine maps is the first scientific map of the Philippines. Its
official replica is housed and taken care of __________.
a) University of the Philippines c) University of Sto.Tomas
b) Ateneo de Manila University d) University of Manila
[] [] [] [] 106. It is a manual that consists of general section dealing with buying and selecting foods, table
A B C D setting, cooking hints, table of calories, weights and measures, and other miscellaneous
information.
a) Cookbook c) Etiquette and correspondence
b) Home Maintenance d) Recreations.
[] [] [] [] 107. What bibliographies are accompanied with notes, short explanations or brief summaries?
A B C D
a) Annotated bibliography c) Textual bibliography
b) Descriptive bibliography d) Subject bibliography

[] [] [] [] 108. Which of the following are one-volume encyclopaedia

A B C D
i Cambridge Encyclopaedia iv Concise Columbia Encyclopaedia
ii Random House Encyclopaedia v Colliers Encyclopaedia
iii Compton’s Encyclopaedia

a) i, iii, iv, v c) i, ii, iv

b) i, ii, iv, v d) i, ii, v

[] [] [] [] 109. It is a type of biographical source that indicates which title should be consulted in order to locate
A B C D the needed information about a person.

a) Bio-bibliographical source c) Indirect Biographical source

b) Direct Biographical source d) Biblio-biographical source
[] [] [] [] 110. In evaluating reference sources, scope is one the criteria for dictionaries and is often
A B C D communicated in which part of the material?

81
 a) Appendix c) Introduction
b) Title page d) Spine
[] [] [] [] 111. Which is an etymological dictionary?
A B C D
a) Merriam-Webster’s Dictionary c) Oxford English Dictionary
b) World Book Dictionary d) Collins Dictionary

[] [] [] [] 112. Which among the following dictionaries contain 3,000 illustrations?

A B C D
a) Merriam-Webster’s Dictionary c) Oxford English Dictionary
b) World Book Dictionary d) Collins Dictionary

[] [] [] [] 113. Which among the following is an unabridged dictionary?

A B C D
a) Merriam-Webster’s Dictionary c) Oxford English Dictionary
b) World Book Dictionary d) Collins Dictionary

[] [] [] [] 114. Which publisher is sanctioned by Western Scrabble Players Association (WESPA) to publish the
A B C D official list of scrabble words into an Official Scrabble Dictionary?
a) Merriam-Webster’s c) Oxford
b) World Book d) Collins
[] [] [] [] 115. In the earliest Philippine Dictionaries, it was considered the first dictionary of any Philippine
A B C D language published in the Philippines which is a list of Tagalog words with their meaning.

a) Arte y reglas de la lengua tagala c) Vocabulario de Lengua Tagala

b) Doctrina Cristiana d) Vocabulario de la Diccionario un
Tagala
[] [] [] [] 116. Which among the following earliest Philippine Dictionaries remained as manuscript printed in rice
A B C D paper by Tomas Pinpin in 1613.

a) Arte y reglas de la lengua tagala c) Vocabulario de Lengua Tagala

b) Doctrina Cristiana d) Vocabulario de la Diccionario un
Tagala
[] [] [] [] 117. Which of the following is the oldest among the Philippine Almanacs?
A B C D
a) Filway’s Philippine Almanac c) Dimasalang Kalendaryong Tagalog
b) Kalendaryong Pangkasaysayan d) Fookien Times Philippines Yearbook

[] [] [] [] 118. It is a method used for personalized or user-specific services such as selective dissemination of
A B C D information, to obtain background information, preferences and other details to help customize the
reference or information service to be offered.
a) User study c) Community needs assessment
b) Client Profiling d) User satisfaction survey
[] [] [] [] 119. It is the systematic method of providing proper and correct information to the users through
A B C D determining the real information needed and be able to identify the suitable source of answer.

a) Search process c) negotiation

b) Reference process d) Reference interview
[] [] [] [] 120. The part of the reference process that serves as the conversation between the reference librarian
A B C D and the library user for the purpose of clarifying the user’s needs and aiding the user in meeting
those needs.
a) Search process c) negotiation
b) Reference process d) Reference interview

[] [] [] [] 121. It is the part of the reference process in which the librarian locates the answer to a given question
A B C D or the process of matching up the question with the source most likely to yield the answer.

a) Search process c) negotiation

b) Reference process d) Reference interview

82
[] [] [] [] 122. The librarian was able to provide a value-added answer in which situation?
A B C D
i Predicted the potential uses of the v Assumed the purpose of the inquiry
information requested and was able and identified the needed resources
to include related works based on best judgment
ii The information was completely vi Provided annotation and summary of
given to the user ahead of the the various resources that needed by
deadline the user
iii Wrote the Background of the study vii Simply cut and pasted information or
for the user extracted information from websites
with complete citation sent through
e-mail.
iv Suggested resources available from viii Shared a link of an online
other libraries and contacted agricultural database perfect for the
cooperating librarians for referral researcher’s queries.

a) ii, iii, v, viii c) i, iii, v, viii

b) i, iv, vi, vii d) ii, v, vi, vii

[] [] [] [] 123. The librarian was able to provide a skilled answer in which situation?
A B C D
i Checked good the table of contents if v Handed the user a compiled abstract
the user’s query could be answer by
the material
ii Explained the difference between the vi Provided a list of the best websites
two similar titles when the user asked where the user’s query could be
answered
iii Drafted the Background of the study vii Simply cut and pasted information or
for the user extracted information from websites
with complete citation sent through
e-mail.
iv Escort the user to the section where viii Suggesting materials that are known
the needed materials could be to have well-constructed indexes.
browsed

a) i, ii, vi, viii c) iii, iv, vi, viii

b) i, v, vi, vii d) iii, v, vi, vii

[] [] [] [] 124. The librarian was able to provide an elementary answer in which situation?
A B C D
i Asked if the query requires an v Provided materials that are available
immediate answer or if the request in the library and informed the user
could wait. that other libraries had better
resources regarding the topic.
ii Handed the user a compilation of vi Showed the user a general
abstracts and indexes of journals encyclopaedia that could possibly
arranged by subject. contain the answer to the question
iii Checked if the title of the books vii Simply cut and pasted information or
could possibly contain the answer to extracted information from websites
the question with complete citation sent through e-
mail.
iv Pointing the OPAC or online viii Escort the user to the shelves where
catalogue’s location to browse
a) ii, iii, v, vi, vii, viii c) iii, iv, v, vi, vii, viii
b) i, iv, v, vi, vii, viii d) i, ii, iii, iv, vi, viii

[] [] [] [] 125. When the librarian is being rattled by a hurrying patron and pressured to just answer anything that
A B C D comes to mind, there is a tendency to provide?

a) Wrong information c) Inappropriate answer

b) Poor knowledge of resources d) Avoidance

83
[] [] [] [] 126. When the librarian is passing difficult questions to another staff, or acting busy behind the desk, or
A B C D trying not to be noticed by the user, it is called ________.

a) Wrong information c) Lack of follow-up

b) Poor knowledge of resources d) Avoidance

[] [] [] [] 127. Which are the best methods to improve poor knowledge of resources?
A B C D
i Shelf-reading iv Weeding
ii Experience sharing v Memorizing collection
iii Familiarization vi Cataloging

a) i, ii, iii, iv c) i, ii, iv, v

b) i, iv, v, vi d) i, iii, iv, vi

[] [] [] [] 128. “What does anaerobic compost mean?”

A B C D
a) Encyclopaedia c) Dictionary
b) Handbook d) Manual

[] [] [] [] 129. “What is composting?”

A B C D
a) Encyclopaedia c) Dictionary
b) Handbook d) Manual

[] [] [] [] 130. “I want to know everything about vermi-composting”

A B C D
a) Encyclopaedia c) Dictionary
b) Handbook d) Manual

[] [] [] [] 131. “How to make pile compost?”

A B C D
a) Encyclopaedia c) Dictionary
b) Handbook d) Manual

[] [] [] [] 132. “What are the nearest 5 star coffee shops here?”

A B C D
a) Directory c) Handbook
b) Guidebook d) Gazetteer

[] [] [] [] 133. “What are the 5 star hotels in Makati?”

A B C D
a) Directory c) Handbook
b) Guidebook d) Gazetteer

[] [] [] [] 134. “I need to compare the recent and previous economic development data of South East Asian
A B C D countries for my thesis”

a) Serials c) Yearbook
b) Almanac d) Government documents

[] [] [] [] 135. “What is the fastest growing economy in the 21st century?”

A B C D

a) Serials c) Yearbook
b) Almanac d) Government documents

[] [] [] [] 136. These are first-hand sources of information. Information in these sources are shown for the first
A B C D time and becomes the basis of research.

a) Primary c) Tertiary
b) Secondary d) Unconventional

84
[] [] [] [] 137. These information sources are basically interpretation, compilation, analysis or restatement of the
A B C D primary source.

a) Primary c) Tertiary
b) Secondary d) Unconventional

[] [] [] [] 138. These information sources repackages the information in primary and secondary sources.
A B C D
a) Primary c) Tertiary
b) Secondary d) Unconventional

[] [] [] [] 139. The following are examples of primary information sources except;

A B C D
a) art original c) photographs
b) speeches d) biography

[] [] [] [] 140. The following are examples of secondary source of information, except;

A B C D
a) textbooks c) autobiography
b) criticism d) reviews

[] [] [] [] 141. Which of the following is not a tertiary source of information?

A B C D
a) encyclopaedia c) newspapers
b) bibliography d) textbooks

[] [] [] [] 142. What is the correct APA citation among the following:

A B C D
a) Cassell, K.A., & Hiremath, U. (2011).
Reference and information services in the
21st century : An introduction (2nd ed.).
New York : Neal-Schuman Publishers,
Inc.
b) Cassell, Kay Ann & Hiremath, Uma
(2011). Reference and information
services in the 21st century : An
introduction. (2nd edition). New York :
Neal-Schuman Publishers, Inc.
c) Cassell, K.A. & Hiremath, U. (2011)
Reference and information services in the
21st century : an introduction. 2nd ed. New
York ; Neal-Schuman Publishers, Inc.
d) Cassell, K.A, & Hiremath, U. (2011).
Reference and information services in the
21st century : An introduction. 2nd edition.
New York : Neal-Schuman Publishers, Inc.

[] [] [] [] 143. What is the correct APA citation for an online Journal article among the following:
A B C D
a) Ryan, M (2019). Portal: Libraries And c) Ryan, M. (2019) portal: libraries and
The Academy 2019 Johns Hopkins the academy 2019 Johns Hopkins
University Press Award for Best University Press Award for Best
Article. Portal: Libraries And The Article. portal: libraries and the
Academy, 19-3. academy, 19(3). doi:
10.1353/pla.2019.0030
b) Ryan, Marianne (2019). Portal: d) Ryan, M. (2019). Portal: Libraries and
Libraries and the Academy 2019 the Academy 2019 Johns Hopkins
Johns Hopkins University Press University Press Award for Best
Award for Best Article. Portal: Article. Portal: Libraries and the
Libraries and the Academy, 19(3). Academy, 19(3). doi:
doi: 10.1353/pla.2019.0030 10.1353/pla.2019.0030
[] [] [] [] 144. What is the latest APA version or edition?
A B C D
a) 6th Edition c) 8th Edition
b) 7th Edition d) 9th Edition

[] [] [] [] 145. What is the correct MLA citation for a book among the following:
A B C D

85
 a) Cassell, Kay Ann., and Uma c) Cassell, K.A., and Uma Hiremath.
Hiremath. Reference and Information “Reference and information services
Services in the 21st Century: an in the 21st century: an introduction.
Introduction. 2nd ed., New York : 2nd ed.,” New York ,Neal-Schuman,
Neal-Schuman, 2011. 2011.
b) Cassell, Kay Ann., and Hiremath, d) Cassell, Kay Ann., and Uma
Uma. Reference and information Hiremath. “Reference And
services in the 21st century: an Information Services In The 21st
introduction. 2nd ed., New York ; Century: An Introduction. 2nd ed.,”
Neal-Schuman, 2011. Neal-Schuman, 2011.
[] [] [] [] 146. What is the correct MLA citation for an article within a book among the following:
A B C D
a) Tyckoson, David A. History and c) Tyckoson, David A. “History And
Functions of Reference Service. Functions Of Reference Service.”
“Reference and Information Services: Reference And Information Services:
an Introduction”, 4th ed. Edited by An Introduction, 4th ed. Edited by
Richard E. Bopp and Linda C. Smith. Richard E. Bopp and Linda C. Smith.
Libraries Unlimited, 2011, p. 420-469. Libraries Unlimited, 2011, pp. 420-
469.
b) Tyckoson, David A. History and d) Tyckoson, David A. “History and
Functions of Reference Service. Functions of Reference Service.”
“Reference and Information Services: Reference and Information Services:
an Introduction,” 4th ed. Edited by an Introduction, 4th ed. Edited by
Richard E. Bopp and Linda C. Smith. Richard E. Bopp and Linda C. Smith.
Libraries Unlimited, 2011, pp. 420- Libraries Unlimited, 2011, pp. 420-
469. 469.
[] [] [] [] 147. What is the latest MLA version or edition?
A B C D
a) 6th Edition c) 8th Edition
b) 7th Edition d) 9th Edition

[] [] [] [] 148. What field uses APA format?

A B C D
a) Humanities c) Education
b) History d) Business

[] [] [] [] 149. What field uses MLA format?

A B C D
a) Psychology c) Education
b) Humanities d) Sciences

[] [] [] [] 150. Fine Arts uses what bibliographic citation format?

A B C D
a) APA c) Chicago
b) MLA d) All of the above

86
KEY ANSWER TO PART II: REFERENCE AND BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. B 51. B 101. C
2. C 52. C 102. A
3. A 53. A 103. D
4. D 54. C 104. C
5. A 55. D 105. B
6. B 56. D 106. A
7. A 57. B 107. A
8. A 58. A 108. C
9. D 59. B 109. C
10. B 60. B 110. C
11. C 61. D 111. C
12. A 62. D 112. B
13. D 63. C 113. A
14. C 64. D 114. D
15. D 65. A 115. C
16. A 66. D 116. C
17. A 67. B 117. B
18. C 68. C 118. B
19. C 69. C 119. B
20. C 70. D 120. D
21. D 71. A 121. A
22. C 72. B 122. B
23. C 73. C 123. A
24. C 74. B 124. D
25. A 75. B 125. A
26. B 76. D 126. D
27. C 77. A 127. A
28. D 78. C 128. C
29. C 79. B 129. A
30. A 80. C 130. B
31. C 81. D 131. D
32. D 82. C 132. B
33. D 83. C 133. A
34. D 84. B 134. C
35. B 85. C 135. B
36. A 86. C 136. A
37. B 87. A 137. B
38. A 88. C 138. C
39. B 89. A 139. D
40. D 90. C 140. C
41. C 91. B 141. C
42. C 92. C 142. A
43. D 93. C 143. D
44. A 94. A 144. B
45. B 95. A 145. A
46. A 96. C 146. D
47. D 97. A 147. C
48. A 98. A 148. C
49. C 99. C 149. B
50. A 100. A 150. C

87
CATALOGING AND CLASSIFICATION
The early systems of library arrangement were merely utilitarian in purpose. Many of the earlier catalogs were arranged
by title. Some showed groupings by broad subjects, chronological arrangement, or arrangement, or arrangement by author, by
order of accession, by size, or even by the color of the binding. But the rapid growth of library collections and their use during
the Nineteenth century resulted in a definite need for better methods of book arrangement in library collection so that the
substantive content would be apparent to the user.

Library Catalogs - A library catalog is a kind of bibliographic file. It differs from a bibliography or a periodical index. All its
records pertain to items in one or more libraries and carry information on where items can be located. Library catalogs represent
a single institution’s holdings; other catalogs show the holdings of several libraries or collections (union catalogs). A library
catalog lists, arrange, and describes the holdings of a specific library collection. Cataloging is a process of preparing a catalog or
preparing entries for a catalog.

A library catalog consists of records that provide data about the items in the collection or collections the catalog
represents. The data in each record include:

a. A bibliographic description giving the identification, publication, and physical characteristics of the resource,
b. For a physical item, a call number that indicates the physical location of the item in the collection, and
c. Most records also include subject terms which state the subject content of the resource succinctly.

The main functions of a library catalog are to enable a patron to determine:

a. Whether the library contains a certain book,

b. Which works by a particular author are in the collection,
c. Which editions of a particular work the library has, and
d. What materials the library has on a particular subject.

Forms of catalog

1. Book catalogs – is a list in book form of the holdings of a particular library collection or group of collections, with
the cataloging records displayed in page format. This is the oldest form of library catalog.
2. Card catalogs – cataloging entries were recorded on 3 by 5 cards, one entry per card or set of cards. Each entry
could then be revised, inserted, or deleted without affecting other entries.
3. Microform catalogs – was a variant of the book catalog and served many situations as an interim device between
card and online catalogs. It contained cataloging records in micro-image and required the use of a microform reader
for viewing.
4. Online catalogs – records are retrieved directly from a computer database. In this mode, individual cataloging
records or parts thereof are retrieved through access points or search keys and are displayed on a monitor. An online
catalog can be integrated with other library operations such as cataloging, acquisitions, and circulation, resulting in
an integrated online system. Machine-readable cataloging records form the basic units of an online catalog. For a
cataloging record to be machine-readable, it must not only be input into a computer, but also its various elements
must be tagged or labeled in such a way that they can be stored, manipulated, and eventually retrieved in all the
ways that are appropriate for technical and reference services in libraries.
5. CD-ROM catalogs – periodically, usually quarterly, copied into compact disks, which can be accessed through
stand-alone microcomputers.

Arrangement of entries in a catalog

1. Dictionary catalogs – entries are arranged into one alphabetical file.

2. Divided catalogs – the divided catalog, one for main, added entries, and the other for subject entries only.
3. Classified catalogs – arranged based upon a system of classification. For example, the shelflist, a record of a library's
holdings arranged by classification number, is a classified catalog.

Cataloging operations

1. Copy cataloging
Catalogers in local libraries make heavy use of bibliographic records prepared elsewhere. Sources of such records
are the Library of Congress, OhioLink, OCLC (Online Computer Library Center), which has absorbed two other
major networks, WLN (Western Library Network) and RLIN (Research Libraries Information Network). OCLC’s
WorldCat is now the largest cataloging database.

88
2. Original cataloging
For an item for which no cataloging record exists, catalogers do full cataloging.
3. Adaptation
A record of similar work or item is revised or “adapted.”

Cataloging files

1. Bibliographic file
The bibliographic file contains cataloging records. This is the file that a library user interacts with.
2. Shelflist
It consists of an array of duplicates of main entry records arranged in shelf order.
3. Authority file
A cataloging tool that records the standardized forms of names and topical terms that have been authorized as
headings, i.e., access points, along with their associated cross-references.

Cataloging procedures

1. Resource description (also called descriptive cataloging), the preparation of bibliographic descriptions and the
determination of bibliographic access points;
2. Subject analysis (often referred to as subject cataloging or the operation of assigning subject headings);
3. Classification, the assignment of classification numbers and book numbers;
4. Authority work, the determination of the standardized forms of subject terms and names; and
5. MARC Tagging for those doing online cataloging.
Cataloging concepts and principles
Principles Description
1. Panizzi’s Principles Sir Anthony Panizzi, a cataloger and later became the principal
librarian of the British Museum Department of Printed Books. He
formulated 91 rules to be used in compiling the catalog of the British
Museum. Such rules are hailed as “the ancestor of all modern library
cataloging code.”
2. Jewett’s Principles Charles C. Jewett, appointed librarian and assistant secretary at the
Smithsonian Institution soon after its establishment in Washington,
D.C., in 1946. He embarked on an effort to establish a great national
library, which would incorporate within it a union catalog of all public
libraries in the United States. He envisioned the union catalog as the first
step in a course that would eventually lead to a universal catalog.
3. Cutter’s Principles Charles Ammi Cutter, a librarian at Harvard College and later, was
appointed the librarian of the Boston Athenaeum. He was responsible
for compiling “Rules For A Dictionary Catalog,” in which he claimed
to set forth rules in a systematic way or to investigate what might be
called the first principles of cataloging that first appeared in 1876 as an
adjunct to a government publication on the state of American libraries.
His statement, “the convenience of the public is always to be set before
the ease of the cataloger,” placed the focus of catalog design squarely
on the user.
4. Lubetzky’s Principles Seymour Lubetzky, a librarian at the Library of Congress and later a
faculty member of the school of Library Services at the University of
California, Los Angeles. He advocated logical rather than situational
rules. He was a prolific writer and produced many publications about
cataloging, such as:
a. Studies of Descriptive Cataloging (1946)
b. Cataloging Rules and Principles (1953)
c. Code of Cataloging Rules (1960)
d. Principles of Cataloging (1969)
5. Paris Principles The International Conference on Cataloging Principles was held in Paris
on October 9-18, 1961, under the auspices of the International
Federation of Library Association (IFLA). In essence, the Paris
Principles drew heavily upon Seymour Lubetzky’s 1960 draft cataloging
code and Cutter’s objectives. One frequently cited feature of this
document is its endorsement of corporate entry and natural, rather than
grammatical, arrangement of title.

89
6. International Standard After the Paris Conference, the International Meeting of Cataloging
Bibliographic Description Experts was held in Copenhagen in 1969. At this meeting, an
(ISBD) international working group was established to develop a standard order
and content for describing monographic materials.
7. Universal Bibliographic The theme of the 39th IFLA meeting in 1973 was the ideal of universal
Control (UBC) bibliographic control, and this concept was adopted as a goal for
ultimate international cooperation. The basic idea of UBC is having each
document cataloged only once, as near to the source of publication as
possible, and making basic bibliographic data on all publications, issued
in all countries, universally and promptly available in an internationally
accepted form.
8. Functional Requirements for In the mid-1990s, an IFLA study group developed FRBR. This is a
Bibliographic Records conceptual model for viewing the structure and relationships of
(FRBR) bibliographic and authority records. It came with a companion volume
FRAD and with an expansion called FRSAD
Development of Standards for Resource Description
Code Description
1. British Museum Cataloging Also known as Panizzi’s 91 rules, reflected the functions of the catalog
Rules (1839) as an inventory list and finding list.
2. Jewett’s Rules (1853) It contains 33 rules which were largely based on Panizzi’s rules. Jewett
advocated stringent and detailed rules that should leave little to the
individual judgment of the cataloger. Jewett’s discussion of subject
headings represents the earliest call for the codifying of subject heading
practice.
3. Cutter’s Rules (1876) The Rules for a Printed Dictionary Catalogue, which formed Part II of
the US Bureau of Education Publication, Public Libraries in the United
States, contains 36 rules covering descriptive cataloging, subject
headings, and filing.
4. AA (1908) The major aim of the code was to meet the requirements of larger
academic and research libraries.
5. Prussian Instructions (1938) It was originally developed as a standardized system of cataloging for
Prussian libraries. PI preferred entry under title instead of corporate
entry, and grammatical arrangement of title is preferred over the natural
or mechanical arrangement.
6. ALA (1941 Draft) The ALA (1941 Draft) was an elaboration of AA (1908). The reason for
the elaboration was the need for standardization required by centralized
and cooperative cataloging.
7. Vatican code (1948) The Vatican rules were developed to compile a general catalog of the
printed books in the Vatican Library after its reorganization in the 1920s
and considered the most comprehensive and best-structured code at the
time. The code contains rules for entry, description, subject headings,
and filing, with ample examples throughout.
8. ALA (1949) ALA cataloging rules for author and title entries were criticized for
being long and confusing because they provided duplicate and
overlapping rules to meet identical conditions. However, together with
LC (1949), ALA (1949) served as the standard for descriptive cataloging
for American libraries until the appearance of AACR in 1967.
9. LC (1949) The rules cover bibliographic descriptions only, excluding the choice of
entries and forms of heading.
10. AACR (1967) Anglo-American Cataloging Rules were received with mixed feelings.
Its logical arrangement and emphasis on authorship conditions rather
than on types of work were considered to be a significant improvement
over the previous codes. However, some critics lamented the
compromises made in practical considerations and the code’s inadequate
handling of non-print materials.
11. AACR2 (1978) In 1973, it was felt that the appropriate time had come for an overhaul
of the AACR. Certain significant development since the publication of
AACR pointed to the desirability of a revision. Michael Gorman and
Paul W. Winkler were appointed editors of the second edition of AACR.
N the revision, the Joint Steering Committee decided to conform to

90
 international agreements and standards, particularly the Paris Principles
and the ISBD.
12. AACR2R (1998) By the late 1990s, sufficient additions, deletions, and changes had been
cumulated since 1988 to warrant a new issue of the second edition. A
new revision of AACR2R containing the rules of the 1988 revision and
the updates since then was issued.
13. AACR2R (2002) It contains changes and additions since 1998, particularly with regard to
the treatment of electronic resources. Annual updates continue to be
issued between editions.
14. The Concise AACR2 (2004) For libraries that do not need the details embodied in the full edition of
AACR, a concise version, prepared by Michael Gorman, one of the
editors of AACR, had been published at appropriate intervals since
1981. The current edition accompanies AACR2R (2002). The intent of
the concise version, as the second edition of the AACR2 without many
of that comprehensive work’s rules for out-of-the-way and complex
materials.
15. RDA (Resource Description In the early 2000s, discussion began on a new edition of AACR,
and Access) including provisions for rapidly developing information items and
packages (particularly electronic resources) and will incorporate the
concepts outlined in the Functional Requirements for Bibliographic
Records (FRBR). Furthermore, it will be made more hospitable to new
and varying forms, and types of information-bearing items and previous
codes have been
Cataloging

Descriptive Cataloging - The phase of the cataloging process concerned with identifying and describing library material
and recording this information in the form of a catalog entry.

I. Bibliographic Description
Areas and Elements of Bibliographic Description
1. Title and Statement of Responsibility Area
a. Title Proper
 The chief name of an item, including any alternative title but excluding parallel titles
and other title information.
 Transcribed from the chief source of information exactly as to wording, order, and
spelling.
 A supplied title is enclosed in square brackets [ ]
 Alternative Title. The second part of a title proper that consists of two parts, each of
which is a title; the parts are joined by or (or its equivalent in another language) (ex. The
tempest, or, The enchanted island)
b. General Material Designation
 A term indicating the broad class of material to which an item belongs
 enclosed in square brackets (ex. [sound recording])
c. Parallel titles
 The title proper in another language or script
 Preceded by an equals sign =
Ex. Wood Cree [ sound recording] = Les Cris des forets.
d. Other Title information
 A title borne by an item other than the title proper or parallel or series title(s); also any
phrase appearing in conjunction with the title proper, etc., indicative of the character,
contents, etc., of the item or the motives for, or occasion of, its production or publication.
 Preceded by a colon :
e. Statement of responsibility
 A statement, transcribed from the item being described, relating to persons responsible
for the intellectual or artistic content of the item, to corporate bodies from which the
content emanates, or to persons or corporate bodies responsible for the performance of
the content the item.
 Preceded by a slash /
 Subsequent statements of responsibility precede by a semi-colon ;

91
2. Edition Area
Preceded by a full stop, space, dash, space, dash. - -
a. Edition statement
 Edition: all copies produced from essentially the same type of image (whether by direct
contact or by photographic or other methods) and issued by the same entity.
 Impression: all copies of an edition of a book, pamphlet, etc., printed at one time.
 An issue is the copy of an edition forming a distinct group distinguished from other
copies of that edition by minor but well-defined variations.
 Reprint: A new printing of an item made from the original type image, commonly by
photographic methods.
b. Statement of responsibility relating to the edition
 Preceded by a slash /
3. Material (or type of publication) Specific Details Area
Preceded by a full stop, space, dash, space, dash. - -
a. Mathematical and Other Material Specific Data Area (for cartographic materials)
 For cartographic materials (maps, atlases, globes)
 Statement of scale, statement of projection ( ; ), statement of coordinates and equinox,
both coordinates and equinox; precede the statement of equinox with a semi-colon ( ; ),
precede the statement of epoch with a comma( , )
 Ex. Scale l :253,240 ; transverse mercator proj. Everest spheroid (E 79° - E 86° / N 20°
- N 12° ; eq. 1950, epoch 1948.5)
b. Musical Presentation Area (for musical materials)
 Indicates the physical presentation of the music.
 Transcribe a statement found in the chief source of information indicating the physical
presentation of the music
 Miniature score
 Playing score
c. File Characteristics Area (for computer files / machine-readable data area)
 Enclose each statement of the number of records, statements, etc., in parentheses.
Computer data (3 files : 1000,460,550 records)
Computer programs (2 files : 4300, 1250 bytes)
d. Numeric and/or Alphabetic, Chronological or Other Designation Area or Numbering Area (for
serials)
 For continuing resources (Serials)
Vol. 3., no. 7.
Vol. ASSP-22, no. 1 (Feb. 1974)-
Vol. 1, no. 1 (Nov. 1943)-v. 10., no. 12 (June 1953) ; no. 1 (July 1974)-
Vol. 3, no. 6 (Aug/Sept. 1970)-v. 5, no. 3 (March 1972)
e. Microform (Special data for cartographic materials, music, and serials)
 Give the third area data depending on the content of the microform.
4. Publication, Distribution, etc., Area
Preceded by a full stop, space, dash, space, dash. - -
a. Place of Publication
 [S.l.] - sine loco (without place -publication-)
b. Name of Publisher, Distributor, etc.
 Preceded by a colon :
 [s.n.] - sine nomine (without name -publisher-)
c. Date of Publication, Distribution, etc. 2007, c2008
 Preceded by a comma,
 Approximate:
[1989 or 1990] one year or the other
[1979?] probable date+
[between 1906-1912] use only for dates fewer than 20 years apart
[ca. 1960] approximate date
[ 197-] decade certain
[197-?] probable decade
[18--] century certain
92
 [18--?] probable century
d. Place of Manufacture, Name of Manufacturer, Date of Manufacture
 In place of missing data about the publication or distribution
5. Physical Description Area
a. Extent of item
 The number of physical units of parts (3 v.) or pagination (150 p.)
b. Other Physical Details
 Preceded by a colon :
 Illustrative matter
 Books, pamphlets, and printed sheets Use ill. For general illustrative matter, specify one
or more of the following if considered important: coats of arms, facsimiles, forms,
genealogical tables, maps, music, plans, portraits, samples)
 Other physical details differ for the following types of materials: cartographic materials,
Manuscripts, Music, Sound Recordings, Motion Pictures, and Video recordings, Graphic
Materials, Computer Files, Three Dimensional Artefacts and Realia, Microforms,
Serials.
c. Dimension
 Preceded by a semi-colon ;
 Height given in centimeters rounded up to the next whole number (Books, pamphlets,
and printed sheets)
 Dimensions differ for the following types of materials: Cartographic materials,
Manuscripts, Music, Sound Recordings, Motion Pictures, and Video recordings, Graphic
Materials, Computer Files, Three Dimensional Artefacts and Realia, Microforms,
Serials.
d. Accompanying Material
 Material issued with and intended to be used with the item being cataloged.
 Preceded by a plus sign ( +)
Examples of Physical Description Area for:
 Cartographic Materials.
1 map: col.; 25 x35 cm.
1 map: col.; 80 x 57 cm. folded to 21 x 10 cm.
1 globe: col., mounted on metal stand; 12 cm. in diameter
 Sound Recordings
1 sound cassette ( 60 mins.): 3 ¾ ips, stereo.
1 sound disc (50 mins.): 33 1/3 rpm, stereo; 4 ¾in. + 1 pamphlet.
 Motion Pictures and Video recordings
1 film reel (12 min.): sd., b&w; 16 mm.+ 1 teacher's guide
1 videodisc (38 min.): sd., col.; 12 in.
2 film cassettes (30 min. each): si., col.; standard 8 mm. 1 v. (28 p.: ill. ; 22 cm.)
 Graphic Materials
16 flashcards: col.; 28 x 10 cm.
1 flip chart (8 sheets): double-sided, col.; 23 x 18 cm.
24 photographs: b&w; 13 x 18 cm.
 Multimedia (Kits)
400 lesson cards, 40 answer key booklets, 1 student record, 1 teacher's handbook,
1 placement test; in contatiner 18 x 25 x 19 cm.
42 various pieces; in box 20 x 12 x 6 cm.
 Computer files
1 computer disk: col.; 5 ¼ in.
1 computer optical disk: col.; 4 ¾ in + 1 user manual and addendum.
 3D Artefacts and Realia
1 sculpture: polished bronze; 110 cm. high.
6 microscope slides : stained; 3 x 8 cm.
1 diorama (various pieces): col.; in box 30 x 25 x 13 cm.
2 jigsaw puzzles: cardboard, col.; in boxes 20 x 30 x 5cm.
 Microforms
1 microform reel: col. & ill.; 16 cm.
93
 20 aperture cards; 9 x 19 cm.
 Published Music
1 miniature score (34 p.): ill. ; 18 cm.
1 score ( vii, 32 p.); 28 cm.+ 1 sound tape reel (60 min. : analog, 7 ½ ips,
mono.; 7 in.,½ in tape)
 Serials
108 v.: ill. ; 25 cm.+ 18 maps (col. ; 65 x 90 cm. or smaller) *completed serial*
v.: ill. ; 25 cm.
6. Series Area
 *Preceded by full stop, space, dash, space, and enclosed in parentheses. - - (McGraw series in
education)
 *Contains the following (same punctuation marks as the main description apply):
a. Title proper of series
b. Parallel Title of Series
c. Other Title Information of Series
d. Statements of Responsibility Relating to Series
e. ISSN
f. Numbering Within Series (preceded by a semi-colon ; )
g. Subseries
h. More than one series statement
7. Note Area
 Important details about the item (found in the chief source of information) that have no place in
the description or other details to be indicated as prescribed in standard formats for description
such as AACR. Each note starts a new paragraph. A note may be FORMAL (copied from the
item) or INFORMAL (supplied by the cataloger).
 Must be brief and easily understood.
8. Standard Number and Terms of Availability Area
 New paragraph after notes.
 ISBN, ISSN, and price.
II. Choice of Access Points
Access Points
Name, term or code, under which a bibliographic record is searched, identified, entered, or filed in a catalog;
it is a key for retrieval and key for filing in display
Main Entry
The complete catalog record of an item, the main entry may include the tracings.
Added Entry
An entry, additional to the main entry, by which an item is represented in a catalog, a secondary entry.
Entry
A record of an item in a catalog
Entry Word
The word by which an entry is arranged in the catalog. The "filing medium."
Authorship
Pertains to the origin of the intellectual or artistic content of the work.
1. Personal Author
Person chiefly responsible for the creation of the intellectual or artistic content of a work (writers of books,
composers of music, painters and sculptors, photographers, compilers of bibliographies, cartographers)
a. General Rule
 Enter a work by one or more persons under the heading for the personal author, the principal
personal author, or the probable personal author.
 In some cases of shared personal authorship and mixed personal authorship, enter under the
heading for the person named first.
b. Works for Single Personal Authorship
 For works of single personal authorship, entry is under the author.
c. Works of Shared Responsibility
 Works produced by the collaboration of two or more persons who performed the same kind
of activity such as writing, adapting, or performing.

94
  Entry is under the principal responsibility if indicated (by the wording or layout of the chief
source of information of the item being cataloged). If not, enter under the heading named first.
d. Mixed Responsibility
 Previously existing works that have been modified (adaptations, revisions, translations) and
new works in which different persons or bodies performing different kinds of activity.
 For Mixed responsibility, entry is under:
 Adapter for a paraphrase, rewriting, adaptation for children, or version in a different
literary form.
 Writer for the text for a work that consists of a text for which an artist has provided
illustrations.
 Artist for separately published illustrations
 Original author of an edition that has been revised, enlarged, updated, etc., by another
person if the original author is still considered responsible for the work.
 Reviser of an edition if the original author is no longer considered to be responsible for the
work.
 Commentator of a work consisting of a text and a commentary by a different person, if the
latter is emphasized
 Author of the text of a work consisting of a text and a commentary by a different person,
if the text is emphasized.
 Original author of a translation
 Biographer-critic of a work by a writer accompanied by/or interwoven with biographical
or critical material, if the latter is emphasized.
 Writer of a work accompanied by/or interwoven with biographical or critical material by
another person presented as editor, compiler, etc.
2. Corporate Body
An organization or group of persons identified by a particular name and that acts or may act as an entity.
a. Works of an administrative nature dealing with the corporate body itself or its internal policies,
procedures, and/or operations; its finances; its officers and/or staff; or its resources.
b. Some legal and governmental works of the following types: laws, decrees of the chief executive
with the force of law, administrative regulations, constitutions, court rules, treatise, etc., court
decisions, legislative hearings, religious laws, liturgical works.
c. Works that record the collective thought of the body.
d. Works that report the collective activity of a conference, an expedition, or an event, falling
within the definition of a corporate body.
e. Sound recordings, films, Video recordings, and written records of performances resulting from
the collective activity of a performing group as a whole, where the group's responsibility goes
beyond that of mere performance, execution, etc.
f. Cartographic materials emanating from a corporate body other than a body merely responsible
for their publication or distribution.
g. Official communications from heads of state, heads of government, heads of international
bodies, popes, patriarchs, bishops, etc., are entered under their corporate headings.
3. Entry under Title
A work is entered under Title if:
a. The author is unknown, and no corporate body is responsible
b. The work has more than three authors, and none of them is the principal author, and no corporate
body is responsible.
c. It is a collection or a work produced under editorial direction and has a collective title.
d. It is not by a person or persons and is issued by a corporate body but is not one of the types of
publications listed previously.
e. It is a sacred scripture or an ancient anonymous work.

Types of Main Subject Headings

1. Headings for Persons

The determination of a personal name heading is normally based on information obtained from the chief
sources of information in works by that person issued in his or her language.
a. Entry under Surname
A name containing a surname is entered under that surname.

95
 Compound Surnames - a surname consisting of two or more proper names is entered
according to the preferred or established form (if known)
Surnames with Separately Written Prefixes - these names are entered according to the usage
of the person's language or country of residence. For American and British names, the entry
element is the prefix.
Von Linn, Charles
b. Entry under Title of Nobility
The elements in the name are arranged in the following order:
Proper name in the title, personal name in the direct order, the term of rank in the vernacular.
c. Entry under Given Name, etc.
A name that consists of a given name or given names only is entered under the part of the name
as listed in reference sources
d. Entry under Phrase
Enter in direct order a name that consists of a phrase or appellation that does not contain a
forename.
Additions to Names
e. Titles of Nobility and Terms of Honour
The title of nobility or a British term of honor is added after the name if the title or term appears
commonly associated with the name in the person's works or reference sources.
Sir Walter Scott
f. Saints
The word Saint is added after the name of the Christian Saint (excluding popes, emperors,
empresses, kings, or queens)
g. Additions to Names Entered under Surname Only
The addition is in the form of a word or phrase associated with the name in works by the person
or reference sources.
Dr. Seuss
h. Additions to Names Entered under Given Name
Royalty. A phrase consisting of the title and the name of the state or people governed is added.
Popes. Pope is added.
Bishops, etc. The title or phrase consisting of the title and the name of the latest see (if
applicable) is added.
Distinguishing persons with the same name
i. Dates
Shakespeare, William, 1564-1616.
j. Fuller forms of names
The fuller form of the name is added in parentheses
***If the dates and fuller form of the name are not available to distinguish between two or more
identical headings; another element is used for this purpose. This element may be a suitable brief
term, a term of address, a title of position or office, initials of an academic degree, initials
denoting membership in an organization.
2. Geographic Names in Headings
a. To distinguish between corporate bodies with the same name, additions to other corporate
names, and headings for governments and non-governmental communities.
b. The basic principle is to use the English form of the name of a place if there is one in general
use. Otherwise, the vernacular form is used.
c. The name of a larger place is added to the name of a place located within a larger place. Unless
the place is located within one of the exceptional countries, this geographic qualifier normally
consists of the name of the country.
d. If the name of the country fails to distinguish between two places with the same name, the name
of a smaller geographic entity is also added.
e. In the case of a number of countries, the name of a jurisdiction immediately below the country
level is used as the geographic qualifier. These exceptional countries include Australia, Canada,
Great Britain, and the United States.
f. Geographic qualifiers are not added to the states, provinces, territories, etc., within the
exceptional countries (England, Massachusetts, Northern Ireland, Ontario)

96
 3. Headings for Corporate Bodies
Enter a corporate body directly under the name by which it is commonly identified, except when the rules
that follow provide for entering it under the name of a higher or related body or under the name of the
government.
a. Subordinate and Related Bodies
University of Illinois. Library
Electrochemical Society. Electronics Division.
American Society of Chemical Engineers. Vibrations and Sound Committee.
b. Direct or Indirect Subheading
Direct Subheading
American Library Association. Reference Tools Advisory Committee.
American Library Association Reference and Adult Services Division.
Reference Tools Advisory Committee.
Indirect Subheading
American Library Association. Reference and Adult Services Division. History Section.
Bibliography and Indexes Committee.
American Library Association
Reference and Adult Services Division
History Section
Bibliography and Indexes Committee
c. Conferences, Congresses, Meetings, etc.
Headings for these are established in the form:
*** Name of conference (number if any: date [year/mo./inclusive days] : place or institution).
d. Governments and Government Bodies
United States.
Chicago (Ill.)
Edinburgh (Scotland)
National Research Council (U.S.)
University of North Dakota.
Library of Congress.
United States. Internal Revenue Service.
California. Bureau of Employment Agencies.
Cambridge (Mass.). Division of Parks and Forestry.
e. Government Official
Forms:
1. Heading for Government. Title of the Office.
2. Heading for Government. Title of the Office (Inclusive years of the reign of incumbency :
Name of Person in Brief Form)
3. Works by pope, patriarchs, bishops, etc., are treated similarly.
Ex. Catholic Church. Pope (1978- : John Paul II)

*Uniform Titles

The particular title by which work has appeared under varying titles is to be identified for cataloging purposes.
The uniform title brings together under one heading the various manifestations ( ex. Editions, translations) of work
regardless of how many different titles it has appeared under.

*** If you use a uniform title, choose the title by which the work is best known (decide this by consulting
reference sources and other publications of the same works, but if in doubt, choose the earliest titles)

*** If the entry is under name heading, place the uniform title between the name heading and the title proper,
and enclose the uniform title in square brackets [ ]

*** Choose a title in the original language.

Examples:

Dickens, Charles
[Pickwick papers]
The posthumous papers of the Pickwick Club

97
Shakespeare, William
[Hamlet]
The tragical history of Hamlet, Prince of Denmark

Swift, Jonathan
[Gulliver's travels]

France
[Constitution (1946)]

Canada. Dept. of Public Works

[Annual report (1965)]

Teorema. English
Theorem

Special Rules for the Bible

The general formula for the heading for a particular version of the Bible:
1. Bible. [O.T. or N.T]. [individual book or group of books]. [language]. [version]. [year].
ex. Bible. N. T. Luke. English. New English. 1965 Bible. English. Living Bible. 1989.
2. For selections and miscellaneous extracts from the Bible, the elements are arranged in the following
manner:
a. Bible. [language]. [version]. Selections. [date].
ex. Bible. English. Authorized. Selections. 1972.
b. Bible. [O.T. or N. T.]. [individual book or group of books]. [language]. [version]. Selections.
[date].
ex. Bible. O.T. Psalms. English. New International. Selections. 1988.
3. Other sacred scriptures.
Rules pertaining to the uniform titles for other sacred scriptures, such as the Koran, Talmud, and Vedas,
are also provided.
ex. Koran. Surat al-Baqarah
Talmud. English. Selections.
Vedas. Atharvaveda.

Forms of Headings
1. Single-concept headings - appear in the form of single-word terms or multiple-word terms.
a. Single-word headings - a single noun or substantive is chosen as the heading when it precisely
represents the object or concept. e.g., noun headings: Chapels, Economics, Forgery, Humanism,
Railroads substantives: Aged, Poor, Sick
b. Multiple-word headings - when a concept or object cannot be expressed properly by a single noun
(word), a phrase is used.
 Adjectival phrase - consists of an adjectival modifier followed by a noun or noun phrase: Military
supplies, Rural churches, Jewish etiquette, American drama, Brownian movements,
Laminated plastics, Carpenter's square, California Railroad Strike, 1894
 Prepositional phrase - consists of two or more nouns, with or without modifiers, connected by a
preposition (s): Children as musicians, Community mental health services for children,
Grooming for men, Divine rights of kings, Communication in birth control, Discrimination
in housing, Catalog of art, Church and state in Wales
 Conjunctive phrase headings - consists of two or more nouns, with or without modifiers,
connected by the word "and" or ending with "etc." is used: Good and evil, Libel and slander,
Crime and criminals, Boats and boating, Religion and international affairs, Literature and
society, Television and children
2. Inverted headings - used to bring the significant word into prominent positions as the entry elements:
Chemistry, Organic/ Knowledge, Theory of/ Insurance, Life/ Insurance, Social
3. Multiple concept headings.

98
 Subdivisions of Main Headings
1. Topical Subdivision - a subdivision that represents a kind or a part of the main subject. Use to limit the
concept expressed by the heading to a special subtopic.
e.g., Heart -- Diseases, Agriculture -- Taxation, Nursing - Research
2. Form Subdivision - an extension of a subject heading based on the bibliographic or physical form or
literary or artistic genre on which the material in a work is organized and/or presented.
e.g., Nursing- Study and teaching, Education - Examinations, questions, etc.
3. Chronological Subdivision - also called period or time subdivisions. Used with heading for the history of
a place or subject.
e.g., Philippines - History - 16th century, United States - History - 21st century, France-History-
Revolution, 1789-1793, English Literature- Middle English, 1500-1700
4. Geographic Subdivision - indicates the origin or locality of the main subject and may be used after
subjects that lend themselves to geographic treatment.
a. Direct geographic Subdivision - the name of the place follows the heading or another
subdivision immediately without the interposition of the name of a larger geographic entity.
e.g., Education, Elementary - Philippines, Music - Indonesia, Art – Thailand
b. Indirect geographic subdivision-the name of the larger geographic entity, normally the
country's name, is interposed between the main heading and the place in question. e.g.,
Charities - Philippines - Manila
5. Free-floating Subdivision - a subdivision that may be used under any existing appropriate subject heading
for the first time without establishing the usage editorially.
e.g. -- Accounting/ -- Addresses, essays, etc./ Taxation/ Examinations/ Examinations, questions, etc.
/ Problems, exercises, etc. / Handbooks, manuals, etc. /Maps/ Environmental aspects/ History/
English language/ Economic aspects/ Atlases/ Legal, status, law, etc. I Study and teaching/ Law and
legislation/ History and criticism / Methods

Cross References - are provided to connect related headings in the catalog

1. See ( or Use) Reference - a reference from a term or name not used as a heading to one that is used.
e.g., Third world countries
See
Developing countries
2. See also (BT, NT, and RT) references- connect headings related in some way, either hierarchically or
otherwise.
Related Term (RT) reference is used to link headings related to the concept but not in a hierarchical
sense.
e.g., Physicians
RT Medicine
Broader Term (BT) and Narrower Term (NT) indicate a hierarchical relationship, and all headings
connected by these terms are all valid.
e.g., Poetry
BR Literature
NT Classical poetry
Lyric poetry
3. General Reference- direct the user to a group or category of headings instead of individual members
of the group or category. Sometimes called the blanket reference and is represented by the symbol SA
e.g., Atlases
SA subdivision Maps under names of countries, cities, etc., and other topics.
General Guidelines in Assigning Subject Headings
1. Specificity- assign the most specific heading which represents exactly the contents of the item.
2. Works on a single topic- assign the heading which represents exactly the content of the item
3. Multi-topical work
*** Two or three related topics in a work- if a heading that exists represents precisely the two or three topics,
do not assign it on the two or three headings. e.g.
Title: The distinctive excellences in Greek and Latin Literature
Subject Heading: Classical literature
*** Rule of three - If a broad heading exists, but includes two or three topics in question, assign two or three
headings, not the broader heading.
Title: Infants, children, and adolescence
99
 Subject Headings: Child development
Infants - Development
Adolescence
*** Rule of four - means that specific headings are preferred when the work being cataloged deals with four
topics, each of which forms only a small portion of a general topic.
Title: The first golden age of the Viennese symphony: Haydn, Mozart, Beethoven, and Schubert
Subject Headings: Symphony-18th century.
Symphony - 19th century.
Haydn, Joseph, 1732-1809. Symphonies.
Beethoven, Ludwig van, 1770-1827. Symphonies.
Schubert, Franz Peter, 1797-1828. Symphonies.
Symphonies - Analysis, appreciation.
4. Multi-element work- if a work treats a single subject from different aspects or contains various elements of one topic,
use one pre-coordinated heading if there is one available.
Title: Chemical plant management in Japan
Subject Heading: Chemical plants - Japan - Management

Subject Cataloging - The process of providing subject access points to bibliographic records. The process of assigning
subject headings to materials being cataloged.

Objectives of Subject Cataloging

1. To provide access by subject to all relevant materials.

2. To provide subject access to materials through all applicable principles of subject organization.
3. To bring together references to materials that treat substantially the same subject regardless of disparities
in terminology.
4. To show affiliations among subject fields.
5. To provide entry to any subject field at any level of analysis.
6. To provide entry through any vocabulary common to any considerable group as users.
7. To provide a formal description of the subject content.
8. To provide means for the user to make selection from among all items in any particular category.

Basic Principles

1. The User and the Usage

The convenience of the public is always to be set before the ease of the cataloger Haykin calls this
guiding principle "the reader as the focus."
2. Literary Warrant
The principle which allows a category to exist in a classification or thesaurus only if a work exists for
that category. The use of an actual collection or holdings of a library or actual published works as the basis
for developing a classification scheme or thesaurus.
3. Uniform Heading
Use of one heading in one form only for a given subject, purposely to avoid scattering of terms.
a. Choice among synonymous terms
ex. Church history
Ecclesiastical history
Religious history
b. Choice between variant spellings
ex. Labor Catalog Archaeology Aesthetics
Labour Catalogue Archeology Esthetics
c. Choice between English and foreign terms
Cutter's rule concerning language states:
"When possible, let the heading be in English, but a foreign word may be used when no
English word expresses the subject of a work."
Foreign terms should be used only under the following conditions (Haykin):
1. When the concept is foreign to the Anglo-American experience, and no satisfactory term for it
exists. ex. Reallast, Precieuses

100
 2. When, especially in the case of scientific names, the foreign term is precise, whereas the English
one is not. ex. Ophiodon elongates, rather than Buffalo cod, or Blue cod
d. Choice between technical (or scientific) and popular terms
The choice must be different in a general library serving a general public from that in a special library
serving specialists.
ex. Cockroaches instead of Blattariae, and Lizards instead of Lacertilia.

In some cases, scientific terms are used instead of popular ones.

ex. Ascorbic acid instead of Vitamin C and Bioflavonoids instead of Vitamin P.
e. Choice between obsolete and current terms
The current term is preferred.
ex. Computers instead of Electronic-calculating machines
4. Unique Heading
Each heading should represent only one subject.
*Homograph. A word that is spelled the same as another word but differs in meaning and origin and may
differ in pronunciation and syllabication.
A modifier is added to differentiate between the homographs.
ex. Rings (Jewelry)
Rings (Algebra)
Rings (Gymnastics)
5. Specific Entry and Coextensivity
Specific entry. An item is entered under its subject heading, not under the heading of a class that includes
the subject.
ex. "The Cat"
Cats (Specific direct entry)
Zoology - Vertebrates - Mammals - Domestic animals - Cats (Specific indirect entry)
6. Pre-Coordination and Post-Coordination
a. Pre-coordinate system - multiple terns representing a topic and its aspects are pre-combined in the
source vocabulary or by the cataloger or the indexer at the time of cataloging or indexing using
prepositions or other devices to show how the terms are interrelated.
b. Post-coordinate system - terms for the main subject and its aspects are simply listed separately, and the
searchers combine the terms at the point of retrieval.

Subject Cataloging Systems

1. The List of Subject Headings for use in Dictionary Catalogs ( 1895) - used by the American Library
Association and is based on Cutter's principles. Editions: 1895, 1898, 1911.
2. Subject Headings used in the Dictionary Catalogues of the Library of Congress (1910-1914) became a
standard tool for subject cataloging for American Libraries.
3. Library of Congress Subject Headings
a. Originally designed as a controlled vocabulary for representing the subject and form of the books
and serials in the Library of Congress collection to provide subject access points to the bibliographic
records contained in the Library of Congress Catalogs.
b. It is also used as a tool for subject cataloging and indexing by other countries.
4. List of Subject Headings for Small Libraries (1923) was compiled by Minnie Earl Sears, intended for
medium-sized or small libraries.
5. Sears List of Subject Headings (6th ed.)
6. Medical Subject Headings is the system designed and used by the National Library of Medicine for
assigning subject headings to books and journal articles in the medical sciences.

Subject Cataloging Process

1. Subject analysis or conceptual analysis - identifying the concepts/topics in a work and determining what
aspects of it the users will be interested in
a. Write down the title of the document. (Raw Title)
b. Read through the other parts of the item: Introduction, Foreword, Preface, Table of Contents, etc. in
order to identify and express the specific content of the item. (Expressive Title)
c. Write down the Kernel Title by arranging the kernel terms which denote each of the substantive ideas
and dropping the auxiliary words and connectives such as articles, prepositions, and conjunctions.

101
 d. Write down the Transformed Title by rearranging the kernel terms in a sequence that would show
which concept is the most significant.
e. Replace the terms in the transformed title with standard terms using a standard list or controlled
vocabulary.
2. Translation occurs when standard terms in the controlled vocabulary are used to represent the subject
heading of an item.

Classification

The act of organizing the universe of knowledge into some systematic order in the library context, classification refers both to
the development of schemes for the systematic display of all aspects of the various fields of knowledge and the art of arranging
books or other objects in conformity with such schemes. It is used both for the creation of a classification scheme. It is used both
for the creation of a classification scheme and for its application.

For clarity, the inventor or creator of a classification scheme or a person engaged in the theory of classification is called a
classificationist. In contrast, the person who applies such scheme is referred to as a classifier.

Purpose of Classification

1. To arrange items in the library shelves in a logical order

2. To provide systematic display of bibliographic entries in printed catalogs, bibliographies, and indexes 'Collocation
system'.
3. In some online catalogs, classification serves a direct retrieval function.
a. As a shelving device, classification helps the user identify and locate a work through a call number and to group
all works of a kind.
b. As a retrieval tool, classification may help to identity and retrieve a group of related items as well as specific
known items.

Basic concepts/types of classification

1. Traditional theory of classification/logical or philosophical principles of classification

Classification begins with the universe of knowledge as a whole and divides it into successive stages of classes and
subclasses, with a chosen characteristic as the basis for each stage.
2. Modern classification theory
Places emphasis on facet analysis and synthesis or the “breaking up” of a subject into its component parts and the
synthesis or “reassembling of those parts as required by the document to be represented.
3. Close classification
The content of a work is specified by a notation to the fullest extent possible. It is classing each subject as completely
as possible, taking into consideration all available minute subdivisions as represented in the particular classification
schedule.
4. Broad classification
A work is placed in a broad class by use of notation that has been logically abridged. It is classing the material in main
divisions and subdivisions without using the minute breakdown of individual categories. For example, one library may
need to classify the King James Bibles using DDC in 220.52…, whereas a library with a small collection of books in
this area may cut back to the broad number 220.

Notation

A device consisting of numerals, letters, and/or, other symbols used to represent the main subordinate divisions of a classification
scheme.

1. Pure notation – one kind of symbol is used consistently

2. Mixed notation – two or more kinds of symbols are used
3. Hierarchical notation – one that reflects the structural order or hierarchy of the classification
4. Expressive notation – one that expresses relationships among coordinate subjects.

General Principles of Classification

1. Consider usefulness
2. Class by subject, then by form / Make subject the primary consideration
3. Use the most specific number or classification available
4. Do not classify from the index alone

102
 Classification of multitopical works

1. Determine the dominant subject or the phase relations.

a. Dominant subject – classify under the dominant subject when one can be determined
b. Phase relations – interrelationships of subjects treated in a work.
i. Influence phase – classify a work about the influence of one thing on another under the subject or
author being influenced.
ii. Bias phase – classify a work on a particular subject written with a bias toward, or aiming at a specific
group of readers.
iii. Tool or application phase – classify a work such as Chemical calculations: an introduction to the use
of mathematics in chemistry under the subject chemistry instead of the tool mathematics.
iv. Comparison phase – class under the subject emphasized, or under the first subject.
2. Class under the first subject – if the dominant subject cannot be ascertained, class under the first subject.
3. Class under broader subject – class under the broader subject of a work dealing with two or three subjects that are
subdivisions of a broader subject and that together constitute the major portion of that subject.
Historical Development of the Organization of Information
Antiquity
2000 BC Sumerian tablet, one of the oldest lists of books, was found at Nippur. Sixty-two titles are recorded on this
tablet, of which 24 are titles of currently known literary works.
1500 BC The Hittites recorded bibliographic information of written works onto tablets. Their tablets included
colophons, a set of data at the end of a "document" that traced kinds of bibliographic data, such as number
of the tablet in a series, its title, and the name of the scribe.
650 BC The citizens in the city of Nineveh developed a library that provided a collection that had a systematic
means of order and authenticity.

Greek civilization has contributed to the incarnation of the "main entry" concept, a western civilization
manifestation. Early Far Eastern societies and even today designate a work's title as its main entry.

Middle Ages
In Europe, there were church and monastery libraries. The demand for knowledge was not of great
interest to the common man and woman.
8th century Catalogs of library holdings during this period were largely inventories of relatively small collections.
800 -1200 There is evidence of very broad subject arrangements. The categories were usually two: Biblical and
Humanistic
1300 At the end of the 13th century, a milestone in the organization of information was attempted. The Registrum
Librorum Angliae, a union list of holdings of English monastery libraries.
European Renaissance
1450 ca. The printing press was invented - creating an explosion in publishing and duplicate copies of works. The
vocation of "Bibliographer" became a by-product of the existence of the printing press.
1595 St. Martins Priory at Dover, the first list designated as a catalog. The catalog had 3 sections of
arrangement. Part 1. Call number - located the exact location where a volume could be found. Part 2. Also
arranged by call number. Contain the contents of each volume, with paging and opening words. Part 3.
Alphabetical listing by author and title and entries of each volume found within a published work, called
an analytical entry.
1596 Andrew Maunsell, an English bookseller, compiled his Catalog of English Printed Books that was prefaced
with rules of entry. Maunsell introduced the entry of personal names listed under surnames rather than
forenames. This concept helped to promote the early developments of bibliographic control.
College libraries were just developing with very small collections that were arranged in an inventory
fashion.
From Inventories to Codifying Devices
1697 Konrad Gesner published an author bibliography. Included was a preface that offered cross-references and
variations of names.
1698 Konrad Gesnar published a subject index.
1791 Frederic Rostgaard published a discourse on cataloging in which he called for subject arrangement
subdivided chronologically and by size of volume. Rostgaard also promoted a supplementary author index.
1792 Following the French Revolution, the French government sent out instructions for cataloging the
collections of the libraries that had been confiscated throughout France. This marks the first instance of a
national code. Libraries were directed to make card catalogs--the first instance of card catalogs. The
reverse sides of playing cards were used as the source for recording the information.

103
 Period of Codification
1831 Anthony Panizzi, a lawyer and political refugee from Italy and an assistant librarian at the British Museum,
was a strong advocate of cataloging and subject analysis. Panizzi authored a cataloging code known as the
"91 rules". Panizzi is credited with the start of developing the "modern" theories of cataloging.
1850 Charles C. Jewett marked the introduction of the American influence to cataloging and arrangement.
Jewett build on Panizzi's earlier efforts. Jewett is credited with developing rules for entry as they relate
corporate authors.
1876 Charles Cutter published his Rules for a Printed Dictionary Catalogue. Cutter's efforts placed emphasis
on establishing rules on filing entries. Cutter was also the first to establish rules for subject headings.
Melvil Dewey, issued anonymously the first edition of his classification. Dewey divided all knowledge into
ten main classes, with each of those divided again into ten divisions, and each of those divided into ten
sections. Dewey is a landmark in the area of classification. Now in its 21st addition (DDC21).
Description
In the twentieth century, the emphasis on description was rooted in codes.
1908 The British and the Americans collaborated on a code in 1908. This collaboration was significant, because
it serves as the first international cataloging code to be established
1931 Americans and Italians collaborated to published the Vatican Code. It was quickly accepted by catalogers
in many countries as the best and most complete code in existence, but because it was written in Italian,
most Americans could not apply it.
1941 The British and the Americans cooperated on publishing a second edition to the volume that was written in
1908. This code was written in two parts: one for entry and heading, and one for description.
The Library of Congress (LC) Rules for Descriptive Cataloging, served as a substitute to the second
part of the British and the American effort.
1949 The revisions, A.L.A Cataloging rules for Author and Title Entries, were written after great criticism by
Andrew Osborn in an article that he authored entitled "The Crisis in Cataloging."
1967 The Americans and the British collaborated to establish the Anglo-American Cataloging Rules. Because
there was disagreement on a few points, this work was published in two separate versions: North American
and British.
The presidents of the colleges and universities in the state of Ohio founded the Ohio College Library
Center (OCLC) to develop a computerized system in which the libraries of Ohio academic institutions
could share resources and reduce costs.
1974 The International Federation of Library Associations (IFLA) issued the International Standard
Bibliographic Description (ISBD), produced as a means for the international communication of
bibliographic information. The ISBD's objectives were to make records from different sources
interchangeable, facilitate their interpretation against language barriers, and facilitate converting such
records to machine-readable form.
1977 The Research Libraries Information Network (RLIN) was established to serve research libraries
particularly.
1978 The AACR2 was published to accommodate the developments established by the ISBD, address non-book
materials, take into account machine processing of bibliographic records, and reconcile the British and
American texts.
1988 A revised edition of the AACR2 was published.
1998 The latest revised edition of the AACR2 was published.
Classifications Schemes / Systems

1. Expansive Classification "EC" (Charles Ammi Cutter, 1837-1903)

- For the Boston Athenaeum
- Published 1891-1893
- Served as a model for the early development of the Library of Congress Classification
2. Universal Decimal Classification - UDC
- An adaptation of DDC
- Proponents: Paul Otlet and Henri La Fontaine
3. Subject Classification "SC" (James Duff Brown, 1862-1914)
- First appeared in 1906
- Follows the order of scientific progression

104
 - Brown is famous for his "one-place theory," he was also responsible for the Quinn-Brown Classification (with Henry
Quinn) in 1849, which was modified by Brown and was published in 1898 as Adjustable Classification.
4. Colon Classification (Shiyali Ramamrita Ranganathan, 1892-1972)
- 1st edition was published in 1933
- 6th edition appeared in 1963
- 7th edition published in 1987 (continued by M.A. Gopinath due to Ranganathan's death)
- S.R. Ranganathan's best-known writing was Prolegomena to Library Classification
- S.R. Ranganathan was considered by many because of his contributions to the theory of facet analysis and synthesis.
5. Bibliographic Classification "BC" (Henry Evelyn Bliss, 1870-1955)
- Organization of knowledge and the system of the sciences (1929), and Organization of knowledge in libraries and the
subject approach to books (1933; 2nd ed. 1939).
- In 1967, an abridged BC was published by the School Library Association.
- From the beginning, several principles guided Bliss's work; these are: consensus, collocation of related subjects,
subordination of special to general, gradation in a speciality, and the opportunity for
alternative locations and treatments.
6. Dewey Decimal Classification System (Melvil Dewey, 1851-1931)
- Conceived as a classification of knowledge for the purpose of organizing a library.
- Oldest classification system. In Dewey Decimal Classification, the universe of knowledge is divided into ten main
divisions, each called a main class, and each main class is further divided into ten divisions, and each division into ten sections.
e.g. 532
500 Main Class Science
30 Division Physics
2 Section Gas mechanics
- A decimal point or dot follows the third digit in a class number, after which division by ten continues to the specific
degree of classification needed. The dot is used as a psychological pause to break the monotony of numerical digits and ease the
class number's transcription and copying.
Volume 1: **Tables**
Volume 2: **The organization of Knowledge from 000-599
Volume 3: **The organization of knowledge from 600-999
Volume 4: **Relative index.
Tables in DDC *on Volume 1
Table 1. Standard subdivisions
Table 2. Geographic Areas
Table 3. Subdivisions for the Arts, for Individual Literatures, for Specific Literary Forms
T3A- Subdivisions for works by or about individual authors
T3B - Subdivisions for works by or about more than one author
T3C - Notation to be added (Table 3B, 700.4, 791.4, 808-809
Table 4. Subdivisions of individual languages and Language families
Table 5. Racial, Ethnic, and National Groups
Table 6. Languages

105
Notes
1. Definition notes - indicate the meaning of a term in the heading
2. Scope notes - indicate whether the meaning of the number is narrower or broader than what is apparent from the heading
3. Number-built notes - identify and explain the source of built numbers included in the schedules and tables
4. Former-heading notes - are given only when a heading has been altered to such a degree that the new heading bears little
or no resemblance to the old.
5. Variant-name notes- used for synonyms and near-synonyms.
6. Class-here notes - list major topics in a class that may be broader or narrower than the heading, overlap it or define
another way of looking at essentially the same material.
7. Including notes - identify topics that have "standing" in the number where the note is found.
8. Class-elsewhere notes - lead the classifier to interrelated topics, or distinguish, among numbers in the same notational
hierarchy.
9. See references
10. See also references
11. Discontinued notes - indicate that all or part of the contents has been moved to a different number.
12. Do-not-use notes - instruct the user not to use all or part of the regular standard subdivision notation or an add table
provision in favor of a special or standard subdivisions at a broader number.
7. Library of Congress Classification
- Designed by J.C.M. Hanson and Charles Martel using Cutter's Expansive Classification as basis
- For notation, it uses a three-element pattern: first, single capital letters for main classes, with one or two capital letters
for their subclasses, second, Arabic integers from 1 to 9999 for subdivisions, and third, cutter number for individual
books. Decimal integers and the use of Cutter numbers were allowed to accommodate expansion.
- Consists of 21 classes in over 40 separately published schedules (volumes)
- Organization of divisions within a class, subclass, or subject originally followed a general pattern known as Martel's
seven points:
1. General form divisions
2. Theory/Philosophy
3. History
4. Treatises and general work
5. Law/Regulation/State relations
6. Study and teaching
7. Special subjects and subdivisions of subjects
- Main classes consist of single capital letters.
- Subclasses - each of the main classes, with the exception of E, F, and Z is divided into subclasses that represent
disciplines or major branches of the main class.
- Divisions - each subclass is further divided into divisions that represent components of the subclass. Each of the
divisions, in turn, has subdivisions specifying different aspects of the subject, such as form, time, place, and more
detailed subject subdivisions.
Tables in LC
Tables of General applications
1. Tables for geographic divisions by means of cutter numbers
* Regions and countries in one alphabet (By country A-Z or By region or country, A-Z)
2. Biography table
* When works about a person, including autobiography, letters, speeches, and biography, are classed in a number
designated for individual biography, they are sub-arranged according to the biography table.
Tables of limited applications
1. Tables applicable to an individual class or subclass
 Author tables used throughout the schedules for class P, Language, and Literature
 Form tables used in the schedules of class K, Law
 Geographic tables in class H, Social Sciences and class S, Agriculture.
2. Tables of internal sub-arrangement - designed for use with specific spans of numbers that are scattered throughout the
schedules.

106
Notes
1. Scope notes - explain the type of works to be classified in that subject, may refer the classifier to related topics elsewhere
in the schedule or in another schedule.
2. Including notes - list subjects that are included within a subject
3. See notes - refer the classifier to a number elsewhere in the schedules, often as a result of reclassification decision. **
A number in parentheses indicates that the number is no longer in use, and a see reference is given.
4. Confer notes (Cf)- indicate that related topics are classified elsewhere in the schedules.
5. Apply table notes- refer the classifier to a table with subdivision instructions so that the same instruction is not repeated
on the same page or several times over a couple of pages.
MARC BASICS
MARC - Machine-Readable Cataloging
• the transcription of the descriptions used in AACR to a language that computer systems can read and manipulate. The
Library of Congress developed this in consultation with other libraries. This enabled many libraries from all over the
world to exchange cataloging data with each other. UNIMARC was created as an international version and used widely
in Europe but had not become the international standard.
USES of MARC format
• printing catalog data in a variety of formats such as subject bibliographies
• producing other products such as accessions lists, shelf lists, book and spine labels
• producing different types of catalogs such as microfiche and online public access catalogs
• standardizing a machine-readable format for bibliographic records for the exchange of cataloging data among libraries
all over the world.
The MARC Record
The record structure
• implementation of national and international standards, such as the Information Interchange Format ANSI Z39.2 and
Format for Information Exchange ISO 2709
The content designation
• codes and conventions that explicitly identify and characterize the data elements within a record to facilitate the manipulation
of data, defined in the MARC 21 Format for Bibliographic Data and other MARC 21 formats maintained by the Library of
Congress
The data content of the record
• defined by external standards such as AACR2, Library of Congress Subject Headings (LCSH), etc.
The MARC 21 Format for Bibliographic Data contains data elements for the following types of materials:
 Books
 Continuing resources
 Computer files
 Maps
 Music
 Sound recordings
 Visual materials
 Mixed materials
Signposts Data Record
Main entry Amosky, Jim 100 1# $a Arnosky, Jim.
Title and statement of 245 10 $a Raccoons and ripe corn / $b Jim
Raccoons and ripe corn / Jim Arnosky
responsibility Arnosky.
Edition statement 1st ed 250 ## $a 1st ed.

107
 Signposts Data Record
Publication, distribution New York : Lothrop Lee & Shepard 260 ## $a New York: $b Lothrop Lee &
area Books, c1987 Shepard Books $c c1987.
Physical description 25 p. : col. Ill. ; 26 cm. 300 ## $a 25 p. : $b col. ill. ; $c 26 cm.
area
Note area Hungry raccoons feast at night in a field 520 ## $a Hungry raccoons feast at night in a
of ripe corn field of ripe corn.

Signposts Data Record

Subject added entries Raccoons 650 #1 $a Raccoons.
Local call number 599.74 ARN 900 ## $a 599.74 ARN
Local barcode number 8009 901 ## $a 8009
Local price $15.00 903 ## $a $15.00
MARC21 Formats
Bibliographic format
• for encoding bibliographic data in records that are surrogates for information packages
Authority format
• for encoding authority data collected in authority records created to help control the content of those surrogate record
fields that are subject to authority control
Holdings format
• for encoding data elements in holdings records that show the holdings and location data for information packages
described in surrogate records
Community information format
• for encoding data in records that contain information about events, programs, services, and the like
Classification data format
• for encoding data elements related to classification numbers, the captions associated with them, their hierarchies, and
the subject headings with which they correlate.
MARC Tag Fields
• 0XX fields - Control information, numbers, codes
• 1XX fields - Main entry
• 2XX fields - Titles, edition, imprint
• 3XX fields - Physical description, etc.
• 4XX fields - Series statements (as shown in item)
• 5XX fields - Notes
• 6XX fields - Subject added entries
• 7XX fields - Added entries other than subject or series
• 8XX fields - Series added entries (other authoritative forms)

BASIC RESOURCE DESCRIPTION AND ACCESS

Source of information
• For multi-sheet, multi-page – use title page
108
 • Treat as an integral part of the resource any storage medium case/box/housing/cartridge as part of the resource itself and
a possible source of information
• Early printed sources – colophon, cover, caption
• Moving images – title frame(s)
Recording titles
• Transcribe as it appears on the source of information
• Abridge a long title
• For serial title or integrating resource, correct obvious typographic errors and make a note
• If a title of a serial includes a date, name, number that varies from issue to issue, omit this date, name number, etc. Use
(…) to indicate omission
• If a title mentions an earlier title, title absorbed, etc., that may or may not be grammatically linked to the rest of the title,
do not transcribe. Record earlier title as related work
• If a title of a serial includes a date, name, number that varies from issue to issue, omit this date, name number etc., Use
(…) to indicate omission
• If a title mentions an earlier title, title absorbed, etc., that may or may not be grammatically linked to the rest of the title,
do not transcribe. Record earlier title as related work
• Parts, sections, and supplements – record the common title followed by the title of the part/section supplement. Use full
stop to separate
• Advanced calculus. Student handbook
• Journal of polymer science. Part A, General papers
• Progress in nuclear energy. Series II, Reactors
Example
RDA REF RDA DATA
ELEMENT
2.3.2 Title proper CA magazine
2.3.9 Key title CA magazine
(Toronto)
2.3.10 Abbreviated title CA mag. (Tor.)

MARC MARC INDICATORS DATA

FIELD FIELD
TAG
210 Abbreviated 0# $a CA mag.
key title $b (Tor.)
222 Key Title #0 $a CA
magazine $b
(Toronto
245 Title 00 $a CA
statement magazine.
Title proper* (2.3.2)
• Title proper and earlier and later variants of the title proper are core elements. Other titles are optional

109
Title
• Title proper * (2.3.2)
• Parallel title (2.3.3)
• Other title information (2.3.4)
• Parallel other title information (2.3.5)
• Variant title (2.3.6)
• Earlier variant title* (2.3.7)
• Later variant title* (2.3.8)
• Key title (2.3.9)
• Abbreviated title (2.3.10)
Title proper* (2.3.2)
• Title in more than one form or language or script – choose the main language of the written, spoken or sung content of
the resource; choose the form on the basis of sequence, layout or typography, or most comprehensive form
CRISP
• Source of information reads: CRISP. Complex radar image and signal processing
Collective title and titles of individual contents
• Record collective title as the title proper
• Record individual contents as titles of related works
Other elements as part of the title proper
• Musical composition, medium of performance, key, etc. – treat as title proper
– Songs & dances
– Rhapsody
– Piano concertos 1 & 2
• Scale in cartographic resource
– include in title if stated in the title
– Topographic 1:500,000 low flying chart
• No title
– Take from another source
– Devise a title
• Changes in title proper
– Change in a subsequent part - Record later title as a later variation of the title proper
– Serials (major) – make new description and relate the two works
– Serials (minor) – record as later variation in the title proper
Parallel title (2.3.3)
• Title proper in another language or script
• Take from any source within the resource
• Transcribe as such
Other title information (2.3.4)
• Information appearing in conjunction with and is subordinate to the title proper of a resource

110
 • May be supplied for cartographic resources and moving images
Bourne legacy : [trailer]
Variant title (2.3.6)
• Title associated with a resource that differs from a title recorded as the title proper, a parallel title, an alternative tit le or
other title information
– Appears in the resource itself
– Associated through reference sources
– Assigned by agency, creator, previous owners, custodians
– Corrections to titles appearing in the resource in an incorrect form
– Part of the title
Example
RDA RDA Data RDA RDA Data
Ref Element Ref Element
2.3.2 Title proper Black X-mas 2.3.2 Title proper Tolkien Society home
page
2.3.3 Parallel title Noël noir
2.3.6 Variant title Welcome to the
2.3.6 Variant title Black Christmas
Tolkien Society home
page

RDA RDA Data

Ref Element
2.3.2 Title proper 219 days
2.3.6 Variant title Two hundred and
nineteen days

Earlier variant title* (2.3.7)

• Title proper, parallel title, other title information, or parallel other title information appearing on an earlier iteration of
an integrating resource that differs from that on the current iteration
– Securities law, fraud—SEC rule 10b-5
• Earlier title proper appearing on iterations 1967-October? 1979
Later variant title* (2.3.8)
• A title proper, parallel title, other title information, or parallel other title information appearing on a later issue or part
of a multipart monograph or serial that differs from that on the first or earliest issue or part
RDA Ref RDA Element Data
2.3.2 Title proper Annual report
of pipeline
safety
2.3.8 Later variant Annual report
title on pipeline
safety
2.20.2.4 Title variations, Later variant
inaccuracies, title appearing
and deletions on issues from
199 on

111
Key title (2.3.9)
• Unique name assigned to a resource by an ISSN registration agency
Abbreviated title (2.3.10)
• Title that has been abbreviated for purposes of indexing
Devised title
• For resources with no title itself and no title associated with it from other sources
• Indicate – nature of the resource and/or subject
– Photograph of Theodore Roosevelt
– Sydney Bicycle Club Badge
• Music – include the medium of performance, numeric designation, key and other distinguishing characteristics
applicable
• Map – the name of area and subject portrayed
• Moving images – name or product and advertisement
• Archival resources – name of creator, source, collector
– Daniel Murray Collection of W.E.B. Du Bois photographs displayed at the International Exposition in Paris,
1900
Statement of responsibility* (2.4)
• Transcribe in the form in which it appears on the source of information
• More than one – record as single statement
Edited by P.C. Wason and P.N Johnson-Laird
Duke Ellington and his orchestra
Compiled and edited by Richard L. Coulton with the assistance of voluntary aid
• More than three in the same function – omit all but the first, indicate what has been omitted, enclose indication in square
brackets
Roger Colbourne [and six others]
• For clarification of role – enclose in square brackets
[music by] Mario Castelnuovo-Tedesco
• Noun phrases – treat as part of statement
research and text by Colin Barham
Edition statement* (2.5)
• Transcribe as it appears on the source of information
Second edition
Director’s cut
2nd edition
Revised edition
Household ed.
• If a designation consists of a letter or letters and/or a number or numbers without accompanying words, add an
appropriate word enclosed in square brackets
3e [edition]

112
Designation of a named revision of an edition* (2.5.6)
• A word or phrase or group of characters identifying a particular revision of a named edition
reprinted with corrections
Designation: 4th ed.
New edition, revised, reset, and illustrated
Designation: World’s classics edition
Numbering of serials* (2.6)
• Numeric and/or alphabetic designation of the first issue or part (2.6.2), chronological designation of first issue or
part(2.6.3), numeric and/or alphabetic designation of last issue or part (2.6.4), and chronological designation of last issue
or part (2.6.5) are core elements. Other numbering is optional
• Record numbers expressed as numerals or as words
• Transcribe other words, characters or groups of words as they appear on the source of information
• July/August 2005
• Vol. 1, no. 1
• Summer 1978

RDA RDA element DATA

ref
2.3.2 Title proper CA magazine
2.6.2 Numeric and/or volume 104, no. 1
alphabetic
designation of first
issue or part of
sequence
2.6.3 Chronological January 1974
designation of first
issue or part of
sequence

• Ceased publication – record the numbering for both the first issue and last issue; if first issue is not available, record
only the last issue
Production statement (2.7)
• Place of production (2.7.2) – inscription, fabrication, construction of a resource in an unpublished form
• Record both the local place and the name of the larger jurisdiction if present. Full address may be included.
• If place of production is not identified, record a probable place of production
• [Salem, Mass.]
• [Port Alberni, British Columbia?]
• [Denmark]
• [France?]
• Producer’s name (2.7.4)
• Record words or phrases indicating the function performed by a person, family, or corporate body as they
appear on the resource
• If no producer is named, record producer not identified

113
 • Date of production (2.7.6)
• The date associated with inscription, fabrication, construction, etc. of a resource in an unpublished form
• Archival resource – date the resource was produced or the dates of record keeping activities
• Collection – date of production or publication of the sources contained in the collection
Multipart monographs, serials, and integrating resources
• If the first issue/part is available, record the date of production of that issue followed by a hyphen 1999-
• Ceased or completed multipart monographs, serials, and integrating resources 1999-2009
• Completed but the first issue is not available
• -2002
• For integrating resources, supply the date of the last update if considered important
• If the production date is the same for all parts, record only that date as a single date
• If dates cannot be approximated, do not record any
• If not identified or cannot be determined, record date of production not identified

Publication statement* (2.8)

• Publisher’s name and date of publication are core elements for published resources. Place of publication is optional
• Place of publication (2.8.2) – includes both local place name and larger jurisdiction if present on the source
• More than one place – record place names in the order indicated by the sequence, layout, typography
• If two or more publishers and two or more places associated with one or more of them, record the place names associated
with each publisher
RDA RDA element DATA
ref
2.3.2 Title proper Encoding across
frontiers
2.4.2 Statement of responsibility Bill Stockting,
relating to title proper Fabienne Queyroux,
editors
2.8.2 Place of publication New York
2.8.2 Place of publication London
2.8.2 Place of publication Victoria (AU)
2.8.4 Publisher’s name The Haworth
Information Press,
an imprint of the
Haworth Press, Inc.
2.11 Copyright date ©2005
• If place of publication is not identified record probable place and make a note.
• If neither is known or no probable place can be determined, record Place of publication not identified
Publisher’s name* (2.8.4)
• If more than one publisher’s name appears on the source of information, only the first recorded is required
• Record as found in the source of information
• Record words or phrases indicating function other than publishing

114
 – SAGE Publications on behalf of McGill University
• Source of information reads: Published by SAGE Publications on behalf of McGill University
• If more than one is named, record the publisher’s names in the order indicated by sequence, layout, or typography
• If no publisher is identified, record publisher not identified
• If the resource is unpublished (manuscript, painting, sculpture) record nothing in the name of publisher’s name sub-
element
Date of publication* (2.8.6)
• Record the date of publication as it appears on the source of information
• Date of publication is not identified, record date of distribution, or copyright date or date of manufacture. If neither is
identified, supply a probable date [1987?]
• If no probable date can be supplied, record date of publication not identified
RDA RDA element DATA
ref
2.3.2 Title proper Black X-mas
2.4.2 Statement of produced by James
responsibility relating Wong and Glen Morgan
to title proper
2.8.2 Place of publication Place of publication not
identified
2.8.4 Publisher’s name publisher not identified
2.8.6 Date of publication date of publication not
identified
2.9.2 Place of distribution Montreal, QC
2.9.4 Distributor’s name distributed exclusively
in Canada by TVA
Films
2.11 Copyright date ©2007

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT** (2.9)

• Distributor’s name is a core element if the publisher is not identified. Date of distribution is a core element if the date
of publication is not identified. Place of publication is optional
• If no known place or distributor name, record Place of distribution not identified and distributor not identified
• If date of distribution is neither known or probable, record date of distribution not identified
Manufacture statement** (2.10)
• Core element if neither a publisher nor a distributor is identified. Date of manufacture is a core element if neither the
date of publication, date of distribution nor the copyright date is identified. Place of manufacture is optional
• If place of manufacture is neither known or probable, record Place of manufacture not identified
• If no manufacturer is named, record manufacturer not identified
Copyright date** (2.11)
• Copyright date is a core element if neither the date of publication nor the date of distribution is identified
• Precede by copyright symbol © or the phonogram symbol  or by copyright or phonogram if symbol cannot be
reproduced

115
Series statement* (2.12)
• Title proper of series (2.12.2), numbering within series (2.12.9), title proper of subseries (2.12.10), and numbering within
subseries (2.12.17) are core elements. Other sub-elements of series are optional
RDA RDA element DATA
ref
2.3.2 Title proper The organization of
information
2.4.2 Statement of Arlene G. Taylor
responsibility relating
to title proper
2.5.2 Designation of edition second edition
2.12.2 Title proper of series Library and information
science text series
2.13 Mode of issuance single unit

Mode of issuance (2.13)

• A categorization reflecting whether a resource is issued in one or more parts, the way it is updated, and its intended
termination
– single unit
– multipart monograph
– serial
– integrating resource
Frequency (2.14)
• How often issues or parts of a serial are released
• Frequency of update for integrating resource
• Terms:
– daily
– bi-weekly
– monthly
– semimonthly
– annual
– biennial
– irregular
Identifier for the manifestation* (2.15)
• If there is more than one identifier for the manifestation, prefer an internationally recognized identifier if applicable.
Additional identifiers for the manifestation are optional
• ISBN
• ISSN
• URN
• fingerprints
• Publishers’ numbers

116
 • plate numbers
• URI
Preferred citation (2.16)
• A citation for a resource in the form preferred by the creator, publisher, custodian, indexing or abstracting service
• Take preferred citation from any source
Fletcher, P.R., (2004) PhD Thesis – How Tertiary Level Physics Students Learn and Conceptualise Quantum Mechanics (School
of Physics, Univeristy of Sydney)
Custodial history (2.17)
• Record previous ownership or custodianship of a resource
Previously owned by L. McGarry, 1951-1963
This collection was assembled by Mr. Stempel in pursuit of his interest in South Australian history, and was presented to him to
the Libraries Board of South Australia in 1964
Immediate source of acquisition (2.18)
• The source from which the agency directly acquired a resource and the circumstances under which it was received
Purchased from Sotheby’s, London, May 26, 2000
Received from Charles Edward Eaton, Chapel Hill, N.C., in a number of installments beginning in 1977
Identifier of the item (2.19)
• Alphanumeric string associated with an item that serves to differentiate the item from other items
Note (2.20)
• Note on title
• Note on statement of responsibility
• Note on edition statement
• Note on numbering of serials
• Note on production statement
• Note on publication statement
• Note on distribution statement
• Note on manufacture statement
• Note on series statement
• Note on frequency
• Note on issue, part, or iteration used as basis for identification of the resource
SOME CHANGES IN DESCRIPTIVE CATALOGING (FROM AACR2 TO RDA)
A. DESCRIPTION
1. No General Material Designation (GMD) is indicated after the title proper of non-prints. Instead, it is represented by
content type (MARC tag 336), media type (tag 337), and carrier type (tag 338).
2. The “rule of three” for four or more authors (e.g. Jose Sison … [et al.] is not applicable in the statement of responsibility.
Instead, transcribe all the names of the creators in the statement of responsibility, or as an option, write only the name of
the first-named author followed by [and three others] if there are four authors.
3. Do not abbreviate terms or convert numerals. Abbreviate only if the data (e.g. edition statement, place of publication,
publisher, numbering, etc.) appear in an abbreviated form in the sources.
4. If there is no place of publication or probable place do not write [s.l.]. Instead, give [place of publication not indicated].
5. If no publisher is identified give [publisher not indicated], not [s.n.]

117
6. If there is no date of publication or probable date give [date of publication not identified] for single part monographs. For
multipart monographs, serials and integrating resources, do not give [date of publication not identified]; omit it if the dates
cannot be approximated.
7. For extent of item, do the following:
a. Do not abbreviate pages to “p.”, volumes to “v.”, color to “col.”, illustrations to “ill.”
b. Use “approximately” (not ca.) and “that is” (not, i.e.).
c. Use “unnumbered” rather than enclosing the numeral in square brackets.
Example: 28 unnumbered pages
8. Do not spell out cm., mm. and in. in dimensions because they are not abbreviations; they are symbols.
B. ACCESS POINTS
1. Entry is under the principal author or first-named author if there are four or more authors responsible for the work.
2. Do not abbreviate Department to “ Dept.” in names of corporate bodies.
3. Spell out “O.T.” to Old Testament and “N.T.” to New Testament.
4. If a book or part of the Bible is being cataloged, have a direct subheading, such as, Bible. Genesis (instead of Bible. O.T.
Genesis)
5. The name or form of name of a family is now a basis for constructing preferred access point and variant access point
representing that family. The other basis for constructing access points are the names of persons and corporate bodies
and preferred title of works.
Example of an RDA Entry in MARC Bibliographic Record
245 10 $a Sleepless in Seattle / $c produced by Gary Foster ; directed by Nora Ephron.
264 #1 $a Culver City, California : $b Columbia Tristar Home Entertainment, $c c2003.
300 ## $a 1 DVD (approximately 105 minutes) : $b digital, sound, color ; $c 12 cm.
336 ## $a moving image $2 rdacontent
337 ## $a video $2 rdamedia
338 ## $a videodisc $2 rdacarrier
511 ## $a Cast: Tom Hanks, Meg Ryan
650 #0 $a Love stories
700 1# $a Foster, Gary, $e film producer
700 1# $a Ephron, Nora, $e film director
700 1# $a Hanks, Tom, $e actor
700 1# $a Ryan, Meg, $e actor
Example of an AACR2 Entry in MARC Bibliographic Record
245 10 $a Sleepless in Seattle $h [videorecording] / $c produced by Gary Foster ; directed by Nora Ephron.
260 ## $a Culver City, Calif. : $b Columbia Tristar Home Entertainment, $c c2003.
300 ## $a 1 videodisc (ca. 105 min.) : $b sd., col. ; 4 ¾ in.
511 ## $a Cast: Tom Hanks, Meg Ryan
650 #0 $a Love stories
700 1# $a Foster, Gary
700 1# $a Ephron, Nora

118
PART III: CATALOGING AND CLASSIFICATION
INSTRUCTION: Read the following questions carefully. Shade the box of the letter that corresponds to the best answer.
[] [] [] [] 1. A name, term, code, etc., under which a bibliographic record may be searched and identified.
A B C D
a. Access point b. Added entry

c. Main entry d. Subject entry

[] [] [] [] 2. Separate parts of the text of a book

A B C D
a. Chapters b. Sections

c. Parts d. Pages

[] [] [] [] 3. A statement at the back or end of an item giving information about one or more of the following:
A B C D
title, author(s), publisher, printer, date of publication or printing.

a. Colophon b. Copyright

c. Summary d. None of the above

[] [] [] [] 4. A word, phrase or group of characters representing a distinct unit of bibliographic information and
A B C D
forming an area of the description

a. Field b. Data

c. Entry word d. Element

[] [] [] [] 5. The source of bibliographic data to be given preference as the source from which a bibliographic
A B C D
description (or portion thereof) is prepared

a. Collective title b. Chief source of information

c. Title d. Copyright page

[] [] [] [] 6. Usually appears on the verso of the title page of a book and states that the book’s contents are the
A B C D
property of the author or publisher

a. Patent b. Copyright

c. ISBN d. Publication data

[] [] [] [] 7. An organization or group of persons that is identified by a particular name and that acts, or may act
A B C D
as an entity

a. Corporations b. Association

c. Agencies d. Corporate Body

[] [] [] [] 8. The first element of the physical description area

A B C D
a. Preliminary pages b. No. of pages

c. Extent of item d. Illustrations

119
[] [] [] [] 9. The word by which a bibliographic entry is arranged in the catalog
A B C D
a. Entry word b. Main entry

c. Added entry d. Access point

[] [] [] [] 10. In its widest sense, a particular physical presentation of an item like, monograph, serial, etc.
A B C D
a. Style b. Form

c. Format d. Class

[] [] [] [] 11. An illustration preceding the title page of a book and usually on the verso of the half title page
A B C D
a. Portrait b. Frontispiece

c. Illustration d. Plates

[] [] [] [] 12. A term indicating the broad class of material to which an item belongs and indicated in field 245,
A B C D
subfield h (MARC TAG).

a. General material designation b. Specific material designation

c. Format d. Class

[] [] [] [] 13. A title of a publication appearing on a leaf preceding the title page

A B C D
a. Half title b. Main title

c. Running title d. Collective title

[] [] [] [] 14. A person who collaborates with one or more other persons to produce a work in relation to which
A B C D
the collaborators perform the same function

a. Editor b. Compiler

c. Reviser d. Joint Author

[] [] [] [] 15. One of the units into which the original sheet or half sheet of paper; parchment, etc. is folded to
A B C D
form part of a pamphlet, journal, etc.; each consists of two pages , one on each side, either or both may

be blank

a. Leaf b. Page

c. Sheet d. Plate

[] [] [] [] 16. The complete catalog record of an item, presented the form by which the entity is to be uniformly
A B C D
identified and cited.

a. Main entry b. Added entry

c. Title entry d. Author entry

120
[] [] [] [] 17. A statement of title, ownership, editor, etc., of a newspaper or periodical. In the case of newspapers
A B C D
it is commonly found on the editorial page or at the top of page one, and, in the case of periodicals, on

the contents page.

a. Colophon b. Masthead

c. Publication data d. Copyright

[] [] [] [] 18. A work in which different persons or bodies contribute to its intellectual or artistic content by
A B C D
performing different kinds of activities.

a. Joint responsibility b. Pure responsibility

c. Mixed responsibility d. Corporate responsibility

[] [] [] [] 19. A nonserial item, either complete in one part or complete, or intended to be completed, in finite
A B C D
number or separate parts

a. Continuing resources b. Periodicals

c. Monograph d. All of the above

[] [] [] [] 20. A title borne by an item other than the title proper, or parallel, or series title(s); also any phrase
A B C D
appearing in conjunction with the title proper.

a. Half title b. Running title

c. Other title information d. Main title

[] [] [] [] 21. ** One of the temporary divisions of a printed item that, for convenience for printing or
A B C D
publication, is issued in small installments, usually incomplete of themselves

a. Fascicle b. Part

c. Volume d. Section

[] [] [] [] 22. ** One of the subordinate units into which an item has been divided by the author, publisher or
A B C D
manufacturer. In case of printed monographs, generally synonymous with volume

a. Fascicle b. Part

c. Volume d. Section

[] [] [] [] 23. It contains illustrative matter, with or without explanatory text, that does not form part of either the
A B C D
preliminary or the main sequence of pages or leaves.

a. Plate b. Frontispiece

c. Map d. All of the above

[] [] [] [] 24. The author’s discussion of the various aspects of the creation of the book, follows the title page of
A B C D
the book.

121
 a. Introduction b. Foreword

c. Preface d. All of the above

[] [] [] [] 25. A name assumed by an author to conceal his or her identity

A B C D
a. Common name b. Proper name

c. Alternative name d. Pseudonym

[] [] [] [] 26. The right hand-page of a book, usually bearing the odd page number
A B C D
a. Verso b. Recto

c. Manu d. Right page

[] [] [] [] 27. Writings made by hand, typescripts, and inscriptions on clay tablets, stones, etc.
A B C D
a. Handwritings b. Manuscripts

c. Typescripts d. Hieroglyphics

[] [] [] [] 28. The second part of a title proper that consists of two parts, each of which is a title; joined by or or
A B C D
its equivalent in another language

a. Alternative title b. Second title

c. Binder’s Title d. Collective title

[] [] [] [] 29. A title given at the beginning of the first page of the text or, in the case of a musical score,
A B C D
immediately above the opening bars of the music

a. Alternative title b. Caption title

c. Main title d. Collective title

[] [] [] [] 30. All copies produced from essentially the same type of image, whether by direct contact or by
A B C D
photographic or other methods, and issued by the same entity

a. Impression b. Issue

c. Reprint d. Edition

[] [] [] [] 31. A title of a publication appearing on a leaf preceding the title page

A B C D
a. Half title b. Caption title

c. Alternative title d. Collective title

[] [] [] [] 32. All copies of an edition of a book, pamphlet, etc., printed at one time
A B C D
a. Impression b. Issue

c. Reprint d. Edition

[] [] [] [] 33. Copies of an edition forming a distinct group that are distinguished from other copies of that edition
A B C D
by minor but well defined variations.

122
 a. Impression b. Issue

c. Reprint d. Edition

[] [] [] [] 34. A new edition with substantially unchanged text. A new printing of an item made from the original
A B C D
type image, commonly by photographic methods.

a. Impression b. Issue

c. Reprint d. Edition

[] [] [] [] 35. A group of separate items related to one another by the fact that each items bears, in addition to its
A B C D
title proper, a collective title applying to the group as a whole

a. Impression b. Series

c. Reprint d. Edition

[] [] [] [] 36. A record of the headings under which an item is represented in the catalog; a record of the
A B C D
references which have been made to a name or to the title of an item that is represented in the catalog

a. Access point b. Tracing

c. Subject heading d. Added entry

[] [] [] [] 37. A system that allows the computer to read and process cataloging records
A B C D
a. OCLC b. OPAC

c. MARC d. CIP

[] [] [] [] 38. Cataloging procedure where terms like forms of headings are standardized to avoid confusion and
A B C D
to facilitate information retrieval

a. MARC tagging b. Authority work

c. Descriptive cataloging d. Subject cataloging

[] [] [] [] 39. The contents of bibliographic files, they represent information entities by providing description of
A B C D
the item and access points

a. Bibliographic records b. Bibliographic description

c. Bibliographic database d. Authority records

[] [] [] [] 40. Organizing recorded information according to established standards to make them easily
A B C D
identifiable and retrievable

a. Indexing b. Bibliographic control

c. Cataloging d. All of the above

[] [] [] [] 41. A cataloging procedure where the item id assigned bibliographic description and access points
A B C D
a. Authority works b. Subject cataloging

123
 c. MARC tagging d. Descriptive cataloging

[] [] [] [] 42. A type of bibliographic file which contains records of items contained or found in a single library
A B C D
or group of libraries

a. Index b. Library software

c. Bibliography d. Library catalog

[] [] [] [] 43. A cataloging file that represents the library holdings in the way they are arranged in the shelves
A B C D
a. Shelflist b. IPF

c. Name authority file d. Library catalog

[] [] [] [] 44. Also known as the verso of the title page

A B C D
a. Table of contents b. Preface

c. Copyright page d. Foreword

[] [] [] [] 45. The most important preliminary page

A B C D
a. Half-title page b. Title page

c. Copyright page d. Cover page

[] [] [] [] 46. A cataloging operation made possible by CIP

A B C D
a. Copy cataloging b. Adaptation

c. Authority work d. Original cataloging

[] [] [] [] 47. A cataloging operation where the cataloger supplies all the bibliographic data
A B C D
a. Copy cataloging b. Adaptation

c. Authority work d. Original cataloging

[] [] [] [] 48. Statement of responsibility is preceded by which punctuation?

A B C D
a. / b. :

c. ; d. ,

[] [] [] [] 49. Accompanying material is preceded by which punctuation?

A B C D
a. * b. :

c. ; d. +

[] [] [] [] 50. Other title information is preceded by which punctuation?

A B C D
a. : b. ;

c. / d. . --

[] [] [] [] 51. General material designation is enclosed in ?

A B C D

124
 a. { } b. “ “

c. [ ] d. ( )

[] [] [] [] 52. Series is preceded by which punctuation?

A B C D
a. [ ] b. . --

c. ( ) d. { }

[] [] [] [] 53. Other physical details is preceded by which punctuation?

A B C D
a. : b. ;

c. , d. /

[] [] [] [] 54. Dimension is preceded by which punctuation?

A B C D
a. : b. ;

c. , d. /

[] [] [] [] 55. Parallel title is preceded by which punctuation?

A B C D
a. = b. :

c. / d. [ ]

[] [] [] [] 56. Numbering within a series is preceded by which punctuation?

A B C D
a. ; b. :

c. , d. /

[] [] [] [] 57. Subsequent statement of responsibility (mixed responsibility) is preceded by which punctuation?

A B C D
a. ; b. :

c. , d. /

[] [] [] [] 58. A catalog in which entries are divided to form more than one alphabetical sequence
A B C D
a. Classed catalog b. Divided catalog

c. Alphabetical specific catalog d. Dictionary catalog

[] [] [] [] 59. This principle in subject cataloging states that the convenience of the user is always to be set before
A B C D
the case of the cataloger

a. Unique heading b. Literary warrant

c. Uniform heading d. The user and the usage

[] [] [] [] 60. All entries in this catalog and the cross-references are interfiled in one alphabetical sequence
A B C D
a. Classed catalog b. Alphabetical specific catalog

c. Dictionary catalog d. Divided catalog

125
[] [] [] [] 61. It served as a model for the early development of the Library of Congress Classification
A B C D
a. Universal Decimal Classification b. Expansive Classification

c. Subject Classification d. Bibliographic Classification

[] [] [] [] 62. Charles Ammi Cutter is the proponent of

A B C D
a. Universal Decimal Classification b. Expansive Classification

c. Subject Classification d. Bibliographic Classification

[] [] [] [] 63. Known to be the oldest classification system

A B C D
a. Colon Classification b. Expansive Classification

c. Subject Classification d. DDC

[] [] [] [] 64. The proponent of Bibliographic Classification

A B C D
a. Henry Evelyn Bliss b. Charles Ammi Cutter

c. SR Ranganathan d. James Duff Brown

[] [] [] [] 65. His best known writing was Prolegomena to Library Classification

A B C D
a. Henry Evelyn Bliss b. Charles Ammi Cutter

c. SR Ranganathan d. James Duff Brown

[] [] [] [] 66. He is also known for his contributions to the theory of facet analysis and synthesis
A B C D
a. Henry Evelyn Bliss b. Charles Ammi Cutter

c. SR Ranganathan d. James Duff Brown

[] [] [] [] 67. The proponents of the Universal Classification System

A B C D
a. Bliss & Ranganathan b. Cutter & La Fontaine

c. Ranganathan & Otlet d. Otlet & La Fontaine

[] [] [] [] 68. The proponent of Subject Classification

A B C D
a. Henry Evelyn Bliss b. Charles Ammi Cutter

c. SR Ranganathan d. James Duff Brown

[] [] [] [] 69. Known for the DDC System

A B C D
a. Melvil Dewey b. John Dewey

c. Dewey Decimal d. John Melvil Dewey

[] [] [] [] 70. The DDC has ___ Main Classes

A B C D
a. 10 b. 20

c. 30 d. 15

126
[] [] [] [] 71. The DDC has ___ Sections
A B C D
a. 10 b. 20

c. 30 d. 15

[] [] [] [] 72. In DDC, it is used as psychological pause to break the monotony of numerical digits and to ease the
A B C D
transcription and copying of the class number

a. dot b. slash

c. comma d. Apostrophe

[] [] [] [] 73. Indicate the meaning of a term in the heading

A B C D
a. Definition notes b. Scope notes

c. Number-built notes d. Former-heading notes

[] [] [] [] 74. Indicate that all or part of the contents have been moved to a different number
A B C D
a. Discontinued notes b. Do-not-use notes

c. Class-elsewhere notes d. Including notes

[] [] [] [] 75. Instruct the classifier not to use all or part of the regular standard subdivision notation
A B C D
a. Discontinued notes b. Do-not-use notes

c. Class-elsewhere notes d. Including notes

[] [] [] [] 76. Lead the classifier to interrelated topics, or distinguish, among numbers in the same notational
A B C D
hierarchy

a. Discontinued notes b. Do-not-use notes

c. Class-elsewhere notes d. Including notes

[] [] [] [] 77. List major topics in a class which may be broader or narrower than the heading, overlap it, or
A B C D
define another way of looking at essentially the same material

a. Class here notes b. Do-not-use notes

c. Including notes d. Class-elsewhere notes

[] [] [] [] 78. Standard subdivisions in DDC is found in

A B C D
a. Table 1 b. Table 2

c. Table 3 d. Table 4

[] [] [] [] 79. Proponents of the Library of Congress Classification

A B C D
a. Hanson & Martel b. Dewey & Martel

d. Bliss & Cutter d. Brown & Bliss

127
[] [] [] [] 80. For LC notation Main Classes are represented by
A B C D
a. Single capital letters b. Double capital letters

c. Roman numerals d. Arabic numerals

[] [] [] [] 81. For LC notation Subdivisions are represented by

A B C D
a. Arabic integers b. Roman integers

c. Single capital letters d. Double capital letters

[] [] [] [] 82. The rules applied in descriptive cataloging of non-print materials are almost the same to the rules
A B C D
used for books, except

a. Specific material designation and note information

b. General material designation and material specific details

c. Material specific details and terms of availability

d. Specific material designation and other physical details

[] [] [] [] 83. The additional area of description used for cataloging non-prints is indicated after
A B C D
a. the publication, distribution, etc., area

b. the edition statement

c. the title proper

d. statement of responsibility

[] [] [] [] 84. General Material Designation

A B C D
a. Indicates the broad class of material to which an item belongs

b. It is an optional addition to the description of non-prints

c. It is an element of information that is indicated after the title proper of a

non-print material

d. All of the above

[] [] [] [] 85. The exact location of the general material designation

A B C D
After:

a. statement of responsibility b. parallel title

c. other title information d. title proper

[] [] [] [] 86. Edgar Wallace : the man who made his name

A B C D
diorama

a. Edgar Wallace [diorama] : the man who made his name

b. Edgar Wallace : the man who made his name [diorama]

128
 c. Edgar Wallace : [diorama] the man who made his name

d. [diorama] Edgar Wallace : the man who made his name

[] [] [] [] 87. Wood Cree = Les Cris des forets

A B C D
slide

a. Wood Cree = Les Cris des forets [slide]

b. Wood Cree [slide] = Les Cris des forets

c. Wood Cree = [slide] Les Cris des forets

d. [slide] Wood Cree = Les Cris des forets

[] [] [] [] 88. Our tour : 10 British jewelers in Germany and Australia = Auf Tournee : zehn britische
A B C D
Goldscgmiede in Deutschland

motion picture

a. Our tour [Motion Picture] : 10 British jewelers in Germany and Australia = Auf Tournee :

zehn britische Goldscgmiede in Deutschland

b. Our tour : [motion picture] 10 British jewelers in Germany and Australia = Auf Tournee :

zehn britische Goldscgmiede in Deutschland

c. Our tour : 10 British jewelers in Germany and Australia = Auf Tournee : zehn Britische

Goldscgmiede in Deutschland [motion picture]

d. Our tour [motion picture] : 10 British jewelers in Germany and Australia = Auf Tournee :

zehn britische Goldscgmiede in Deutschland

[] [] [] [] 89. The general material designation for an item that contains parts in different forms
A B C D
a. multi-media b. kits

c. realia d. motion picture

[] [] [] [] 90. A black and white film is transcribed as:

A B C D
a. no color b. plain

c. black and white d. b&w

[] [] [] [] 91. When a film has no sound, it is transcribed as:

A B C D
a. without sound b. no. sound

c. si. d. no sd.

[] [] [] [] 92. rpm and ips pertain to the sound recordings’

A B C D
a. playing condition b. playing speed

c. playing time d. playing capacity

129
[] [] [] [] 93. Mathematical data area (cartographic materials) has 3 elements: statement of scale, statement of
A B C D
coordinate and equinox, and

a. numeric and/or alphabetic designation

b. chronological designation

c. statement of altitude

d. statement of projection

[] [] [] [] 94. If no statement of scale is found on a map, and cannot be ascertained, write

A B C D
a. no scale b. scale not found

c. scales vary d. scale indeterminable

[] [] [] [] 95. If a map has 3 or more scales, write

A B C D
a. no scale b. scale not found

c. scales vary d. scale indeterminable

[] [] [] [] 96. When the number and/or type of pieces in a set of non-print materials cannot be ascertained easily
A B C D
or named concisely, write

a. various pieces b. pieces cannot be counted

c. type indeterminable d. various piece

[] [] [] [] 97. A film on Cats directed by Hillary Obama is transcribed as

A B C D
a. Cats [film] / Hillary Obama, director

b. Cats [Film] / Hillary Obama, director

c. Cats [film] / directed by Hilary Obama

d. Cats [film] / directed by Hillary Obama

[] [] [] [] 98. The Quantitative Approaches to Management by Richard I. Levin, Harold G. Halcrow, Paul G.
A B C D
Bahn and Richard Dee Lee. [Main entry?]

a. Levin, Richard I.

b. Quantitative approaches to management

c. The quantitative approaches to management

d. The Quantitative approaches to management

[] [] [] [] 99. The Illustrated History of Archaeology edited by Richard D. Lee

A B C D
a. Lee, Richard D.

b. Illustrated history of archaeology

c. The illustrated history of archaeology

130
 d. The Illustrated history of archaeology

[] [] [] [] 100. A globe mounted on a metal stand with 16 cm. in diameter, transcribe as

A B C D
a. globe : mounted ; 16 cm.

b. 1 globe : mounted on metal stand ; 16 cm. in diam.

c. 1 globe : mounted ; 16 cm.

d. 1 globe : mounted on metal stand ; 16 cm. in diam.

[] [] [] [] 101. What is the LCC assigned notation for Nursing?

A B C D
a. RN b. RP

c. RT d. RD

[] [] [] [] 102. What is the LCC assigned notation for Education?

A B C D
a. L b. M

c. N d. P

[] [] [] [] 103. Which group does not exist in the LCC?

A B C D
a. U, V, X, Y, Z b. U, W, X, Y, Z

c. N, O, Q, V, W d. I, O, W, X, Y

[] [] [] [] 104. What is the LCC assigned notation for Library Science?

A B C D
a. W b. X

c. Y d. Z

[] [] [] [] 105. What is the LCC assigned notation for Philippine history?

A B C D
a. DL b. DP

c. DS c. DQ

[] [] [] [] 106. What is the LCC assigned notation for Philippine literature?

A B C D
a. PS b. PL

c. PT d. PZ

[] [] [] [] 107. What is the LCC assigned notation for Agriculture?

A B C D
a. S b. T

c. U d. V

[] [] [] [] 108. What is the LCC assigned notation for Political science?

A B C D
a. K b. L

c. J d. H

131
[] [] [] [] 109. What is V in LCC?
A B C D
a. Military science b. Naval Science

c. Science d. Library Science

[] [] [] [] 110. What is U in LCC?

A B C D
a. Military science b. Naval Science

c. Science d. Library Science

[] [] [] [] 111. The controlled vocabulary developed by Minnie Earl Sears in 1923

A B C D
a. List of subject headings for use in Dictionary Catalogs

b. List of Subject Headings for Small Libraries

c. Library of Congress Subject Headings

d. Sears List of Subject Headings

[] [] [] [] 112. Headings that refer to the “aboutness” of a work

A B C D
a. Form headings b. Name headings

c. Topical headings d. Geographic headings

[] [] [] [] 113. The correct heading for Peter Parker

A B C D
a. Parker, Peter b. Peter Parker

c. Parker, Peter (Fictitious character) d. Parker, Peter (Legendary character)

[] [] [] [] 114. The correct entry form for East Asia

A B C D
a. Asia, East b. East Asia

c. Asia, Eastern d. Eastern Asia

[] [] [] [] 115. Names of countries, cities, provinces, towns, etc. are called

A B C D
a. Non-jurisdictional geographic names b. Political place names

c. Jurisdictional geographic names d. Administrative places

[] [] [] [] 116. The correct form of entry for Deutschland

A B C D
a. France b. Germany

c. Italy d. Ireland

[] [] [] [] 117. Which of the following is considered a non-jurisdictional geographic name

A B C D
a. Pangasinan b. New York

c. Amazon River d. Laguna

[] [] [] [] 118. This type of heading indicates the artistic, literary or bibliographic form of a work rather than its
A B C D
subject content

132
 a. Form heading b. Name heading

c. Topical heading d. Geographic heading

[] [] [] [] 119. All of the subject headings listed below, except for one, are form headings
A B C D
a. Atlases b. Yearbooks

c. Periodicals d. Biology

[] [] [] [] 120. Which of the headings below cannot be considered a name heading

A B C D
a. Place names b. Corporate bodies

c. Personal names d. Languages

[] [] [] [] 121. This is a word or phrase enclosed in parentheses following the heading and is used to resolve
A B C D
semantic ambiguity

a. Adjective b. Identifier

c. Qualifier d. Series

[] [] [] [] 122. The basic guideline in assigning subject headings is

A B C D
a. Assign as many headings as possible to an individual work

b. Assign the most specific heading which represents exactly the contents of an item

c. Observe consistency of subject

d. Assign at least three subject headings to an individual work

[] [] [] [] 123. A cataloger is allowed to assign a heading for the subtopic discussed in the item in addition to the
A B C D
heading assigned for the main topic if the subtopic covers at least

a. 10 percent of the entire work b. 15 percent of the entire work

c. 5 percent of the entire work d. 20 percent of the entire work

[] [] [] [] 124. The first step in determining the subject content of a book is by

A B C D
a. Reading a book technically b. Consulting a controlled vocabulary

c. Preparing a concept list d. Assigning a classification number

[] [] [] [] 125. This takes place when standard terms contained in the controlled vocabulary are used to represent
A B C D
the subject heading of an item

a. Conceptual analysis b. Translation

c. Classification d. Transformation

[] [] [] [] 126. A person who applies/uses a classification scheme is called

A B C D
a. Indexer b. Cataloger

c. Classifier d. Classificationist

133
[] [] [] [] 127. A person who creates a classification scheme is called a/an
A B C D
a. Indexer b. Cataloger

c. Classifier d. Classificationist

[] [] [] [] 128. This type of classification indicates that the content of a work is specified by a notation to the
A B C D
fullest extent possible

a. Broad classification b. Close classification

c. Modern classification d. Traditional classification

[] [] [] [] 129. This type of classification means that a work is placed in a broad class by use of notation that has
A B C D
been logically abridged

a. Broad classification b. Close classification

c. Modern classification d. Traditional classification

[] [] [] [] 130. Which theory of classification places emphasis on facet analysis and synthesis
A B C D
a. Broad classification b. Close classification

c. Modern classification theory d. Traditional theory of classification

[] [] [] [] 131. Which classification theory states that classification begins with the universe of knowledge and
A B C D
divides it into successive stages of classes and subclasses, with a chosen characteristic as the basis for

each stage

a. Broad classification b. Close classification

c. Modern classification theory d. Traditional theory of classification

[] [] [] [] 132. A device consisting of numerals, letters and /or other symbols used to present the main and
A B C D
subordinate divisions of a classification scheme

a. Notation b. Work mark

c. Call number d. Cutter number

[] [] [] [] 133. A notation that reflects the structural order of classification

A B C D
a. Pure notation b. Hierarchical notation

c. Mixed notation d. Expressive notation

[] [] [] [] 134. A notation system that uses only one kind of symbol is called
A B C D
a. Pure notation b. Hierarchical notation

c. Mixed notation d. Expressive notation

[] [] [] [] 135. A notational system that uses a combination of two or more kinds of symbols is known as
A B C D
a. Pure notation b. Hierarchical notation

134
 c. Mixed notation d. Expressive notation

[] [] [] [] 136. A notation system that expresses relationships among coordinate subject is known as
A B C D
a. Pure notation b. Hierarchical notation

c. Mixed notation d. Expressive notation

[] [] [] [] 137. Another term used for a faceted scheme

A B C D
a. Analytico-synthetic scheme b. Expansive classification

c. Enumerative scheme d. Expressive classification

[] [] [] [] 138. A classification scheme that identifies subjects by their component parts and requires fitting
A B C D
together the appropriate parts in order to provide a class mark for a work

a. Faceted scheme b. Enumerative scheme

c. Broad classification d. Hierarchical notation

[] [] [] [] 139. This is the part of the call number which designates a specific individual work within its class
A B C D
a. Book number b. Accession number

c. Call number d. Class number

[] [] [] [] 140. The process of assigning book number is often referred to as Shelflisting or

A B C D
a. Shelving b. Cuttering

c. Accessioning d. Classifying

[] [] [] [] 141. Which should be considered first in classifying a multi-topical work wherein the dominant subject
A B C D
cannot be ascertained

a. First subject b. Second subject

c. Last subject d. None of the above
[] [] [] [] 142. Which of the following guidelines should be applied to a work dealing with two or three subjects
A B C D
that are subdivisions of a broader subject

a. Class under the broader subject b. Class under the first subject

c. Class under the last subject d. Class under the dominant subject

[] [] [] [] 143. The organization of divisions within a class, subclass, or subject in LCC follows a general pattern
A B C D
known as

a. Brown’s seven points b. Hanson’s seven points

c. Martel’s seven points d. Bliss’ seven points

[] [] [] [] 144. This is a subdivision in DDC that represents a frequently recurring physical form or approach
A B C D
applicable to any subject of discipline

135
 a. Geographic subdivisions b. Standard subdivisions

c. Language subdivisions d. Form subdivisions

[] [] [] [] 145. a. KF 12 J23 b. KF 2 M23 c. KF 237 d. KF 1 K31

A B C D
a. d, b, a, c b. b, c, d, a

c. a, b, d, c d. a, b, c, d

[] [] [] [] 146. a. KF 12 J17 b. KF 12 J109 c. KF 12 J5 d. KF 12 J113

A B C D
a. c, a, b, d b. b, c, d, a

c. b, d, a, c d. a, c, b, d

[] [] [] [] 147. a. K 12 D89 b. K 12 D47 c. K 12 D56 d. K 12 D6

A B C D
a. a, b, c, d, b. b, c, d, a

c. d, b, c, a d. c, b, d, a

[] [] [] [] 148. a. QE 862.311 A94 b. QE 862.3011 D97 c. QE 862.4 E13 d. QE 862.54 N19

A B C D
a. c, d, a, b b. b, c, d, a

c. b, a, c, d d. a, c, b, d

[] [] [] [] 149. a. QL 453.8123 N39 b. QL 453.82 S14 c. QL 453.8301 T9 d. QL 453.8113 V17

A B C D
a. d, b, c, a b. b, d, a, c

c. a, b, d, c d. d, a, b, c

[] [] [] [] 150. a. HF 5356 D27 b. HF 5415.13 H87 c. HF 5547.5 F63 d. HF 5549.12 D67

A B C D
a. a, b, d, c b. b, c, d, a

c. c, b, a, d d. d, b, c, a

136
KEY ANSWER TO PART III: CATALOGING AND CLASSIFICATION
1. A 51. C 101. C
2. A 52. B 102. A
3. A 53. A 103. D
4. A 54. B 104. D
5. B 55. A 105. C
6. B 56. B 106. B
7. D 57. A 107. A
8. C 58. C 108. C
9. B 59. D 109. B
10. B 60. C 110. A
11. B 61. B 111. B
12. A 62. B 112. C
13. A 63. B 113. A
14. D 64. A 114. B
15. A 65. C 115. C
16. A 66. C 116. B
17. B 67. D 117. C
18. C 68. D 118. A
19. C 69. A 119. D
20. A 70. A 120. D
21. A 71. A 121. C
22. B 72. A 122. B
23. D 73. A 123. B
24. C 74. C 124. A
25. D 75. B 125. B
26. B 76. C 126. C
27. A 77. A 127. D
28. A 78. A 128. B
29. C 79. A 129. A
30. B 80. A 130. C
31. A 81. D 131. D
32. A 82. C 132. A
33. D 83. B 133. B
34. C 84. D 134. A
35. B 85. D 135. C
36. A 86. A 136. D
37. C 87. B 137. A
38. B 88. D 138. A
39. B 89. B 139. D
40. B 90. D 140. B
41. D 91. C 141. A
42. D 92. B 142. A
43. A 93. D 143. C
44. C 94. D 144. D
45. C 95. C 145. A
46. A 96. A 146. C
47. D 97. D 147. B
48. A 98. A 148. C
49. D 99. D 149. D
50. A 100. C 150. A

137
COLLECTION MANAGEMENT
The process of making certain the library meets the information needs of its service population in a timely and economical
manner; using information resources produced both inside and outside of the organization (Evans, 2005).

Collection Management is a process of information gathering, communication, coordination policy formulation,

evaluation, and planning. These processes, in turn, influence decisions about the acquisition, retention, and provision of
access to information sources in support of the intellectual needs of a given library community.

Collection Development is a term representing the process of systematically building library collections to serve study,
teaching research, recreational and other needs of library users. The process includes selecting and deselection of current
and retrospective materials, planning coherent strategies for continuing acquisition, and evaluating collections to ascertain
how well they serve user needs.

It is an important behind the scene task. As Johnson (2004) aptly described it: "Collection development and management are the
meat and potatoes of libraries. If you don't have a collection, you don't have a library."

I. History
A. First philosophies
a. Gabriel Naude (1600s): It may be laid down as a maxim that there is no book whatsoever, be if never be so bad
or disparaged, but may it time be sought for by someone.
b. Jean-Baptiste Cotton des Hounoyes (1780): Libraries should consist only of books of genuine merit and of well-
approved utility with new additions guided by enlightened economy.
c. Christian Gottlob Heyne (1763-1812). A primary advocate of librarians in the development of library collections.
d. John Cotton Dana: Book selection should be left to the librarians, directed by the trustees or a book committee.
B. Timeline
a. Late 1960’s - use of the term collection development over selection
b. 1977 - collection development as a new specialization
c. Early 1980’s - use of the term collection management
d. Mid 1980’s - offered as a course in professional library schools
II. Trends and issues
A. Collection development policies
a. Detailed versus outline of general principles
b. Reasons for revision:
i. To simplify a restrictive and prescriptive policy
ii. Emergence of electronic content
iii. Emphasis on access over ownership
iv. Emergence of open access
B. Demand-Driven Acquisition (DDA)
a. Ownership versus access
b. Spend monies in a more efficient and targeted manner
c. Lorcan Dempsey: We have seen a progressive move away from purchasing and local storage at one end of a
spectrum toward general facilitated access at the other.
C. Open access and open access investments
a. Open access: unrestricted online access to scholarly research primarily intended for scholarly journal articles;
promises to remove both the price barriers and the permission barriers that undermine library efforts to provide
access to scholarly record as well as helping to address the serials crisis.
i. Budapest Open Access Initiative (February 2002)
ii. Bethesda Statement on Open Access Publishing (June 2003)
iii. Berlin Declaration on Open Access to Knowledge in the Sciences and Humanities (October 2003)
b. Degrees of open access:
i. Gratis: free online access (free to read)
ii. Libre: free online access plus some re-use rights
c. Methods of open access:
i. Gold: option for authors to make their work openly accessible in an open access journal
ii. Green: practice of depositing articles in an open access repository that can be institutional or disciplinary
d. APC - Article processing charges
D. Big deals

138
 a. The amount spent on big deals as a percentage of the collection budget is quite significant and in some cases, very
high.
b. Serials expenditures and continuations budget
E. Collection budget
a. Deployment to diverse ways that are non-traditional and value-added
i. Beyond content and resources for research and teaching
ii. Examples: MARC records; memberships; discovery services; ILL/resource sharing; physical processing;
binding/preservation and digitization projects
b. Flat budget versus declining budget versus increasing budget
c. The collections budget clearly faces significant pressures as different types of expenditures are being added in the
digital era, whereas, practically, none are being removed.
F. Rationalizing
a. Rightsizing collections: to free up space and to collaborate in order to provide access to a wider range of resources
(collaborative collection building).
b. [. . .] a shared approach to print management is on the rise, and we anticipate that a large part of existing print
collections, distribu1ed across many libraries, will move into coordinated or shared management -within a few
years (Dempsey, Malpas, and Lavoie, 2014).
c. collective collection and collective collection initiatives
i. CRL's Print Archive Network (PAN)
ii. Western Regional Storage Trust (WEST)
iii. Eastern Academic Scholars Trust (EAST)
iv. CRL's Print Archives and Preservation Registry (PAPR)
G. Demonstrating value
a. Because libraries no longer have a monopoly on the provision of access to information, the value that they add to
that content is now just as important as the content itself (Levine-Clark, 2014).
b. Approaches:
i. Quantitative:
 Usage data
 Faculty output measures
 Citation analysis
 Cost-per-use analyses
ii. Qualitative:
 Communicating student success stories
 Developing new services to meet identified university priorities
 Community engagement
H. Local digital collections
a. Digitization of local archival and special collections is of great strategic importance; it enables sharing of unique
holdings with a global audience, expanding access and increasing visibility for the institution.
b. The goal is to enrich the scholarly environment with useful books and other documents that would otherwise
remain hidden from scholars and students, and to shift our focus from resources and activities that make relatively
little contribution to that environment to those that will have the greatest enriching effect upon it (Anderson, 2013).

III. General Principles of Collection Development (Evans, 2005)

1. Collection development should be geared primarily to identified needs rather than to an abstract standard of quality
2. Collection development to be effective must be responsive to the total community needs, not just to those of the
current or the most active users
3. Collection development should be carried out with knowledge of and participation in cooperative programs at the
local, regional, and national levels
4. Collection development must consider all formats for inclusion in the collection.
5. Collection development was, is and always will be a subjective biased work. The intervention of a selector's
personal values into the process can never be completely avoided.
6. Collection development is not something that one learns entirely in the classroom or from reading. Only through
practice and making mistakes will a person become proficient in the process of developing a collection.
IV. Laws of Collection Development in Relation to the Size of a Library's Service Community
1. As the size of the service community increases, the degree of divergence of individual information needs increases.
2. As the degree of divergence in individual information needs increases, the need for cooperative programs of
informational materials sharing increases.

139
 3. It will never be possible to completely satisfy all the information needs of any individual or class of clientele in
the service community.
V. Community Analysis
1. Importance of community analysis:
a. Provides factual data· on what the clientele needs to ·provide the right information to the right reader at the
right time
b. Provide a valuable mechanism for patron input into the process of collection development
2. Data needed in community analysis
a. User population and categories
b. Course offerings, curricula, research and development programs, community development programs
c. Social and educational organizations that reflect community values
d. Cultural, religious and recreational organizations, ex. youth clubs, parish council
e. Other information centers/libraries within the community
3. Sources of information
a. Key informants
b. Community forums
c. Social indicators
d. Field surveys
VI. Collection Development Policy
 A document that serves as a day-to-day working tool that provides the necessary guidelines for carrying out the
majority of tasks within the area of collection building (Gardner, 1981).
 Blueprint for the operations of a library as a whole, for it is through this policy that the library carries out its
central tasks of acquiring, organizing, and managing library materials (Gregory, 2004).
Importance of Collection Development Policies
1. Informs everyone about the nature and scope of the collection
2. Informs everyone of collecting priorities and aids in the allocation and coordination of responsibilities and
duties
3. Forces thinking and commitment to meet organizational goals
4. Sets quality standards for inclusion and exclusion of materials
5. Reduces the influence of single selector and personal biases
6. Provides an orientation, in-service training tool for new staff
7. Helps ensure ·a degree of consistency and continuity in administration over time and despite staff turnover
8. Saves time and guides staff in decision making over routine work in the day-to-day activities
9. Guides staff in handling complaints
10. Aids in rationalizing budget fund allocations, especially if funds are limited
11. Serves as a public relations document
12. Provides a means of assessing the overall performance of the collection development program
13. Makes possible interpretation of written words much more consistent, clear and precise than interpretation
of spoken words.
Functions of Collection Development Policy (Gorman and Howes, 1990)
1. Planning Function
2. External Communication Function
3. Internal Communication Function
 A robust marketing program using every resource available, even the collection development
policy, not only raises the visibility of the library, promotes the use of the · library collection, and
better serves library patrons, but it also sends a clear message to campus administrators and other
relevant stakeholders regarding the enduring value and worth of the library (Fought et al., 2016).
Parts of a Collection Development Policy (Gregory, 2004)
1. Title page/ cover
2. Signature page
3. Table of contents
4. Statement of purpose
5. Background statement
6. Responsibility for collection development and management
7. Mission, goals, and objective statements
8. Identification of target audiences
9. Budgeting and funding
10. Selection or evaluation criteria
140
 11. Analysis of subject fields
12. Analysis of collection by format
13. Selection aids
14. Intellectual freedom
15. Collection maintenance and weeding
16. Gift policy and procedures
17. Replacements
18. Special Collections
19. Revision
VII. Collection Evaluation
 the systematic consideration of a collection to determine its intrinsic merit or its "goodness." The evaluation seeks
to examine or describe collections either in their own terms or in relation to other collections and checking
mechanisms (list, standards, etc.)- How well does the collection support the goals, needs, and mission of the
library and the parent organization (Johnson, 2004).
Purposes of Collection Evaluation
1. To search for a more accurate understanding of the scope, depth, and utility of the collections
2. To prepare a guide to and a basis for collection development
3. To aid in the preparation of a collection development policy
4. To measure the effectiveness of a collection development policy
5. To determine collection adequacy or quality
6. To help rectify inadequacies in library holdings and lo suggest ways to improve them
7. To focus human and financial resources on areas most needing attention
8. To aid justification for book budget increases
9. To demonstrate to administrators that something is being done about the demands for "more money"
10. To establish the existence of special strengths, as well as weaknesses, in the collection
11. To check the need for weeding and collection control and to establish areas of priority of need
Tools for Collection Evaluation
1. RLG Conspectus
*uses six levels
a. A valuable tool developed by RLG based on the combined collection development policies of their
member libraries.
b. Only one standard code is accepted in all types of libraries.
c. With the use of this tool, collection density, collection intensity, and collection policy can be indicated
and coded clearly on a worksheet.
Density - the extent of existing collections
Intensity - current collecting activity
Policy - the desired level for future collecting
Collection Strength Codes
ALA Guidelines RLG Conspectus
A - Comprehensive 5 - Comprehensive
B - Research 4 - Research
C - Study 3 - Study
D - Basic 2 - Basic
E- Minimal 1 - Minimal
0 - Not Collected

2. The Western Library Network/OCLC Western Conspectus scale

*uses more levels (ten as opposed to six)
0 Out of Scope
1a Minimal Information Level: uneven coverage
1b Minimal Information Level: focused coverage
2a Basic Information Level: introductory
2b Basic Information Level: advanced
3a Basic Instructional Support Level
3b Intermediate Instructional Support Level
3c Advanced Instructional Support Level
4 Research Level
5 Comprehensive

141
 Assessment Techniques

1. Shelflist counts and analysis: the best starting point to get an easy snapshot of a particular subject collection.

2. List checking, a frequently used assessment method that should be used when lists are readily identifiable,
current, and available.

3. Shelf scanning: An appropriate technique when most of the materials are on the shelves provides about the
condition and extent of the collection very quickly.

4. Expert (faculty or consultant) opinion: an important technique but may be difficult to obtain, especially for
small to medium-sized libraries that cannot hire subject bibliographers.

5. Client-centered methods: a variety of techniques involving the gathering and analysis of statistics relating to
circulation, reference, interlibrary loan, cataloging, acquisitions, online and CD-ROM database searches.
Circulation, interlibrary loans, and online search information may be more useful in guiding spot purchases than
long-term collection efforts that aim to build in-depth and comprehensive collections.

VIII. Selection
 The process of deciding what materials to acquire for the collection
 It results from a combination of knowledge, experience, and intuition of a collections librarian (Johnson,2004).
 The selection decisions a collection development librarian makes, therefore, necessarily involve a form of
intellectual triage. Deciding what items to forgo, what to cut, and what to keep (Gregory 2011).
Selection Theories
 Theory of Book Selection (1925) - Lionel McColvin
1. Information should be as accurate as possible.
2. Items should be complete and balanced regarding the subject and intended scope.
3. Authors should distinguish between fact and opinion.
4. Information should be current (frequently, the determining criteria for collection).
5. Writing style and treatment of the subject should be appropriate to the type of demand the book will
answer.
6. The title should reflect the cultural values of its country of origin.
7. Consider physical characteristics when deciding between two books with similar content.
 Book Selection (1930) - Francis Drury
1. Establish suitable standards for judging all books.
2. Apply criteria intelligently, evaluating the book’s content for inherent worth.
3. Strive to get the best title on any subject, but add mediocre title that will be read rather than superior titles
that will be unread.
4. Duplicate the best rather than acquire the many.
5. Stock the classics and standards.
6. Select for positive use.
7. Develop the local history collection.
8. Be broadminded and unprejudiced in selection.
9. Do select fiction.
10. Buy editions in bindings suitable for circulation and borrowing.
11. Know publishers, costs, and values.
12. Know authors and their works.
 Living with Books (1950) - Helen Haines
1. Know the community’s character and interests.
2. Be familiar with subjects of current interest.
3. Represent subjects applicable to these conditions.
4. Make the collection of local history materials useful and extensive.
5. Provide materials for organized groups whose activities and interests can be related to books.
6. Provide materials for both actual and potential readers.
7. Avoid selecting books that are not in demand; withdraw books that are no longer useful.
8. Select some books of permanent value regardless of their potential use.
9. Practice impartiality in selection. Do not favor certain hobbies or opinions. In controversial or sectarian
subjects, accept gifts if purchase is undesirable.
10. As much as possible, provide for the needs of specialists.

142
 11. Strive not for a “complete” collection, but for the best; best books in a subject, the best book by an author,
the most useful volumes of a series.
12. Prefer inferior book that will be read over a superior one that will not.
13. Keep abreast of current thoughts and opinions.
14. Maintain promptness and regularity in supplying new books, especially for books that are both good and
popular.
 Library Book Selection (1952 & 1990) - Shiyali Ramamrita Ranganathan
1. Books are for use.
2. Every reader his books.
3. Every book its reader.
4. Save the time of the reader.
5. A library is a growing organism.
 Selecting Materials for Libraries (1981) - Robert Broadus
1. Be aware of the impact of publicity that may stimulate demand.
2. Consider the duration as the intensity of the demand.
3. Weigh the amount of possible opposition to a tile. Controversy stimulates demand.
4. Include a reasonably high percentage of standards and classics in the collection.
5. Consider past loans of specific titles and subjects. Past use is one of the most reliable predictors of future
use.
6. Make some provision for serving the needs of potentials users in the community. Having made such a
provision, advertise it.
7. Weigh the differences between true demand (which reflects individual needs) and artificial demand
(resulting from organized propaganda efforts).
 Building Library Collection (1985) – Curley & Broderick
1. Large public libraries with both a heterogeneous community to serve and a reasonable book budget can in
theory apply most collection principles with little modification within the total library system.
2. Medium-sized libraries are similar, except that funding usually forces greater care in selection. Mistakes
are most costly.
3. Small public libraries are the most limited. Most can only hope to meet the most significant community
demands, and they may lack both the professional staff and the money to do more.
4. College libraries serve a more homogeneous population. In most cases, demand is the operative principle:
college libraries acquire materials needed to support the instructional programs. No one questions the
quality of the material if the request originated with a faculty member or department.
 Other contribution to collection development advocacies
1. The American Public Library (1929) – Arthur Bostwick – Demand as the average taste of users.
2. A Manual of Practical Book (1939) Harold Bonny – Knowing the community’s tastes and needs.
3. Building Library Collection (1974) Mary Duncan Carter and Wallace John Bonk – Building a collection
rather than selecting individual title. Places emphasis on demand than quality.
4. Book Selection: an introduction to principles and practices (1974) –David Spiller – Library supports
educational programs.
5. Collect Development (1980) – William Katz – inclusion of all formats in the collection.
6. Library collection: their origin, selection and development (1981) – Richard Gardner – Reviewing is an
important element in selection.
Foundations for Effective Selection Gorman and Howes, 1990)
1. The selection process is related to other professional activities and is dependent on them both for policy
decisions and practical procedures. Selection is port of the overall collection development process and
must be viewed in this perspective.
2. One should update professional competence by regular reading in the literature concerning the principles
and practices of collection building, selection, publishing, reviewing, and acquisitions.
3. 3. One must have an intimate knowledge of the library's purpose, collections, and user groups. These are
the key factors in the effective, responsible selection of library materials.
4. A good selector will develop over time a sound understanding of how the publishing industry and the book
trade operate; this includes how library materials of all types are generated, distributed, and sold.
5. One should become fully familiar with the publishing policies, advertising media, publicity outlets, names
of senior editors and general reliability of those publishers whose lists are most directly relevant to the
library's collection-building requirements.

143
 6. One should become fully familiar with the key reviewing media and read reviews regularly to keep abreast
of critical opinions on books and other library materials.
7. One should become fully familiar with trade and national bibliographies and understand their strengths
and weaknesses regarding the library's collection building requirements.
8. One should always make independent but well-informed judgments about what materials are to be selected
for o library, as the competent professional is in the best position to determine the right materials for the
specific collection and its users.

Selection Environment

Type of Primary Selection Priority Selection Tools

Library Selector Commonly Used
Public Senior  Because user groups in the public Approval plans, trade
Librarian + library setting range across entire literature promotions,
local social and cultural spectrum, the timely reviews in
authority selection of materials must reflect and mass circulation
cater to diversity. magazines and
 Emphasis is on current titles produced newspapers.
by trade publishers as theses re most
suited to the general interests of the
community.
School Teacher-  Commitment to educational needs of Published reviews,
Librarian + students and curriculum support for reviewing journals
committee of teachers. catering specifically
teaching  Ensure to have a greater variety of to materials for
staff + materials because of heavy reliance children and young
administrator on audio, visual and other non-print adults, approval plans
media in teaching.
Academic Faculty  Embraces variations on subject focus, Trade publications,
members + disciplinary ranges, and levels of national
discipline readership. bibliographies,
librarians reviewing journals,
scholarly journals,
indexing services.
Special Users  The librarians tends to be specialist Current information
with a narrow subject focus and in from publishers and
most cases vigilant on the currency of suppliers, indexing
collection. and abstracting
sources.
Selection Criteria

General rules (Gregory, 2011)

1. Library materials are best selected based on suitability for inclusion in the collection.
2. The collection should be an unbiased source of information that represents as many points of view as possible.
3. Subjects should be covered in a manner appropriate to the library's anticipated users' needs.
4. No material should be excluded from the collection because of the race, religion, gender, national origin, sexual
preference, or political view of the author, the material, or the user.

Specific Criteria (ASTAFS approach)

1. Authority of creators. This criterion concerns the qualifications and reputation of those who have created the material.
Creators include authors, publishers and in the case of audio-visual materials, producers.
2. Scope. This criterion is concerned with the breadth and depth of coverage afforded by the work, including both
intended and actual coverage.
3. Treatment and Level. The work should be pitched at the right level for the intended audience and the discussion should
neither down to nor above the reader.
4. Arrangement. This criterion generally looks at the organization of content, paying special· attention to both content
and format. The material should be arranged in a way that facilitates the development and logic of the text.
5. Format. This criterion is particular with technical and aesthetic considerations. Check if the material was produced to
a high standard physically and is likely to withstand substantial use. However, keep in mind that the physical features
should not override the primary concern: the intellectual content of the material.

144
 6. Special considerations or special features. This is concerned if the work has features that set it apart from (and ideally
above) all similar works. The selector looks for something special that will give on item some positive benefit to the
users in the context of a particular collection.

Selection Aids

Types of Characteristics Advantages Disadvantages Example

Selection Aids
Current sources Contain citation Identify new materials as Usually only provide for  American Book
for in-print books information they become available; author searches; subject Publishing
particularly useful in searches are time- Record
large libraries attempting consuming; do not  Books in Print
to achieve broad contain review/content
coverage. information.
Catalogs, flyers, Marketing May contain more Advertising copy tends to  Some catalog
and material designed information than in print present the item in its collection in
announcements and distributed by lists. most favorable light. Publishers Trade
publishers. List Annual
Current review Designed to Save staff time in “Differential marketing”  Library Journal
sources promote or locating/reviewing may affect promotion of  Wilson Library
evaluate works. newly published works. title; only a small Bulletin
Three types of percentage of total book  Choice
reviews: out-put reviewed; delay in  Booklist
1. Reviews for reviews appearance in  New York
persons making print; reviewer Times Sunday
their living competence varies; Book Reviews
buying books reviews tend not to be
2. Reviews for critical in nature.
subject
specialists
3. Reviews for the
general public
National A listing of books Means for identifying Main entry and subject  British National
bibliographies published in or out-of-print materials for entries can vary among Bibliography
about a country. retrospective collection sources; little consistency  National Union
Usually non-profit development. in listing series. Catalog
origin. Contain (Complemented
citation by OCLC &
information. RLIN)
Online databases Cooperative and Access to millions of No all countries well  OCLC
individual library records worldwide; represented in online  RLIN
catalogs; serve as usually do not need systems.
partial separate access to
replacement for national bibliography;
national useful for verification
bibliographies. work; information can
be downloaded and
serve as a bibliographic
record in online catalog.
Recommended, Lists of items Useful when used Impractical to strive to  Public Library
best and core recommended for carefully. collect every item; list catalog
collection lists purchase. becomes dated  Books for Junior
immediately upon College
publication. Libraries
Select Listing prepared Can exist for virtually Currency and selectivity  Reference
bibliographies by subject experts any subject. issues exists. Sources for
and including Small and
critical Medium-Sized
evaluations. Libraries.

Other Selection Aids

 Review or approval copies
145
  Trial offers
 Demonstrations
 Book fairs and bookstores
 Visits to other libraries
 Vending machines
 In-house information

Selection and Evaluation of Electronic Resources

Electronic resources: materials that require computer access, whether through a personal computer, mainframe, or handheld
mobile device. They may either be accessed remotely via the Internet or locally. Some of the most frequently encountered types
are:

 E-journals
 E-books
 Full-text (aggregated) databases
 Indexing and abstracting databases
 Reference databases (biographies, dictionaries, directories, encyclopedias, etc.)
 Numeric and statistical databases
 E-images
 E-audio/visual resources
1. Content
a. Support the main research aims and goals of the organization
b. Complement or add depth or breadth to the existing collection supported by subject profiles
c. Be of a certain quality, e.g., peer-reviewed, or hove a reputable producer
d. Support the requirements of the/a key audience
e. Generate an acceptable level of use
2. Technical Requirements/Feasibility
a. Availability, e.g., remote access, stand-alone access
b. Authentication, e.g., IP [Internet Protocol] filtering or login password
c. Hardware. and software compatibility and capability
d. Storage and maintenance, e.g., remote hosting v. local hosting
e. Platforms that facilitate access to e-resources
3. Functionality and Reliability
a. Search and retrieval functionality, e.g., truncation, browsing, search history, transliteration
b. Exporting and downloading, e.g., printing, e-mail, downloading to a machine, and downloading to on an
electronic device
c. Sorting and ranking abilities for database results. For example, author, title, date, relevancy, facets, etc.
d. Interface, e.g., system intuitiveness, navigation, help, and tutorials
e. Reliability and availability, e.g., response times, 24/7 access
4. Vendor Support
a. User training and support
b. Trials and product demonstrations
c. Technical support and system notification process
d. Statistical reporting
e. Customization, e.g., branding
f. Provision of bibliographic data, e.g., MARC records
g. Data security and archiving policies
5. Supply
a. Purchase model, e.g., purchase, subscribe, pay per view, rental
b. Pricing models, e.g., selective v. big deal
c. Access options, i.e., single user, multiple users
d. Archiving and post-termination rights
e. Maintenance fees
f. Cancellation rights
6. Licensing
a. Model/Standard license
b. Governing laws

146
 c. Liability for unauthorized use
d. Definition of authorized users
e. Definition of authorized sites
f. Fair use provision
g. Termination
h. Refunds
i. Period of agreement
j. Compliance with the governing laws of the library’s or consortium's legal jurisdiction (province, state,
country)

Materials Producers and Distributors

Functions of Publishers
1. Tap sources of materials (concepts)
2. Raise and supply the capital to produce salable products
3. Aid in the development of the material
4. Contract for the manufacturing (duplication, packaging, etc.) of the product
5. Distribute materials, including promoting and advertising
6. Maintain records of sales, contracts, and correspondence relating to the production and sale of the materials

Functional Areas of Publishing

1. Administration - Deals with overseeing the activities, ensuring coordination, and making certain there are
adequate funds available to do the desired work
2. Editorial - Publishing houses decide what to produce
3. Production - Considers the issues such as page size, typeface, number and type of illustrative materials, and
cover design, as well as typesetting, printing and binding
4. Marketing - Responsible for promoting and selling the product; Provides input about the sales potential of the
title
5. Fulfillment - Needed to process on order, including warehousing of the materials; least controllable cost factor
for a publisher
6. Distribution - A major problem for both publishers and libraries because of the number of channels end the
implications for acquiring a specific publication

Different Types of Publishers

1. Trade - produces a wide range of titles, both fiction and non-fiction, that have wide sales potential for the so-called
general reader. Ex. Harper-Collins, Knopf, Macmillan, Doubleday, etc.
2. Specialty - restrict output to a few areas or subjects. The audience of this type is smaller and more critical. It
includes reference, children1 s microform, music etc. Ex. Gale
3. Textbook - target audience are primary and secondary schools. Ex. Scott, Foresman/ Addison Wesley, Rex, Anvil
4. Subject specialty - have narrow markets that are easy to identify and exist for a variety of fields. Ex. Harry Abrams
(Art), E.C. Schirmer (Music), Academic Press (Scientific), West Publishing (Lew), WB Saunders (Medical)
5. Vanity Presses/ Subsidy - receive most of their operating funds from the authors whose work they publish. Ex.
Author House
6. Private presses - their operations are not intended as income-generating. Ex. Harry Morris, Bird and Poull Presses.
7. Scholarly- as part of not-for-profit organizations, receive subsidies. Most are port of an academic institution,
research institution, or learned society.
8. Government presses - world's largest publishers. Their combined annual output dwarfs commercial output. Ex.
International (UNESCO), national (US Government Printing Office)
9. Paperback - produce two types of work, quality trade paperbacks and mass market paperbacks. They may publish
original paperbacks, that is first edition in a paperback.
10. Newspaper and periodical - retain reporters or writers as members of their staff. They are commercial publishers
of popular materials, specialty publishers, children's publishers, scholarly or academic publishers, and government
publishers.
11. Associations and reprint houses- have professional and special interest groups and associations frequently
establish their own publishing houses. Ex. ALA
12. Small presses - these are actually literary Presses. They are small but are as diverse as international publishing
conglomerates.

147
Censorship and Intellectual Freedom

Censorship - the active suppression of books, journals, newspapers, theater pieces, lectures, discussions, radio and television
programs, films, art works, etc. either partially or in the entirety - that is deemed objectionable on moral, political, military, or
other grounds (Hauptman, 1988).

Censorship is the act of prohibiting the publication, circulation or representation of materials considered objectionable. Censor
is an official empowered to examine written or printed matter as manuscripts, books, plays, serials, and non-print materials in
order to forbid publication, circulation or representation if it contains anything objectionable.

Types of censorship:
 mandated by the law
 demanded by individuals or groups
 exercised by the librarian

Premises which a censor works on:

 Materials/books can harm people
 Government has a responsibility to protect people from themselves
 The protection of the youth, the weak is more important than adult freedom • There is a consensus that exist about
what is obscene • There is a consensus about what is good literature and should be
IX. Acquisitions
 The process of ordering and receiving materials for library or archival collections by purchase, exchange, or gift,
which may include budgeting and negotiating with outside agencies, such as publishers, dealers, and vendors, to
obtain resources to meet the needs of the institution's clientele, in the most economical and expeditious manner.
 The four B1 s in acquisitions work are buy, beg, borrow, and barter.

Eight Standard Methods of Library Acquisitions

1. Firm order: An order placed with a dealer specifying a time limit for delivery and a price which must not exceed
without the customer's prior approval.
2. Standing order: A general order to a dealer to supply the volumes or parts of a particular title or type of publication
as they appear, until notified otherwise.
3. Approval plans: An arrangement by which a publisher or wholesaler assumes the responsibility for selecting and
supplying, subject to return privileges, all publications as issued, fitting a library's collection profile specified in
terms of subjects, levels, formats, prices, languages, etc.
4. Blanket order: A plan by which a publisher or wholesaler agrees to supply to a library one copy of all publications,
as issued within the specified limits of the plan, generally without return privileges.
5. Subscriptions (for serials): The arrangement by which, in return for a sum paid in advance, a periodical, newspaper,
or other serial is provided for a specified number of issues.
6. Leased Collection: A revolving collection of popular works in high demand provided to a library by a leasing
service for a rental fee.
7. Gifts: Acquiring library materials through donations.
8. Exchange programs: The arrangement by which a library sends to another library its own publications, or those of
the institution with which it is connected, such as university, and receives in return publications from the other
library; or sends duplicates from its collection to another library and receives other materials in return.

Budgeting and Fiscal Management

Approaches in Budgeting

1. Lump-sum budget provides for the allocation· of a specified amount of money to an organization or entity as a
whole. It allows administrators maximum flexibility in expenditures but obviously provides very limited built-in
accountability to the parent organization.
2. Program budgeting seeks to tie resources to areas of organizational objectives and activities. The focus in this
method of budgeting is on the library's activities and the funds are to be earmarked for programs or services that the
library plans to provide. For instance, if a library decides to provide a Current Awareness Service, the cost of that
Service is calculated and the expenditure estimated. The budget is thus prepared on the basis of the cost of programs
and whether a program has to continue, get modified or deleted.
3. Zero-based budge (ZBB) requires justifications of budget allocations without reference to past allocations in order
to overcome the inevitable organizational bias towards continuing as always. ZBB is an operating, planning and

148
 budgeting process that requires each manager to justify his entire budget request in detail from scratch and shifts the
burden of proof to each manager to justify why he should spend at all.
4. Line-item budgeting is also called incremental budgeting because the object is usually to add to the existing figures.
The most common type of budget that divides items of expenditure, line-by-line, into broad categories such as books
and journals, salaries and allowances, equipment, supplies, capital expenditure, contingencies, etc., with further
subdivisions for each of these broad categories. This is the usual traditional method that prepares the current budget
by considering past expenditure on each item, hence called historical budgeting.
5. Formula budgeting uses predetermined standards for the allocation of monetary resources. Such a budget is
technical and easy to prepare. It does not require special skills to prepare the same. This method tries to relate some
inputs like users served, academic programs supported, and ratio of book stock to total funds of parent body based on
financial norms and standards. The formulae are used for financial estimation as well as budget justification. This
appears to be a broad and quick method and hence saves a lot of time.
6. Performance budgeting requires careful accumulation of quantitative data over a period of time based on the
performance of activities and emphasizes the efficiency of operations. This budgeting method is similar to program
budgeting, but the emphasis shifts from programs to performance. Management techniques such as cost-benefit
analysis are used to measure the performance and establish norms.
7. Planning Programming Budgeting System (PPBS) combines the best of both program budgeting and performance
budgeting. The emphasis is on planning. It begins with the establishment of goals and objectives and ends with the
formulation of programs or services. Two key elements of PPBS are budgeting and systems analysis. As an extension
of program budgeting, PPBS involves systems analysis and/or other cost-effectiveness processes to provide a more
systematic and comprehensive comparison of costs and benefits of alternative approaches to a policy goal or program
objective.
X. Collection Maintenance
Weeding
The process of removing material from the open shelves of a library and reassessing its value in terms of current needs.
Once the material has been removed, it can be relegated, discorded, transferred to group storage, or disposed of or by sale.
Reasons for weeding:
 Assure continued quality in the collection
 To save money and improve services and collections
 The material and the information may be out-of-date
 The material may be worn out physically
 Better editions of a specific title may be available, even though the content may be the same
 Community needs may have changed
 Institutional objectives may have changed so that library objectives must change also
 Unwanted material can get in the way and has a ‘hindrance effect" (more effective use of library's space and
staff)
 Costs of storage
Barriers to weeding:

 Lack of time
 Procrastination
 Fear of making a mistake

Technique in weeding:

 Periodic collection inventories or reviews

o CREW (Continuous Review, Evaluation, and Weeding)
o MUSTIE
 Misleading – factually inaccurate
 Ugly – worn beyond mending or rebinding
 Superseded – by a new edition or by a much better book
 Trivial – of no discernable literacy or scientific merit
 Irrelevant – to the needs and interests of the library’s community
 Elsewhere – the material is easily obtained from another library
o Shelf Scanning
Collection Protection and Security
 Preservation - activities intended to prevent, retard, or stop deterioration of materials or to retain the intellectual
content of materials no longer physically intact.

149
 Conservation - the treatment of the physical items in order to extend their usable life; Maximizing the
endurance or minimizing the deterioration of an object through time, with as little change to the object as
possible.
o Conservator
 Trained professional who treats objects to repair damage, maximize endurance, and minimize
deterioration.
o Conservation Options
 Basic binding and repair
 Reformatting (Preservation microfilming and digitization)
 Restoration - the process that involves treating damaged material to return it as close as possible to its original
state.
o Basic Elements
 Proper handling of items by staff members and users
 Appropriate environmental conditions with minimal fluctuations
 Climate control - The ability to adjust and regulate the temperature and relative humidity
of a particular environment.
 Ultraviolet filter - A filter that can be placed over windows, skylights, and fluorescent
light tubes, between the light source and museum object to remove or reduce harmful
ultraviolet rays in the light.
 Ultraviolet radiation - Radiation of wavelengths shorter than 400nm, found in light from
the sun, sky, and most artificial light sources; it is invisible and strongly affects
collections.
 Security against theft and mutilation
 Planning for and responding to disasters
 Protection of electronic resources
o Practical tips to extend the useful life of materials
 Good housekeeping
Integrated Pest Management: The selection, integration, and implementation of pest
management methods based on predicted economic, ecological, and sociological
consequences. A decision-making process that helps one decide if a treatment is necessary
and appropriate, where the treatment should be administered when treatment should be
applied, and what strategies should be integrated for immediate and long-term results.
 Shelves should be the proper height for the items placed on them and should not be packed
too tightly.
 Storage containers and protective enclosures should be ‘archivally’ sound
 Book drops should be padded and emptied frequently
 Utilize supplies that are add-free, non-damaging, and safe for workers for in-house cleaning
and simple mending
Acid-free: A term loosely used for papers and other materials that are often pH neutral or
alkaline buffered; it could be any pH from 6 to 11.

150
PART IV: SELECTION AND ACQUISITION
INSTRUCTION: Read the following questions carefully. Shade the box of the letter that corresponds to best answer.
[] [] [] [] 1. He emphasized the importance of a written collection development policy and introduced the
A B C D evaluation criteria for Book Selection.

a) Peter Brophy c) Robert Broadus

b) Richard Gardner d) Paul Mosher
[] [] [] [] 2. He identified the 8 function of collection management.
A B C D
a) Peter Brophy c) Robert Broadus
b) Richard Gardner d) Paul Mosher
[] [] [] [] 3. With the numerous roles a librarian should perform, William Katz said that collection
A B C D development is a debate between a librarian and a/an

a) economist c) business manager

b) accountant d) specialist
[] [] [] [] 4. Which of the following are the contributions of William Katz to collection development.
A B C D
i Evaluation of reference books iii Reference librarian
ii Magazines for libraries iv Acquisitions librarian

a) i, ii, iv c) i only
b) i, iv d) iv only
[] [] [] []
A B C D 5. He said that collection analysis is the basis for evaluation.

a) William Katz c) Francis Drury

b) Robert Broadus d) David Spiller
[] [] [] [] 6. Who wrote Living with Books?
A B C D
a) Harold V. Bonny c) Helen Haines
b) Mary Carter, Wallace Bonk, et al. d) Arthur Bostwick
[] [] [] [] 7. Who described the difference between the collection development of libraries according to type
A B C D and size?

a) Harold V. Bonny c) Helen Haines

b) Mary Carter, Wallace Bonk, et al. d) Arthur Bostwick
[] [] [] [] 8. Which of the following have diverse collection.
A B C D
a) University Libraries c) College Libraries
b) School Libraries d) Special Libraries
[] [] [] [] 9. Which of the following have an extreme homogeneous collection?
A B C D
a) University Libraries c) College Libraries
b) School Libraries d) Special Libraries
[] [] [] [] 10. Which of the following could apply almost all the collection development principles because
A B C D this time, there are small budgetary constraints?

a) Medium Public Libraries c) School Libraries

b) Small Public Libraries d) College Libraries
[] [] [] [] 11. Which of the following have a homogeneous collection?
A B C D

151
 a) Medium Public Libraries c) School Libraries
b) Small Public Libraries d) College Libraries
[] [] [] [] 12. Which of the following could only apply the most important principles of collection
A B C D development and focus only on the basic needs and requirements?

a) Medium Public Libraries c) School Libraries

b) Small Public Libraries d) College Libraries
[] [] [] [] 13. Which of the following where librarians are solely responsible for the selection?
A B C D
a) Medium Public Libraries c) School Libraries
b) Small Public libraries d) College Libraries
[] [] [] [] 14. Who advocated for public libraries but also promoted that basic education is the goal of school
A B C D libraries?

a) Harold V. Bonny c) Helen Haines

b) Mary Carter, Wallace Bonk, et al. d) Arthur Bostwick
[] [] [] [] 15. Who promoted reading fiction in translation?
A B C D
a) Robert Broadus c) Helen Haines
b) Francis Drury d) Arthur Bostwick
[] [] [] [] 16. According to him, there is a right book for the right reader at the right time.
A B C D
a) Robert Broadus c) Helen Haines
b) Francis Drury d) Arthur Bostwick
[] [] [] [] 17. According to him, the library should not strive for mediocrity. He even added to duplicate the
A B C D best rather than acquire many. In other words, quality over quantity.

a) Robert Broadus c) Helen Haines

b) Francis Drury d) Arthur Bostwick
[] [] [] [] 18. Who introduced inclusivity in service and the 14 principles of selection?
A B C D
a) Robert Broadus c) Helen Haines
b) Francis Drury d) Arthur Bostwick
[] [] [] [] 19. According to Harold V. Bonny, the following are the purpose of reading, except one;
A B C D
a) Recreation c) Study
b) Information d) Research
[] [] [] [] 20. In the depreciation of library material scale, which is for library books?
A B C D
a) 15% of original cost per year with 6- c) 10% of original cost per year with
year life-time expectancy 17-year life-time expectancy
b) 10% of original cost per year with d) 14% of original cost per year with 7-
10-year life-time expectancy year of life-time expectancy
[] [] [] [] 21. In the depreciation of library material scale, which is for software?
A B C D
a) 15% of original cost per year with 6- c) 10% of original cost per year with
year life-time expectancy 17-year life-time expectancy
b) 10% of original cost per year with d) 14% of original cost per year with 7-
10-year life-time expectancy year of life-time expectancy
[] [] [] []
A B C D 22. In the Industry Standards for Automated Acquisition, BISAC stands for?

a) Book Industry Systems Acquisition c) Book Industry Systems Advisory

Committee Standards Computerized Standards
b) Book Industry Systems Advisory d) Book Industry Systems Advisory
Committee Standards Computerized Standards
152
[] [] [] [] 23. Which of the following integrated library systems has BISAC interface
A B C D
a) TALIS c) INNOPAC
b) TINLIB d) Geac Advance ILS
[] [] [] [] 24. Which module is not available in the Philippine Scenario ILS?
A B C D
a) Indexing Module c) Circulation Module
b) Cataloging Module d) Acquisition Module
[] [] [] [] 25. It is based on ongoing assessment of the information needs of library clientele, usage statistics
A B C D analysis, and demographic projections primarily for the decision-making process in determining
how the library’s resources support its clientele. Often impacted by budgetary limitations
(IFLA).

a) Collection management c) Collection assessment

b) Collection development d) Acquisition
[] [] [] [] 26. This guides the processes of collection development by establishing priorities and facilitating
A B C D decision making in selection and acquisition.

a) Collection Management Policy c) Library Operations and Procedures

Statement Guideline
b) Collection Development Policy d) Selection and Acquisition Guideline
Statement
[] [] [] [] 27. This guides all the departments, sections and services and their functions, activities, operations,
A B C D policies and procedures within the library. It is what a staff consults whenever there are crucial
situations, especially when the staff have divided opinions and decisions. IT is also what new
hires are reviewing to be familiar with the overall operations of the library.

a) Collection Management Policy c) Library Operations and Procedures

Statement Guideline
b) Collection Development Policy d) Selection and Acquisition Guideline
Statement
[] [] [] [] 28. A subpart of the Selection and acquisition guideline which guides the library’s acquisition of
A B C D materials to be added in the library collection.

a) Weeding out policy c) Selection policy

b) Acquisition policy d) Procurement policy
[] [] [] [] 29. Included in the selection policy, which is synonymous to de-selection process, this provides
A B C D criteria on determining those that are necessarily be removed to improve the collection as well
as the SOPs to be followed such as discarding and any means of relieving accountability.

a) Weeding out policy c) Selection policy

b) Acquisition policy d) Procurement policy
[] [] [] [] 30. Which of the following processes are part of collection development?
A B C D
i Formulating criteria for selection vi Determining collection strengths,
level or intensity
ii Implementing preservation and vii Identifying user needs, current
conservation measures trends and community interests
iii Arranging the collection according viii Marketing the collection
to established organization methods.
iv Cooperative decision making within ix Analyzing usage statistics
library consortia and with other
libraries
v Facilitating access to resources x Developing disaster risk reduction
program

153
 a) i, iii, v, vi, viii, and ix c) i, iv, vi, vii, and ix
b) i, ii, iii, iv, v, vi, vii, viii, ix, and x d) i, ii, iv, v, vi, vii, and ix
[] [] [] [] 31. Which of the following processes are part of the library manual?
A B C D
i Formulating criteria for selection vi Determining collection strengths,
level or intensity
ii Implementing preservation and vii Identifying user needs, current
conservation measures trends and community interests
iii Arranging the collection according viii Marketing the collection
to established organization methods.
iv Cooperative decision making within ix Analyzing usage statistics
library consortia and with other
libraries
v Facilitating access to resources x Developing disaster risk reduction
program

a) i, iii, v, vi, viii, and ix c) i, iv, vi, vii, and ix

b) i, ii, iii, iv, v, vi, vii, viii, ix, and x d) i, ii, iv, v, vi, vii, and ix

[] [] [] [] 32. A publishing house associated with a university or other scholarly institution, specializing in the
A B C D publication of scholarly books and journals, particularly works written by its faculty. Most of
these type of publisher operate on a nonprofit basis relying on a committee of senior faculty
members to select manuscript for publication.

a) Private press c) Vanity press

b) University Press d) Small Press
[] [] [] [] 33. A small publisher of comparatively limited resources, functioning independently of the
A B C D publishing establishment and consequently more likely to issue works outside cultural
mainstream. Most of these publishers employ fewer than a dozen people and publish no more
than 20-30 new titles per year.

a) Private press c) Vanity press

b) University Press d) Small Press
[] [] [] [] 34. More common in the US, a type of publisher that specializes in producing books at the author’s
A B C D expense, used mainly by writers whose works have been rejected by commercial publishers, and
by individuals of private means who are convinced they have an important message to impart to
the world.

a) Private press c) Vanity press

b) University Press d) Small Press
[] [] [] [] 35. It is a publishing house that issues books of interest to the educated reader, for sale in college
A B C D and quality retail bookstores.

a) Trade publisher c) Popular press

b) Foreign subsidiary d) Commercial press
[] [] [] [] 36. It is granted by the author or the person responsible for the work, to the publisher to produce or
A B C D publish the work in different formats based on the original material.

a) Copyright c) Subsidiary rights

b) Licensing agreement d) Legal rights
[] [] [] [] 37. It is the process of managing the budget to cover different subject materials or formats.
A B C D
a) Resource allocation c) User needs assessment
b) Collection evaluation d) Collection maintenance
[] [] [] [] 38. Which is the correct order of acquisition purchase?
A B C D
154
 i Bibliographic verification vi Delivery receipt
ii Preparation of purchase order vii Request for quotation
iii Purchase request viii Request Approval
iv Record verification ix Technical processing
v Bidding and Deliberation x Clearing of records

a) i, iii, viii, v, ii, vi, vii, ix, iv, x c) i, iii, viii, vii, v, ii, vi, ix, iv, x
b) i, iv, iii, viii, v, ii, vi, vii, ix, x d) iv, i, iii, viii, vii, v, ii, vi, ix, x
[] [] [] [] 39. A note issued by a vendor in place of a cash refund on orders unfilled of returned, to be
A B C D deducted for the total charge of the invoice.

a) Claim c) Invoice
b) Statement of account d) Credit memo
[] [] [] [] 40. These are the billing; notices of paid and unpaid invoices from the vendor.
A B C D
a) Claim c) Invoice
b) Statement of account d) Credit memo
[] [] [] [] 41. These are billings from a publisher or agent for library materials being acquired.
A B C D
a) Claim c) Invoice

b) Statement of account d) Credit memo

[] [] [] [] 42. They serve as wholesale middleman in book trade between the library and the publisher.
A B C D
a) Book jobber c) Agent
b) Bookseller d) Antiquarian dealer
[] [] [] [] 43. An acquisition plan where the library instructs the supplier or publisher or jobber to provide a
A B C D copy of all publications in a particular category with the right to return them.

a) Approval plan c) Firm Order

b) Blanket Order d) Book lease plan
[] [] [] [] 44. An acquisition plan offered by some jobbers which allows a library to rent an agreed upon a
A B C D number of popular fiction and nonfiction titles, usually for a fixed monthly fees.

a) Approval plan c) Firm Order

b) Blanket Order d) Book lease plan
[] [] [] [] 45. It is the most common acquisition method if the library know what it wants. It is used when
A B C D ordering on a per title basis.

a) Approval plan c) Firm Order

b) Blanket Order d) Book lease plan

[] [] [] [] 46. A plan that ensures the presence and availability in some libraries of the United States of one
A B C D copy of each book of research value published in foreign countries.

a) Greenaway Plan c) Farmington Plan

b) McNaughton Plan d) Subscription
[] [] [] [] 47. An agreement between a library and a publisher or a vendor to supply a serial title to be
A B C D renewed and prepaid annually until cancelled.

a) Greenaway Plan c) Farmington Plan

b) McNaughton Plan d) Subscription
[] [] [] [] 48. It is an author signed copy of a work or a book.
A B C D

155
 a) Autographed edition c) Deluxe edition
b) Author’s edition d) First edition
[] [] [] [] 49. An edition with intricate design with extra details on the cover, printing and the physical design
A B C D of the book, better compared to the standard trade edition. Usually printed in different paper
with a different type of binding.

a) Autographed edition c) Deluxe edition

b) Author’s edition d) First edition
[] [] [] [] 50. The whole number of copies first printed from the same type and issued at the same time.
A B C D
a) New edition c) Revised edition
b) Reprint edition d) First edition
[] [] [] [] 51. It is an edition reproduced or copied intended to simulate as closely as possible the physical
A B C D appearance of a previous work.

a) Facsimile edition c) Special edition

b) Expurgated edition d) Unexpurgated edition
[] [] [] [] 52. It is an edition re-issued in a new format, sometimes with an introduction, appendix, or
A B C D illustrations and having a distinctive name. Often issued due to anniversary or other milestones.

a) Facsimile edition c) Special edition

b) Expurgated edition d) Unexpurgated edition
[] [] [] [] 53. An edition that includes passages omitted from other versions or editions, usually because the
A B C D language or content was considered offensive to some readers.

a) Facsimile edition c) Special edition

b) Expurgated edition d) Unexpurgated edition
[] [] [] [] 54. A term used to refer to the treatment to expurgated editions. Originated from the treatment of
A B C D the Old Testament, Canterbury Tales, Gulliver’s Travel and Shakespeare’s works.

a) Bowdlerized c) Censor
b) Excommunicated d) Blue-pencil
[] [] [] [] 55. It is a second or subsequent impression of the previously published edition, usually with a
A B C D different title, cover design or cover illustration.

a) Reprint c) Impression
b) Re-issue d) Newsprint
[] [] [] [] 56. An edition printed in the lowest grade of paper; made from wood pulp and used for newspapers.
A B C D Often are the “international editions” of foreign published books.

a) Manuscript c) Draft
b) Preprint d) Newsprint edition
[] [] [] [] 57. It is the relative effort presently expended on the development of a subject collection. It is
A B C D expressed as the collection strength that will result if the present effort continues overtime.

a) Current Collecting Intensity c) Collection Aspects

b) Desired Collecting Intensity d) Existing Collection Strength
[] [] [] [] 58. It is the other term used to express the relative effort presently expended on the development of
A B C D a subject collection. It is expressed as the collection strength that will result if the present effort
continues overtime.

156
 a) Collection levels c) Collection development
b) Acquisitions commitment d) Collection goal

[] [] [] [] 59. The other term used to express the relative degree of effort that should be maintained for the
A B C D development of a subject collection that meets the library’s mission.

a) Collection levels c) Collection development

b) Acquisitions commitment d) Collection goal
[] [] [] [] 60. Communities of two or more libraries formally bound to coordinate, cooperate on, or
A B C D consolidate specified functions. It may be based on geography, type of library, or subject.

a) Consortia c) Collection development and

management program
b) Cooperative collection development d) Library network
[] [] [] [] 61. Coordination, or cooperation, or sharing in the management and development of library
A B C D collections agreed by two or more libraries. The arrangement is generally less formal.

a) Consortia c) Collection development and

management program
b) Cooperative collection development d) Library network
[] [] [] [] 62. The formal and systematic organization of a library’s collection development and management
A B C D activities. Explicitly linked to the parent agency’s mission; administratively structured around
corresponding goals and objectives; and supported by appropriate policies, governance
structures, training programs and other administrative arrangements.

a) Consortia c) Collection development and

management program
b) Cooperative collection development d) Library network
[] [] [] [] 63. A systematically arranged and comprehensive set of labels (numbers’ letters, or a combination
A B C D of numbers and letters) used to represent a defined library collection characteristics, notably
collection levels and the extent of representation of languages in a library collection.

a) Scope notes c) Disposition policy

b) Collection codes d) Conspectus
[] [] [] [] 64. An overview or summary of collection strengths and collecting intensities- arranged by subject,
A B C D classification scheme, or combination of either, and containing standardized codes for collection
or collecting levels and for languages of materials collected.

a) Scope notes c) Disposition policy

b) Collection codes d) Conspectus
[] [] [] [] 65. The library does not collect in this subject.
A B C D
a) Out of scope (0) c) Minimal level : uneven coverage
(1a)
b) Minimal level (1) d) Minimal level : even coverage (1b)
[] [] [] [] 66. There is an unsystematic representation of the subject.
A B C D

a) Out of scope (0) c) Minimal level : uneven coverage

(1a)
b) Minimal level (1) d) Minimal level : even coverage (1b)
[] [] [] [] 67. Collection can serve to introduce and define a subject and to indicate varieties of information
A B C D available elsewhere.

157
 a) Out of scope (0) c) Basic information level (2)
b) Minimal level (1) d) Instructional level (3)
[] [] [] [] 68. Sufficient to support the information and recreational reading needs of a highly educated
A B C D general public or community college students.

a) Basic instructional level (3a) c) Basic information level, introductory

(2a)
b) Advanced instructional level (3c) d) Basic information level, advanced
(2b)
[] [] [] [] 69. Adequate to impart maintain knowledge about a subject in a systematic way and adequate to
A B C D support independent study and most learning needs of the clientele of public and special
libraries, as well as undergraduate and some graduate instruction.

a) Basic information level (2) c) Research level (4)

b) Instructional level (3) d) Comprehensive level (5)
[] [] [] [] 70. Adequate to support advanced undergraduate course work but not master’s degree programs.
A B C D
a) Basic instructional level (3a) c) Advanced instructional level (3c)
b) Intermediate instructional level (3b) d) Research level (4)
[] [] [] [] 71. Supports doctoral and other original research.
A B C D
a) Basic instructional level (3a) c) Advanced instructional level (3c)
b) Intermediate instructional level (3b) d) Research level (4)
[] [] [] [] 72. A selection philosophy wherein there is a widening of service patterns to include as many
A B C D people as possible.

a) Pluralist c) Liberal
b) Traditionalist d) Minimalist
[] [] [] [] 73. A selection philosophy which is the middle ground point of view and comes up with a selection
A B C D philosophy as wide in scope as it is generous people.

a) Pluralist c) Liberal
b) Traditionalist d) Minimalist
[] [] [] []
A B C D 74. What are the reasons for conducting a community needs assessment or analysis?

i For collection development v For collection assessment

ii To locate service focus vi To adjust resource allocations
iii For the record purposes vii For community engagement
iv To adjust staffing patterns viii To follow emerging trends in
neighboring community
a) i, ii, iii, iv, v c) i, iv, v, vi, viii
b) i, iv, v, vi, vii d) i, ii, iv, v, vi
[] [] [] []
A B C D 75. Which of the following is not a use of collection development policy?

a) To help ensure the diverse policy c) To aid in weeding and evaluating the
interpretation especially during staff collection
turnover
b) To guide staff in handling d) To aid in rationalizing budget
complaints allocations
[] [] [] [] 76. Which of the following is a use of collection development policy?
A B C D
a) To provide means of assessing c) To silence complaints from insisting
overall performance of the collection clients
development program

158
 b) To provide proof for accreditation d) To confuse staff with what should
matters be done in certain situations

[] [] [] [] 77. Which of the following primarily affects academic library selection?

A B C D
a) The prevailing community need c) The space
b) The curriculum d) The budget
[] [] [] [] 78. Which of the following primarily affects public library selection?
A B C D
a) The prevailing community need c) The space
b) The curriculum d) The budget
[] [] [] [] 79. Which factor is being considered when asking for: “Is the length of the program appropriate?”
A B C D
a) Programming Factors c) Technical Factors
b) Content Factors d) Format Factors
[] [] [] [] 80. Which factor is being considered when asking for: “Does the background audio material
A B C D contribute to the overall impact?”

a) Programming Factors c) Technical Factors

b) Content Factors d) Format Factors
[] [] [] [] 81. Which of the following is a qualitative collection analysis?
A B C D

a) Circulation statistics c) Ratio measures

b) Content overlap studies d) Collection mapping
[] [] [] [] 82. Which of the following is a quantitative collection analysis?
A B C D
a) Citation analysis c) Verification studies
b) User opinion surveys d) Collection mapping
[] [] [] [] 83. Which of the following are collection based collection analysis?
A B C D
i Circulation statistics vi Usability testing
ii In-house use statistics vii Collection size and growth
iii Interlibrary loan statistics viii Collection size standards and
formulas
iv Hits and downloads ix List Checking
v Costs per use x Collection mapping
a) i, ii, iii, iv, v c) i, v, vii, viii, x
b) vii, viii, ix, x d) ii, iii, iv, viii
[] [] [] [] 84. Which of the following is included in H.F. McGraw’s Criteria for de-selection?
A B C D
i Physical condition vi Obsolete books, especially in the
sciences
ii Duplicates vii Superseded editions
iii Qualitative worth viii Books that are infested, dirty,
shabby, etc.
iv Unsolicited and unwanted gifts ix Unused, unneeded volumes of sets
v Quantitative worth x Periodicals with no indexes
a) i, iii, v, vi, vii, viii, ix, x c) ii, iii, v, vi, vii, viii, ix, x
b) ii, iv, vi, vii, viii, ix, x d) i, ii, iv, vi, vii, viii, ix, x
[] [] [] [] 85. Which of the following should not be considered in selecting the vendor or supplier?
A B C D

a) Services c) Financial considerations and

viabilities
b) Special or additional services d) Freebies

159
[] [] [] [] 86. Under content, which is not an evaluation criteria for Internet Resources?
A B C D
a) Authority c) Purpose
b) Audience d) Special Features
[] [] [] [] 87. Which of the following evaluation criteria is unique for serials?
A B C D
a) Cost c) Format
b) Indexing d) Demand
[] [] [] [] 88. The type of library where its selection process is not an exclusive responsibility of a librarian
A B C D but is a task dictated by the prevailing need of the most active users of the collection?

a) Public Library c) Academic Library

b) School Library d) Special Library
[] [] [] [] 89. The type of library where heads of the different departments, curriculum specialists, directors
A B C D of curriculum and instruction, librarians, or media specialists are responsibly for selection

a) Public Library c) Academic Library

b) School Library d) Special Library
[] [] [] [] 90. According to him, without clear and reliable information about what is happening within an
A B C D organization and in its interactions with its customers and suppliers, it is impossible to make well-
founded decisions to guide future development or even to monitor the effects of decision that have
been made in the past.

a) Peter Brophy c) Robert Broadus

b) Richard Gardner d) Paul Mosher
[] [] [] [] 91. According to him, library collection development should be responsive to its parent
A B C D institution.

a) Peter Brophy c) Robert Broadus

b) Richard Gardner d) Paul Mosher
[] [] [] [] 92. According to him, libraries must stock on classic, select fiction and develop local history.
A B C D
a) William Katz c) Francis Drury
b) Robert Broadus d) David Spiller

[] [] [] []
A B C D
93. Who said that librarians must censor what is not good, true and beautiful?

a) Harold V. Bonny c) Helen Haines

b) Mary Carter, Wallace Bonk, et al. d) Arthur Bostwick

[] [] [] [] 94. Which of the following libraries could apply all collection development principles due to no
A B C D budgetary constraints?

a) University Libraries c) College Libraries

b) Large Public Libraries d) Special Libraries

[] [] [] [] 95. 15% of original cost per year with 6-year life-time expectancy is the depreciation rate for
A B C D which library material?

a) Library Books c) Software

b) Encyclopedias d) Textbooks
[] [] [] [] 96. 10% of original cost per year with 10-year life-tome expectancy is the depreciation rate for
A B C D which library material?

160
 a) Encyclopedias c) Software
b) Textbooks d) None of the above

[] [] [] [] 97. In the Industry Standards for Automated Acquisition, SISAC stands for?
A B C D

a) Serials Industry Systems c) Serials Industry Systems Advisory

Acquisition Committee Standards Computerized Standards
b) Serials Industry Systems d) Serials Industry Systems Advisory
Advisory Committee Standards Computerized Standards

[] [] [] [] 98. Which of the following integrated library systems can download files from online
A B C D bibliographic utilities like OCLC or commercial jobbers like EBSCO?

a) TALIS c) INNOPAC
b) TINLIB d) Geac Advance ILS

[] [] [] [] 99. It is the process of information gathering, communication, coordination, policy making,

A B C D evaluation, and planning that results in decisions about the acquisition, retention, and provision of
access to information sources in support of the intellectual needs of a given community.

a) Collection management c) Collection assessment

b) Collection development d) Selection and Acquisition

[] [] [] [] 100. This guides the processes of managing the collection by establishing extent of usage, and
A B C D circulation, and facilitating access by defining restrictions or limitations.

a) Collection Management Policy c) Library Operations and

Statement Procedures Guideline
b) Collection Development Policy d) Selection and Acquisition
Statement Guideline

[] [] [] [] 101. Another term for library operations and procedures guideline is

A B C D
a) Library Manual c) Library Regulations
b) Library Policy d) Library Handbook

[] [] [] [] 102. A subpart of the Selection and acquisition guideline which enables the library to achieve
A B C D quality, objectivity and consistency in the process of identifying which materials to be acquired and
ensures that resources satisfy the information needs of the customers.

a) Weeding out policy c) Selection policy

b) Acquisition policy d) Procurement policy

[] [] [] [] 103. Included in the acquisition policy, this helps achieve transparency in transactions and ensure
A B C D efficient use of budget during purchase and subscription.

a) Weeding out policy c) Selection policy

b) Acquisition policy d) Procurement policy

[] [] [] [] 104. Which of the following processes are part of collection management?

A B C D
i Formulating criteria for selection vi Determining collection strengths,
level or intensity
ii Implementing preservation and vii Identifying user needs, current
conservation measures trends and community interests

161
 iii Arranging the collection viii Marketing the collection
according to established
organization methods.
iv Cooperative decision making ix Analyzing usage statistics
within library consortia and with
other libraries
v Facilitating access to resources x Developing disaster risk
reduction program
a) i, iii, v, vi, viii, and ix c) i, iv, vi, vii, and ix
b) i, ii, iii, iv, v, vi, vii, viii, ix, and x d) i, ii, iv, v, vi, vii, and ix

[] [] [] [] 105. It is a publisher that operates on a cost-recovery basis. In other words, they produce or sell
A B C D books and/or other publications for profit. Trade publishers and popular presses are classified under
this type of publisher.

a) Private press c) Vanity press

b) University Press d) Commercial press
[] [] [] [] 106. It is a small printing establishment, often operated by a single person, offering limited editions
A B C D at the discretion of the owner. The results are usually of fine quality and, when offered for sale, may
not be distributed through regular market channels.

a) Private press c) Vanity press

b) University Press d) Small Press

[] [] [] [] 107. It is a publishing house that issues publications for the mass market, sold at newsstands and in
A B C D supermarkets and chain stores.

a) Trade publisher c) Popular press

b) Foreign subsidiary d) Commercial press

[] [] [] [] 108. A publisher that operates in large scale publishing through branching out to many foreign
A B C D countries. They have offices and/or presses in other countries but there is a main headquarters that
controls all its functions.

a) Trade publisher c) Popular press

b) Foreign subsidiary d) Commercial press
[] [] [] []
A B C D 109. It is considered as the heart of the collection development process.

a) Acquisition c) Selection
b) Evaluation d) Budget
[] [] [] [] 110. It is the process of ensuring the degree to which the library acquires the materials it intends to
A B C D acquire in accordance with stated parameters.

a) Resource allocation c) User needs assessment

b) Collection evaluation d) Collection maintenance

[] [] [] [] 111. It is an auxiliary file that reflects the reference number, date of order, source, order of titles
A B C D and other descriptive information. This authorizes a publisher, jobber, dealer or a vendor to deliver
materials or services at a set price.

a) Purchase order c) Exchange and Complimentary

b) Quotation d) Receipt
[] [] [] []
A B C D 112. It is any communication directed to the agent or source to hasten delivery of overdue material

162
 a) Claim c) Invoice
b) Fine d) Quotation

[] [] [] [] 113. They are sometimes referred as aggregators for online databases and periodicals and ______
A B C D for print subscriptions.

a) Book jobber c) Agent

b) Bookseller d) Antiquarian dealer
[] [] [] [] 114. A type of a dealer who handles older, frequently out-of-print books which probably have had
A B C D one or more owners; also called second hand-dealer.

a) Book jobber c) Agent

b) Bookseller d) Antiquarian dealer

[] [] [] [] 115. It is an agreement between a library and a supplier for the automatic supply of one or more
A B C D copies of all the titles issued by the publisher or of all the titles within certain subject without the
right to return them.

a) Approval plan c) Firm Order

b) Blanket Order d) Book lease plan

[] [] [] [] 116. It is a form of blanket order in which a large library or library system agrees to receive from a
A B C D publisher for a nominal price one advance copy of all the trade books it publishes to encourage
acquisitions librarians to order selected title in advance of publication.

a) Greenaway Plan c) Farmington Plan

b) McNaughton Plan d) Subscription

[] [] [] [] 117. Which of the following is an example of a book lease plan?

A B C D
a) Greenaway Plan c) Farmington Plan
b) McNaughton Plan d) Subscription

[] [] [] [] 118. An order to supply each succeeding issues of a serial, periodical or annual publication, or
A B C D subsequent volumes of a work published in a number of volumes issued intermittently. Also called
continuation order or till-forbidden order.

a) Firm order c) Standing order

b) Blanket order d) Purchase order
[] [] [] [] 119. The second batch of printing usually contains minor corrections such as typographical and
A B C D grammatical errors but still used the same typesetting or layout of the first editions. If not correct,
erratum are accompany this edition.

a) New edition c) Revised edition

b) Reprint edition d) First edition
[] [] [] [] 120. An edition with substantial alteration by correction, deletion, or the addition of supplementary
A B C D materials, either by the original author or another author, usually to expand the content or bring it up-
to-date. That is why it is sometimes referred as the expanded edition.

a) New edition c) Revised edition

b) Reprint edition d) First edition

[] [] [] [] 121. An edition which portions have been deleted usually to satisfy moral or political objections,
A B C D an alternative to banning the work completely from publication or distribution.

163
 a) Facsimile edition c) Special edition
b) Expurgated edition d) Unexpurgated edition

[] [] [] [] 122. An edition of a book specifically intended for the use of students enrolled in a course of study
A B C D or in preparing for an examination on a subject or in an academic discipline.

a) Textbook c) Impression
b) Preprint d) Newsprint
[] [] [] [] 123. These are all the copies of a book or other publication printed in the same time from the same
A B C D type of plates.

a) Reprint c) Impression
b) Re-issue d) Newsprint

[] [] [] [] 124. A portion of a work printed and issued before the publication of the complete work. A paper
A B C D submitted at a conference which is published prior to the holding of the conference.

a) Manuscript c) Draft
b) Preprint d) Newsprint edition

[] [] [] [] 125. A copy of an article published in a periodical, specially reprinted for the author’s use, but
A B C D retaining the numbering of the issue from which it was taken. Sometimes called a separate.

a) Reprint c) Preprint
b) Offprint d) Newsprint edition

[] [] [] [] 126. It is the relative degree of effort that should be maintained for the development of a subject
A B C D collection that meets the library’s mission.

a) Current Collecting Intensity c) Collection Aspects

b) Desired Collecting Intensity d) Existing Collection Strength

[] [] [] [] 127. It is the current quality of a subject collection in a particular library. It may be temporarily at a
A B C D higher or lower level than that of current or desired collecting intensity.

a) Current Collecting Intensity c) Collection Aspects

b) Desired Collecting Intensity d) Collection Strength
[] [] [] [] 128. It is the other term used to refer to is the current quality of a subject collection in a particular
A B C D library in conspectus work.

a) Collection levels c) Collection development

b) Acquisitions commitment d) Collection goal

[] [] [] [] 129. It states the options for removing unwanted materials acquired by purchase, gift, deposit, or
A B C D other means, as governed by local, parent-agency, legal, and other restrictions. These options include
exchange, donation to other agencies, sale, and discard.

a) Scope notes c) Disposition policy

b) Collection codes d) Conspectus
[] [] [] [] 130. Description of local holdings or policies that supplement the codes specified for each subject
A B C D in a conspectus. A description of preservation project is an example of this.

a) Scope notes c) Disposition policy

b) Collection codes d) Conspectus

164
[] [] [] [] 131. The state of a collection and the state of collection building at a point in time.
A B C D
a) Collection aspects c) Collection intensity
b) Collection strength d) Collection levels

[] [] [] [] 132. The collection contains very basic works.

A B C D
a) Out of scope (0) c) Basic information level (2)
b) Minimal level (1) d) Instructional level (3)

[] [] [] [] 133. Basic, authors, some core works, and a spectrum of ideological views are represented.
A B C D
a) Out of scope (0) c) Minimal level : uneven coverage
(1a)
b) Minimal level (1) d) Minimal level : even coverage
(1b)

[] [] [] [] 134. Sufficient to support patrons attempting to locate general information about a subject or
A B C D students enrolled in rudimentary level courses.

a) Basic instructional level (3a) c) Basic information level,

introductory (2a)
b) Advanced instructional level (3c) d) Basic information level, advanced
(2b)

[] [] [] [] 135. Supports lower division undergraduate courses, as well as some of the basic independent
A B C D study needs of the lifelong learner.

a) Basic instructional level (3a) c) Advanced instructional level (3c)

b) Intermediate instructional level d) Research level (4)
(3b)

[] [] [] [] 136. Supports master’s degree level programs as well as other specialized inquiries such as those of
A B C D subject professionals within special libraries.

a) Basic instructional level (3a) c) Advanced instructional level (3c)

b) Intermediate instructional level d) Research level (4)
(3b)

[] [] [] [] 137. Includes all significant works of recorded knowledge in all applicable languages for a
A B C D necessarily defined and limited field.

a) Intermediate instructional level c) Research level (4)

(3b)
b) Advanced instructional level (3c) d) Comprehensive level (5)

[] [] [] [] 138. A selection philosophy which views to stick on the building a collection for the current
A B C D patrons.

a) Pluralist c) Liberal
b) Traditionalist d) Minimalist

[] [] [] []
A B C D 139. Which of the following is not a use of collection development policy?

165
 a) To inform everyone about the c) To generate some degree of
nature and scope of the collection commitment to meeting
organization goals
b) To inform everyone that they are d) To set standard for inclusion and
the priorities of the collection exclusion
[] [] [] [] 140. Which of the following is not a use of collection development policy?
A B C D
a) To force the thought about c) To reinforce the influence of a
organizational priorities for the single selector and personal
collection biases
b) To inform every one of the d) To provide a training and
collection priorities orientation tool for the new staff

[] [] [] [] 141. In the common features of Collection Management Policies, which of the following freedom
A B C D statements are necessary?

a) Freedom to Abode c) Freedom to Read

b) Freedom of Expression d) Freedom of Citizenry

[] [] [] [] 142. Which of the following primarily affects special library selection?

A B C D
a) The prevailing community need c) The space
b) The curriculum d) The budget

[] [] [] [] 143. Which factor is being considered when asking for: “Is it only for recreational use?”
A B C D
a) Programming Factors c) Technical Factors
b) Content Factors d) Format Factors

[] [] [] [] 144. Which factor is being considered when asking for: “If damage occurs, can it be repaired, or
A B C D must one buy a replacement copy, or does it require maintenance?”

a) Programming Factors c) Technical Factors

b) Content Factors d) Format Factors

[] [] [] [] 145. Which of the following are use and user-based collection analysis?
A B C D

i Interlibrary loan statistics vi Content overlap studies

ii Ratio measures vii User observation
iii Citation analysis viii User opinion survey
iv Focus groups ix Materials budget and growth
analysis
v Document Delivery statistics x Verification studies
a) ii, iii, iv, vi, vii, viii c) i, iv, iv, v, vii, viii
b) i, ii, vi, ix, x d) ii, iv, v, vii, viii, x

[] [] [] [] 146. The following are reasons for de-selection except?

A B C D
a) To keep the library in best c) Alleviate space problems,
possible condition especially for small libraries
b) To find justification for budget d) Improve accessibility of the
requests collection
[] [] [] [] 147. Which of the following are benefits of Cooperative Collection Development?
A B C D

166
 a) Potential for improving both
information and materials
accessed by users and as well as
staff
b) Greater possibility of limiting
stretched resources
c) Increases the breadth and depth of
material available to users of
member libraries.
d) Joint projects can increase the
visibility of enhancements and
improvements

[] [] [] [] 148. What type of library includes members of the faculty and the librarian in-charge have the
A B C D primary responsibility of selecting materials for inclusion in the library collection. They are also
guided by recommendations coming from students and researchers?

a) Public Library c) Academic Library

b) School Library d) Special Library

[] [] [] [] 149. The type of library where the members of the community will have a significant role in
A B C D materials selection and decisions to purchase and acquire. Sometimes the librarian will just have to
ensure that s/he is able to understand and interpret the unexpressed needs of her community to be
able to determine the kinds or materials these users would like to find in the library collection.

a) Public Library c) Academic Library

b) School Library d) Special Library

[] [] [] [] 150. According to him, selection process considers both education and demand. He also identified
A B C D various tools or methods used for selection (such as examination, publishers’ information, reviews
and listings)

a) William Katz c) Francis Drury

b) Robert Broadus d) David Spiller

167
KEY ANSWER TO PART IV: SELECTION AND ACQUISITION
1. C 51. A 101. A
2. A 52. C 102. C
3. A 53. D 103. D
4. A 54. A 104. D
5. A 55. B 105. D
6. C 56. D 106. A
7. B 57. A 107. C
8. A 58. B 108. B
9. D 59. D 109. C
10. A 60. A 110. B
11. D 61. B 111. A
12. B 62. C 112. A
13. C 63. B 113. C
14. A 64. D 114. D
15. C 65. A 115. B
16. B 66. C 116. A
17. B 67. C 117. B
18. C 68. D 118. C
19. D 69. B 119. B
20. B 70. B 120. C
21. D 71. D 121. B
22. B 72. A 122. A
23. D 73. C 123. C
24. D 74. D 124. B
25. B 75. A 125. B
26. B 76. A 126. B
27. C 77. B 127. D
28. B 78. A 128. A
29. A 79. B 129. C
30. C 80. C 130. A
31. B 81. C 131. A
32. B 82. C 132. B
33. D 83. B 133. D
34. C 84. B 134. C
35. A 85. D 135. A
36. C 86. D 136. C
37. A 87. D 137. D
38. D 88. D 138. B
39. D 89. B 139. B
40. B 90. A 140. C
41. C 91. C 141. C
42. A 92. C 142. A
43. A 93. D 143. A
44. D 94. B 144. D
45. C 95. D 145. C
46. C 96. A 146. B
47. D 97. A 147. C
48. A 98. B 148. C
49. C 99. A 149. A
50. D 100. A 150. D

168
INDEXING AND ABSTRACTING
INDEXES and INDEXING

Indexing

- the process of analyzing the informational content of records of knowledge and expressing the informational content
in the language of the indexing system (a set of prescribed procedures, either manual and/or automated, intended
for indexing)

Index

- Latin word indicare, which means "to point out”

- a guide to the contents of a knowledge record systematic analysis of such records, arranged in an organized way
- list of bibliographic information arranged in order according to some specified datum such as author, subject, or
topic keyword

Document

- physical carrier of organized information; maybe print or non-print, including digital form

Collection

- used to denote any body of materials indexed, which may be a single or a composite text (e.g. treatise, anthology,
encyclopedia, periodical, etc.).
- also refers to group of documents to the contents of which reference is made or expected to be made in an index
(e.g. documents scanned by an indexing service. o database or abstracts, etc.). It may also pertain to a set of
rep1esenlations (e.g. maps, drawings, reproductions of art, or other objects).

*An index is made up of index entries (individual records.in the index).

Basic Elements of an Index

1. Index heading - This is a term chosen to represent in the index the item or concept derived from the material being
indexed.
2. Index subheading - This refers to the heading that is subsumed under a heading to indicate a modifying or subordinate
relationship.
3. Qualifier - This is a term added to a heading, but separated from it by punctuation (preferably parentheses) in order to
distinguish the heading from homographs in the same index.
4. Scope note - This pertains to the explanation added to a heading to clarify the range of the subject matter encompassed
or the usage of the heading within the index.
5. Locator - This element leads the user directly to the part of the document or collection containing the information to
which the index heading refers.

Functions and uses

1. To allow an indexer to represent the subject matter of the document in a consistent way.
2. To bring vocabulary used by the searcher into coincidence with the vocabulary used by the indexer.
3. To provide means whereby searcher can modulate a search strategy in order to achieve high recall or high precision as
varying circumstances demand.

General purposes

1. To minimize the time and effort of finding information

2. To maximize the searching success of the user

Types of indexes

A. According to arrangement
a. Alphabetical index is based on the orderly principles of letters in the alphabet and used for /he arrangement
of subject headings, cross references, and qualifying terms. m well as main headings
b. Classified index has its contents arranged on the basis of relation among concepts represented by headings
(e.g. hierarchy, inclusion, chronology, and other association)

169
 c.
Concordance is an alphabetical index of all the principal words appearing in a single text or in the multi-
volume work of a single author with a pointer to the precise point at which the word occurs. The index shows
a very contextual occurrence of a word. - The need for indexes was first felt when the English Bible was made
available to ordinary people. This paved the way for Alexander Cruden in 1737 to prepare The Concordance
of the Bible.
A concordance is used to
i. to locate a partly or completely remembered passage
ii. to assemble subject matter
iii. to compare and analyze word meaning and usage
d. Numerical or serial order - Included in this group are patent-number indexes (e.g. The Numerical Patent
Index of Chemical Abstracts) and table indexes.
B. According to the Type of Material Indexed
a. Book index or back-of-the-book index
i. an alphabetical list of words, or group of words at the back of the book giving a page location of the
subject or name associated with each word or group of words.
ii. Book index is prepared in order to
1. Reduce the frustration of information overload
2. Permit a browser in a bookstore to compare books prior to purchase)
3. Collect the different ways of wording the same concept
4. Provide well-worded sub-entries (rather than long strings of unanalyzed page references.
5. Guide a user directly to a specific aspect of a topic
6. Filter information for the reader
iii. The contents of the index must satisfy the following conditions
1. It must bring together references to similar concepts that are scattered in the text.
2. All significant items in the text must appear in the index.
3. Items and concepts in the text must be represented by appropriate, precise, accurate
unambiguous headings.
4. Index entry headings should be consistent in form and in usage.
5. The book index should represent the text and is not a vehicle for expressing the indexer's
own views and interests.
iv. Components of Book Index
1. Entry - This is the principal subdivision of the index.
2. Heading - This identifies the subject and is the top line in the index entry hierarchy.
3. Subentry/subheading - This is a line of indented text that immediately follows the heading.
It usually represents some aspect of the main heading.
4. Locator - This tells the reader where to find the item or material pertaining to the subject.
5. Cross-reference - This is an internal index navigation guide. They usually take the forms see
and see also.
b. Periodical index
i. based on the same principles and has the same general objective m u book index but has a broader
scope, Periodical indexes are open-ended projects usually performed by a group of people. Each issue
of a periodical may deal with unrelated topics by several authors, written in different styles and aimed
at different users.
c. Newspaper index
i. uses the same principles and objectives as the previous index types except for some problems
occurring to them.
1. A newspaper article may contain names, places, or even subjects that may not occur again
(problem in vocabulary control)
2. Multiple editions that some newspapers tend to have may cause some stories to be added,
dropped, or shifted to other pages
d. Index to audio-visual materials
i. Multimedia sources - textual labeling is needed (index terms or descriptive-narrative) along with
image matching
ii. Sound databases - usually feature sound browsers which allow fuzzy searches on audio databases.
There are sound databases that can utilize speech recognition technology for retrieving television news
segments. Such is used to create transcripts of the audio portion of the broadcast, which are then stored
in a searchable form

170
 C. According to Forms of Literature
a. Index to short stories
i. Example: Shod Story Index (NY: H.W. Wilson, 1953) - This index lists stories in both book and
periodical collections. It provides entries for author, title, and subject. This index is issued annually,
with over 3,000 s1ories included each year. Short story index provides a list of books and periodicals
that were analyzed. Five-year cumulation issues are also provided.
b. Index to plays
i. Example: Play Index (NY: H.W. Wilson 1953) Unlike Short Story Index, this index is published
irregularly. It provides author, ti1Ie, and subject index entries to individually published plays and play
collections. An author entry contains the author's full name, title of the ploy, a brief description notes,
the number of acts and scenes, the size of the cost, and the number of sets required. It contains a cast
analysis that helps a librarian locate plays for a number of players required.
c. Index to poems (first-line index)
i. Example: The Columbia Granger's Index to Poetry. 9th ed. (NY: Columbia University Press, 1990.
2048 p. Also available in CD-ROM).
This publication indexed close to 400 poetry anthologies. It provides four (4) indexes: by
first line, author, subject, and title. It serves as a guide in locating a poem in a particular
anthology. It is also valuable in locating elusive quotations either by first line or by subject.
The index provides access to over 40,000 poems.
ii. The Columbia Granger's Guide to Poetry Anthologies (NY: Columbia University Press, 1991)
This publication provides an annotated, descriptive, and critical appraisal of all the
anthologies indexed in the 9117 edition of The Columbia Granger's Index to Poetry, with
attention given to the audience for the particular works. The annotations were prepared by
William and Linda Katz
d. Index to essays
i. Example: Essay and General Literature Index (NY: Columbia University Press, }290 ff.) - This index
consists of analy1ical subject entries to the contents of approximately 300 collected works on every
subject from art to rneclici11e. It is useful in approaching an author's work via his/her name and
locating criticism of the author's efforts. Regular issues of four-year cumulation for the previous index
issues are provided.
D. According to Physical Form and Other Categories
a. Card indexes (e.g., card catalog)
b. Printed indexes (e.g., indexes in printed book or serial formats) ·- These indexes contain indexer's markings on
the items. They are constructed through the use of bibliographic worksheets.
c. Microform indexes
d. Computerized indexes (e.g., online indexes, indexe1 in CD-ROM)
*Indexes can also be categorized by the type of index headings they contain
a. Subject index - provides access to the topics treated in documents and/or features of documentary units (e.g.,
genre, format, etc.). Index subject headings are arranged alphabetically or in other systematic order.
b. Author index - provides access to information on documents cited by the author's name in the indexed
document, or it lists documents distinguished by author's name in the indexed collection. 3. Name index -
provides access to names contained in documents. whether or persons, organizations, or other animate or
inanimate objects which are identified by a proper name.

Steps in indexing

A. Decide which topics in the item are relevant to the potential user of the document
B. Decide which topics truly capture the content of the document
C. Determine terms that come as close as possible to the terminology used in the document
D. Decide on index terms and the specificity of those terms Group references to information that is scattered in the text of
the document
E. Combine headings and subheadings into related multi-level headings
F. Direct the user seeking information under terms not used to those that are being listed by means of see references and
to related terms see also references
G. Arrange the index into a systematic presentation

171
Steps in ACTUAL indexing

A. Record the bibliographic data

B. Analyze the content/ Content analysis
a. The title
b. The abstract
c. The text itself
d. The references section
C. Determine subject facets
D. Convert to the indexing language
E. Review what has been done

Indexing Principles and Concepts

A. Exhaustivity
- the extent to which concepts or topics are made retrievable by means of index terms.
- Degree of exhaustivity
a. Depth indexing aims to extract all the main concepts dealt with in a document, recognizing many subthemes
and subtopics.
b. Summarization identifies only a dominant, overall subject of the item, recognizing only concepts embodied in
the main theme.

Summarization Depth indexing

Document retrieval Information retrieval

B. Specificity
- the extent to which a concept or topic in a document is identified by a precise term in the hierarchy of its genus-species
relationship.
- Example: An information resource about musicians is entered under Musicians and not Performing artists.
C. Coextensive entry
- means that the subject heading will cover all but not more than the concepts covered in the document.
- Example: For a document that deals both with musicians and dor1cers, should be Musicians and dancers.
D. Consistency
- the extent to which agreement exists on the terms to be used to index some documents. It requires that items on the
same subject be conceptually analyzed and translated in the same way.
- two types of consistency level
1. inter-indexer consistency
2. intra-indexer contingency
- factors that influence indexing consistency.
1. Number of concepts represented
2. Size of vocabulary

Indexing methods

A. Derived or derivative indexing

B. Assigned indexing

Indexing languages

system of naming or identifying subjects contained in a document

Features

a. Vocabulary - This refers to terms selected for the indexing of concepts. It employs certain classes of words,
adjectives, participles and gerunds, few prepositions and conjunctions, almost no adverbs, pronouns or verbs,
and no interjections. There are two types of vocabulary.
i. Index vocabulary – consists of index terms which are assigned to express the concepts of the author.
These are also called the descriptors.
ii. Approach vocabulary – Consists of terms which are used as lead-in terms to the index terms.
172
 b. Syntax - This refers to the combination and modification of terms to form headings and multi-level headings
or to form search statements for non-displayed indexes. It is concerned with the clearness of expression, with
efficient and unambiguous communication and is language dependent. Syntactic relationships may be shown
in several ways.
i. Recall devices – These are indexing language devices that group terms together into classes of one
type or another so that such devices will allow improvements in recall in search operation and will
make the index consistent in assigning index terms that represent the subject contents of document.
1. Synonyms
2. Control of Word
3. Hierarchical relationship
ii. Precision devices – These are indexing language devices that when used with association with terms
will increase the shades of meaning of the terms. Hence, such devices will improve precision in both
indexing and search operations. The most common type of such devices are:
1. Term coordination or combination of two or more different terms with different meaning
to come up with a distinct index term with specific meaning. These are called:
a. Adjectival headings
b. Phrase headings
c. Compound headings
2. Subheadings or subdivision are terms or phrases that are used main headings or index terms
to subdivide certain subjects into more specific topics or show a particular aspect of a given
subject or index term.
c. Semantics - This is actually the study of meaning expressed in communications such as words. In indexing,
semantics indicate class relations among index terms. Semantic relationships are categorized as follows.
i. Equivalence relationship - This kind of semantic relationship implies that there will be more
than one term denoting the same concept. Equivalence is expressed through any of the following.
1. synonyms (e.g., Feminism ↔ Women's Liberation Movement)
2. quasi-synonyms (e.g., Economics ↔ Cost and financing)
3. preferred spelling (e.g., Program ↔ Programme)
4. acronyms and abbreviations (e.g., ALA → American Library Association)
5. current and established terms (e.g., Developing countries ↔ Third world ↔
Underdeveloped areas ↔ Less developed countries)
6. translation (e.g., Manila hemp ↔ Abaca)
ii. Hierarchical relationship - This kind of semantic relationship is manifested in various instances.
1. genus/species (e.g., Agroindustry → Food industry →
Meat industry)
2. whole/part relationships (e.g., Foot → Toes)
iii. Affinitive/associative relationships - Such relationships are displayed with the use of related
terms.
1. Example: Men - Women
Education - Teaching Maintenance – Repairing
Types of Indexing Language

A. Natural language
a. Natural language tends to improve recall because it provides more access points but reduces precision.
b. In natural language, redundancy is greater.
c. Natural language uses more current terms.
d. Natural language tends to be favored by subject specialists or the end-user.
B. Controlled vocabulary
a. It controls synonyms by choosing one form as the standard term.
b. It makes distinctions among homographs.
Example: Security (Law)
Security (Psychology)
c. It establishes the size or scope.
d. It usually records hierarchical and affinitive/associative relations.
e. It controls variant spellings.

C. Free Language
a. Does not consist of a list of terms distinct from those used to describe concepts in a subject area.

173
 b. It is free in the sense that there are no constraints on the terms that can be used in the indexing process. It is
the nature of a free language that any word or term that suits the subject may be assigned as an indexing term.
c. Terms may be computer or human assigned.
d. Most common in a computer-indexing environment.

Controlled vocabulary uses several syndetic devices.

 USE and USE FOR (for synonymy)
o USE indicates that another term is to be used in preference.
o UF (Used for) indicates that a term is used instead of another.
 BT, NT, and RT (references for differing levels specificity and certain near-synonyms and antonyms.
o BT - indicates that the term is broader in scope in relation to other terms within the unit.
o NT - suggests that the term is narrower in scope
o RT - indicates the availability of related terms to the term in the unit.
 parenthetical qualifiers (for semantic ambiguities)
o Example: Mercury (Planet)
Mercury (Chemical element) Mercury (Mythology)
Controlled vocabulary offers advantages for the indexer and the user of the index.
 It increases the probability that both indexer and searcher will express a particular concept in the same way,
so as to improve the matching process and enable the searcher to find what is being looked up to.
 It increases the probability that both indexer and searcher can be led to a desired topic by the syndetic features.
 It increases the probability that the same term will be used by different indexers or by the same indexer at
different times to ensure consistency.
 It helps to speed the indexing process and especially the searching process by making it unnecessary to imagine
and to look up possible or likely synonyms if the term looked up is not in the database.
 It helps searchers to focus their thoughts when they approach the information system without a full and precise
realization of what information they need.
Coupled with these advantages are some disadvantages.
 Indexing with controlled vocabulary can mean high input costs, since it is usually done by people who must read
the document, discern the various ideas it contains, then match these with appropriate terms in the authority lists.
 Controlled vocabulary indexing is prone to human error in interpreting a document's subject matter.
 Different indexing languages may be incompatible, even with the same discipline or subject, making searching
in different databases difficult.
 There is a possibility that the controlled vocabulary may be inadequate. The indexer and the searcher are
limited to the terminology used, to the scope of each content (term or notation), and to the structure of the
existing system.
Subject Heading Lists and Thesauri

Controlled vocabulary is channeled in two basic forms.

 Subject heading list - This is an alphabetical list of subject headings with cross references from not preferred
terms and headings to preferred ones, and linking devices between related terms and headings. It often includes
separate sequences of standardized subheadings that may be combined with subject headings. Rules for applying
subheadings usually accompany the list. A subject heading is used primarily to index textual, book-length
documents, with one or two terms that capture what the document is all about. Examples of subject heading lists
are the following.
o Library of Congress Subject Headings (LCSH) - LCSH is used in conjunction with the Subject
Cataloging Manual: Subject Headings, a document that contains policies and practices of the Library of
Congress. LCSH is updated continuously. Electronic updates are available via subscriptions to
Cataloger's Desktop and through various bibliographic utilities such as RLIN and OCLC.
o Sears List of Subject Headings - This list is intended for small collections used by persons with general
needs. Its main users are public and school libraries. It is also continuously updated (updates are
available in electronic form).
o Medical Subject Headings (MeSH) - This list is used to provide subject access points on every
bibliographic record created at the National Library of Medicine. In printed version, MeSH comprises
three (3) volumes - one volume for a hierarchical listing, another volume that is alphabetically-
arranged that includes scope note, and a volume of permuted alphabetical listing in which every word
of a phrase is brought into lead position.
 Thesaurus - The term thesaurus is derived from Latin, which means "treasure." It is used to control indexing
vocabulary in one subject or field of interest, ranging from Agriculture to Vocational Training and to the
174
 European Communities. It is a controlled indexing language vocabulary arranged in a known order and
structured so that equivalence, homographic, hierarchical, and associative relationship indicators among terms
are displayed clearly and identified by standardized relationship indicators that are reciprocally employed.
More than the subject heading list, a thesaurus is based on terms and concepts that appear on the actual text of
documents being indexed. A thesaurus aims to promote consistency in the indexing of documents,
predominantly for post- coordinate information retrieval systems, and to facilitate searching by linking lead-
in terms with descriptors.
Indexes and Indexing systems
I. Title-Based Derivative Indexes
A title-based derivative index is generated merely by obtaining and analyzing contexts present in document or article titles. There
are two (2) known indexing systems that are centered in this principle.
 KWIC (Keyword in Context) indexing was introduced by Hans Peter Luhn in 1959. It is a rotated index commonly
derived from the titles of documents. Each keyword appearing in the title becomes an entry point and highlights in some
way by setting it off at the center of the page. KWIC indexing employs the following principles.
o Titles are generally informative.
o The words extracted from the title can be used effectively to guide the user to an article or a paper likely to contain
the desired information.
o Although the meaning of the word viewed in isolation may be ambiguous or too general, the context surrounding
the word helps to define and explain its meaning.
 KWOK (Keyword Out of Context) indexing system is also a rotated index but uses a different method. Keywords that
become the access points are set off on the left-hand margin of the page, or sometimes, they are used as though they
were subject headings. A keyword used as an entry point in a KWOC index is not usually repeated in the title but is
replaced by an asterisk (*) or some other symbols.
Below are some examples of how KWIC and KWOC indexes are constructed. Examples:
Document titles - Blue-Eyed Cats in Texas
The Cat and the Fiddle
Dogs and Cats and Their Diseases The Cat and the Economy
II. String and Permuted Indexes
A string indexing system is a word-based system in which the indexer analyzes the various aspects of a complex subject
treated in a document and records the aspects as words, along with "role operators" (that is, instructions to the computer).
The computer program combines these words into a string of terms that represents a brief summary of the document's
content. Then, the program provides index entries by automatically recasting the string under every significant term that
forms part of the string.
Timothy C. Craven cited two main characteristics of a string index.
1. Each indexed term normally has a number of index entries containing at least one of the same terms.
2. Computer software (index string generator) generates the description part (index string) of each index entry according to
regular and explicit syntactical rules.
 PRECIS (Preserved Context Index System) - This is a method of subject indexing developed by Derek Austin for
the British National Bibliography (1971-1973) in order to produce printed alphabetical subject entries. It involves
a. determining the subject content of the document
b. analyzing the subject statement to determine the role of each significant term (action term, location term,
an agent or object of the action)
c. computer manipulation of the coded string to produce index entries
d. determining the relationship of the term to other terms in the database and how should all these terms be
linked
 POPSI (Postulate-based Permuted Subject Indexing) - This indexing system was developed at the Documentation
Research and Training Center in India, following the classification ideas of S.R. Ranganathan. The coding used
for the index string generator in this system is based on the indicator system of Colon Classification (also by S.R.
Ranganathan). A comma (",") precedes the entity segment, a semicolon (";") before the property segment; a colon
(":") before a process segment; a hyphen ("-") before a qualifying sub-segment; and a greater-than sign (">")
before a narrower term.
 NEPHIS (Nested Phrase Indexing System) - This system was developed by Timothy C. Craven. In this system,
the input string was designed to be a phrase in ordinary language. Four (4) different coding symbols are used - the
left and right angular brackets ("<" and ">") which mark the beginning and the end of a phrase embedded, or
"nested" within the large phrase; question mark ("?") which indicates that what follows is a connective to be
included only in those index strings in which the connective has something to which to connect; and the at-sign

175
 ("@"), used either at the beginning of wither the input string or the nested phrase, which indicates that what
follows is not an access term.
 CIFT (Contextual Indexing and Faceted Taxonomic Access System) - This system was developed for the Modern
Language Association (MLA). In this indexing system, alphabetical subject entries are created from strings
provided by indexers who assign facets derived from literature, linguistics, and folklore. This system was published
with the MLA International Bibliography. A CIFT index string has three parts - a heading to be displayed in bold
capitals; a subheading, in mixed upper and lower case boldface; and a subheading, in typeface of ordinary weight.
A lead term repeated in the subheading is capitalized; author dates appear only in the heading.
III. Faceted and Chain Indexes
 Faceted Indexes
Faceted indexes are products of a type of systematic classification that is often called as analytico-
synthetic system. A facet analysis is a tightly controlled process by which simple concepts are organized into
carefully defined categories by connecting class numbers on the basic concepts.
A faceted index is pre-coordinated at the time of indexing and is arranged in classification order rather
than straight alphabetical order. S.R. Ranganathan introduced faceted classification system by publishing his basic
works in the system on the 1930s.
 Chain indexing
Chain indexes are prepared though a simple technique of constructing an organized set of entries for an
alphabetical subject index of a classified catalog. They provide that every concept becomes linked, or chained, to
its directly related concept in the hierarchy system.
Chain indexing involves the creation of multi-level headings that consist of "chains" of terms extracted
from a classification scheme, arranged in an inverse citation order of facets to that of the classification scheme
itself. S.R. Ranganathan also introduced this as part of his Colon Classification, which uses synthesis or number
building. The number representing some complex subject is arrived at by joining the notational elements that
represent more elemental subjects.
Guidelines for Indexing
Selection of Documents and Periodical Titles for Indexing
There are certain factors to be considered in· the selection of periodical titles for indexing. These are the following.
o Usefulness
o subject coverage or content
o class and range of readership
o availability in most libraries
o indexing of titles in other indexing services
When indexing particular documents, especially books, these are the only parts that should be considered for the process.
o body of the text that is directly relevant to the subject matter, scope, and audience of the book
o introduction
o chapter headings
o footnotes and endnotes (if they present material not found in the text itself)
o personal names
o quotations (should be paraphrased if lengthy)
o appendices (if they contain important material omitted in the body)
o illustrative matter, e.g., charts, maps graphs, drawings, etc. (if they me printed several pages away from the page
containing the textual discussion)
Subject indexing
These are the five specific steps in subject indexing.
1. Recording locators (may sometimes be the bibliographic data about the document)
a. When indexing printed books, pamphlets, periodicals, and other printed documents, use locators that refer
to the page numbers, separating locators with a comma (","). It is necessary to distinguish between
different sequences of numbers.
Example: Livingstone, Ken 1/3, 1/97, 3/94 or Livingstone, Ken 1:3, 1/97; 3:94
b. When indexing a collection of documents, locators should give complete information about each
document. In the case of periodical articles, each locator normally consists of the title of the article, the

176
 author(s) of the article (if named), the title of the periodical (often in an abbreviated form that is explained
in the introductory notes), the periodical's volume number and date, and the inclusive pagination of the
document.
Example: Computer simulation
Building working computer models. R. Collison and Peter Farcas. Computer univ. 16:37-41 Jan-
Feb '89. Tables
Computer-simulated robotic arms. Bits & bytes. 8:26 Jan '89. ill.
c. If a document treats a subject continuously in a consecutively numbered sequence, reference should be
made to the first and last numbered elements only (e.g., 7-18).
d. Exceptionally, where space constraints apply or where the locators are extremely long (e.g., 10003-
10009), numbers may be omitted so that the only changed digits of the second locator are given (e.g.,
10003-9). Conventionally, the digits 10-19in each hundred are given in full (e.g., 14-17, 412-18).
2. Content analysis - Some factors may affect this activity.
a. Environmental situations - If there is labor shortage or other critical time factors, this process may be
hurried. The various physical environmental factors such as noise and other factors that determine the
conduciveness of a workplace may also affect the process.
b. Policy decisions - Guidelines imposed by agencies are generally concerned with selecting certain content
indicators and the rejection of others. For example, indexers of scientific literature may be told to
concentrate on the methodology, measurement, equipment used, and the results, ignoring historical
materials.
c. Decision of the indexer - This determines which aspects of the subjects must be emphasized and which
aspects are deemphasized.
d. Content analysis must cover the following parts of the document being indexed.
i. Title - Even though some titles are vague and are not related to the document subjects, they are
still considered basic indexing units and serve as the first sop in determining subject content.
ii. Abstract - This is the actual information-packed miniature of the document. Good abstracts can
be fundamental indicators of subject content
iii. List of contents - This gives an overview of the actual contents of the document.
iv. Text - It is also necessary to examine the4 introduction, summary, and conclusion. Likewise,
section headings and first and last sentences of paragraphs should also be given primary attention.
v. Illustrations, diagrams, tables, and their captions
vi. Reference section (bibliography) - The references for the work cited by authors are also
considered subject indicators.
e. Consider the following steps in conceptual analysis
i. Scan the document by examining its content and identifying what is being discussed. This could
help in simply getting the raw title. A raw title is the title found on the title page or the need of a
document.
ii. Read through other parts of the document and pay attention to the following: (a) introduction, (b)
table of contents, (c) abstract, (d) summary and conclusions, (illustrations, diagrams, tables and
their captions, and (f) highlighted keywords
iii. Once the aboutness of the document has been identified, the specific content of the document will
be turned inside out by writing the expressive title or the expanded version of the raw title.
iv. Underline the terms in the expressive title that were not on the raw title.
v. Write down the kernel title by retaining the substantive keywords which denote each of the
substantive ideas and dropping the auxiliary words and connectives such as articles, prepositions,
and conjunctions
vi. Write down the categorization of each kernel term from the kernel title. This will give you the
analyzed title.
vii. Then check for the equivalent words for the terms from the authority list. It will give you the
transformed title.
3. Subject determination - At this point, the indexer determines the aboutness of the document. It entails the
formulation of a concept list. The following guidelines must be observed.
a. Choose the concept which would be regarded as the most appropriate by a given community of users,
bearing in mind the purpose of the index.
b. If necessary, modify both indexing tools and procedures as a result of feedback from inquiries. Such
modification should not be taken to a point where the structure or logic of the indexing language is
distorted.

177
 c. No arbitrary limit should be set on the number of terms or descriptors which can be assigned to a
document. This should be determined entirely by the amount of information contained in the document
related to the expected needs of the users of the index.
d. Concepts should be identified as specifically as possible. More general concepts may be preferred in some
circumstances, depending upon the following factors.
i. Extent to which the indexer considers that over- specificity might adversely affect the
performance of the indexing system - For example, an indexer might decide that very specific
models of equipment may be represented by more general terms such as the name of the maker
and perhaps of the family of models, especially when these concepts occur in the fringe areas of
the subject field covered by the index.
ii. Weight attached to a concept by the author - If an indexer considers that an idea is not fully
developed or is referred to only casually by the author, indexing at a more general level might be
justified.
4. Conversion to the index language - Terms in the concept list must be matched against those available in the
controlled vocabulary. The following practices must be observed in the translation process.
a. Concepts that are already translated into indexing terms should be translated into their preferred terms.
b. Terms that represent new concepts should be checked for accuracy and acceptability in reference tools
such as:
i. dictionaries and encyclopedias recognized by authorities in their fields
ii. thesauri (especially those constructed following ISO 2788 or ISO 5964)
iii. classification schemes
iv. subject specialists (especially those with some knowledge in indexing or
documentation)
c. Suppose the concepts are not yet present in an existing thesaurus or classification scheme. In that case,
these may be expressed by terms or descriptors which are admitted to the indexing language immediately,
or they may be represented temporarily by more general terms, the new concepts being proposed as
candidates for later addition.
5. Preparation of index entries - The indexer may use a pre-printed form or bibliographic sheet encoding to prepare
and organize the index entries obtained. The process of editing index elements (e/g/ cross-references, spelling,
punctuation, headings, subheadings, missing entries, and unnecessary entries) is also undertaken at this point. In
organizing the index entries, the indexer may opt to arrange the entries alphabetically (either word by word or letter
by letter), or in a classified system.
Factors that affect the quality of an index
1. Qualifications and expertise of the indexer
a. subject knowledge
b. knowledge of users' needs
c. experience
d. concentration level
e. reading ability and comprehension
f. impartiality
2. Hospitability of the indexing language being employed
a. This determines whether to admit new terms or changes in terminology freely and respond to users' new
needs.

Evaluating indexes

The process of evaluating indexes is to determine their effectiveness, efficiency, and value. The following guidelines will help
the indexer, librarian, or even the user to determine the quality of an index.

• Subject errors
• Generic searching
• Terminology
• Internal guidance
• Cross references
• Accuracy in referring
• Entry scattering
• Entry differentiation
• Spelling and punctuation
178
 • Filing
• Layout
• Length and type
• Cost
• Standards

Two highlighted aspects should be looked at in evaluating the quality of an index.

 Recall Ratio - the ratio of relevant documents retrieved to the total number of relevant documents potentially available
in the file. Recoil depends on the level of Exhaustivity allowed by the indexing policy.
 Relevance Ratio - the ratio of the relevant documents retrieved to the total numbers of the document retrieved
Indexing Standards
A. International Organization for Standardization (ISO)
a. ISO 2788-1996 - Documentation - Guidelines for the establishment and development of monolingual
thesauri
b. ISO 5964-1985 - Documentation - Guidelines for the establishment and development of multilingual
thesauri
c. ISO 5963-1985 - Documentation - Methods for examining documents, determining their subjects, and
selecting indexing terms
d. ISO 999-1996 - Information and documentation- Guidelines for the content, organization, and presentation
of indexes
e. ISO 4-1997 - Information and documentation - Rules for the abbreviation of title words and titles of
publications (It publishes List of Serial Title Word Abbreviations which includes title word abbreviations
in over 50 languages.)
B. National Information Standards Organization (NISO)
a. ANSI/NISO Z93.2 - l 994 (R200l) Information Interchange Format (Equivalent to ISO 2709)
b. ANSI/NISO Z39.14 - l 997 (R2002) Guidelines for Abstracts
c. ANSI/NISO Z39.19 - 2003 Guidelines for the Construction, Format, and Management of Monolingual
Thesauri (Equivalent to ISO 2788)
C. British Standards Institution (BSI)
a. BS 1749: 1985 - Recommendations for alphabetical arrangement and the filing order of numbers and
symbols
b. BS 5726: 1987 - Guide to establishment and development of monolingual thesauri
c. BS 6478: 1984 - Guide to filing bibliographic information in libraries and documentation
d. BS 6529: 1984 - Recommendations for examining documents, determining their subject, and selecting
indexing terms
e. BS ISO 999-1996- Information and documentation- Guidelines for the content, organization, and
presentation of indexes
f. BS DD CEN/TS 14463: 2003- Health informatics

ABSTRACTS AND ABSTRACTING

Abstracts are accurate representations of the important contents of a document. Usually, it is accompanied by an adequate
bibliographic description to enable the user to trace the original document, which qualifies it as a document surrogate.
Other types of Document Surrogates
 Annotation – This is a note added below the bibliographic reference or title of a document by way of comment or
brief description of what the document is about. It usually appears in one or two sentences only.
 Extract – This document surrogate is actually a portion of a document lifted from the results, conclusions, or
recommendations to represent the aboutness of the document. It is easy to produce an extract because this is just a
matter of lifting any portion of the document, which is thought of giving the reader an idea of what the document is
about.
 Summary – This type of surrogate is usually found at the end of the document, which is intended to complete the
reader's orientation and present some of the highlights for the reader to remember. Author of the document does this
to restate the important findings and conclusions of the document.
 Abridgement – This document surrogate is a reduction in terms of length of the original document that aims to
present only the major points. Non-major points are omitted.
 Synopsis – This is similar to a summary. Example – short resume at the back of a pocketbook.
 Terse literature – This document surrogate is a condensation of the original. This is done by using statements that
are highly abbreviated to encapsulate the major points. Example – short articles found in the Reader’s Digest.
179
 Three Basic Characteristics of an Abstract (ABC)
 Accuracy – It must be error free. It means that abstractor must exert effort to prevent the occurrence of error in
the presentation of the document surrogate to the reader.
 Brevity – It must be brief or shorter than the document. It must be worthwhile to be used as a substitute of the
original document.
 Clarity – It must be clear, written in complete thought and must not replace the author’s idea. It may be
paraphrased but the ideas encoded in the document must still be interpreted for the enhancement of the literary
quality of the abstract.
Parts of an Abstract
 Bibliographic reference - This contains the complete bibliographic citation of the original document.
o Document identification number
o Author(s)
o Author affiliation
o Title
o Source of document
o Original document
 Abstract proper or the body - The body contains data from the original document and indicates or describes
the content of the original.
o Purpose
o Methodology
o Results
o Conclusion
 Signature - This indicates the abstractor's name (either the full name or initials may be given) and his affiliation.
This usually comes at the end of the abstract.
o This part is optional
Purpose of Abstract
 Abstracts facilitate selection
 Abstract save the time of the reader
 Abstract facilitate literature search
 Abstracts promote current awareness
 Abstract overcome language barrier
 Abstracts also aid in the compilation and provision of other tools such as indexes, bibliographies, and reviews.
Types of Abstract
 Types of Abstract According to Type of Information (True Form Abstracts)
o Indicative (Descriptive) abstract - indicates what the document is about. Its main purpose is to indicate to
the reader of the abstract whether or not he/she would want to read the original document.
o Informative abstract - provides readers with quantitative and qualitative information in the present
document. Ideally, such an abstract obviates the necessity to refer to the original. It is intended for
experimental studies but not for theoretical studies or opinion articles.
o Indicative-informative abstract - This is the combination of the two abstracts mentioned above. Parts of
the abstracts are written in informative or indicative style. Major aspects of the document are written in an
informative way, while minor aspects are written indicatively. This mixed-style can utilize not too many
words and not too little words just enough to be able to transmit information effectively.
o Critical abstract – is really a condensed critical review that when applied to reports, journal articles,
and other relatively brief items, serve much the same purpose as a critical book review. It is
subjective and evaluative. The abstractor expresses views on the quality of the author's work or
contrasts it with the work of others. It might mention weaknesses of the methodology used, how the
population was sampled, or compare the results with other research done by another author.
 Types of Abstract According to Form
o Telegraphic abstract – is written in a telegram style and therefore imprecise. It is written in incomplete
sentences and really resembles a telegram. It contains a string of keywords which serve as a crude indicator
of the subject scope of the document. This abstract type is computer produced based on word counts; the
higher the possibility that these words will be part of the words through.
o Modular abstracts – are rare because it is somewhat customized on the request of the customer. In this
particular abstract, the document is abstracted using the following methods: First, the citation will be given.
Second, the annotation. Third, the indicative abstract. Fourth, the informative abstract. Then fifth, the critical
180
 abstract.
o Statistical or tabular abstract - a summary of the data presented in tabular form. This is used in certain
specialized subjects, such as economics, sociology, other social sciences, and applied sciences like
engineering. Data is frequently emphasized exclusively in statistical and tabular forms.
o Structure abstract - abstract in a non-narrative form wherein the abstractor lists the items in a worksheet
or template as these are found in the document. This kind of abstract works well only for a subject area in
which the essential elements/items are more or less the same from one study to another. This abstract may
also take a form in which subheadings (e.g., background of the study, objectives, methods, results, and
conclusion) are included to facilitate scanning. Such type is commonly used in abstracting medical journals.
o Mini-abstract - highly structured abstract designed primarily for computer-aided searches. It actually is an
index-cum-abstract rolled into one. The terms used in this abstract are drawn from a controlled vocabulary
and arranged in a specific sequence, nearly approximating a sentence structure. It is also known as machine-
readable index-abstract.
 Types of Abstract According to Who Prepared the Abstract
o Author-prepared abstract - These abstracts are prepared by authors of documents for publication together
with the document. This is submitted on time since it generally accompanies the article for publication.
However, authors do not necessarily write the best abstracts since they lack training and experience in
abstracting as well as knowledge of abstracting rules.
o Subject-expert prepared abstract - This type of abstract is prepared by a professional in the subject field
concerned. It may be an excellent high-quality abstract if the subject expert is trained and experienced in the
methods and procedures of abstracting. In general, subject experts volunteer as abstractors, but may not
submit their abstracts on time. They are given a modest honorarium or none at all if they volunteer. Another
agendum they might have is to be up-to-date to developments in their fields by getting liberal access to
information in the documents they abstract.
o Professional abstractor-prepared abstract - This kind of abstract is prepared by a professional abstractor,
a person who has been trained in the procedures and methods of abstracting. He/she is one who has attained
experience in abstracting, has foreign language expertise, and can cover subject areas in which subject areas
cannot be found.
Steps in Writing an Abstract
1. Read the document
2. Note down the key information
3. Organize the key information
4. Follow the standard abstract format
5. Check the draft abstract
6. Edit and polish the draft
7. Write the final abstract
Approximate
Component Description
Proportion
Nature and scope States the “what” and the boundaries and limitation of
3%
of the document the study/document
States the “why” of the study. This should be stated
Objectives unless this is already clear from the document's title or 7%
can be derived from the remainder port of the abstract.
Describes briefly but comprehensively the techniques
or approaches used, the tests and the measurements
employed, and the respondents studied. The techniques
of approaches employed should be described but only
Methodology 15%
to the degree necessary for comprehension. New
techniques should be identified clearly and the basic
methodological principle, the range of operation and the
accuracy obtained would be described as well.
Presents concisely the results the study. Results and
Findings conclusions should be clearly presented. These may be 70%
abstracted jointly to avoid redundancy.
Gives the conclusions of the study and suggested
Conclusion 5%
courses of action to be taken

181
Writing style in Abstracts
 Topic sentence - Begin the abstract with a topic sentence.
 Sentences within the abstract - Use complete sentences but simple and transitional words and phrases for coherence.
 Verbs - Use verbs in the active voice.
 Pronouns - Use third-person pronouns.
 Language - Use simple language.
 Abbreviations - Use commonly understood and easily intelligible abbreviations.
 Terminology - Use standard and familiar terms. Avoid the use of trade jargons and colloquial terms.
 Verbosity - Ideas in phases must be completely expressed through the minimum number of words.
 Redundancy - Avoid the use of a word whose meaning is already conveyed elsewhere in a passage.
 Number of words - This determines the specified length of the abstract.
o There is a direct correlation between the length of an original document and its abstract. Generally, the
following number of words for each type of abstract will apply,
 annotation - 5-15 words
 indicative abstracts - 20-30 words
 informative abstracts - l 00-150 words.
 In special cases, abstracts may run to as many as 205-500 words
Abstracting Standards
 Armed Services for Technical Information Agency (ASTIA) - Guidelines for Cataloging and Abstracting.
2002.
 Defense Documentation Center (DDC) - Abstracting Scientific and Technical Reports of Defense-Sponsored
RRDT/E AD 667000. 1968.
 UNESCO - Guide for the Preparation of Author's Abstracts for Publication. 1968.
 International Organization for Standardization (ISO) - ISO 214-1976 - Documentation: Abstracts for
Publication and Documentation. 1976.

182
PART V: INDEXING AND ABSTRACTING
INSTRUCTION: Read the following questions carefully. Shade the box of the letter that corresponds to the best answer.
[] [] [] [] 1. These are factors to be considered in deciding which materials should have abstract, except
A B C D a. Economic constraints c. Significant materials
b. Length of the whole material d. Subject interest of the user

[] [] [] [] 2. Another term for a descriptive abstract

A B C D a. Indicative abstract c. Slanted abstract
b. Informative abstract d. Critical abstract

[] [] [] [] 3. This is a type of abstract that is evaluative and the abstractor expresses views on the quality of
A B C D the work of the author and even makes comparisons with the works of other authors.
a. Slanted abstract c. Indicative abstract
b. Critical abstract d. Informative abstract

[] [] [] [] 4. The following are considered document surrogate, except

A B C D a. Facsimile c. Abstract
b. Annotation d. Index

[] [] [] [] 5. An index is a __________, which is data about data, indicating the characteristics and
A B C D relationships of the information in the data items and other data items that are similar.
a. Descriptor c. Bibliography
b. Metadata d. Reference

[] [] [] [] 6. A condensed, representative surrogate of a knowledge record. A narrative description of a

A B C D document, which may include pertinent data and critical comments.
a. Summary c. Index
b. Abstract d. Catalog

[] [] [] [] 7. These are abstract prepared by the acknowledged specialists in the subject field.
A B C D a. Author prepared abstracts c. Professional abstractors
b. Discipline oriented abstracts d. Subject-expert oriented abstracts

[] [] [] [] 8. A controlled vocabulary provides for semantic structuring which was designed to provide the
A B C D following except
a. Control synonyms by choosing one form as a standard
b. Facilitate easy search
c. Distinguish among homographs
d. Link together terms whose meanings are most closely related

[] [] [] [] 9. This journal first published in 1665 was considered to be the first abstract journal
A B C D a. Journal des Psychologie c. Journal des Philosophie
b. Journal des Scavans d. Journal des Matematica

[] [] [] [] 10. In the 1850s, he published an index that began the modern concept of single publication
A B C D indexing multiple issues of periodicals.
a. Melville Dewey c. John Cotton Dana
b. W.H. Poole d. D. W. Scott

[] [] [] [] 11. These are non-relevant documents retrieved as a result of a semantic breakdown.

A B C D a. Hits c. Keywords
b. Search results d. False drops

[] [] [] [] 12. Of the four things that can happen in using an index, the good one is
A B C D a. You do not find any information although it is there
b. You find information, but it is not what you thought it would be
c. You find information and it is exactly what you need
d. You find a part of the information that you need

183
[] [] [] [] 13. The following are considered forms of controlled vocabulary, except
A B C D a. Classification schedules c. subject authority files
b. Thesauri d. Dictionary

[] [] [] [] 14. A vocabulary of approved list of words that can be used as index terms. It is also used to
A B C D manage synonyms and near synonyms and to bring together semantically related terms.
a. Free texts c. Semantics
b. Controlled vocabulary d. Uncontrolled vocabulary

[] [] [] [] 15. The quantitative ratio of the number of retrieved relevant documents to the total number of
A B C D relevant documents in a collection.
a. Recall c. Search results
b. Precision d. Keyword

[] [] [] [] 16. This refers to an alphabetical index of the words appearing in a text with a pointer to the
A B C D precise point at which each word occurs.
a. Subject headings c. Abstract
b. Concordance d. Controlled vocabulary

[] [] [] [] 17. This step in abstracting involves reviewing all the points in a document and deciding which
A B C D ones are important.
a. Recording the reference c. Writing the annotation
b. Content analysis d. Identifying the abstractor

[] [] [] [] 18. These are indexes to the content of individual monograph publications, which are usually
A B C D placed at the end of the book and subject and name terms are arranged alphabetically.
a. Name indexes c. Book indexes
b. Author indexes d. Journal indexes

[] [] [] [] 19. An abstract that is aimed at mission-oriented activity, emphasizing selected material from the
A B C D original documents.
a. Informative abstract c. Slanted abstract
b. Indicative abstract d. Critical abstract

[] [] [] [] 20. According to F. W. Lancaster, a modular abstract is consists of five parts: an annotation, an

A B C D indicative abstract, an informative abstract, a critical abstract and ____________
a. Citation c. Subject headings
b. Bibliography d. Summary

[] [] [] [] 21. A list of terms in a special subject, field, or area of usage, with accompanying definitions often
A B C D included as part of a book or monograph.
a. Glossary c. Index
b. Dictionary d. Reference

[] [] [] [] 22. An abstractor should omit information that readers would be likely to know or that may not be
A B C D of direct interest to them. This might include
a. Results of the study c. Background or historical information
b. Methodology d. Conclusion

[] [] [] [] 23. This is the representation of terms in headings by making every possible combination of terms.
A B C D a. Permuted index c. Alphabetical index
b. Numeric index d. Open-end index

[] [] [] [] 24. An indexing scheme that combines single terms to create composite subject concepts.
A B C D a. Pre-coordinate indexing c. Coordinate indexing
b. Post-coordinate indexing d. Derivative indexing

[] [] [] [] 25. The list that saves the time of the users because it prevents from using such terms included in
A B C D the list which are not used as keywords or access points.
a. Authority list c. Stop list
b. Controlled vocabulary d. Thesaurus

184
[] [] [] [] 26. The suggested length of abstract for thesis and dissertation is ______________ words.
A B C D a. 250 c. 300
b. 100 d. 30

[] [] [] [] 27. A type of indexing where terms are combined prior to searching wherein it is not easy to
A B C D combine terms at the time a search is performed.
a. Post-coordinate indexing c. Automatic indexing
b. Pre-coordinate indexing d. Probabilistic indexing

[] [] [] [] 28. Someone who prepares an index is called

A B C D a. Bibliographer c. Indexer
b. Librarian d. Abstractor

[] [] [] [] 29. POPSI stands for

A B C D a. Postulate Based Permuted Subject Indexing
b. Postulate Permuted Subject Index
c. Postulate Permutation Subject Index
d. Permuted or Postulate Subject Index

[] [] [] [] 30. An entry in an index, in which a user’s chosen word matches a word in the index, giving the
A B C D user a starting point in the search.

a. Access point c. Search term

b. Keyword d. Added entry

[] [] [] [] 31. A word from the natural language of a document that is considered significant for indexing.
A B C D a. Summary c. Abstract
b. Keyword d. Search term

[] [] [] [] 32. This refers to the range of topic coverage of an indexed document.

A B C D a. Exhaustivity c. Consistency
b. Specificity d. Summarization

[] [] [] [] 33. The development of the KWIC automated system is credited to

A B C D a. W.F. Poole c. Hans Peter Luhn
b. John Cotton Dana d. S. R. Ranganathan

[] [] [] [] 34. A thesaurus or part of a thesaurus containing terms to a delimited field of knowledge.

A B C D a. Minithesaurus c. Microthesaurus
b. Macrothesaurus d. Authority list

[] [] [] [] 35. This is the type of indexing language generally preferred by users or subject specialists.
A B C D a. Controlled indexing c. Assigned indexing
b. Natural language indexing d. none of the above

[] [] [] [] 36. When you search the entire document looking for matches of natural language terms, you are
A B C D doing
a. Surfing c. Natural language searching
b. Free-text searching d. Scanning

[] [] [] [] 37. The words “torn” and “thorn” are examples of

A B C D a. Eponyms c. Antonyms
b. Homonyms d. Synonyms

[] [] [] [] 38. A thesaurus with general index terms to a broad field of knowledge.

A B C D a. Minithesaurus c. Microthesaurus
b. Macrothesaurus d. Authority list

[] [] [] [] 39. Which of the following statements do not describe the similarity between a thesauri and subject
A B C D headings list?
a. Both are made up of single terms and bound terms to represent single concepts

185
 b. Both provide subject access to information by providing terminology that can be
consistent
c. Both choose preferred terms and make references from non-used terms
d. Both provide hierarchies so that terms are presented in relation to their broader,
narrower and related terms

[] [] [] [] 40. Term or terms used to clarify homonyms

A B C D a. Qualifiers c. Determinants
b. Clarifiers d. Descriptors

[] [] [] [] 41. The process of bringing like things together on the basis of similarities and differences. The
A B C D systematic arrangement in sets of categories according to established criteria.
a. Cataloging c. Indexing
b. Classification d. Abstracting

[] [] [] [] 42. Primarily, Scope Notes (SN) are provide to

A B C D a. Define an entry c. Provide keywords
b. Avoid ambiguities d. Help in content analysis

[] [] [] [] 43. ________________ serve as models and guidelines for the analysis of documents and referred
A B C D to for consistency and uniformity
a. Indexing tools c. Indexing standards
b. Indexing vocabulary d. Indexing procedures

[] [] [] [] 44. This type of indexing attempts to minimize missing useful entries by presenting the single
A B C D entries in a classified index, one by one in an alphabetical list
a. Faceted indexing c. String indexes
b. Chain indexing d. Citation indexes

[] [] [] [] 45. In a list showing hierarchical relationships of concepts, the term one step lower than the term
A B C D being considered is the
a. NT c. RT
b. BT d. None of the above

[] [] [] [] 46. An indexing software designed to assist an indexer working from printed proofs, text on disk,
A B C D the author’s manuscript or an already completed book .

a. Authex Plus c. MACREX

b. CINDEX d. WINDEX

[] [] [] [] 47. A “stop list” can be best defined as

A B C D a. List of words that mean stop
b. List of words included in an index
c. List of words not used as keywords
d. List of words that signals the indexer to stop indexing

[] [] [] [] 48. A subject-author guide to articles published by the US National Library of Medicine.

A B C D a. MEDLINE c. PubMed
b. Index Medicus d. MeSH

[] [] [] [] 49. These are non-relevant documents retrieved as a result of a semantic breakdown.

A B C D
a. Hits c. Keywords

b. Search results d. False drops

[] [] [] []
A B C D 50. Refer to the connectives used to combine terms for searching in post-coordinate systems.
a. Boolean operators c. Search strategy
b. Conjunctions d. Information retrieval

186
[] [] [] [] 51. In the preparation of a back-of-the-book index, the _________________ indexing system is
A B C D applied.
a. Post-coordinate c. Pre-coordinate
b. Permuted d. Derivative

[] [] [] [] 52. When did book indexing begin?

A B C D
a. 15th century c. 17th century
b. 16th century d. 18th century

[] [] [] [] 53. It is a tool which indicates or points out to a user the location of the information one needs.
A B C D
a. Subject heading list c. Table of Contents
b. Catalog d. Index

[] [] [] [] 54. A set of prescribed procedures intended for indexing.

A B C D
a. Library system c. Indexing system
b. Library Manual d. Cataloging standard

[] [] [] [] 55. Concordances are alphabetical index of all the principal words appearing in a single text or in a
A B C D multi-volume work of a single author with a pointer to the precise point at which the word
occurs. Sometimes, concordances are called

a. Back of the book index c. Card index

b. Word and Name index d. Printed book index

[] [] [] [] 56. It is a method by which words or phrases occurring in the title or text of a document are
A B C D translated into standard index terms from a standard authority list/controlled vocabulary.

a. Derived indexing c. Post-coordinate indexing

b. Assigned indexing d. Pre-coordinate indexing

[] [] [] [] 57. A list of index and lead-in or approach terms arranged alphabetically or in a classified manner.
A B C D
a. Syntax c. Context
b. Vocabulary d. Semantics

[] [] [] [] 58. In indexing, this indicates class relations among index terms which are supposed to have a
A B C D permanent relationship.

a. Syntax c. Context
b. Vocabulary d. Semantics

[] [] [] [] 59. Which of the following manifests equivalence relationship?

A B C D
a. Doctor & Physician
b. Health care professionals & Nurse
c. Surgeon & Surgery
d. Medical Technician & Computer Technician

[] [] [] [] 60. Which of the following manifests associative relationship?

A B C D
a. Doctor & Physician
b. Health care professionals & Nurse
c. Surgeon & Surgery
d. Medical Technician & Computer Technician

[] [] [] [] 61. What relationship is manifested by Flower festival and Panagbenga

A B C D
a. Equivalence c. Associative
b. Hierarchical d. No relation

187
[] [] [] [] 62. What relationship is manifested by president and vice president?
A B C D
a. Equivalence c. Associative
b. Hierarchical d. No relation

[] [] [] [] 63. Who developed NEPHIS (Nested Phrase Indexing System)

A B C D
a. Timothy C. Craven c. J.D. Anderson
b. S. R. Ranganathan d. Ganesh Bhattacharya

[] [] [] [] 64. POPSI, which derived its postulates from Ranganathan’s theories of classification, is
A B C D developed by?

a. Timothy C. Craven c. J.D. Anderson

b. S. R. Ranganathan d. Ganesh Bhattacharya

[] [] [] [] 65. A description of the contents of a document, usually to clarify the title.

A B C D
a. Terse Literature c. Annotation
b. Extract d. Summary

[] [] [] [] 66. One or more portions from a document lifted verbatim to represent the whole.
A B C D
a. Terse Literature c. Annotation
b. Extract d. Summary

[] [] [] [] 67. Brief restatement of the salient findings and conclusions intended to complete the orientation
A B C D of the reader; may be found at the beginning of the article or at the end.

a. Terse Literature c. Annotation

b. Extract d. Summary

[] [] [] [] 68. Which of the following examples do not illustrate verbosity?

A B C D
a. In a slow manner c. Cope with
b. Pair of scissors d. Past history

[] [] [] [] 69. Abstracts published with the document

A B C D
a. Highlight abstract c. Hyphenated abstract
b. Homotopic abstract d. Homogeneous abstract

[] [] [] [] 70. The objectives of the study is allotted approximately ____ of the abstract.
A B C D
a. 3% c. 15%
b. 7% d. 70%

[] [] [] [] 71. The findings of the study is allotted approximately ____ of the abstract.
A B C D
a. 3% c. 15%
b. 7% d. 70%

[] [] [] [] 72. Sentences in abstracts must be

A B C D
a. Short and clear c. short and declarative
b. Short and concise d. short and relevant

[] [] [] [] 73. “stated verbally”

A B C D
a. stated c. verbally
b. said d. talked

[] [] [] [] 74. The first sentence in an abstract should not repeat information found in the ______.
A B C D
a. summary c. bibliographic reference

188
 b. text of the document d. title of the document

[] [] [] [] 75. In reading the document to identify the key information, which parts of the document are
A B C D deemed useful?

a. Author’s abstract c. Text

b. Summary and conclusions d. All of the above

[] [] [] [] 76. Collateral information refers to

A B C D
a. Findings incidental to the main purpose c. Newly discovered documents/data
sources
b. Modification of new methods d. All of the above

[] [] [] [] 77. “Blue in color”

A B C D
a. Colored blue c. blue
b. Color d. blue color

[] [] [] [] 78. What should be done before doing the final step in writing the abstract?
A B C D
a. Check the draft abstract c. Edit and polish the abstract
b. Write the final abstract d. Follow the abstract format

[] [] [] [] 79. The type of abstract is considered appropriate for research reports, theses and dissertations.
A B C D a. Structured abstract c. Indicative abstract
b. Critical abstract d. Informative abstract

[] [] [] [] 80. The physical carrier of organized information which may be print, non-print or electronic in
A B C D format.
a. Document c. Message
b. Database d. Data

[] [] [] [] 81. ANSI stands for

A B C D a. American National Standards Institution
b. American National Society of Indexers
c. American National Surrogates Institute
d. American National Standards Institute

[] [] [] [] 82. The following can be used to describe a book with poor indexes or no indexes at all, except
A B C D a. Incomplete c. Totally useful
b. Penalized readers d. In a way, cheated on the readers

[] [] [] [] 83. This refers to the exponential increase in information generation which was deemed
A B C D uncontrollable unless information is properly organized for retrieval.
a. Information retrieval c. Data storage
b. Information explosion d. Databases

[] [] [] [] 84. The type of abstract that is considered to be the most appropriate for medical journals.
A B C D a. Slanted abstract c. Discipline-oriented abstract
b. Structured abstract d. Author-prepared abstract

[] [] [] [] 85. The _____________ is a key device in identifying information for retrieval and users will often
A B C D depend on it to help them decide if the material is useful or not.
a. Author’s name c. Name of publisher
b. Title d. Date of publication

[] [] [] [] 86. This type of abstract provides the content of the original paper without data or comment. It
A B C D simply describes what type of record is being abstracted and what it is about.
a. Critical abstract c. Indicative abstract
b. Informative abstract d. Slanted abstract

189
[] [] [] [] 87. The ideal length of abstract for notes and short communications is __________ words.
A B C D a. 250 c. 30
b. 100 d. 300

[] [] [] [] 88. A brief but accurate representation of the contents of a document.

A B C D a. Summary c. Abstract
b. Index d. Annotation

[] [] [] [] 89. A list of terms derived directly from the text of a document.

A B C D a. Keywords c. Controlled vocabulary
b. Search terms d. Derived vocabulary

[] [] [] [] 90. An index term identified as the preferred representation for the aboutness of a topic in a
A B C D document.
a. Descriptor c. Entry
b. Keyword d. Extract

[] [] [] [] 91. This refers to the degree to which retrieved informational materials satisfies the needs of the
A B C D user.
a. Relevance c. Precision
b. Recall d. Search result

[] [] [] [] 92. Abstracts are used to find

A B C D a. A particular known item suggested from a reference
b. A comprehensive overview of a field, subfield, or concept in the field
c. Other works by an author recently discovered by the user
d. All of the above

[] [] [] [] 93. This is the key unit in the reference of an abstract because it provides the location of the paper.
A B C D It should be accurate and consistent and follows some standard conventions for citing.
a. Funding agency c. Author affiliation
b. Publication source d. Title

[] [] [] [] 94. An ISO standard that provides for the guidelines for preparing and presenting abstracts, subject
A B C D analysis, style to be used and length of abstract.
a. ISO 214 c. ISO 999
b. ISO 5964 d. ISO 5963

[] [] [] [] 95. How do abstracts save the time of the reader?

A B C D a. Abstracts are usually shorter than the whole paper
b. Abstracts indicate the major content of the whole paper
c. Abstracts gave the subject coverage of the whole paper
d. Abstracts generally give useful information about the whole paper

[] [] [] [] 96. The number one common sense criteria in evaluating an abstract is that it should
A B C D a. Exclude unimportant information
b. Represent what the item is all about
c. Be error free
d. Be brief and readable

[] [] [] [] 97. Refers to a highly structured abstract designed primarily for searching by computer.
A B C D a. Indicative abstract c. Critical abstract
b. Mini-abstract d. Informative abstract

[] [] [] [] 98. A type of automatic indexing in which the significant words in a string are rotated and
A B C D displayed, surrounded by the other words in the string.
a. KWIC c. KWAC
b. KWOC d. KWAD

[] [] [] [] 99. An abbreviated version of a document created by drawing sentences from the document itself.
A B C D a. Abstract c. Summary
b. Extract d. Annotation

190
[] [] [] [] 100. A plan or method for systematically identifying useful data or documents in an information
A B C D storage file.
a. Search strategy c. Search formulation
b. Keywords d. Search terms

[] [] [] [] 101. Good quality abstracts has the following characteristics

A B C D a. Accuracy, originality, brevity c. Acceptability, accuracy, brevity
b. Clarity, brevity, accuracy d. Relevance, clarity, accuracy

[] [] [] [] 102. The ratio of the number of relevant documents retrieved to the total number of documents
A B C D retrieved
a. Recall c. Search result
b. Precision d. Keyword

[] [] [] [] 103. An authority file of terms that shows the full scope of each term along with its relationship to
A B C D broader terms, narrower terms, and related terms.
a. Thesaurus c. Controlled vocabulary
b. Dictionary d. Uncontrolled vocabulary

[] [] [] [] 104. These are universal, unique and permanent identification tags for online content that is
A B C D registered in an online directory and cover any form of digital files including text, image,
video, audio and even software.
a. URL c. IPs
b. DOIs d. Search engine

[] [] [] [] 105. An analytic-synthetic classification system developed in 1933 by S. R. Ranganathan.

A B C D a. Library of Congress Classification c. Dewey Decimal Classification
b. Colon Classification d. Universal Classification

[] [] [] [] 106. A/An _____________________ list is a related group of words or phrases adopted by a

A B C D particular group of people to be used in an indexing activity. It implies a controlled vocabulary
where indexers must adhere to when preparing a document.
a. Keyword c. Name
b. Authority d. Subject

[] [] [] [] 107. An ANSI accredited association responsible for the development of the Z39 series.
A B C D a. ALA c. ISO
b. NISO d. British Standards Association

[] [] [] [] 108. PRECIS stands for

A B C D a. Preserved Context Index System c. Preserved Content Index System
b. Pre-Coordinate Index System d. Preserved Concise Index System

[] [] [] [] 109. Verbose writing is a no-no in abstracting. Choose the more concise form for “in the shape of a
A B C D rectangle”
a. Shape c. Rectangular
b. Rectangle d. Shapely

[] [] [] [] 110. An index first published in 1900 by H.W. Wilson notable for the emphasis it placed on subject
A B C D access and good referencing.
a. Index Medicus c. Readers’ Guide to Periodical
Literature
b. Index to the Social Sciences d. ALA Index to Periodical Literature
[] [] [] [] 111. In __________________ indexing, it is the indexer who determines the index terms at the time
A B C D of indexing.
a. PRECIS c. Postcoordinate
b. Controlled d. Precoordinate

191
[] [] [] [] 112. It consists of a list of articles, with a sublist under each article of subsequently published papers
A B C D that cite the article.
a. Citation index c. Alphabetical index
b. Author index d. Classified index

[] [] [] [] 113. A type of index whose entry points are people, organizations, corporate authors, government
A B C D agencies and the like are called
a. Alphabetical index c. Book index
b. Author index d. Periodical index

[] [] [] [] 114. The result of the combined effects of exhaustivity and specificity in an index.
A B C D a. Indexing system c. Controlled vocabulary
b. Depth of indexing d. List of subject headings

[] [] [] [] 115. The following are considered document surrogates, except

A B C D a. Annotation c. Summary
b. Extract d. Keywords

[] [] [] [] 116. Indexing system developed for the Modern Languages Association (MLA)
A B C D a. POPSI c. CIFT
b. NEPHIS d. PRECIS

[] [] [] [] 117. The following are the acknowledged uses of indexes, except

A B C D a. Give indications on the relationships among terms found in the document
b. Identify relevant information
c. Help in the development of services of the library
d. Help in minimizing efforts by users in searching relevant information

[] [] [] [] 118. Simply put, this is the use of computers in indexing.

A B C D a. Derivative indexing c. Manual indexing
b. Automatic indexing d. Coordinate indexing

[] [] [] [] 119. The combination and modification of terms to form headings and multilevel headings or to
A B C D form search statements.
a. Vocabulary c. Syntax
b. Semantics d. Diction

[] [] [] [] 120. A presentation of the substance of a body of material in a condensed form or by reducing it to

A B C D its main points Is called a
a. Extract c. Annotation
b. Summary d. Terse literature

[] [] [] [] 121. The process by which the subject matter or content of a document is represented in an index
A B C D a. Content analysis c. Abstracting
b. Cataloging d. Subject indexing

[] [] [] [] 122. __________ terms are words that allow the user to enter the vocabulary structure of an index.
A B C D If these are not allowable descriptors, these will refer the user to a term that is acceptable.
a. Preferred c. Identifier
b. Entry d. Keyword

[] [] [] [] 123. An indexing software that provides for a spreadsheet approach to data entry and editing.
A B C D a. CINDEX c. SKY Index
b. Authex Plus d. MACREX

[] [] [] [] 124. The development of NEPHIS (Nested Phrase Indexing System) was attributed to
A B C D a. Timothy C. Craven c. W. H. Poole
b. S. R. Ranganathan d. C. A. Cutter

[] [] [] [] 125. Which of the following publishes Library and Information Science Abstracts?
A B C D
a. H.W. Wilson c. American Library Association

192
 b. Institute of Scientific Information d. Library Association

[] [] [] [] 126. It is the process of analyzing the contents of a document and assigning index terms to represent
A B C D the names of persons, places, titles and subject matter of documents and for these to serve as
access points in locating and retrieving information from the document.

a. Indexing c. Classifying
b. Abstracting d. Cataloging

[] [] [] [] 127. The following are uses of index, except:

A B C D
a. Facilitate reference to the specific item
b. Disclose relationships
c. Give nomenclature guidance
d. Provide superficial review of a subject field

[] [] [] [] 128. The arrangement of indexes by H.W. Wilson are generally

A B C D
a. Classified index c. Periodical
b. Alphabetical index d. None of the above

[] [] [] [] 129. It is a method by which words or phrases occurring in the title or text of a document are
A B C D utilized as index terms by a human indexer or computer.

a. Derived indexing c. Post-coordinate indexing

b. Assigned indexing d. Pre-coordinate indexing

[] [] [] [] 130. Derived indexing is also called

A B C D
a. Constructive indexing c. Controlled indexing
b. Extractive indexing d. Natural indexing

[] [] [] [] 131. It is the combination and modification of terms to form simple or multilevel index terms. It is
A B C D concerned with the clarity of expression, efficient and unambiguous communication.
Relationship among these terms is ad hoc or temporary.

a. Syntax c. Context
b. Vocabulary d. Semantics

[] [] [] [] 132. Which of the following manifests hierarchical relationship?

A B C D
a. Doctor & Physician
b. Health care professionals & Nurse
c. Surgeon & Surgery
d. Medical Technician & Computer Technician

[] [] [] [] 133. What relationship is manifested by smoked meat and etag?

A B C D
a. Equivalence c. Associative
b. Hierarchical d. No relation

[] [] [] [] 134. What relationship is manifested by Computer and motherboard

A B C D
a. Equivalence c. Associative
b. Hierarchical d. No relation

[] [] [] [] 135. Which of the following is not a STRING index?

A B C D
a. KWIC c. NEPHIS
b. PRECIS d. CIFT

193
[] [] [] [] 136. Who developed the CIFT for the Modern Language Association?
A B C D
a. Timothy C. Craven c. J.D. Anderson
b. S. R. Ranganathan d. Ganesh Bhattacharya

[] [] [] [] 137. In the process developed by S.R. Ranganathan, analytico-synthetic method, which title is
A B C D supplied by the indexer as taken from the title of the document and/or the other parts of the
documents? This is the descriptive form of the subject content of the document.

a. Raw title c. Kernel title

b. Expressive title d. Transformed title

[] [] [] [] 138. Highly abbreviated statement that encapsulates the major points of a document.
A B C D
a. Terse Literature c. Annotation
b. Extract d. Summary

[] [] [] [] 139. An abstract designed to rouse the reader’s interest.

A B C D
a. Highlight abstract c. Hyphenated abstract
b. Homotopic abstract d. Homogeneous abstract

[] [] [] [] 140. The nature of the study is allotted approximately ____ of the abstract.
A B C D
a. 3% c. 15%
b. 7% d. 70%

[] [] [] [] 141. The methodology of the study is allotted approximately ____ of the abstract.
A B C D
a. 3% c. 15%
b. 7% d. 70%

[] [] [] [] 142. According to Lancaster, an abstract is an accurate and brief ____ of a document.

A B C D
a. Version c. Description
b. Derivative d. Representation

[] [] [] [] 143. Which of the following abstracting services include critical abstracts?

A B C D
a. Mathematical Reviews c. Excerpta Medica
b. Bulletin Signaletique d. Psychological Abstracts

[] [] [] [] 144. “Audible to the ear”

A B C D
a. heard c. audible
b. ear d. hearable

[] [] [] [] 145. This principle of abstracting stresses unnecessary redundancy and verbosity.

A B C D
a. accuracy c. brevity
b. clarity d. consistency

[] [] [] [] 146. If one were to write an abstract for an article written in French, one would choose to write;
A B C D
a. A critical abstract c. An indicative abstract
b. A slanted abstract d. An informative abstract

[] [] [] [] 147. The body of the abstract should be so organized to contain the following information in a
A B C D prescribed sequence. Which of the following is the correct sequence.

a. Objective, methodology, conclusions, results

b. Purpose, methodology, results, conclusions
c. Objective, purpose, methodology, results, conclusions
d. Purpose, objective, methodology, conclusions, results

194
[] [] [] [] 148. It is the first abstracting journal published in the mid-seventeenth century.
A B C D
a. Le Journal des Scavans c. Science Abstracts
b. Pharmaceutisches Central-Blatt d. Bulletin Signaletique

[] [] [] [] 149. What is the final step in writing the abstract?

A B C D
a. Check the draft abstract c. Edit and polish the abstract
b. Write the final abstract d. Follow the abstract format

150. This activity is referred to as machine aided indexing wherein the text is analyzed by means of
computer algorithms.
[] [] [] []
A B C D
a. content-based image indexing c. HTML indexing
b. automatic indexing d. concept-based image indexing

195
KEY ANSWER TO PART V: INDEXING AND ABSTRACTING
1. C 51. C 101. B
2. A 52. B 102. B
3. B 53. D 103. A
4. D 54. D 104. B
5. B 55. B 105. B
6. B 56. B 106. B
7. D 57. B 107. C
8. B 58. D 108. A
9. B 59. A 109. B
10. B 60. C 110. C
11. D 61. B 111. D
12. C 62. C 112. A
13. D 63. A 113. B
14. B 64. D 114. A
15. A 65. C 115. D
16. B 66. B 116. C
17. B 67. D 117. C
18. C 68. C 118. B
19. C 69. B 119. C
20. B 70. B 120. B
21. A 71. D 121. D
22. C 72. A 122. B
23. A 73. A 123. C
24. C 74. D 124. A
25. C 75. D 125. D
26. C 76. D 126. A
27. B 77. C 127. D
28. C 78. C 128. B
29. A 79. D 129. A
30. A 80. A 130. B
31. B 81. D 131. A
32. A 82. C 132. B
33. C 83. B 133. A
34. C 84. B 134. C
35. B 85. B 135. A
36. C 86. C 136. C
37. B 87. B 137. B
38. B 88. C 138. A
39. C 89. D 139. A
40. A 90. B 140. A
41. B 91. A 141. C
42. B 92. D 142. D
43. C 93. D 143. A
44. B 94. A 144. C
45. A 95. B 145. C
46. C 96. D 146. D
47. C 97. B 147. B
48. B 98. A 148. A
49. D 99. B 149. B
50. A 100. A 150. B

196
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
According to the Implementing Rules and Regulations (IRR) of Republic Act 9246, otherwise known as The Philippine
Librarianship Act of 2003, information technology (IT) is "electronic means of capturing. processing and communicating
information for fast delivering of services and other operations."

Two Categories of Information Technology

 Information processing, such as computer systems

 Information dissemination, such as telecommunication systems

What is ICT?

 Information
 Communication
 Technology

Technologies that are used to create, collect, consolidate. and communicate multimedia information. These include typewriters,
computers, fax machine, photocopying machines: computers, telephones, cameras, radios, etc. In today's information age, the
information is usually created, stored, and transferred in digital format.

Development of Computers and Information Systems

Pre-computer Age of Equipment

 ca. 500 BC - Abacus is one of the earliest invented over 2000 years ago by Asian merchants to speed up calculations. It
is a simple hand device for recording numbers or performing simple calculations like addition. It was first used n
Babylon.

Calculating Machines - Calculating machines were first introduced in the 17th century.

 1614 - John Napier invented a system of moveable rods, referred to as Napier's Rods. which allowed for
multiplication, division, and square and cube root calculation
 1623 - Wilhelm Schickard developed the so-called "Calculating Clock." It was mechanical, naturally, and was capable
of adding and subtracting six6igit numbers.
 1625 - William Oughtred invented the slide rule that can perform direct multiplication and division.
 1642 - Blaise Pascal built a workable calculating machine that could perform additions and subtractions. Pascal was
credited for building the first calculating machine in 1642 that perform addition and subtraction, a precursor of the
digital computer.
 1671 - Gottfried Wilhelm von Leibniz built the first calculating machine called Stepped Reckoner that could multiply
and divide as well as add and subtract.
 1820 - Charles Xavier Thomas de Colmar invented the first mechanical calculator that was available for commercial
use. He produces a machine called an Arithmometer.
 1874 - Frank S. Baldwin developed the first mechanical calculator produced in the United States. Baldwin was also
well known for inventing the Baldwin Computing Engine (1890), the Baldwin Calculator (1902), and the Monroe
Calculator (1913, with co-developer Jay Monroe).
 1886 - William Seward Burroughs invented the first commercially available calculator that was both a calculating and
listing machine. His Calculating Machine was patented in 1888. Burroughs later founded the Burroughs Corporation,
now the UNISYS Corporation.
 1886 - Dorr Felt created in Chicago the Comptometer, the first mechanical calculator to be driven solely by the action
of pressing keys rather than by other mechanisms such as dialing. In 1889, Felt went on to bring out the very first
printing desk calculator.

Punched hard Information Processing

 1801 - Joseph Jacquard invented a machine (known as Jacquard Loom) that could automatically weave patterned
cloth. The Jacquard concept of recording data in the form of holes punched in cards was used in the design of
punched-card information processing equipment.
 1890 - Dr. Herman Hollerith was the first person to suggest that punched card be used for Information processing. He
Is often referred to as the Father of Information Processing.

197
  1911- Hollerith's firm merged with three other companies to form the Computing Tabulating- Recording Company
with Thomas J. Watson Sr. as president.
 1924 - Watson changed the name of the company to International Business Machines (IBM)

Early Computers

 1822 - Charles Babbage designed his first mechanical computer known as the Difference Engine
 1833 - Babbage also designed the Analytical/ Engine, the forerunner of modern computers. He is often referred to as
the "Father of Modern Computers."
 1842-1843 - Augusta Ada Lovelace provided complete details as to exactly how the analytical engine was to work.
She often is called the "World's first computer programmer".
 1848 - George Boole devised binary algebra, known today as Boolean Algebra. This was essential for a binary
computer to be developed, which happened after almost a hundred years later.
 1941 - Atanasoff-Berry Computer (ABC) - a computer made up of electronic parts. Professor John Vincent Atanasoff
and Clifford Berry are given credit for designing the world’s first electronic computing machine. The ABC pioneered
important elements of modern computing, including binary arithmetic and electronic switching elements, but its
special-purpose nature and lack of a changeable, stored-program distinguish it from modern computers.
 1941 - Kondrad Zuse developed Z3, the “World’s first functional, general-purpose, program-controlled computer." Z3
was a binary 64-bit floating point calculator featuring programmability with loops but without conditional jumps, with
memory and a calculation unit based in telephone relays.
 1943 - MARC I also known as Automatic Sequence-Controlled Calculator (ASTM), was designed by Professor
Howard Aiken of Harvard University and built by IBM engineers. It was the first "computer-like" machine to be built
and the first operating machine that could execute long computations automatically.
 1946 - J. Presper Eckert and John Mauchly designed and built the Electronic Numerical Integrator and
Computer(ENIAC), the “World’s first universal electronic computer” to be made fully operational. ENIAC was built
for the US Army for ballistic trajectories and tests of hydrogen bomb theories.

Types of Computers and Information Systems

A computer can be defined as an electronic device that has the ability to accept data, store and execute a program of
instructions, perform mathematical and logical operations on data, and report the results. A computer system has the following
common features regardless of brand, type, or size.

 Input and output devices

 Primary and secondary storage
 Processor and control unit
 Peripheral devices

Modern digital computers are all conceptually similar, regardless of size. Nevertheless, they can be divided into several categories
on the basis of cost and performance.

1. Mainframes - are large, relatively expensive machine that offer extensive problem-solving capabilities. They often
have several processors. Mainframes are used mainly by large organizations (e.g., banks. insurance companies).
2. Minicomputers or Midrange computer - is a scaled-down version of the mainframe. This is a middle-size computer.
3. Microcomputers - The smallest and least expensive type of computer system, also known as a personal computer (PC)
or a micro.
 Traditionally, microcomputers are designed to be operated by one user at a time, using the keyboard or mouse
for data entry and a monitor or printer for display output.
 Microcomputer systems can be classified as desktop, portable, or hand-held units.
 Desktop computers - are those found most often in schools, homes, and businesses. Portable
computers, such as laptops and notebooks, are designed for users who would like to use the same
microcomputer at several sites. These computers are characterized as being lightweight and compact
(able to fit into a carrying case).
 Hand-held computers - like palmtop computers and Personal Digital Assistants POSs) - look and
behave a lot like standard pocket calculators.
 Server - computer that is specifically optimized to provide software and other resources to other
computers over a network; and
 Server farm - a large group of servers maintained by a commercial vendor and made available via
subscription for electronic commerce and other activities requiring heavy use of servers.

198
Specialized types of computers

1. Embedded Computers - a microprocessor designed to operate within another tool. Embedded computers are not as
flexible as general-purpose microcomputers. The purpose of embedded computers is to expand the capacities of the
tools we use (e.g., the microprocessor in the refrigerator helps regulate the refrigerator’s temperature to keep the food
fresh).
2. Supercomputers - The most advanced and expensive type of computer. Supercomputer use is usually limited to such
organizations as large oil companies, the US Department of Defense. and the National Aeronautics and Space
Administration (NASA). This is a highly sophisticated and powerful computer that can perform very complex operations
in extreme speed.
3. Fault-Tolerated Computers - These machines are designed so that they never crash. To achieve this, the manufacturer
duplicates all important components of the processing hardware. Fault-tolerated computers are especially useful in
hazardous environments or in situations where an organization cannot afford to be without processing power, e.g.,
hospitals, scientific laboratories, nuclear power plants.
4. Workstation - this is a desktop computer with enhanced graphics, mathematical, and communications capabilities that
can make it especially useful to perform complicated task at once. They are ideal for office work.
5. Thin client - this computer functions only when connected to a server.

Stored programs

The stored program concept was a major advance in computer technology because it gave much more flexibility in the
use of the machine. Just who invented the concept is a matter of controversy. Credit generally is given to John Von Neumann of
Pennsylvania University, one of the most brilliant mathematicians in the U. S.

 1949 - Proposed by John Von Neumann, the Electronic Discrete Variable Automatic Computer (EDVAC) was designed
so that It would be capable of storing and completed until 1951. The machine. named Electronic Delay Storage
Automatic Calculator(EDSAC) was finished in the year 1949. Thus, EDSAC is acknowledged as the “World’s first
operating electronic computer that stored its program of instructions."
 1951 - The Universal Automatic Computer (UNIVAC), developed by J. Presper Eckert and John Mauchly, is the
“World's first business computer". The most famous UNIVAC product was the UNIVAC I mainframe computer of
1951, which became known for predicting the outcome of the US presidential election the following year.

Generation of Computers

1. First Generation Computers (ca. 1940-1956) - Computers were very large in size and had thousands of Vacuum tubes.
These tubes produced so much heat that special air-conditioning was required to cool computer rooms. Punched cards
were used for input and output while magnetic drums for memory. The machines had small memory capacities, and
preparation of the program of Instructions was difficult.
2. Second Generation Computers (ca. 1956-1963) - solid state Transistors replaced the vacuum tubes. The transistors
were developed by William Shockley, John Bardeen, and Walter Brattain in 1947 at Bell Labs but did not see widespread
use in computers until the 1950’s. Computers with transistor produced much less heat than those made with vacuum
tubes. These machines were much faster, smaller in size, and much more reliable in operation. Data input and output
could be recorded on magnetic tape as well as on punched cards.
3. Third Generation Computers (ca. 1964-1971) - The development of the Integrated Circuit (IC) was the hallmark of
the third generation computers. Transistors were miniaturized and placed on silicon chips, called semiconductors, which
drastically increased the speed, efficiency, and storage capacity of computers, Jack Kilby of Texas Instruments and
Robes Noyce of Fairchild Semiconductors were credited for developing the IC. Instead of punched cards and printouts,
users interacted with third generation computers through keyboards and monitors and interfaced with an operating
system, which allowed the device to run many different applications at one time with a central program that monitored
the memory. Third generation computers included smaller and less expensive machines called minicomputers.
4. Four Generation Computers (ca. 1971- Present) - The microprocessor brought the fourth generation of computers.
as thousands of integrated circuits were built onto a single silicon chip. The microprocessor developed by Gilbert Hyatt
and Marcian E. Hoff of Intel Corp., operates 10,000 times faster than first generation machines. Fourth Generation
Machine also have target memories, for storage of data and provide faster access to stored data and information. Fourth
generation computers also saw the development of GUls. the mouse and handheld devices.
5. Fifth Generation Computers (Present and Beyond) - microprocessor is still the processing hardware of computers.
Fifth generation computing devices, based on Artificial Intelligence are still in development. Although, there are some
applications, such as voice recognition, that are being used today. The use of Parallel Processing and Superconductors
is helping to make artificial intelligence a reality. Quantum computation and molecular and nanotechnology will

199
 radically change the face of computers in years to come. The goal of fifth generation computing is to develop devices
that respond to natural language input and are capable of learning and self-organization.

Computer-Based Information System

A computer is a device made up of a combination of electronic and electromechanical components. By itself, a computer has no
intelligence and is referred to as the hardware. It can’t be used until it is connected to other parts of the computer system. A
computer system is a combination of the elements, data/information, people, procedures, hardware, and software. An additional
component, though not always available, is communication. It relies on computer hardware and software for processing and
disseminating information. The Librarian or information specialist provides and delivers information systems services, which
nowadays is usually computer-based.

A. Data vs. Information

Information system is not a concept that is purely confined in computers. An information system (IS) is a set of people, procedures
and resources that collects, transforms, and disseminates information in an organization. It is a system that accepts data resources
as input and processed them as information products as output.

Data consist of raw facts and figures that are process into information.

Information is summarized data or otherwise manipulated (processed data).

Types of Data

1. Numeric - numbers and numeric symbols

2. Text / Textual – letters, numbers, and special characters
3. Audio-Visual - voice and music, computer graphics, visua1 images, video sequences, etc.
4. Physical - light, temperature, pressure, etc.

B. People (Information specialists, librarians, knowledge workers, IT specialists, etc.)

i. Computer professional- is a person who has formal education in the technical aspects of computers, such as
computer programmers, systems analysts, information systems manager, etc.
ii. User or End-User - is a person without much technical knowledge of computers but uses computers to perform
professional or personal tasks, enhance learning, or have fun.
C. Procedures
i. Operating Procedures — rules for using any hardware or software correctly.
ii. Emergency Procedures — used for troubleshooting in events like computer crash or failure.
D. Computer Hardware

The computer hardware is the equipment and devices that make up a computer system as opposed to the programs that are used
on it. A digital computer is not a single machine; rather, it is a system composed of distinct elements.

• input devices
• Central processing unit
• Primary storage devices
• Secondary storage devices
• Output devices
• Communication devices

For information to flow through a computer system and be in form suitable for processing, all symbols, pictures, or words must
be reduced to a string of binary digits. A binary digit is called a bit. It represents the smallest unit of data in a computer system.
It can only have one of two states (e.g., true or false, on or off) represented by 0 or 1. A byte is a string of eight (8) bits, used to
store one number or character in a computer system.

Computers continue to become smaller, faster, more reliable, less costly to purchase and maintain, and more interconnected
within computer networks. input devices are directed toward direct data input that ids more natural and easy to use, while output
devices are geared toward direct output methods that communicate naturally, quickly, and clearly.

I. Input devices - enable a computer user to enter data, commands and programs into the CPU. It consists of devices
that take data and programs that people read or comprehend and convert them to a form the computer can process.
a. Text input Devices

200
  Keyboard
The keyboard - Standard Keyboard Layout
 This is commonly known as the QWERTY keyboard, named after the six leftmost characters in
the top row of alphabetic characters on most keyboards—the standard layout of most typewriters
and computer keyboards. An alternative layout, the Dvorak keyboard, is considered more
efficient, but the QWERTY keyboard has the advantage of familiarity. This is the most common
input device. Information typed at the typewriter-like keyboard is translated by the computer into
recognizable patterns.
 A standard computer keyboard has about 100 keys.
 Most keyboards have keys arranged in five groups:
o Alphanumeric keys
o Numeric keypad
o Function keys
o Modifier keys
o Cursor-movement keys
b. Pointing Devices
 Mouse
 Trackballs
 Touch screens
 Light pens
 Digitized tablets
 Pen-based systems
c. Game Controllers
 Steering Wheel
 Joystick
 Gamepad or Joypad Paddle
 Jog dial/shuttle (or knob)
 Wii Remote
d. Imaging and Video Input Devices
 Image Scanners
 Web Cam
 Fingerprint reader
 Fingerprint scanner
 Barcode Reader 3D Scanner
 Smart cards and optical cards
 Voice recognition devices
 Digital camera
 Digital camcorder
 Portable media player
 Microsoft Kinect Sensor
 Laser rangefinder
 Eye gaze tracker
e. Audio-input devices
 Microphone
 Midi-keyboard or other musical instrument
f. Medical Imaging
 Computed tomography
 Magnetic resonance imaging
 Position emission tomography
 Medical ultrasonography
g. Sensors
h. Human-Biology input devices
i. Magnetic ink character recognition
j. Graphic Tablets - This pointing device is also called a digitizing tablet. It is a flat plastic rectangle with
subsurface electronics, used in conjunction with a pointing device in many engineering and design applications
as well as in illustration work. When a pointing device, like a puck (or even the finger) is moved on the surface
of the tablet, the location of the device is translated to a specific on-screen cursor position.

201
 k. Puck - This is often used in engineering applications. It is a mouse-1ike device with buttons for selecting items
or choosing commands and a clear plastic section extending from one end with cross hairs printed on it. The
intersection of the cross hairs on the puck points to a location on the graphics tablet, which in turn is mapped
to a specific location on the screen. Since the puck’s cross hairs are on a transparent surface, a drawing can
easily be traced by placing it between the graphics tablet and the puck and moving the cross hair over the lines
of the drawing.
II. Central Processing Unit (CPU)

Central Processing Unit (CPU) - follows the instructions of the software to manipulate data into information. The procedure that
transforms data into useful information is called processing. This function is divided between the computer’s processor and
memory. The processor is also called the central processing unit (CPU). It manages all devices and performs the actual processing
of data. It is referred to as the brain of the computer system.

The CPU consists of one or more chips attached to the computer’s main circuit board (the motherboard). Chips are also called
microprocessors. The speed and performance of a computer’s microprocessor help determine a computer’s processing power.
These are based on the following:

a. Word length — This refers to the number of bits that the computer can process at one time (e.g., a 64-bit chip can
process 64 bits, or 8 bytes in a single cycle). The larger the word length, the greater the computer’s speed.
b. Cycle speed — This is measured in megahertz (MHz) or gigahertz (OHz). This indicates the number of cycles per
second (e.g., a 500 MHz Intel Pentium III processor will have 500 million cycles per second).
c. Data bus width — This acts as a superhighway between the CPU, primary storage, and other devices, which determines
how much data can be moved at one time. The 8088 chip having 16-bit word length but only an 8-bit data bus width
can process data in 16-bit chunks but could only be moved 8 bits at a time.

Most CPU chips and microprocessors are composed of four functional sections:

 Arithmetic/logic unit – this gives the chip its calculating ability and permits arithmetical and logical operations.
 Registers – These are temporary storage areas that hold data, keep track of instructions, and hold the location and results
of these operations.
 Control section – The control section has three principal duties.
o It times and regulates the operations of the entire computer system.
o Its instruction decoder reads the patterns of data in a designated register and translates the pattern into an
activity, such as adding or comparing.
o Its interrupt unit indicates the order in which individual operations use the CPU, and regulates the amount of
CPU time that each operation may consume.
o Internal bus – This segment of a CPU chip or microprocessor is a network of communication lines that connects
the internal elements of the computer system. There are three types of CPU buses:
 Control bus – This consists of a line that senses input signals and another line that generates control
signals from within the CPU.
 Address bus – This is a one-way line from the processor that handles the location of data in memory
addresses.
 Data bus – This is a two-way transfer line that both reads data from memory and writes new data into
memory.

There are certain ways that can speed up processing.

 Reduced instruction set computing (RISC) — This technology is used to enhance the speed of microprocessors by
embedding only the most frequently used instructions on a chip.
 Parallel processing — This is a type of processing in which more than one instruction can be processed at a time by
breaking down a problem into smaller parts and processing them simultaneously with multiple processors.
 Massively parallel processing — This is similar to parallel processing, only that hundreds or thousands of processing
chips are used to attack large computing problems simultaneously.

The manner in which data are input into the computer affects how the data can be processed. Information systems collect and
process information in one or two

 Batch processing — This is a method of collecting and processing data in which transactions are accumulated and stored
until a specified time when it is convenient or necessary to process them as a group.
 On-line processing – In this method, transactions are entered directly into the computer system and processed
immediately
202
Aside from the computer’s CPU, another computer hardware that can be considered under this category is the motherboard (or
the main board). This is the main circuit board containing the primary components of a computer system. This board contains
the microprocessor, main memory. support circuitry, and bus controller and connector. Other boards, including expansion
memory and input/output boards, may attach to the motherboard via the bus connector.

III. Primary Storage

Primary storage refers to temporary storage of data and program instructions during processing. It is also known as internal
storage since it stores data in the computer memory. There are two types.

 RAM (Random Access Memory) — These are chips that are mounted directly on the computer’s main circuit board, or
in chips mounted on peripheral cards that plug into the computer's main circuit board. They are called so because the
computer can directly access any randomly chosen location in the same amount of time. These RAM chips consist of
millions of switches that are sensitive to changes in electric current. So-called static RAM chips hold their data as long
as current flows through the circuit, whereas dynamic RAM (DRAM)) chips need high or low voltages applied at regular
intervals—every two milliseconds or soil they are not to lose their information. RAM is used for short-term storage of
data or program instructions. It is volatile - meaning its contents will be lost when the computer’s electric supply Is
turned off.
 ROM (Read-Only Memory) — These chips form commands, data, or programs that the computer needs to function
correctly. RAM chips are like pieces of paper that can be written on erased, and used again; ROM chips are like a book,
with its words already set on each page. ROM is non-volatile. ROM can only be read from it; it cannot be written to.
ROM chips come from manufacturers with programs already burned in or stored. ROM is used in general-purpose
computers to store important or frequently-used programs. Like RAM, ROM chips are linked by circuitry to the CPU.

Primary storage has three main functions.

 They store all or part of the software program that is being executed.
 They store the operating system programs that manage the operation of the computer.
 They hold the data that the program is using.

How Data and Programs are represented in the Computer

Computers use the two-state. 0/1 binary system to represent data. Two common binary coding schemes are:

• ASCII — American Standard Code for Information Interchange, most widely used for microcomputers; originally a 7-bit
character encoding system, now an 8-bit character encoding.

• EBCDIC — Extended Binary-Coded Decimal Interchange Code, 8-bit character encoding commonly used in mainframes.

Computer storage capacity is expressed in

Bit short for binary digit (0s and 1s)

Byte 8 bits (usually represent one character,
digit, or symbol)
Kilobyte (KB) 1.024 Bytes (1.0241)
Megabyte (MB) 1.024 KB (1.0242)
Gigabyte (GB) 1.024 MB (1.0243)
Terabyte (TB) 1.024 GB (1.0244)
Petabyte (PB) 1.024 TB (1.0245)
Exabyte (EB) 1.024 PB (1.0246)
Zettabyte (ZB) 1.24 (1.0247)
IV. Secondary Storage

Secondary storage stores data and instructions when they are not used in processing. Relatively. they are long-term, non-volatile
storage of data outside the CPU or primary storage, Secondary storage is also known as external storage because it does not use
the computer memory to store data. External storage devices, which ye located within the computer housing, are external to
the main circuit board. These devices store data as charges on a magnetically sensitive medium such as a magnetic tape or, more
commonly, on a disk coated with a fine layer of metallic particles.

The most popular secondary storage devices include the following.

 Magnetic disks — This broad category includes the following.

o Floppy disk — The floppy disk in normal use stores about 800 KB or about 1.4 MB.

203
 o ZIP disk — A ZIP disk is much like a floppy disk but has a greater capacity.
o Hard disk - Hard, or “fixed” disk cannot be removed from their disk-drive cabinets, containing the electronics
ad and writing data on to the magnetic disk surfaces. Hard disks currently used with personal computers can
store from several hundred megabytes to several Gigabytes.
o RAID (Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks) — This is a disk storage technology to boost disk
performance by packing more than 100 smaller disk drives with a control chip and specialized software in a
single large unit to deliver data over multiple paths simultaneously.
o Optical disks — These disks use the same laser techniques that are used to create audio compact discs (CDs).
Under this genre are:
 CD-ROM — This is an acronym for compact disc read-only memory, a form of storage characterized
by high capacity {roughly S00 MB) and the use of laser optics rather than magnetic means for reading
data.
 WORM — This is an acronym for write once, read many. This is very much like the CD-ROM. This
type of optical disc can be read and reread but cannot be altered after it has been recorded. WORMs
are high-capacity storage devices. Because they cannot be erased and re-recorded, they are suited to
storing archives and other large bodies of unchanging information.
 CD-R and CD-RW — In simple definition, these are blank CD-ROM that are ready for data storage.
A CD-R is similar to a WORM which cannot be erased or re-recorded. A CD-RW is capable of being
erased and re-recorded.
 DVD - This is short for digital versatile disc. The group of DVD disc formats includes various forms
of data recording for computer purposes, including discs that contain pre-recorded data (DVD-ROM)
and discs that can be rewritten many times (DVD-RAM). These are several times the capacity of
C&ROMs. The simple single-layer version of the DVD holds between 3.7 and 4.38 GB (with double-
layer versions holding 15.9 GB). compared to the 650 MB of CD-ROMs. These higher capacity discs
are used particularly for computer games and in multimedia applications.
 DVD-R and DVD-RW - These are blank optical disks in DVO format ready for data storage, just like
CD-R and CR-RW
 Blu-ray — mainly used in high-definition video and data storage.
 Lightscribe - a specially coated recordable CD and DVD media designed for producing laser-etched
labels with text or graphics using Lightscribe optical disc recording techno1ogy.
 Mass Storage Device
o USB Flash Drive —are typically removable and rewritable. much shorter than a floppy disk and weigh less
than 2 ounces (56g) Storage capabilities typically range from 64 MB to 64 GB with steady improvements in
sizes and price per gigabyte.
o Solid-State Drive (SSD) — a data storage device that uses solid-state memory to store persistent data.

V. Output Hardware - devices that translate information processed by the computer into a form that humans can
understand.

The most common output device can deliver either the soft copy or the hard copy of the data. Devices that render soft copy are
the following

 Video display unit IDU) - This is commonly known as the monitor, which displays characters and graphics on
a television-like screen. It usually has a cathode ray tube like an ordinary television set, but small, portable
computers use liquid crystal displays (LCDs) or electroluminescent screens.
 Audio output devices - These are respon5ible for the sound that the user hears from the computer. These include
the sound card and the speakers. The sound card is a computer circuit board that allows the computer to receive
sound in digital form and reproduce it through speakers.
 External storage devices - These Include floppy disks, compact disks, external hard disks, etc.
 Interactive multimedia - This is the combination of audio, video, and text on high capacity compact discs. CD-
I includes such features as image display and resolution, animation, special effects, and audio. Interactive
multimedia includes the following materials:
 e-books and e-newspapers
 electronic classroom presentation technologies
 full motion videoconferencing
 imaging
 graphic design tools
 video and voice mail

204
  interactive web pages
 multimedia web sites (they render digitized music and videos)

There are only two output devices known to render hard copy of data.

a. Printers - These are computer peripherals that put text or a computer-generated image on paper or on another
medium, such as transparency. Printers can be categorized in several different ways. The most common
distinction is impact and non-impact.
 Impact printers physically strike the paper and are exemplified by pin dot-matrix printers and daisy-
wheel printers.
 Non-impact printers include every other type of print mechanism, including thermal, inkjet, and laser
printers.
 Permanent (Hardcopy) - refers to the printed output
 Printers
1. Dot-matrix (Impact Printer)
2. Inkjet (Non-Impact Printer)
3. Laser (Non-impact Printer)
4. Thermal (Impact printer)
5. Braille embossed (Impact printer)
b. Computer output microform - these are output devices that can render microscopic format of documents.
 Temporary (Softcopy) — refers to data that is shown on a display screen or is in audio or voice form
 CRT (Cathode ray tube)
 Flat-panel display (LCD)
 Plasma display devices
 Multimedia projectors
 Audio-output (voice and sound-output)
 Video output (Film recorder)
 Action - consists of processing data that initiate some form of action or process control activity
 CAD / CAM (Computer-aided design / Computer-aided manufacturing /machining)
 Robotics system

VI. Communication Devices

Communication devices control the passing of information to and from communication networks. It consists of both physical
devices and software that link the various pieces of hardware and transfer data from one physical location to another. Computers
and communications equipment can be connected in networks for sharing voice, data, images, sound, video, or even a
combination of all these.

a. Modem (modular-demodulator) - convert a computer’s digital signals to analog. and vice versa.
b. Facsimile Transmission (Fax) modem - a modem with a fax capability. Allows the PC to talk directly to fax
machines and to send and receive fax messages. High-speed modems have been developed that work at speeds
of 2 megabits per second. These are used as components in leading-edge communications services.
c. Network Interface Card (NIC) or LAN card — commonly used when computers are part of a LAN or connected
to the Internet using broadband connection
d. Wireless Network Interface Card — used for wireless connection to a LAN or the Internet,

Telecommunication, which is communications over a distance using technology to overcome that distance, has the
following system components.

 Computer terminals which process information. input and output devices that send or receive data.
 Communication channel. Which include the telephone line, fiber-optic cables, coaxial cables, and wireless
transmission technologies like infra-red (IR) and Bluetooth technologies.
 Communication processors such as modems, multiplexers. controllers, and front-end processors.
 Communication software which controls input and output activities and manages other function networks
in the communication networks.
Others
a. Peripheral —a piece of computer hardware that is attached to a host computer to expand its capabilities. Typical
examples include joysticks, printers, and scanners.

205
 b.Computer port — series as an interface between the computer and other computers or peripheral devices.
Physically, a port is a specialized outlet on a piece of equipment to which a plug or cable connects
i. Parallel – a type of interface found on computers for connecting various peripherals. It is also known
as a printer port or Centronics port.
ii. Serial – a serial communication physical interface through which information transfers in or out one
but at a time (in contrast with parallel).
iii. PS/2 – used connecting some keyboards and mice into a PC compatible computer system.
iv. IEEE 1394 – a serial bus interface standard for high-speed communications and isochronous real-time
data transfer, frequently used in a personal computer and digital audio and digital video devices. The
interface is also known by the brand names of FireWire (Apple Inc.), i.Link (Sony), and Lynx (Texas
Instruments).
v. Universal Serial Bus (USB) — a serial bus standard to interface devices to a host computer designed
to allow many peripherals to be connected using a single standardized interface socket and to improve
the plug-and-play capabilities by allowing devices to be connected and disconnected without
rebooting the computer or turning off the device.
vi. Ethernet - port used to connect a computer to a wired network.
E. Computer Software
i. System Software - coordinates the various parts of the computer system manages the resources and runs basic
operations.
a. Operating System — starts up the computer and manages the basic operations
 MS DOS/ Windows 9S/98/2000/NT/Millennium ed. / XP by Microsoft Corporation.
 OS/2 by IMB and IBM-compatible microcomputers
 UNIX - originally developed at Bell Labs.
 Linux — Unix-like operating systems commonly distributed as open-source (e.g., Redhat, Fedora.
Debian, BSD)
 Macintosh OS by Apple Computers
b. Utility Software — used to support enhance, or expand existing programs in a computer system.
 Screen saver — utility program that supposedly prevents a monitor’s display screen from being
etched by an unchanging image.
 Data recovery — used top recover data from damaged, failed, corrupted, or inaccessible secondary
storage media when it cannot be accessed normally.
 Backup utilities – copies data so that these additional copies maybe used to restore the original after
a data loss event.
 Virus protection software— scans hard disk, diskettes, and the microcomputer’s memory to detect
virus.
 Data compression – encodes information using fewer bits (or other information-bearing units)
through use of specific encoding schemes to reduce the consumption of expensive resources, such as
hard disk space or transmission bandwidth (e.g. WinZip)
 Defragment tools — reduces the amount of fragmentation in file systems by physically reorganizing
the contents of the disk to store the pieces of each file close together and contiguously.
 Device drivers — utility program that enables an application program to function with a specific
hardware device.
c. Language translators —translates a program written by a programmer into machine language.
 Compilers
 Interpreters
 Assemblers

System Software Capabilities

 Multitasking — ability of an operating system to enable two or more programs or tasks to execute
concurrently.
 Multiprogramming — refers to multi-user operating systems.
 Time-sharing — single computer’s processing of the tasks of several users at different stations in
round-robin fashion.
 Multiprocessing — used of two or more computers linked together to perform work at the same time.
ii. Application Software — software programs designed to satisfy a user's specific needs. Applications software
can be custom written for the system (custom software) or purchased at a store or from a catalog (Off-the-shelf
or packed software).

206
Types of application software
• General purpose application software
• General business management software
• Special discipline software
• Library management software
• Information retrieval software

a. Word Processing —allows you to create, edit, revise, stole, and print documents.
 WordPerfect
 Lotus Word
 WordStar
 SMS Word
 OpenOffice Writer (Open-source)
b. Desktop Publishing (DTP) —using a microcomputer and mouse, scanner, laser, printer, and a
Desktop Publishing software for mixing text with graphics to produce high-quality output.
 Adobe PageMaker
 Microsoft Publisher
 QuarkXpress
c. Electronic Spreadsheets — allows users to create tables by entering data into rows and columns arranged
as a grid on a display screen
 MS Excel
 VisiCalc — the first electronic spreadsheet developed by Daniel Bricklin and Robert Frankston of
Harvard Business School in the l970s
 Lotus 123
 OpenOffice Calc (open-source)
 SPSS
d. Graphics Software — enables users to produce many types of graphics creations
Presentation Graphics — These are programs that create quality graphics presentations that can
incorporate charts, sound, animation. photos, and video clips
 MS PowerPoint
 Lotus Freelance Graphics
 Harvard Graphics.
 OpenOffice Impress (open-source)
Image processing software — These are intended in producing and editing high-quality images and
photos, which can be used in other works or can be shared online or through devices like digital
cameras.
 Free Drawing Graphics
 Corel Draw
 Adobe PhotoShop/PhotoDeluxe,
 PaintBrush
e. Multimedia Systems - allow users to combine text with graphics, sounds, video, and animation in one
single presentation or project.
 Multimedia Encyclopedias
 Computer animation (cartoons) - the sequencing of single drawings, or frames resulting in motion.
 MovieMaker
 Filmora
 Vegas Pro
 Adobe Animate
f. Database management software — These are used for creating and manipulating lies, creating files and
databases to store data and combining information for reports.
 MS Access
 Integrated Library System Software
 File Maker Pro
g. Integrated software packages and software suites — These come in bundles of two or more applications,
which provide easy transfer of data between them. Integrated software suites have capabilities for
supporting collaborative work on the web or incorporating information from the web into documents (e.g.
MS Office 2000. XP, and 2OO3).
 MS Office
207
  Lotus Notes
h. Personal information management software - These are equipped with appointment scheduling systems,
calendars, contact lists, e-mail browsers, and other applications used for organizing personal data and
information.
 MS Outlook
 Palm OS
i. Electronic mail software — These programs facilitate computer-to-computer exchange of messages. Web
browsers and PC software suites also have e-mail capabilities.
 MS Outlook
 Mozilla
 Eudora
 Pegasus
j. Web browsers - These are easy-to-use software tools for accessing information in the World Wide Web
and the Internet.
 MS Internet Explorer
 Netscape Navigator
 Opera
 Google Chrome
 Mozilla Firefox
 Brave
k. Web authoring software —These are intended in the creation of high quality Web pages and Web sites.
They usually apply a WYSIWYG working environment, allowing the less skilled Web developers to come
up with competitive work results.
 MS FrontPage
 Adobe GoLive
l. Web Conferencing or Video Conferencing Software – These boomed during the pandemic when face-to-
face activities were limited.
 Skype
 Zoom
 Google Meet
 Microsoft Teams
m. Reference suite software — These are the electronic counterpart of the printed reference sources known,
like encyclopedias, dictionaries, atlases, and so on.
 MS Encarta Reference Suite
 Compton’s Interactive Encyclopedia
n. Media authoring software — These are intended to be used in producing various types of media like video,
music, animations, and so on.
 Pinnacle
 Cakewalk Studio
 Sonic Foundry Acid Pro
 Macromedia Flash
o. Music notation software — These are chiefly intended for the production of printed music. Some music
notation software applications are integrated with features that function like media authoring software.
 Finale
 Voyetra MusicWrite
 Cakewalk Score Writer
p. Media players — These are intended to playback media files like music files (e.g. audio tracks, mp3 files,
MIDl sequences, .wav files. etc.), and video files (MPEG files. AVI files, etc.). They are also used to
access the media content of optical discs (e.g. VCD. DVD. audio CD) or other storage devices that contain
media.
 Windows Media Player
 Cyberlink Power DVD
 Creative Media Center
 VLC Media Player
q. Computer-aided design software — These are highly specialized software used in creating designs like
architectural and engineering designs. They are capable of rendering three-dimensional images.
 Autodesk AutoCAD

208
Common Features of Applications Software

 WYSIWYG — “What You See Is What You Get" —any special typeface, graphics, or formats would appear on the
monitor exactly as they would be printed.
 White space - unused areas of the document.
 Cursor — movable symbol on the display screen that shows you where you may enter the next data.
 Scrolling — moving quickly upward or downward through the text or other screen display.
 Panning — moving to the left or right of the screen.
 Word-wrap and cursor control — word processing features that automatically produce soft returns.
 Desktop - the area of the screen that Is available for GUI applications, usually the entire screen area.
 Clipboard — a program features that provides temporary storage for data you wish to transfer between applications.
 Desk / Desktop Accessories - a program that provides a feature commonly found on a conventional office desktop.
 Clipart — Pre-packed artwork designed to be imported into text documents or charts by desktop publishing or
presentation graphics software.
 Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) — a feature that lets you embed an object created using one application into
another application.

User Interface — combination of menu options, Icons, and commands we use when working with a computer program.

 Command-driven or Character User interface (CUI) — employs a screen prompt that indicates that the system is ready
to accept a new command.
 Shell Interface or Menu-driven - navigating through a shell by selecting many options.
 Graphical User Interface (GUI) - uses a mouse that controls the location of a screen pointer.
 Natural Language — allows the user to activate program options by writing or speaking in the native language.

Software Packages

 Shareware - Copyrighted, commercial software programs that are designed to let the user try them out first before
buying. Often downloadable from the internet or distributed on CD-ROMs bundled with a computer peripheral.
 Freeware — software available for use at no costs of for an optional fee. It is different from shareware, where the user
is obliged to pay (e.g., after some trial period or for additional functionality).
 Integrated Software — a collection of several applications in a single package with a common set of commands and the
ability to work together and share data e.g., MS Works, Lotus Works, and Integrated Library Systems.
 GroupWare — Software that is used on a network and serves a group of users working together on the same project,
e.g., Lotus Notes: also known as collaborative software.
 Software Suite — application bundled together and usually sold for a fraction of what the software would cost if bought
individually, e.g., Microsoft Office, Kingsoft Office, Lotus SmartSuite: also referred to as office suite or productivity
suite. Some open-source alternatives are OpenOffice and NeoOffice.

Library Management System is a software used to manage the catalog of a library. This helps to keep the records of whole
transactions of the books available in the library.

Information retrieval software

 Used for specialized databases such a‹ abstracts and indexes, electronic journals, electronic books, etc. available on:
- CD-ROM
- Remote online access services
- The Internet
- Onsite multi-user licensed databases mounted as tapes or on hard disks
- In-house databases
 Z39.5o Gateway
o A national and international (ISO 23950) standard defining a protocol for computer-to-computer information
retrieval. Makes it possible for a user in one system to retrieve information from other computer systems (that
also have this gateway) Without knowing the search syntax that is used by those other systems. It was originally
approved by the National Information Standards Organization (NISO) in 1988.

Examples of Services Using Information Retrieval Software

 Applied Science and Technology Index

 Readers Guide Abstracts
 DIALOG
209
  EBSCO How
 ERIC
 Others
Data Resources Management
Overview of the Data Hierarchy
 Character or Byte —group of 8 bits. Consists of a single alphabetic, numeric, or other symbol,
 Field — unit of data consisting of one or more characters
 Record — collection of related fields
 File — collection of related records
 Database - collection of related files, group of stored, integrated (cross-referenced) data elements that can be retrieved
and manipulated with great flexibility to produce information.

File Management System — was coined to describe the traditional approach to managing data and information.
Database Management System (DBMS) - a computer-based system for defining, creating, manipulating, controlling, managing,
and using databases.
Library Management Software
 Programs used for performing functions specific to library services:
- Cataloguing/lndexing
- Online Public Access Catalog (OPAC)
- Serials management
- Collection management
- Circulation
- Other services: e.g., interlibrary loan
- Integrated library services with combinations or all of the above
 Examples of Library Management Software
- Mandarin by Mandarin Library Automation
- ResourceMate by Jaywil Software Development
- Alexandria by COMPanion
- Koha ILS by Liblime
- L4U by SRB Education Solutions
- OPALS by OPAL
- ConcorInfiniti by Concord lnfiniti
- Destiny Library Manager by Follett Corporation
- insignia Library System by insignia Software
- LIBRARIAN by CR2 Technologies

File Access Methods

 Sequential Access - to find a file means starting with the first record and looking at each consecutive record in the file,
one at a time until the specific record is found.
 Direct Access or Random Access - uses an index or other technique to identify a record’s location within a file and can
directly access the file without processing other records.

Types of Database Structures

 Hierarchical or Tree Structure - follows a top-down structure: resembles a family tree. With each child records
subordinate to parent records.
 Network or Plex model - similar to a hierarchical model but each child record can have more than one parent record.
Thus, a child record can be reached through more than one parent.
 Relational Model - The most flexible type of organization, relates, or connects, data in different files through the use of
key fields, or common data elements. Data elements are stored in different tables made up of rows and columns.

Common Database Jargons

 Schema - overall description of the database, including its entities, attributes, relationships, etc.
 Relation - a table with columns and rows
 Entity - a person, place, thing, or event about which information must be kept
 Attribute - a named columns and rows
 Tuple - a row of a relation
210
  Cardinality - the cardinality of a relation is the number of tuples it contains
 Key field - attribute used to identify a unique record in a database table.
 Structured Query Language (SQL) - an ANSI and ISO standard database computer language designed for the retrieval
and management of data in relational database management systems (RDBMS), database schema creation and
modification. and database object access control management.

Many database management software packages make use of SQL (Structured Query Language). It is the most prominent data
manipulation language today.

A typical database consists of several database objects. The following objects are the usual components of a database. Other
database management programs may use a different name for some of the objects.

 Table
A table is the basic unit for storing a collection of data. A table’s definition consists of a list of fields, each of
which stores a discrete piece of information for a single record.
 Queries
Queries enable the user to extract a subset of data from a single table, from a group of related tables, or from
other queries, using criteria you define. By saving a query as a database object, the query can be run at any time, using
the current contents of the database. They may sometimes look exactly like a table; the crucial difference is that each
row of the query’s results may consist of fields drawn from several tables. A query may also contain calculated fields,
which display results based on the contents of other fields.
 Forms
Forms enable users to enter, view. and edit information, generally one record at a time. They can closely
resemble paper 1orms such as invoices and timesheets, or they are organized for data entry with data validation rules.
A form may also include a subform that displays Information from a related table.
 Reports
Reports enable the user to present data from one or more tables or queries in a readable style and a professional
format generally for printed output. A report may Include detailed lists of specific data, with each row consisting of a
single record, or it may provide a statistical summary of a large quantity of information. A report design can include
grouping and sorting options.
 Macro
A macro is a set of one or more actions that perform a particular operation, such as opening a form or printing
a report. Macros can help to automate common tasks. For example, the user can rim a macro that prints a report when a
user clicks a command button. A macro can be one macro composed of a sequence of actions, or it can be a macro
group.
 Module
A module is essentially a collection of declarations, statements. and procedures stored together as one named
unit to organize Visual Basic code or may other code used by the database which are generated by other programming
languages.

In designing a database, the following steps should be applied:

 Determine the purpose of your database.

The first step in designing a database is to determine its purpose and how it is to be used.
o Talk to people who will use the database.
o Brainstorm about the questions you and they would like the database to answer.
o Sketch out the reports you would like the database to produce. Gather the forms you currently use to record
your data.
As you determine the purpose of your database. a list of information you want from the database will begin to
emerge. From that, you can determine what facts you need to store in the database and what subject each fact
belongs to. These facts correspond to the fields (columns) in your database, and the subjects that those facts
belong to correspond to the tables.
 Determine the fields you need in the database.
Each field is a fact about a particular subject. For example, you might need to store the following facts about
customers: company name, address, city, state, and phone number. You need to create a separate field for each of these
facts.
 Determine the relationships between tables.

211
 Now that you have divided your information into tables and identified primary key fields. you need a way to
tell the database how to bring related information back together again in meaningful ways. To do this, you define
relationships between tables.
 Refine the design.
After designing the tables, fields, and relationships needed, it is time to study the design and detect any flaws
that might remain. It is easier to change the database design at this point than it will be after you have filled the tables
with data.
 Test the design.
Enter enough sample data in your tables so as to test the design. To test the relationships in the database, see if
you can create queries to get the answers you want. Create rough drafts of forms and reports and see if they show the
data expected. Look for unnecessary duplications of data and eliminate them.
 Enter data and create other database objects.
If table structures meet design principles described and are determined to serve their purpose effectively, then
it is time to go ahead and add all existing data to the tables. Other database objects can already be created at this point,
such as queries, forms, reports, macros, modules, and other available objects.

Classifying Databases

Databases can be classified in different ways. They can be classified by their intended use and function, or by their
structure.

 By intended use and function

 Operational databases (e.g. HR database, inventory database, customer database)
 Distributed database — This is a replicate copy or a part of a database to network servers at a variety of sites.
 External database — This database is designed to be published in the World Wide Web which can be accessed
through the Internet, with charge or free.
 By structure
 Relational DBMS — This is a type of logical database model that represents all data in the database as simple two-
dimensional tables called relations. The tables appear similar to flat files, but the information in one file can be
easily extracted and combined.
 Hierarchical DBMS — This is an o\der logical database model that organizes data in a treelike structure. A record
is subdivided into segments that are connected to each other in one-to-many parent-child relationships.
 Network DBMS — This is also an older logical database model that is useful for depicting many-to-many
relationships.
 Object-oriented DBMS — This is a database for storing graphics and multimedia and has the capabilities of a
relational DBMS for sorting traditional information.

Trends in Database Management

The notable factor to the trends in database programming and management is the continuous advancement of
information management practices. Listed below are some of these trends.

 Multidimensional data analysis

This is the capability for manipulating and analyzing large volumes of data from multiple perspectives. It is
also known as on-line analytical processing (OLAP).
 Data warehouses
A data warehouse is a database with reporting and query tools. that stores current and historical data extracted
from various operational systems and consolidated for management reporting analysis.
 Data mining
This is the analysis of large pools of data to find patterns and rules that can be used to guide decision-making
and predict future behavior.
 Hypermedia databases
These are common in the Web. Hypermedia was used as an approach to data management that organizes data
as a network of nodes linked in any pattern the user specifies. The nodes can contain text, graphics, sound, full-motion
video, or executable programs.

Issues and Trends in IT: Issues Affecting Libraries and Information Centers

Even if there are so many developments in hardware, software, and network technologies, there are several issues in IT that are
of great concern to Libraries and Information centers.

212
 Licensing
Like in any of the many areas of commerce in which licenses are required, licensing also applies in
commercially distributed software. This is a very big concern since the cost of licensed software is too high nowadays.
Some institutions that cannot afford to purchase a licensed software resort to the use of pirated software. An alternative
to expensive licensed software is the use of shareware (software that is distributed on the basis of an honor system), or
freeware (a computer program given away free of charge). Most shareware is distributed free of charge, but the author
usually requests that you pay a small fee if you like the program or use it on a regular basis. Freeware is often made
available on bulletin boards and through user groups. An independent program developer might offer a product as
freeware either for personal satisfaction or to assess its reception among interested users.
 Piracy
Software piracy is a crime of robbery for private ends. Software programs are reengineered and redistributed
by unauthorized bodies for their own gains. They usually unlock the software by providing passwords, serial numbers,
or codes required for installation. There are also times at which they unlock the software by using cracking program
tools.
 Computer viruses
A computer virus is a program that “infects” computer files usually other executable programs) by inserting
copies of itself in those files. This is usually done in such a manner that the copies will be executed when the file is
loaded into memory. allowing them to infect still other files, and so on. Viruses often have damaging side effects,
sometimes intentionally, sometimes not. PC users can safeguard their files using anti-virus software packages such as
Norton Anti-virus, McAfee Virus Scan. AVG Anti-Virus. and so on. These programs can detect viruses. and often repair
the damage done by them.
The increase in transactions over the Internet has greatly increased the chance of virus infection. so anti-virus
measures have been introduced to promote the growth of electronic business. Digital certificates can be used to validate
the identity of people and organizations on the Internet. digital signatures can prove the identity of an individual, and
Secure Electronic Transaction (SET) mechanisms have been developed to allow safe credit card transactions.
E-mail viruses remain a major threat, however—during 2000, many large organizations were brought down by a virus
attached to an e-mail message entitled “I Love You”. In 2002 a new type of virus appeared that allowed unauthorized
users to access private information (such as credit card details). This virus, known as “Bugbear”, was carried via e-mail
and affected many users.
 Data theft
This is a more serious problem than software piracy. Computer system hackers (or crackers) mutilate the
encryption of restricted databanks and databases and make unauthorized use of the information/data contained in them.
The use of these data may be intended for unlawful activities like theft.

 Spam and junk mails

Spam or unsolicited e-mail is the electronic equivalent of junk mail. People usually send spam in order to sell
products and services to draw traffic to websites or to promote moneymaking schemes. Unlike physical junk mail, spam
does not stop if it is unsuccessful. When marketing departments send junk mail, they incur some expense, so give up if
they do not succeed. Spam costs virtually nothing to send, and so it persists, whatever the recipient does.
Spam can easily be confused with legitimate bulk e-mail. According to Mail Abuse Prevention System (MAPS), an
electronic message is regarded as spam only if the recipient’s personal identity is irrelevant because the message is
equally applicable to many others. The recipient has not granted permission for it to be sent, and the message appears
to the recipient to give a disproportionate benefit to the sender. Spam has become a big problem over the past few years
as it consumes large amounts of the recipient’s time and Internet capacity. It is also an enduring problem as it is virtually
impossible to determine where it originates. The first spam was sent as long ago as 1978 by a Digital Equipment
Corporation sales representative to advertise a computer equipment demonstration.
The initial defense against spam was to block mail from domains that are known to be senders, but it is relatively
easy for spam senders to send from a new domain. The most effective measure now available is to use one of the e-mail
filters on the market that saves the user from having to manually his through his or her inbox. Legislation introduced in
the European Union in December 2003 makes it a criminal offense to send spam unless the recipient has agreed in
advance to accept it. Similar legislation was signed into law in the US in the same month.
• Obsolescence of hardware and software
The very fast developments in computer technology mean the very quick obsolescence of computer devices.
Both hardware and software are subject to this problem. This can be resolved by downloading software updates from
the Internet. Unused computers which are left because of purchasing newer one can be donated to charitable institutions
so that they become useful once more.

213
 Computers drain critical resources such as electricity and paper. They also produce unwanted electrical and
chemical, and bulk-waste side effects. As a society, we 3hould adopt a more environmentally position with respect to
use, manufacture, and disposal of computer equipment and devices. This is known as green computing
(environmentally sensible computing).
• High costs in electricity
A computer will never work without electricity. The electrical consumption of computers becomes a big deal
if the institution has many computer units which are run simultaneously. Always set the computer to a mode at which
the monitor and the hard drive is automatically turned off when not in use. Green computing is also a solution to this
problem.
 Health issues
Ergonomics (or human factor engineering), the science and technology emphasizing the safety, comfort, and
ease of use of human-operated machines such as computers. Its goal is to produce systems that are user-friendly, safe,
comfortable, and easy to use. Institutions which make use of computers in their daily activities should consider using
ergonomically correct furniture (e.g., chairs and tables) and devices (e.g., mouse, keyboard. etc.).
 Computer system capabilities
Computers continue to become smaller, faster, more reliable, less expensive to purchase and maintain, and
more interconnected within computer networks and other electronic gadgets and devices.
 Input technology trends
Input devices are becoming more natural and easy to use. Even programming languages are becoming to be
structured like human language, making them easier and faster to understand.
 Output technology trends
Output devices are geared toward direct output methods that communicate naturally, quickly, and clearly.
 Trends in storage media
The capacity of data storage media is continuously growing. Primary storage media are starting to use
microelectronic circuits while secondary storage media are using magnetic and optical media. One continuing trend in
computer development is microminiaturization, the effort to compress more circuit elements into smaller and smaller
chip space. Researchers are also trying to speed up circuitry functions through the use of superconductivity, the
phenomenon of decreased electrical resistance observed in certain materials at very low temperatures. As the physical
limits of silicon-chip computer processors are being approached, scientists are exploring the potential of the next
generation of computer technology, using, for instance, devices based on deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA).
The fifth-generation computer effort to develop computers that can solve complex problems in ways that might
eventually merit the description “creative” is another trend in computer development, the ideal goal being true artificial
intelligence. One path actively being explored is parallel processing computing, which uses many chips to perform
several different tasks at the same lime. Parallel processing may eventually be able to duplicate to some degree the
complex feedback, approximating and assessing functions of human thought. One important parallel processing
approach is the neural network, which mimics the architecture of the nervous system. Another ongoing trend is the
increase in computer networking, which now employs the worldwide data communications system of satellite and cable
links to connect computers globally. There is also a great deal of research into the possibility of “optical” computers—
hardware that processes not pulse of electricity but much faster pulses of light.

Bibliographic Networks

Use of Networks in Reference Services

Ex. The use of a formal bibliographic facility like the OCLC would enable a reference librarian to answer

Three basic types of questions

1. The bibliographic query

2. The verification query
3. The location query

Functions of bibliographic networks

1. Rapid location of a book, article, document, etc.

2. Acquisition of materials through either direct or indirect file use.
3. Circulation control and remote catalog access.
4. Shared cataloging, which allows the members to catalog most of the ongoing collections at a computer terminal.
5. Online access to Library of Congress Name & Authority File.

214
Major bibliographic utilities and networks

1. North America
o The Online Computer Library Center (OCLC)
o The Research Libraries Group (RLG), which operates the Research Libraries Information Network (RLIN)
o The Western Library Network (WLN)
o Auto-Graphics, Incorporated, which operates the Impact/ONLINE CAT service
o A-G Canada, a subsidiary of Auto-Graphics that operates Impact/MARCit, a bibliographic utility originally
developed by UTLAS
o Brodart Automation, which operates the interactive Access System (IAS)
o The Library Corporation. which offers the ITS.MARC cataloging service
o Data Research Associates, which operates Open DRA Net. an Internet-based information service that provides
online access to cataloging records and other databases.
2. United Kingdom
o BLCMP (Birmingham Libraries Cooperative Mechanization Project)
o LASER (London and South East Library Region)
o SLS (information Systems Ltd)
3. Europe
o BIBSYS (Bibliotek System) – Norway
o LIBRIS (Library Information System) – Sweden
o PICA (Project gelntegreerde Catalogue Automatisering) — Netherlands

Major research networks

1. Europe
o RARE (Reseaux Associes Pour La Recherche Europeenne)
o JANET (Joint Academic Network) — UK
o SURFnet — Netherlands
o NORDUnet - Scandinavian countries
o EARN (European Academic Research Networks)
2. United States
o INTERNET — evolved from ARPANET (Advanced Research Project Agency) - US Department of National
Defense.
o BITNET — links more than 3000 academic on4 research institutions in the US.
o Usenet — is a loose assemblage of UNIX-bases sites.

Other Networks

 MEDIARS (Medical Literature Analysis and Retrieval System)

Two subject-oriented networks in health and sciences developed in the 1960s by the National Library of
medicine which produced 21 major indexes, including Index Medicus
 AGRICOLA
An online agricultural database developed by the National Agricultural Library (NAL) in J962 which included
indexes to worldwide journals and monographic literature and US government report on general agriculture, food, etc.
 MARC
Database that provided the resource for establishing and developing cooperative cataloging services by OCLC,
BALLOTS, and later RLIN
 INTERNET
Network of networks
 Telnet
This can be used for consulting remote catalogs or OPAC or access other databases
 APPROTECH (Asian Alliance for Appropriate Technology Practitioners)
A non-government organization concerned with the information needs for appropriate technology for rural-
based populations.
 APINMAP (Asia Pacific Information Network on Medicinal and Aromatic Plants)
The network that caters to the health information needs of rural based population through use of indigenous
plants having medicinal value.
 AGIMFONET-SEA (Agricultural Information Networks of Southeast Asia)

215
 The network that ties together fine Southeast countries and disseminates Information in the field of agriculture
and related fields.
 INNERTAP (Information Network on New and Renewable Energy Resources and Technologies for Asia and the
Pacific)
The networks that collects and disseminates information and environment-friendly energy resources being
coordinated by the Energy Research and Development Center of the Philippines National Oil Corporation.
 ASTINFO (Regional Network for the Exchange of Information and Experience in Science and Technology in
Asia and the Pacific)
Sponsored by UNESCO, it is aimed at improving the access and use of scientific and technological information
among the participating countries.
 ALBASA
Cooperative project of libraries in Visayas and Mindanao for the acquisition of library materials. For Colleges
and Universities of Visayas and Mindanao
 ARALIN (Association of Research and Academic Libraries Information Network)
Database (CDS/lSIS)
 NISST (National Information System for Science and Technology
Ties together all the science and technology-oriented libraries and information centers in the country, be they
in public or private sectors.

Library Networks

 AGRIS
(International System for Agricultural Science and Technology) It is a global public database providing access
to bibliographic information on agricultural science and technology. The database is maintained by CIARD, and its
content is provided by participating institutions from all around the globe that form the network of AGRIS centers
Sponsored by FAO, it is a cooperative undertaking of some 80 countries for the development of a
comprehensive scientific database on the agricultural sciences
 DOST-ESEP (Dept. of Science & Technology — Engineering A Science Education)
A Library network on science and technology established in the 90s with 10 academic institutions as members.
 HAIN (Health Action Information Network)
 HERDIN (Health Research and Development Information Network)
The network that makes available health and medical information to doctors and health care practitioners
managed and coordinated by the Philippine Council for Health
 NATLINE (National tabor Information Network)
 PAIS (Philippine Agricultural Information Network)
 PASFIS (Philippine Aquatic Science & Fisheries information System)

216
PART VI: INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
INSTRUCTION: Read the following questions carefully. Shade the box of the letter that corresponds to the best answer.
[] [] [] [] 1. Abacus is a pre-computer calculating device that could perform basic arithmetic functions
A B C D
such as addition and subtraction. It was invented by

a) Babylonian scholars c) Egyptian mathematicians

b) Asian merchants d) Chinese emperors

[] [] [] [] 2. The first calculating machine which became a precursor of digital computer.

A B C D
a) Pascaline c) Slide Rule
b) Calculating clock d) Napier bones

[] [] [] [] 3. Who invented the slide rule?

A B C D
a) Gottfried Leibniz c) William Oughtred
b) John Napier d) Wilhelm Schickard

[] [] [] [] 4. Who invented the Stepped Reckoner, which is an improvement from Pascaline?

A B C D
a) Gottfried Leibniz c) William Oughtred
b) John Napier d) Wilhelm Schickard

[] [] [] [] 5. What is the first commercial Mechanical calculator?

A B C D
a) Arithmometer c) Comptometer
b) Calculating Machine d) Stepped Reckoner

[] [] [] [] 6. It is the first mechanical calculator driven by key pressing mechanism.

A B C D
a) Arithmometer c) Comptometer
b) Calculating Machine d) Stepped Reckoner

[] [] [] [] 7. Who conceptualized data recording through punching holes in card?

A B C D
a) Herman Hollerith c) Thomas Watson
b) Charles Babbage d) Joseph Jacquard
[] [] [] [] 8. Who is the Father of Information Processing?
A B C D
a) Herman Hollerith c) Thomas Watson
b) Charles Babbage d) Joseph Jacquard

[] [] [] [] 9. Who is the Father of Modern Computers?

A B C D
a) Herman Hollerith c) Thomas Watson
b) Charles Babbage d) Joseph Jacquard

[] [] [] [] 10. Charles Babbage invented this early mechanical computer which became the Forerunner of
A B C D
Modern Computer being able to handle complicated math problems.

a) Difference engine c) ABC

b) Analytical engine d) Z3

[] [] [] [] 11. Who is the World’s First Computer Programmer?

A B C D
a) Augusta Ada Byron c) John Vincent Atanassof
b) Konrad Zuse d) Clifford Berry

[] [] [] [] 12. Who invented Z3?

A B C D

217
 a) Augusta Ada Byron c) John Vincent Atanassof
b) Konrad Zuse d) Clifford Berry

[] [] [] [] 13. It is the first electronic digital machine.

A B C D
a) Difference engine c) ABC
b) Analytical engine d) Z3

[] [] [] [] 14. It is the first electromechanical Computer.

A B C D
a) MARK I c) EDSAC
b) ENIAC d) EDVAC

[] [] [] [] 15. Who invented MARK I?

A B C D

a) Howard Aiken c) J. Presper Eckert

b) John Neumann d) John Mauchly

[] [] [] [] 16. It was the first Electronic Computer developed by J. Presper Eckert and John Mauchly for
A B C D
the US Army.

a) MARK I c) EDSAC
b) ENIAC d) EDVAC

[] [] [] [] 17. EDSAC (Delay storage) developed by Cambridge University is considered as

A B C D
a) First Electromechanical Computer c) First Computer with Memory
b) First Electronic Computer to store its d) First All-Electronic Digital
programs of instruction Computer
[] [] [] [] 18. Colossus is developed by World War II teams of scientists and mathematicians and
A B C D
considered as

a) First Electromechanical Computer c) First Computer with Memory

b) First Electronic Computer to store its d) First All-Electronic Digital
programs of instruction Computer
[] [] [] [] 19. EDVAC developed by John Neumann from Pennsylvania University is considered as,
A B C D
a) First Electromechanical Computer c) First Computer with Memory
b) First Electronic Computer to store its d) First All-Electronic Digital
programs of instruction Computer
[] [] [] [] 20. It is the first mechanical computer.
A B C D
a) Difference engine c) ABC
b) Analytical engine d) Z3

[] [] [] [] 21. First Mass-Produced Business Computer invented to improve information processing in

A B C D
business organizations.

a) UNIVAC I c) MARK I
b) ENIAC d) IBM 701 and 650

[] [] [] [] 22. The commercial mass production of this computer indicated the acceptance of computers
A B C D
in the business world.

a) UNIVAC I c) MARK I
b) ENIAC d) IBM 701 and 650

[] [] [] [] 23. It was invented by Jack S. Kilby of Texas Instrument and became the heart of all electronic
A B C D
devices today

218
 a) Integrated Circuit c) Transistor
b) Silicon Chip d) Vacuum Tube

[] [] [] [] 24. It was the verbose programming language developed by Grace Hopper.

A B C D
a) COBOL c) C
b) BASIC d) Java

[] [] [] [] 25. It was the component for First Generation Computers.

A B C D
a) Integrated Circuit c) Transistor
b) Silicon Chip d) Vacuum Tube

[] [] [] [] 26. The component used to develop Second Generation Computer.

A B C D
a) Integrated Circuit c) Transistor
b) Silicon Chip d) Vacuum Tube

[] [] [] [] 27. A second generation computer made of discrete transistors and other electronic
A B C D
components.

a) PDP-8 c) Honeywell 400

b) IBM PC d) Lotus 123

[] [] [] [] 28. It set the standard in the microcomputer industry during its time.
A B C D
a) PDP-8 c) Honeywell 400
b) IBM PC d) Lotus 123

[] [] [] [] 29. A spreadsheet program invented by Michael Kapor

A B C D
a) VisiCalc c) Honeywell 400
b) Excel d) Lotus 123

[] [] [] [] 30. First Successful transistor based microcomputer.

A B C D
a) PDP-8 c) Honeywell 400
b) IBM PC d) Lotus 123

[] [] [] [] 31. It was the component used for third generation computers

A B C D
a) Integrated Circuit c) Transistor
b) Silicon Chip d) Vacuum Tube

[] [] [] [] 32. During which generation when magnetic tapes were used for storage?
A B C D
a) First c) Third
b) Second d) Fourth

[] [] [] [] 33. The first commercially available microcomputer

A B C D
a) Macintosh c) MITS Altair
b) IBM PC d) Lotus 123

[] [] [] [] 34. Who founded the Microsoft Corporation?

A B C D
a) John Kemeny and Thomas Kurtz c) Bill Gates and Paul Allen
b) Dennis Ritchie and Ken Thompson d) Steve Jobs and Steve Wozniak

[] [] [] [] 35. Who founded the Apple Computers?

A B C D

219
 a) John Kemeny and Thomas Kurtz c) Bill Gates and Paul Allen
b) Dennis Ritchie and Ken Thompson d) Steve Jobs and Steve Wozniak

[] [] [] [] 36. Who developed the Beginner’s All Purpose Symbolic Instruction Language (BASIC)?
A B C D
a) John Kemeny and Thomas Kurtz c) Bill Gates and Paul Allen
b) Dennis Ritchie and Ken Thompson d) Steve Jobs and Steve Wozniak

[] [] [] [] 37. Who developed the Multi-user Computer System or Multics?

A B C D
a) John Kemeny and Thomas Kurtz c) Bill Gates and Paul Allen
b) Dennis Ritchie and Ken Thompson d) Steve Jobs and Steve Wozniak

[] [] [] [] 38. Who created UNICS or UNIX for the Multics Operating system?
A B C D
a) John Kemeny and Thomas Kurtz c) Bill Gates and Paul Allen
b) Dennis Ritchie and Ken Thompson d) Steve Jobs and Steve Wozniak

[] [] [] [] 39. Who developed the C Language to write the UNIX program?

A B C D
a) John Kemeny and Thomas Kurtz c) Bill Gates and Paul Allen
b) Dennis Ritchie and Ken Thompson d) Steve Jobs and Steve Wozniak

[] [] [] [] 40. It is a business and technology policy that allows employees to bring in personal mobile
A B C D
devices and use these devices to access company data, email, etc.

a) BYOT c) BYOG
b) BYOD d) BYOM

[] [] [] [] 41. CGI is a mechanism used by most web servers to process data received from a client
A B C D
browser (e.g., a user). CGI scripts contain the instructions that tell the web server what to do
with the data. What does CGI Stands fos?

a) Client Graphic Interface c) Client Gateway Instructions

b) Common Graphic Instructions d) Common Gateway Interface

[] [] [] [] 42. IT is a small piece of information you may be asked to accept when connecting to certain
A B C D
servers via a web browser. It is used throughout your session as a means of identifying you.

a) cookie c) Data
b) cache d) byte

[] [] [] [] 43. Refers to a region of computer memory where frequently accessed data can be stored for
A B C D
rapid access; or an optional file on your hard drive where such data also can be stored.

a) cookie c) Data
b) cache d) byte

[] [] [] [] 44. A challenge-response test in the form of an image of distorted text the user must enter that
A B C D
to determine whether the user is human or an automated bot.

a) Captcha c) Authentication
b) Terms and Conditions d) Authorization

[] [] [] [] 45. A combination of keyboard characters meant to represent a facial expression. Frequently

A B C D
used in electronic communications to convey a particular meaning, much like tone of voice is
used in spoken communications.

a) Emoticon c) Smileys
b) Emoji d) Animoji

220
[] [] [] [] 46. Copyrighted software available for downloading without charge; unlimited personal usage
A B C D
is permitted, but you cannot do anything else without express permission of the author.

a) Freeware c) Greyware
b) Shareware d) Courseware

[] [] [] [] 47. It is system used to represent data and programs in a manner understood by the computer.
A B C D
a) Binary system c) Decode/encode
b) Translation d) Coding System

[] [] [] [] 48. It is the smallest unit of data that binary computer can recognize.
A B C D
a) Bit c) Kilobyte
b) Byte d) Megabyte

[] [] [] [] 49. It is displayed using a collection of frames, each frame contains a still image.
A B C D

a) Graphics data c) Video data

b) Audio data d) Metadata

[] [] [] [] 50. It is a binary-based language for representing computer programs the computer can execute
A B C D
directly.

a) Computer language c) Human language

b) Machine language d) Programming language

[] [] [] [] 51. Which of the following describes the system unit?

A B C D
a) It houses the processing hardware c) Interconnected through sets of wires
and software for a computer called buses on the motherboard
b) It contains other components, such d) All of the above
as storage devices, power supply,
cooling hardware, processors,
several types of memory and
peripheral devices

[] [] [] [] 52. It is a circuit board consisting of computer chips also called integrated cicuits.
A B C D
a) Central Processing unit c) Hard drive
b) Motherboard d) Hard disk

[] [] [] [] 53. These are rectangular metal racks inside the system unit that house storage devices.
A B C D
a) Drive bays c) Motherboard
b) Power Supply d) Processor

[] [] [] [] 54. It is the computer’s main memory or system memory that stores essential parts of operating
A B C D
system, programs, and data the computer is using.

a) RAM c) Registers
b) ROM d) Flash Memory

[] [] [] [] 55. Consists of non-volatile chips located on the motherboard into which data programs have
A B C D
been permanently stored.

a) RAM c) Registers
b) ROM d) Flash Memory

221
[] [] [] [] 56. Consists of non-volatile memory chips that can be used for storage
A B C D
a) RAM c) Registers
b) ROM d) Flash Memory

[] [] [] [] 57. These are high-speed memory locations built into the CPU used to store data and
A B C D
intermediary results during processing.

a) RAM c) Registers
b) ROM d) Flash Memory

[] [] [] [] 58. Heat sinks are small components typically made out of aluminum with fins that help to
A B C D
dissipate heat. What are other cooling systems used in computers?

i Freezers iv Immersion cooling

ii Liquid Cooling system v Cooling stand
iii Ion pump cooling vi Air conditioners

a) iii, iv, v, vi c) ii, iii, iv, v

b) i, iii, v, vi d) i, ii, iii, v

[] [] [] [] 59. It is a location on the motherboard into which expansion card are inserted.
A B C D
a) Expansion ports c) Expansion slots
b) Expansion buses d) Expansion cords

[] [] [] [] 60. These are electronic path within a computer over which data travels.
A B C D
a) Bus c) Connector
b) Port d) Channel

[] [] [] [] 61. It is a connector on the exterior of a computer’s system unit to which a device may be
A B C D
attached.

a) Channel c) Ports
b) Expansion slots d) Bus

[] [] [] [] 62. What is the correct sequence for machine cycle?

A B C D
a) Fetch, Store, Decode, Execute c) Fetch, Decode, Execute, Store
b) Fetch, Execute, Decode, Store d) Fetch, Decode, Store, Execute

[] [] [] [] 63. Quantum Computing applies the principles of quantum physics and quantum mechanics to
A B C D
computers. Who first began working on quantum mechanical models?

a) Yuri Manin c) David Deutsch

b) Richard Feynman d) Paul Benioff

[] [] [] [] 64. These are concentric paths on the disk where data is recorded.
A B C D
a) Tracks c) Sectors
b) Clusters d) Cylinders

[] [] [] [] 65. These are small pieces of tracks.

A B C D
a) Tracks c) Sectors
b) Clusters d) Cylinders

[] [] [] [] 66. These are collection of tracks located in the same location on a set of hard disk surfaces.
A B C D
a) Tracks c) Sectors
b) Clusters d) Cylinders

222
[] [] [] [] 67. Consists of one or more sectors and smallest addressable area of a disk.
A B C D
a) Tracks c) Sectors
b) Clusters d) Cylinders

[] [] [] [] 68. It uses flash memory technology to store data much faster than magnetic hard drives, but
A B C D
more expensive.

a) Hard Disk Drive c) Solid-State Hybrid Drives

b) Solid-State drive d) External Hard Drives

[] [] [] [] 69. It uses a combination of magnetic disks and flash memory chips and data that is most
A B C D
directly associated with performance is stored in the flash memory.

a) Hard Disk Drive c) Solid-State Hybrid Drives

b) Solid-State drive d) External Hard Drives

[] [] [] [] 70. It is the total time that it takes for a hard drive to read or write data
A B C D
a) Seek time c) Data Movement time
b) Rotational Delay d) Disk access time

[] [] [] [] 71. Used to represent data on an optical disc.

A B C D
a) Grooves c) 1 and 0
b) Pits and Lands d) Tracks and Clusters

[] [] [] [] 72. What is the capacity of a CD?

A B C D
a) 700 MB c) 25-50 GB
b) 4.7-8.5 GB d) 100 GB

[] [] [] [] 73. What is the capacity of a DVD?

A B C D
a) 700 MB c) 25-50 GB
b) 4.7-8.5 GB d) 100 GB

[] [] [] [] 74. What is the capacity of a BD?

A B C D
a) 700 MB c) 25-50 GB
b) 4.7-8.5 GB d) 100 GB

[] [] [] [] 75. What is the capacity of an Ultra HD?

A B C D
a) 700 MB c) 25-50 GB
b) 4.7-8.5 GB d) 100 GB

[] [] [] [] 76. It is a method of storing data on two or more hard drives that work together to record
A B C D
redundant copies. It is used to protect critical data on large storage systems.

a) Network Storage c) Cloud Storage

b) Flash Memory d) Redundant Arrays of Independent
Discs
[] [] [] [] 77. It is the process of identifying and moving data that is no longer actively being used from
A B C D
regular storage systems to a separate long-term archival storage system

a) Archaic storage c) Alternative storage

b) Data Archiving d) Cloud storage

[] [] [] [] 78. It is usually the letter assigned to the first hard drive.

A B C D

223
 a) A c) C
b) B d) D

[] [] [] [] 79. Touch screens are display devices that are touched with the finger to interact by means of
A B C D
selecting commands or otherwise provide input to the computer. Touch screens are what type
of device?

a) Input device c) Both a and b

b) Output device d) None of the above

[] [] [] [] 80. The quality of ________ determines the graphic capabilities of a computer.

A B C D
a) Video Cards c) Aspect Ratio
b) Screen resolution d) All of the above

[] [] [] [] 81. Which of the following is an impact printer?

A B C D
a) Laser printer c) Thermal printer
b) Ink-jet printer d) Dot-matrix printer

[] [] [] [] 82. You are tasked to print 6,000 sheets of a 2-page library inforgraphic to be distributed to
A B C D
college freshmen. Which of these printers are needed if the orientation is about to start within
an hour and the inforgraphic should be distributed before the orientation? Note: These are the
printer available in the library. You are also trying to be efficient in using the printers,
resource, power, and supply wise.

Printer 1 with 65 ppm and 1200 dpi

Printer 2 with 60 ppm 300 dpi

Printer 3 with 50 ppm and 2400 dpi

Printer 4 with 25 ppm and 300 dpi

Printer 5 with 65 ppm with 300 dpi

a) Printer 1 & 5 c) All except Printer 4

b) All except printer 3 d) All 5 printers

[] [] [] [] 83. It refers to the operating system and the utility programs that control a computer system
A B C D
and allow you to use that system.

a) System software c) Operating system

b) Application software d) Utility software

[] [] [] [] 84. It is a collection of programs that manage and coordinate the activities taking place within
A B C D
a computer. It acts as intermediary between the user and the computer and between the
application programs and system hardware.

a) System software c) Operating software

b) Application software d) Utility software

[] [] [] [] 85. It refers to the programs that allow a user to perform a specific task on a computer. For
A B C D
example, word processing, playing games, browsing the Web, and etc.

a) System software c) Operating software

b) Application software d) Utility Software

224
[] [] [] [] 86. Which of the following files is a document?
A B C D
a) Untitled.odf c) Untitled.asf
b) Untitled.svg d) Untitled.zip

[] [] [] [] 87. Which of the following files is a video file?

A B C D
a) Untitled.odf c) Untitled.asf
b) Untitled.svg d) Untitled.zip

[] [] [] [] 88. Which of the following is a graphic file?

A B C D
a) Untitled.odf c) Untitled.asf
b) Untitled.svg d) Untitled.zip

[] [] [] [] 89. Which of the following categories of operating system are designed to be installed on a
A B C D
single computer?

a) Personal Operating System c) Mobile Operating System

b) Server Operating System d) Embedded Operating
system
[] [] [] [] 90. Which of the following categories of operating systems are designed to be installed on a
A B C D
network server?

a) Personal Operating System c) Mobile Operating System

b) Server Operating System d) Embedded Operating
system
[] [] [] [] 91. Which of the following categories of operating systems are installed in cars, kiosks, and
A B C D
other consumer electronics?

a) Personal Operating System c) Mobile Operating System

b) Server Operating System d) Embedded Operating
system

[] [] [] [] 92. Who developed Linux?

A B C D
a) Linus Torvalds c) Steve Jobs
b) Steve Wozniak d) Bill Gates

[] [] [] [] 93. Android is based on which operating system?

A B C D
a) Windows OS c) Linux
b) Chrome OS d) OS X

[] [] [] [] 94. It performs a specific task, usually related to managing or maintaining the computer
A B C D
system.

a) System software c) Operating software

b) Application software d) Utility Software

[] [] [] [] 95. It gives you the right to use a software program and specifies the conditions under which
A B C D
the software can be used.

a) FAQ c) TAC
b) EULA d) All of the Above

[] [] [] [] 96. It was the first widely used open source software.

A B C D
a) LibreOffice c) Lynx
b) Linux d) LinkedIn

225
[] [] [] [] 97. The following are videoconferencing applications; except,
A B C D
a) Zoom c) GoOnMeeting
b) Cisco WebEx d) Google Meet

[] [] [] [] 98. A network topology where all network devices connect to a central device and if the
A B C D
central device fails, the network cannot work.

a) Star Network c) Mesh Network

b) Bus Network d) P2P Network

[] [] [] [] 99. A network topology where all network devices connect to a central cable.
A B C D
a) Star Network c) Mesh Network
b) Bus Network d) P2P Network

[] [] [] [] 100. A network topology where network devices are interconnected so that the messages can
A B C D
take any several possible paths.

a) Star Network c) Mesh Network

b) Bus Network d) P2P Network

[] [] [] [] 101. It is a company network accessible by authorized outsiders.

A B C D
a) Internet c) Extranet
b) Intranet d) Virtual Private Network

[] [] [] [] 102. Data is sent in time to be delivered at the time it is needed.

A B C D
a) Synchronous transmission c) Isochronous transmission
b) Asynchronous transmission d) Full-Duplex transmission

[] [] [] [] 103. Messages are separated into small units called packets and travel along the network
A B C D
separately; packets are reassembled once destination is reached

a) Circuit switching c) Broadcasting

b) Packet Switching d) None of the above

[] [] [] [] 104. Which cable is used for telephone and network connection?

A B C D
a) Twisted-pair cable c) Fiber-optic cable
b) Coaxial cable d) None of the above

[] [] [] [] 105. Which cable is used for computer networks and cable television delivery?
A B C D
a) Twisted-pair cable c) Fiber-optic cable
b) Coaxial cable d) None of the above

[] [] [] [] 106. Which cable utilizes hundreds of thin transparent clear glass or plastic fibers over which
A B C D
lasers transmit data as light and is used for high-speed communications?

a) Twisted-pair cable c) Fiber-optic cable

b) Coaxial cable d) None of the above

[] [] [] [] 107. TCP is the most widely used communications protocol. Which protocol is responsible for
A B C D
the delivery of data?

a) TCP c) Both TCP and IP

b) IP d) None of the Above

[] [] [] [] 108. TCP is the most widely used communications protocol. Which protocol provides address
A B C D
and routing information?

226
 a) TCP c) Both TCP and IP
b) IP d) None of the Above

[] [] [] [] 109. Which search operator is used to compare?

A B C D
a) filetype: c) define:
b) define: d) vs

[] [] [] [] 110. ISRS stands for :

A B C D
a) Information Storage and c) Information Storage and
Retrieval Server Retrieval System
b) Information Storage and d) Information Storage and
Renewal Server Renewal System
[] [] [] [] 111. Protocol used to share files through the web
A B C D
a) FTPS c) FTP
b) HTTP d) HTTPS

[] [] [] [] 112. Search engine that is most popular in China

A B C D
a) DuckDuckGo c) Bing
b) Baidu d) Yahoo

[] [] [] [] 113. Which search operator is used to search word definitions?

A B C D
a) define: c) expound:
b) meaning: d) site:

[] [] [] [] 114. Below are disadvantages of a mesh topology except

A B C D
a) Below are disadvantages of c) Lots of network redundancy
a mesh topology except
b) Lots of cabling is required d) Scalability depends on the
capacity of the central bus
and the cable type

[] [] [] [] 115. Which of the following is not true?

A B C D
a) The hub connects two c) The bridge connects
devices LANs
b) The bridge can filter d) The hub is not
content intelligent
[] [] [] [] 116. Everything listed below is true for netiquette except
A B C D
a) Refusing cultural c) Recognize that the
differences internet is an
extension of society
b) Refusing to empower d) Apply the same
abuse and standards online as
harassment while we do in public
online
[] [] [] [] 117. Which search operator is used for price?
A B C D
a) ““ c) PHP
b) * d) #

[] [] [] [] 118. IT trend that allows a client to access the library at any given time
A B C D
a) Virtual Reality c) Streaming Services
b) RFID Technology d) Open Libraries

227
[] [] [] [] 119. Which of the following is not true?
A B C D
a) The Internet connects c) The internet is
different network of accessible to anyone
computers together
b) The internet has an d) The Internet is safe as
unlimited number of compared to the
users intranet
[] [] [] [] 120. A server that contains, sends and receives electronic mail
A B C D
a) Web c) DHCP
b) Mail d) DNS

[] [] [] [] 121. Below are advantages of a mesh topology except

A B C D
a) Heavily dependent on c) No single point of
the network medium failure
b) Can handle heavy traffic d) Easy to identify faults

[] [] [] [] 122. Below are advantages of a star topology except

A B C D
a) Simplicity of operation c) Lots of network
redundancy
b) Easy to detect faults d) Can handle heavy traffic

[] [] [] [] 123. Search engine that does not track its users

A B C D
a) Yahoo c) Bing
b) AOL d) DuckDuckGo

[] [] [] [] 124. Which network does not belong to the group?

A B C D
a) Local Area Network c) Wired Network
b) Wide Area Network d) Metropolitan Area
Network
[] [] [] [] 125. DBMS stands for
A B C D
a) Database Monitoring c) Database Monitoring
Server System
b) Database Management d) Database Management
Server System
[] [] [] [] 126. At what distance is a Single Mode Fiber-optic cable used?
A B C D
a) 1.5 kilometers c) 3 kilometers
b) 2 kilometers d) 1 kilometer

[] [] [] [] 127. Place search results can be filtered by the following except

A B C D
a) Price c) Rating
b) Time d) Cuisine

[] [] [] [] 128. Protocol used to display web pages securely

A B C D
a) FTP c) HTTP
b) FTPS d) HTTPS

[] [] [] [] 129. Who created the World Wide Web?

A B C D
a) Vinton Cerf c) Tim Berners-Lee
b) Marc Andersen d) Robert Morris

[] [] [] [] 130. Who was considered as one of the Fathers of Internet?

A B C D

228
 a) Vinton Cerf c) Tim Berners-Lee
b) Marc Andreessen d) Robert Morris

[] [] [] [] 131. Who released the first web browser?

A B C D
a) Vinton Cerf c) Tim Berners-Lee
b) Marc Andreessen d) Robert Morris

[] [] [] [] 132. What is the first web browser?

A B C D
a) Netscape c) America On-Line
(AOL)
b) Mosaic d) Internet Explorer
[] [] [] [] 133. It is a library of resources available to computer users through the global Internet. It
A B C D
enables users to view a wide variety of information, including magazine archives, public and
college library resources, and current world and business news.

a) Database c) World Wide Web

b) Ethernet d) Online Public Access
Catalog (OPAC)

[] [] [] [] 134. In Microsoft Access, it is a tool that allows you to automate tasks and add functionality to
A B C D
your forms, reports, and controls. For example, if you add a command button to a form, you
associate the button's OnClick event to a macro, and the macro contains the commands that
you want the button to perform each time it is clicked.

a) Queries c) Macros
b) Forms d) Tables

[] [] [] [] 135. The programming language used in Microsoft Access

A B C D
a) VBA c) JavaScript
b) C++ d) MySQL

[] [] [] [] 136. Academic Libraries Book Acquisition Systems Association, Inc. is a network of agencies
A B C D
and institutions engaged in health research and development in the Central Visayas started
with 13 original members. Who was the first ALBASA manager?

a) Diosdado David c) Fr. Rafael Boromeo

b) Eva Brillo d) Nela Serrato

[] [] [] [] 137. Refers to a set of moral rules or a code of behaviour applied to the online environment. As
A B C D
a responsible netizen, you should observe these rules to help make cyberspace a safe place.

a) Netiquette c) Technology Ethics

b) Computer Ethics d) Social Etiquette

[] [] [] [] 138. It is a malicious attempt to disrupt normal traffic of a targeted server, service or network by
A B C D
overwhelming the target or its surrounding infrastructure with a flood of Internet traffic.

a) Hacking c) Phishing
b) DDoS attack d) SYN Flood

[] [] [] [] 139. With the increase of people creating contents on Youtube, many are interested on how to
A B C D
reach more audience and increase viewers. Many refer to this as something that works
behind the scene on how contents are being advertised, arranged and presented on the
platform.

a) Advertisement c) Algorithm
b) Clickbait d) Subscribers

229
[] [] [] [] 140. Microblogging is a type of blog that lets users publish short text updates. Bloggers can
A B C D
usually use a number of service for the updates including instant messaging, e-mail, or
Twitter. The posts are called microposts, while the act of using these services to update your
blog is called microblogging. Another example of microblog is evident in the following
except;

a) Facebook c) Tumbler
b) Instagram d) Wordpress

[] [] [] [] 141. What is the most basic language Microsoft made?

A B C D
a) DirectX c) C++
b) Batch d) Visual Basic

[] [] [] [] 142. It is an electronic device capable of performing complex computations in a short time.

A B C D
a) Application c) Computer
b) Operating system d) Software

[] [] [] [] 143. It is an 8-bit character encoding (code page) used on IBM mainframe operating systems.
A B C D
a) ASCII c) EBCDIC
b) UNICODE d) UNIX

[] [] [] [] 144. A part of computer that stores applications, documents and system operating information
A B C D
a) Memory c) Hard Disk
b) Central Processing Unit d) Data Disk

[] [] [] [] 145. It is a methodology that is typically used to develop, maintain and replace information
A B C D
systems for improving the quality of the software design and development process.

a) System Life Cycle c) Program Life Cycle

b) Software Licensing d) Software Development
Development Cycle Life Cycle
[] [] [] [] 146. What is the correct way of making a header in HTML?
A B C D
a) <head> text </head> c) <h> text </h>
b) <header> text </header> d) <h1> text </h1>

[] [] [] [] 147. Which of the following is the correct way of making a string in Java?
A B C D
a) String "Text"; c) String text = "text"
b) String text = 'text'; d) String text = "text";
[] [] [] [] 148. Which of the following is the correct way to use the standard namespace in C++?
A B C D
a) Using namespace std; c) Using standard
namespace;
b) Using namespace d) Standard namespace
standard; used;
[] [] [] [] 149. What does &nbsp mean?
A B C D
a) No Border Space c) No Between Spaces
Padding
b) Non-Breaking Space d) Non-Bordered Space
Padding
[] [] [] [] 150. In HTML, how do you insert a link?
A B C D
a) <a><href=”link”></a> c) <a href=”link”></a>

b) <ahref=”link”></ahref> d) <ahref>link</a>

230
KEY ANSWER TO PART VI: INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
1. B 51. C 101. C
2. A 52. B 102. C
3. C 53. A 103. B
4. A 54. A 104. A
5. A 55. B 105. B
6. C 56. D 106. C
7. D 57. C 107. A
8. A 58. C 108. B
9. B 59. C 109. D
10. B 60. A 110. C
11. A 61. C 111. C
12. B 62. C 112. B
13. C 63. D 113. A
14. A 64. A 114. D
15. A 65. C 115. B
16. B 66. D 116. A
17. B 67. B 117. C
18. D 68. B 118. D
19. C 69. C 119. D
20. A 70. D 120. B
21. A 71. B 121. A
22. D 72. A 122. C
23. A 73. B 123. D
24. A 74. C 124. C
25. D 75. D 125. D
26. C 76. D 126. C
27. C 77. B 127. B
28. B 78. C 128. D
29. D 79. C 129. C
30. A 80. A 130. A
31. A 81. D 131. B
32. B 82. C 132. B
33. C 83. A 133. C
34. C 84. C 134. C
35. D 85. B 135. A
36. A 86. A 136. B
37. B 87. C 137. A
38. B 88. B 138. B
39. B 89. A 139. C
40. B 90. B 140. D
41. D 91. D 141. D
42. A 92. A 142. C
43. B 93. C 143. C
44. A 94. D 144. A
45. A 95. B 145. D
46. A 96. B 146. D
47. D 97. C 147. D
48. A 98. A 148. A
49. C 99. B 149. B
50. B 100. C 150. C

231
REFERENCES:

● Bongalos, F. S. (2008). Librarians licensure examination reviewer. Quezon City: C & E

Publishing.

● Buenrostro, J. C. (2006). The Complete reviewer for the librarians licensure examination. Quezon
City: Great Books Publishing.
● Buenrostro, J. C. (2018). Abstracting and indexing made easy. Quezon City: Great Books Trading.
● Buenrostro, J. C., & Bhagwani, E. T. (2004). More than books: perspectives on the management of
information resources and services in libraries. Quezon City: Published and exclusively
distributed by Great Books Trading.
● Buenrostro, J. C., Buenrostro, J. S., Magbag, T. D. J., & Marasigan, R. P. (2018). The complete
reviewer for librarians licensure examination. Quezon City: Great Books Trading.
● Cassell, K. A., & Hiremath, U. (2006). Reference and information services in the 21st century: an
introduction. London: Facet Publishing.
● Gregory, V. L. (2019). Collection development and management for 21st century library
collections: an introduction. Chicago: ALA Neal-Schuman.
● Huber, J. J. (2013). Lean Library Management: Eleven Strategies for Reducing Costs and
Improving Customer Services. New Delhi, India: DBS Imprints.
● Katz, W. A. (2002). Introduction to reference work: reference services and reference processes.
New York: McGraw-Hill.
● National Library of the Philippines. (2014). Cataloging policy statements and RDA guidelines for
Philippine libraries. Manila.
● Pymm, B., & Hickey, D. d. (2004). Learn library management. Maryland (Estados Unidos):
Scarecrow Press, Inc.
● Stueart, R. D., & Moran, B. B. (2007). Library and information center management. Westport,
Conn: Libraries Unlimited.
● Taylor, A. G., Miller, D. P., & Wynar, B. S. (2000). Wynars introduction to cataloging and
classification / Arlene G. Taylor ; with the assistance of David P. Miller. Englewood, CO:
Libraries Unlimited.
● Totterdell, A., Gill, J., & Hornsey, A. (2005). An introduction to library and information work.
London: Facet.
● Woolls, B. (2008). The school library media manager. Westport, CT: Libraries Unlimited.

232
 [REPUBLIC ACT NO. 9246]

AN ACT MODERNIZING THE PRACTICE OF LIBRARIANSHIP IN THE PHILIPPINES THEREBY REPEALING

REPUBLIC ACT NO. 6966, ENTITLED: “AN ACT REGULATING THE PRACTICE OF LIBRARIANSHIP AND
PRESCRIBING THE QUALIFICATIONS OF LIBRARIANS,” APPROPRIATING FUNDS THEREFOR AND FOR
OTHER PURPOSES

Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the Philippines in Congress assembled:

ARTICLE

TITLE, STATEMENT OF POLICY, DEFINITION

OF TERMS, SCOPE OF THE PRACTICE

SECTION 1. Short Title. – This Act shall be known as “The Philippine Librarianship Act of 2003.”

SEC 2. Statement of Policy. – The State recognizes the essential role of librarianship as a profession in developing the intellectual
capacity of the citizenry thus making library service a regular component for national development. It shall, through honest,
effective and credible licensure examination and regulatory measures, undertake programs and activities that would promote and
nurture the professional growth and well-being of competent, virtuous, productive and well-rounded librarians whose standards
of practice and service shall be characterized by excellence, quality, and geared towards world-class global competitiveness.

SEC 3. Objectives. – This Act shall govern the following:

(a) National examination for licensure, registration of librarians, issuance of Certificate of Registration and Professional
Identification Card;

(b) Supervision, control and regulation of practice of librarianship;

(c) Integration of librarians under one national organization; and

(d) Development of professional competence of librarians.

SEC 4. Definition of Terms. – As used in this Act, the following terms shall be defined:

(a) Librarian – refers to an individual who is a bona fide holder of a Certificate of Registration and Professional Identification
Card issued by the Professional Regulatory Board for Librarians and by the Professional Regulation Commission in accordance
with this Act.

(b) Commission – refers to the Professional Regulation Commission.

(c) Board – refers to the Professional Regulatory Board for Librarians.

SEC 5. Scope of the Practice of Librarianship. – Librarianship shall deal with the performance of the librarian’s functions, which
shall include, but not be limited to the following:

(1) Selection and acquisition of multi-media sources of information which would best respond to clientele’s need for adequate,
relevant and timely information;

(2) Cataloguing and classification of knowledge or sources of information into relevant organized collections and creation of
local databases for speedy access, retrieval or delivery of information;

(3) Development of computer-assisted/computer-backed information systems which would permit online and network services;

(4) Establishment of library systems and procedures; dissemination of information; rendering of information, reference and
research assistance; archiving; and education of users;

233
(5) Teaching, lecturing and reviewing of library, archives and information science subjects, including subjects given in the
licensure examination;

(6) Rendering of services involving technical knowledge/expertise in abstracting, indexing, cataloguing and classifying; or the
preparation of bibliographies, subject authority lists, thesauri and union catalogues/lists;

(7) Preparation, evaluation or appraisal of plans, programs and/or projects for the establishment, organization, development and
growth of libraries or information centers, and the determination of library requirements for space, buildings, structures or
facilities;

(8) Provision of professional and consultancy services or advice on any aspect of librarianship; and

(9) Organization, conservation, preservation and restoration of historical and cultural documents and other intellectual properties.

ARTICLE II

CREATION OF THE PROFESSIONAL

REGULATORY BOARD FOR LIBRARIANS

SEC 6. Creation and Composition of the Board. – There is hereby created a Professional Regulatory Board for Librarians,
hereinafter called the Board, under the administrative supervision and control of the Professional Regulation Commission,
hereinafter referred to as the Commission, to be composed of a Chairperson and two (2) members who shall be appointed by the
President of the Philippines from among the list of three (3) recommendees for each position submitted by the Commission from
among the list of five (5) nominees for each position submitted by the accredited, integrated national professional organization
of librarians from among the librarians of recognized standing who qualify under SEC 7 of this Act. The new Board shall be
constituted within three (3) months from the effectivity of this Act.

SEC 7. Qualifications of Members of the Board. – The Chairperson and members of the Board, at the time of their appointment,
shall possess the following qualifications:

(a) A natural born citizen and resident of the Philippines;

(b) A good reputation and moral character;

(c) A librarian as defined in “section 4(a)” of this Act;

(d) Active in the practice of librarianship for at least ten (10) years, five (5) years of which is in a managerial position;

(e) Must not be a member of the faculty of a university, college, school or institution conferring the academic degree on
librarianship, or offering review classes for librarian licensure examination; nor a person who has a direct or indirect pecuniary
interest in any such institution; and

(f) Must not be an incumbent officer of the accredited, integrated national professional organization of librarians.

SEC 8. Powers, Functions and Duties of the Board. – The Board shall exercise executive/administrative, rulemaking and quasi-
judicial powers in carrying out the provisions of this Act. It shall be vested with the following specific powers, functions, duties
and responsibilities:

(a) To promulgate and administer rules and regulations necessary to carry out the provisions of this Act;

(b) To administer oaths in connection with the administration of this Act;

(c) To adopt an official seal of the Board;

(d) To issue, suspend or revoke the Certificate of Registration and Professional Identification Card or grant or cancel a
temporary/special permit;

234
(e) To look into the conditions affecting the practice of librarianship, and when necessary, adopt such measures as may be deemed
proper for the enhancement and maintenance of high ethical, moral and professional standards of librarianship;

(f) To adopt policies and set the standards for all types of libraries, librarians and the practice of librarianship;

(g) To ensure, in coordination with the Commission on Higher Education (CHED), that all institutions offering library, archives
and information science education comply with prescribed standards for curriculum, faculty and facilities for course offerings of
library science, or library and information science;

(h) To adopt and prescribe a Code of Ethics and a Code of Technical Standards for Librarians;

(i) To hear and decide administrative cases involving violations of this Act, its Implementing Rules and Regulations or the Code
of Ethics or the Code of Technical Standards for Librarians; and for this purpose, issue subpoena ad testificandum and subpoena
duces tecum to ensure the appearance of witnesses and the presentation of documents in connection therewith;

(j) To prescribe guidelines in the Continuing Professional Education (CPE) in coordination with the accredited and integrated
association for professional librarians;

(k) To prepare, adopt, issue or amend the syllabi or terms of specification of subjects for the librarian licensure examination
consistent with the policies and standards set by the CHED; and

(l) To discharge other powers and duties as the Board may deem necessary for the practice of librarianship and the continued
growth and development of librarians, libraries and library education in the Philippines.

The policies, resolutions, rules and regulations issued or promulgated by the Board shall be subject to review and approval of the
Commission. However, the Board’s decision, resolution or order rendered in administrative case shall be subject to review only
if on appeal.

SEC 9. Term of Office. – The Chairperson and the members of the Board shall hold office for a term of three (3) years until their
successors shall have been appointed and duly qualified: Provided, That members of the first Board to be appointed after the
approval of this Act shall hold office for the following terms: the Chairperson for three (3) years, one member for two (2) years
and the other member for one (1) year: Provided further, That the Chairperson or any member may be reappointed for another
term of three (3) years but in no case shall the whole term exceed six (6) years. Interim vacancies in the Board shall be filled for
the unexpired portion of the term only. Each member shall take the proper oath of office.

SEC 10. Compensation of the Board. – The Chairperson and members of the Board shall receive compensation and allowances
comparable to that being received by the Chairperson and members of existing regulatory boards under the Commission as
provided for in the General Appropriations Act.

SEC 11. Removal or Suspension of Board Members. – The Chairperson or any member of the Board may be removed or
suspended by the President of the Philippines on recommendation of the Commission if found guilty after a proper administrative
investigation, based on the following grounds: neglect of duty, incompetence, unprofessional, unethical, immoral or dishonorable
conduct; any violation of this Act, or the Code of Ethics and the Code of Technical Standards for Librarians; or commission or
toleration of irregularities in the examination such as manipulation, rigging of examination results, disclosure of secrets and
information on examination questions prior to conduct of examination, tampering of grades or final judgment, or criminal offense
involving moral turpitude.

SEC 12. Executive Officer and the Secretary of the Board. – The Chairperson of the Commission shall be the Executive Officer
of the Board and shall conduct the licensure examination for librarians. The Commission shall designate the Secretary of the
Board and shall provide the Secretariat and other support services to implement the provisions of this Act.

All records of the Board including the examination papers, minutes of deliberations, and records of administrative proceedings
and investigations shall be kept by the Commission under the direct custody of the Secretary.

235
SEC 13. Annual Report. – The Board shall submit to the Commission after the close of each calendar year, its annual report of
accomplishments which shall include a detailed account of the operation of the Board for the year and the appropriate
recommendation on issues or problems affecting the profession.

ARTICLE III

LICENSURE EXAMINATION AND REGISTRATION

SEC 14. Examinations. – Applicants for registration, except those specifically allowed under SEC 19 of this Act, shall be required
to undergo a written licensure examination to be given by the Board in such places and dates the Commission may designate
subject to compliance with the requirements prescribed by the Commission.

SEC 15. Qualifications of Applicants. – Applicants for licensure examination must meet the following qualifications at the time
of filing of applications:

(a) Citizen of the Philippines or a foreign citizen whose country has reciprocity with the Philippines as regards the practice of
librarianship;

(b) Good health and good moral character; and

(c) Graduate of Bachelor’s degree in Library Science and Information Science: Provided, That a holder of a master’s degree in
Library and Information Science shall be allowed to qualify for application to the licensure examinations: Provided, further; That
within five (5) years from the effectivity of this Act, holders of the following degrees shall also be allowed to qualify for
application to the licensure examination:

(1) Bachelor of Science in Education or Elementary Education; or Bachelor of Arts with a major or specialization in Library
Science;

(2) Master of Arts in Library Science or Library and Information Science; or

(3) Any masteral degree with concentration in Library Science.

SEC 16. Scope of Examination. – The licensure examination for librarianship shall consist of the following subjects:

(1) selection and acquisition of multi-media sources of information;

(2) cataloguing and classification;

(3) indexing and abstracting;

(4) reference, bibliography and information services;

(5) organization, management and development and maintenance of multi-media based library or information service, laws,
trends and practices affecting the profession; and

(6) information technology.

The Board is hereby authorized to modify or add to the subjects listed above as the needs and demands in the library profession
may require.

SEC 17. Rating in the Board Examination. – To be qualified as having passed the licensure examination, a candidate must obtain
a weighted general average of seventy-five percent (75%), with no grade lower than fifty percent (50%) in any subject.

SEC 18. Report of Results of Examination. – The Board shall report to the Commission the results of the examination and the
ratings of the examinees within ten (10) days after the examination.

236
SEC 19. Registration Without Examination. – Upon application and payment of the required fees, the Board shall issue a
Certificate of Registration and Professional Identification Card to an applicant who, on the date of effectivity of Republic Act
No. 6966, is:

(a) a practicing librarian who has completed at least a bachelor’s degree and a librarian or supervising librarian eligible;

(b) a practicing librarian who has completed at least a bachelor’s degree, eighteen (18) units in Library Science, five (5) years
experience in librarianship, and a first grade eligible or its equivalent;

(c) a practicing librarian who has completed a masteral degree in Library Science or Library and Information Science, and a first
grade eligible or its equivalent; or

(d) a practicing librarian who has completed at least a bachelor’s degree, eighteen (18) units in Library Science, and seven (7)
years experience in librarianship.

Those who qualify under this section shall be given three (3) years within which to apply for registration upon the effectivity of
this Act.

SEC 20. Issuance of Certificate of Registration and Professional Identification Card. – The Commission, on recommendation of
the Board, shall issue a Certificate of Registration and Professional Identification Card to each person who passed the licensure
examination for librarians and to those who are registered without examination under this Act and shall enter the name of the
registered professional in the Roster of Philippine Librarians.

The Certificate of Registration shall bear the signature of the Chairperson of the Commission and the Chairperson and members
of the Board, stamped with the official seals of the Board and the Commission indicating that the person named therein is entitled
to the practice of the profession with all the privileges appurtenant thereto. The said certificate of registration shall remain in full
force and effect until suspended or revoked in accordance with this Act.

A professional identification card bearing the name and signature of the registrant, registration number, date of issuance, expiry
date, duly signed by the Chairperson of the Commission, shall likewise be issued to every registrant who has paid the prescribed
fee.

SEC 21. Oath of Profession. – All successful examinees qualified for registration and all qualified applicants for registration
without examination shall be required to take an oath of profession before any Commission Officer, or member of the Board or
any government official authorized to administer oaths, prior to entering into the practice of librarianship in the Philippines.

SEC 22. Refusal to Issue Certificate of Registration and Professional Identification Card. – The Board shall not register any
successful examinee nor any applicant for registration without examination if he/she has been convicted by a court of competent
jurisdiction of any criminal offense involving moral turpitude or has been found guilty of immoral and dishonorable conduct
after investigation of the Board, or has been declared to be of unsound mind. The reason for the refusal shall be set forth in
writing.

SEC 23. Revocation and Suspension of Certificate of Registration and Professional Identification Card or Cancellation of
Temporary/Special Permit. – The Board has the power, after due notice and hearing, to revoke or suspend the Certificate of
Registration or cancel a temporary or special permit of any librarian on any ground stated under section 22 of this Act, or for any
of the following: unprofessional or dishonorable conduct; malpractice; incompetence; serious ignorance or negligence in the
practice of librarianship; fraud; deceit or falsification in obtaining a certificate of registration, professional identification card, or
temporary/special permit; abetment of illegal practice by allowing illegal use of his/her certificate of registration, or professional
identification card, or temporary/special permit; practice of profession during the period of suspension; or any violation of this
Act, its Implementing Rules and Regulations, the Code of Ethics or the Code of Technical Standards for Librarians, or Board
policies. The respondent may appeal the Board’s decision, order/resolution to the Commission within fifteen (15) days from
receipt thereof.

SEC 24. Reissuance of Revoked Certificate of Registration and Replacement of Lost Certificate of Registration and Professional
Identification Card. – The Board after two (2) years from the date of revocation of the Certificate of Registration may reissue a
certificate upon proper application.

237
A new Certificate of Registration and Professional Identification Card or temporary/special permit, which has been lost, destroyed
or mutilated, may be reissued after payment of the required fee prescribed by the Commission.

SEC 25. Roster of Librarians. – The Board, in coordination with the accredited and integrated national organization of librarians,
shall maintain an up-to-date, complete and properly organized Roster, which shall include those who had been issued Certificates
of Registration under Republic Act No. 6966 and those who shall qualify under this Act, to contain the following data:

(a) alphabetical list by surname of librarians with their addresses and license numbers;

(b) the list of licensees, numerically arranged by license numbers; and

(c) such other lists which the Board may deem necessary.

Copies of the Roster, which shall be provided to the National Library, the Civil Service Commission, and the accredited national
organization of librarians, shall be kept as permanent record.

ARTICLE IV

PRACTICE OF LIBRARIANSHIP

SEC 26. Illegal Practice of Librarianship. – A person who does not have a valid Certificate of Registration and Professional
Identification Card or a temporary/special permit from the Commission shall not practice or offer to practice librarianship in the
Philippines or assume any position, which involve performing the function of a librarian as provided under SEC 5 of this Act.

SEC 27. Certificate of Registration/Professional Identification Card and Professional Tax Receipt. – The Certificate of
Registration, Professional Identification Card and Professional Tax Receipt number of the librarian shall be reflected in any
document issued/signed in connection with the practice of the profession.

SEC 28. Foreign Reciprocity. – A librarian from another country shall be admitted for licensure examination, be issued a
Certificate of Registration and Professional Identification Card and be entitled to the rights and privileges appurtenant to this Act,
if the country or state he/she is a citizen of or subject, permits Filipino librarians to practice librarianship on an equal basis as the
librarians of said country or state: Provided, That the requirements for Certificate of Registration in said country or state are
substantially the same as the requirements under this Act: Provided, further, That the law of such country or state grants Filipino
librarians the same privileges as the citizens/subjects of that country/state.

SEC 29. Vested Rights: Automatic Registration of Practicing Librarians. – All practicing librarians who are registered at the time
this Act takes effect shall automatically be registered.

SEC 30. Integrated and Accredited National Organization of Librarians. – All registered librarians shall be integrated under a
single organization recognized and accredited by the Board and approved by the Commission.

A librarian duly registered and licensed by the Board and the Commission shall automatically become a member of the integrated
and accredited professional organization and shall receive the benefits and privileges appurtenant thereto upon payment of the
required fees and dues. Membership in the integrated and accredited professional organization shall not be a bar to membership
in any other association of librarians.

SEC 31. Employment of Librarians. – Only qualified and licensed librarians shall be employed as librarians in all government
libraries. Local government units shall be given a period of three (3) years from the approval of this Act to comply with this
provision.

ARTICLE V

PENAL AND FINAL PROVISIONS

SEC 32. Penal Provisions. – Any person who practices or offers to practice any function of a librarian as provided for under SEC
5 of this Act who is not registered and has not been issued by the Commission a Certificate of Registration and Professional
Identification Card, or a temporary license/permit or who violates any of the provisions of this Act, its Implementing Rules and

238
Regulations, shall, upon conviction, be penalized by a fine of not less than Thirty thousand pesos (P30,000.00) nor more than
One hundred-thousand pesos (P100,000.00), or imprisonment of not less than one (1) month nor more than three (3) years at the
discretion of the court.

SEC 33. Funding Provision. – The Chairperson of the Professional Regulation Commission shall immediately include in the
Commission’s program the implementation of this Act, the funding of which shall be included in the annual General
Appropriations Act.

SEC 34. Transitory Provision. – The present Board shall continue to function in the interim until such time as the new Board
shall have been constituted pursuant to this Act.

SEC 35. Implementing Rules and Regulations. – The Board, subject to the approval of the Commission, shall promulgate, adopt
and issue rules and regulations, and the Code of Ethics and the Code of Technical Standards for Librarians which shall take effect
fifteen (15) days following publication in the Official Gazette or newspaper of general circulation.

SEC 36. Separability Clause. – If any clause, provision, paragraph or part hereof shall be declared unconstitutional or invalid,
such judgment shall not affect, invalidate or impair any other part hereof, but such judgment shall be merely confined to the
clause, provision, paragraph or part directly involved in the controversy in which such judgment has been rendered.

SEC 37. Repealing Clause. – Republic Act No. 6966 is hereby repealed and all other laws, decrees, orders, rules, regulations,
ordinances or parts thereof which are inconsistent with this Act are hereby repealed or amended accordingly.

SEC 38. Effectivity. – This Act shall take effect fifteen (15) days following its publication in the Official Gazette or a national
newspaper of general circulation.

Approved,

(Sgd.) JOSE DE VENECIA JR.

(Sgd.) FRANKLIN M. DRILON Speaker of the House
President of the Senate of Representatives

This Act which is a consolidation of House Bill No. 5351 and Senate Bill No. 2579 was finally passed by the House of
Representatives and the Senate on December 2, 2003 and December 16, 2003, respectively.

(Sgd.) ROBERTO P. NAZARENO

(Sgd.) OSCAR G. YABES Secretary General
Secretary of the Senate House of Representatives

Approved: FEB 9 2004

(Sgd.) GLORIA MACAPAGAL-ARROYO

President of the Philippines

Republic Act No. 9246: GOVPH. (2004, February 9). Retrieved June 4, 2020, from

https://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/2004/02/09/republic-act-no-9246/

239
 REPUBLIC ACT NO. 8981

AN ACT MODERNIZING THE PROFESSIONAL REGULATION COMMISSION, REPEALING FOR THE

PURPOSE PRESIDENTIAL DECREE NUMBERED TWO HUNDRED AND TWENTY-THREE, ENTITLED
"CREATING THE PROFESSIONAL REGULATION COMMISSION AND PRESCRIBING ITS POWERS AND
FUNCTIONS," AND FOR OTHER PURPOSES

Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the Philippines Congress assembled:

Section 1. Title – This Act shall be called the "PRC Modernization Act of 2000."

Section 2. Statement of Policy – The State recognizes the important role of professionals in nation-building and, towards this
end, promotes the sustained development of a reservoir of professionals whose competence has been determined by honest and
credible licensure examinations and whose standards of professional service and practice are internationally recognized and
considered world-class brought about the regulatory measures, programs and activities that foster professional growth and
advancement.

Section 3. Professional Regulation Commission – There is hereby created a three-man commission to be known as the
Professional Regulation Commission, hereinafter referred to as the Commission, which shall be attached to the office of the
President for general direction and coordination.

Section 4. Composition – The Commission shall be headed by one (1) full-time Chairperson and two (2) full-time
Commissioners, all to be appointed by the President for a term of seven (7) years without reappointment to start from the time
they assume office. Appointments to a vacancy that occurs before the expiration of the term of a Commissioner shall cover only
the unexpired term of the immediate predecessor. At the expiration of the Chairperson, the most senior of the Commissioners
shall temporarily assume and perform the duties and functions of the Chairperson until a permanent Chairperson is appointed by
the President.

The Chairperson or Commissioner shall be at least forty (40) years of age, holding a valid certificate of registration/professional
license and a valid professional identification card or a valid certificate of competency issued by the Commission or a valid
professional license issued by any government agency, familiar with the principles and methods of professional regulation and/or
licensing and has had at least five (5) years of executive or management experience: Provided, That, one (1) of the Commissioners
must be a past Chairperson/member of a Professional Regulatory Board.

Section 5. Exercise of Powers and Functions of the Commission – The Chairperson of the Commission, and the Commissioners
as members thereof shall sit and act as a body to exercise general administrative, executive and policy-making functions of the
Commission. The Commission shall establish and maintain a high standard of admission to the practice of all professions and at
all times ensure and safeguard the integrity of all licensure examinations.

The Chairperson shall act as the presiding and chief executive officer of the Commission. As presiding officer, he/she shall
preside over the meetings of the Commission sitting as a collegial body. As chief executive officer of the Commission, he/she
shall be responsible for the implementation of the policies and the programs adopted by the Commission for the general
administration of the Commission. He/she shall perform such other activities which are necessary for the effective exercise of
the powers, functions and responsibilities of the Commission.

Section 6. Compensation and Other Benefits – The Chairperson shall receive compensation and allowances equivalent to that of
a Department Secretary while the Commissioners shall receive compensation and allowances equivalent to that of an
Undersecretary. The Chairperson and the members of the Commission shall be entitled to retirement benefits provided under
Republic Act Numbered Fifteen Hundred and Sixty Eight, as amended by Republic Act Numbered Three Thousand Five Hundred
and Ninety Five.

Section 7. Powers, Functions and Responsibilities of the Commission – The powers, functions, and responsibilities of the
Commission are as follows:

(a) To administer, implement and enforce the regulatory policies of the national government with respect to the
regulation and licensing of the various professions and occupations under its jurisdiction including the enhancement and
maintenance of professional and occupational standards and ethics and the enforcement of the rules and regulations
relative thereto:

240
(b) To perform any and all acts, enter into contracts, make such rules and regulations and issue such orders and other
administrative issuance as may be necessary in the execution and implementation of its functions and the improvement
of its services;

(c) To review, revise, and approve resolutions, embodying policies promulgated by the Professional Regulatory Boards
in the exercise of their powers and functions or in implementing the laws regulating their respective professions and
other official actions on non-ministerial matters within their respective jurisdictions;

(d) To administer and conduct the licensure examinations of the various regulatory boards in accordance with the rules
and regulations promulgated by the Commission; determine and fix the places and dates of examinations; use publicly
or privately owned buildings and facilities for examination purposes; conduct more than one (1) licensure
examination: Provided, That, when there are two (2) or more examinations given in a year, at least one (1) examinations
shall be held on weekdays (Monday to Friday): Provided, further, That, if only one (1) examination is given in a year,
this shall be held only on weekdays: Provided, finally, That, the Commission is also authorized to require the completion
of a refresher course where the examinee has failed to pass three (3) times, except as otherwise provided by law; approve
the results of examinations and the release of the same; adopt measures to preserve the integrity and inviolability of
licensure examinations; appoint supervisors and room watchers from among the employees of the government and/or
private individuals with baccalaureate degrees, who have been trained by the Commission for the purpose and who shall
be entitled to a reasonable daily allowance for every examination day actually attended, to be determined and fixed by
the Commission; publish the list of successful examinees; provide schools, colleges and universities, public and private,
offering courses for licensure examinations, with copies of sample test questions on examinations recently conducted
by the Commission and copies of the syllabi or terms of specifications of subjects for licensure examinations; and impose
the penalty of suspension or prohibition from taking licensure examinations to any examinee charged and found guilty
of violating the rules and regulations governing the conduct of licensure examinations promulgated by the Commission;

(e) To admit the successful examinees to the practice of the profession or occupation; cause the entry of their names on
its registry book and computerized database; issue certificates of registration/professional license, bearing the
registrant’s name, picture, and registration number, signed by all the members of the Board concerned and the
Chairperson, with the official seal of the Board and the Commission affixed thereto which certificate shall be the
authority to practice; and at the option of the professional concerned, ministerially issue the professional identification
card, to be used solely for the purpose of identification, upon payment of the appropriate amount: Provided, That, marine
deck and marine engineer officers shall also be issued endorsement certificates exclusively by the Commission pursuant
to the 1978 and 1995 Standards of Training, Certification and Watch-keeping (STCW) Convention, to the exclusion of
any other government agency, Section 1(2) of Executive Order No. 149, Series of 1999 and provisions of other existing
laws, executive orders, administrative issuance/regulations to the contrary notwithstanding: Provided, further, That,
once a certificate of registration/professional license, or certificate of competency, in the case of marine deck and engine
officers are issued, this cannot be withdrawn, cancelled, revoked, or suspended except for just cause as may be provided
by law after due notice and hearing;

(f) To have custody of all the records of the various Boards, including examination papers, minutes of deliberation,
records of administrative cases and investigations and examination results for control and disposition;

(g) To determine and fix the amount of fees to be charged and collected for examination, registration, registration without
examination, professional identification card, certification, docket, appeal, replacement, accreditation, including
surcharges and other fees not specified under the provisions of Republic Act Numbered Four Hundred Sixty Five as
amended by Republic Act Numbered Sixty Five Hundred and Eleven or to charge and collect reasonable fees at the
rates higher than the rates provided thereunder subject to the approval by the Office of the President.

(h) To appoint subject to the Civil Service laws, rules, and regulations, officials and employees of the Commission
necessary for the effective performance of its functions and responsibilities; prescribe their duties and fix their
compensation subject to the provisions of Republic Act Numbered Six Thousand Seven Hundred and Fifty Eight and
allowances including other fringe benefits; and to assign and/or reassign personnel as the exigency of the service requires
subject to the Civil Service laws, rules and regulations; and to organize or reorganize the structure of the Commission;
and create or abolish positions or change the designation of existing positions in accordance with a staffing pattern
prepared by it and approved by the Office of the President upon the recommendation of the Department of Budget and
Management (DBM) to meet the changing conditions or as the need arises: Provided, That, such changes shall not affect
the employment status of the incumbents, reduce their ranks and/or salaries nor shall result in their separation from the
service;

241
(i) To submit and recommend to the President of the Philippines the names of licensed/registered professionals for
appointment as members of the various Professional Regulatory Boards from among those nominated to fill up vacancies
pursuant to the provisions of Executive Order No. 496, Series of 1991;

(j) Upon recommendation of the Professional Regulatory Board concerned, to approve the registration of and authorize
the issuance of a certificate of registration/license and professional identification card with or without examination to a
foreigner who is registered under the laws of his state or country and whose certificate of registration issued therein has
not been suspended or revoked: Provided, That, the requirements for the registration or licensing in said foreign state or
country are substantially the same as those required and contemplated by the laws of the Philippines and that the laws
of such foreign state or country allow the citizens of the Philippines to practice the profession on the same basis and
grant the same privileges as those enjoyed by the subjects or citizens of such foreign state or country: Provided, further,
That, the Commission may, upon recommendation of the Board concerned, authorize the issuance of a certificate of
registration/license or a special temporary permit to foreign professionals who desire to practice their professions in the
country under reciprocity and other international agreements; consultants in foreign-funded, joint venture or foreign-
assisted projects of the government, employees of Philippine or foreign private firms or institutions pursuant to law, or
health professionals engaged in humanitarian mission for a limited period of time: Provided, finally, That agencies,
organizations or individuals whether public or private, who secure he services of a foreign professional authorized by
law to practice in the Philippines for reasons aforementioned, shall be responsible for securing a special permit from the
Professional Regulation Commission (PRC) and the Department of Labor and Employment (DOLE), pursuant to PRC
and DOLE rules:

(k) To authorize any officer of the Commission to administer oaths:

(l) To supervise foreign nations who are authorized by existing laws to practice their professions either as holders of a
certificate of registration and a professional identification card or a temporary special permit in the Philippines; to ensure
that the terms and conditions for their practice or of their employment are strictly complied with; to require the hiring
or employing government agency or private entity/institution to secure a temporary special permit from the concerned
Board subject to approval by the Commission and to file a criminal complaint against the head of the government agency
or officers of the said private entity/institution, who shall be liable under the penalty provided for in the concerned
professional regulatory law or the penalty imposed pursuant to this Act, when the professional was hired and allowed
to practice his/her profession without permit; to file upon due process request for deportation with the Bureau of
Immigration and Deportation (BID); and to supervise professionals who were former citizens of the Philippines and
who had been registered and issued a certificate of registration and a professional identification card prior to their
naturalization as foreign citizens, who may, while in the country on a visit, sojourn or permanent residence, practice
their profession: Provided, That, prior to the practice of their profession they shall have first been issued a special permit
and updated professional identification card by the Board concerned subject to approval by the Commission and upon
payment of the permit and annual registration fees;

(m) To monitor the performance of schools in licensure examinations and publish the results thereof in a newspaper of
national circulation;

(n) To adopt and institute a comprehensive rating system for universities, colleges, and training institutes based on the
passing ratio and overall performance of students in board examinations;

(o) To exercise administrative supervision over the various professional regulatory boards and its members;

(p) To adopt and promulgate such rules and regulations as may be necessary to effectively implement policies with
respect to the regulation and practice of the professions;

(q) To implement the program for the full computerization of all licensure examinations given by the various
professional regulatory boards including the registration of professionals not later than the year 2003 and other
operations of the Commission;

(r) To investigate and decide administrative matters involving officers and employees under the jurisdiction of the
Commission;

(s) To investigate motu proprio or upon the filing of a verified complaint, any member of the Professional Regulatory
Boards for neglect of duty, incompetence, unprofessional, unethical, immoral or dishonorable conduct, commission of
irregularities in the licensure examinations which taint or impugn the integrity and authenticity of the results of the said
242
 examinations and, if found guilty, to revoke or suspend their certificates of registration and professional
licenses/identification cards and to recommend to the President of the Philippines their suspension or removal from
office as the case may be;

(t) To issue summons, subpoena and subpoena duces tecum in connection with the investigation of cases against
officials and employees of the Commission and the members of the Professional Regulatory Boards;

(u) To hold in contempt in erring party or person only upon application with a court of competent jurisdiction;

(v) To call upon or request any department, instrumentality, office, bureau, institution or agency of the government
including local government units to render such assistance as it may require, or to coordinate or cooperate in order to
carry out, enforce or implement the professional regulatory policies of the government or any program or activity it may
undertake pursuant to the provisions of this Act;

(w) To initiate an investigation, upon complaint under oath by an aggrieved party, of any person, whether a private
individual or professional, local or foreign, who practices the regulated profession or occupation without being
authorized by law, or without being registered with and licensed by the concerned regulatory board and issued the
corresponding license/professional identification card or temporary or special permit, or who commits any of the
prohibited acts provided in the regulatory laws of the various professions, which acts are criminal in nature, and if the
evidence so warrants, to forward the records of the case to the office of the city or provincial prosecutor for the filing of
the corresponding information in court by the lawyers of the legal services of the Commission who may prosecute said
case/s upon being deputized by the Secretary of Justice;

(x) To prepare an annual report of accomplishments on the programs, projects and activities of the Commission during
the year for submission to Congress after the close of its calendar year and make appropriate recommendations on issues
and/or problems affecting the Commission, the Professional Regulatory Board, and the various professions under its
jurisdiction; and

(y) To perform such other functions and duties as may be necessary to carry out the provisions of this Act, the various
professional regulatory laws, decrees, executive orders and other administrative issuance.

Section 8. Regional Offices – The Commission is hereby authorized to create regional offices as may be necessary to carry out
their functions mandated under this Act.

Section 9. Powers, Functions and Responsibilities of the Various Professional Regulatory Boards – The various, professional
regulatory boards shall retain the following powers, functions and responsibilities:

(a) To regulate the practice of the professions in accordance with the provisions of their respective professional
regulatory laws;

(b) To monitor the conditions affecting the practice of the profession or occupation under their respective jurisdictions
and whenever necessary, adopt such measures as may be deemed proper for the enhancement of the profession or
occupation and/or the maintenance of high professional, ethical and technical standards, and for this purpose the
members of the Board duly authorized by the Commission with deputized employees of the Commission, may conduct
ocular inspection in industrial, mechanical, electrical or chemical plants or establishments, hospitals, clinics,
laboratories, testing facilities, mines and quarries, other engineering facilities and in the case of schools, in coordination
with the Commission on Higher Education (CHED);

(c) To hear and investigate cases arising from violations of their respective laws, the rules and regulations promulgated
thereunder and their Codes of Ethics and, for this purpose, may issue summons, subpoena and subpoena duces tecum to
alleged violators and/or witnesses to compel their attendance in such investigations or hearings: Provided, That, the
decision of the Professional Regulatory Board shall, unless appealed to the Commission, become final and executory
after fifteen (15) days from receipt of notice of judgment or decision;

(d) To delegate the hearing or investigation of administrative cases filed before them except in cases where the issue or
question involved strictly concerns the practice of the profession or occupation, in which case, the hearing shall be
presided over by at least one (1) member of the Board concerned assisted by a Legal or Hearing Officer of the
Commission;

243
 (e) To conduct, through the Legal Officers of the Commission, summary proceedings on minor violations of their
respective regulatory laws, violations of the rules and regulations issued by the boards to implement their respective
laws, including violations of the general instructions to examinees committed by examinees, and render summary
judgment thereon which shall, unless appealed to the Commission, become final and executory after fifteen (15) days
from receipt of notice of judgment or decision;

(f) Subject to final approval by the Commission, to recommend registration without examination and the issuance of
corresponding certificate of registration and professional identification card;

(g) After due process, to suspend, revoke or reissue, reinstate certificate of registration or licenses for causes provided
by law;

(h) To prepare, adopt and issue the syllabi or tables of specifications of the subjects for examinations in consultation
with the academe; determine and prepare the questions for the licensure examinations which shall strictly be within the
scope of the syllabus or table of specifications of the subject for examination; score and rate the examination papers
with the name and signature of the Board member concerned appearing thereon and submit the results in all subjects
duly signed by the members of the Board to the Commission within ten (10) days from the last day of examination
unless extended by the Commission for justifiable cause/s; and subject to the approval by the Commission, determine
the appropriate passing general average rating in an examination if not provided for in the law regulating the profession;
and

(i) To prepare an annual report of accomplishments on programs, projects and activities of the Board during the year for
submission to the Commission after the close of each calendar year and make appropriate recommendations on issues
or problems affecting the profession to the Commission.

Section 10. Compensation of the Members of the Professional Regulatory Boards – The members of the Professional Regulatory
Boards shall receive compensation equivalent to, at least, two salary grades lower than the salary grade of the
Commissioners: Provided, That the Chairperson of the Regulatory Board shall receive a monthly compensation of two steps
higher than the members of the Board, and: Provided, further, That they shall be entitled to other allowances and benefits
provided under existing laws.

Section 11. Person to Teach Subjects for Licensure Examination on all Professions – All subjects for licensure examinations
shall be taught by persons who are holders of valid certificates of registration and valid professional licenses of the profession
and who comply with the other requirements of the CHED.

Section 12. Assistance of Law Enforcement Agency – Any law enforcement agency shall, upon call or request of the Commission
or of any Professional Regulatory Board, render assistance in enforcing the regulatory law of the profession including the rules
and regulations promulgated thereunder by prosecuting the violators thereof in accordance with law and the rules of court.

Section 13. Appropriations – The amount necessary to carry out the initial implementation of this Act shall be charged against
the current year’s appropriations of the Professional Regulation Commission. Thereafter, such sums as may be necessary for the
continued implementation of this Act shall be included in the succeeding General Appropriations Act.

Section 14. Authority to Use Income – In addition to the annual appropriations of the Commission provided under the Annual
General Appropriations Act, the Commission is hereby authorized to use its income not exceeding the amount of Forty-five
million pesos (P45,000,000.00) a year for a period of five (5) years after the effectivity of this Act to implement the program for
full computerization of the operations of the Commission, subject to the usual accounting and auditing requirements.

Section 15. Penalties for Manipulation and Other Corrupt Practices in the Conduct of Professional Examinations –

(a) Any person who manipulates or rigs licensure examination results, secretly informs or makes known licensure
examination questions prior to the conduct of the examination or tampers with the grades in professional licensure
examinations shall, upon conviction, be punished by imprisonment of not less than six (6) years and one (1) day to not
more than twelve (12) years or a fine of not less than Fifty thousand pesos (P50,000.00) to not more than One hundred
thousand pesos (P100,000.00) or both such imprisonment and fine at the discretion of the court.

(b) In case the offender is an officer or employee of the Commission or a member of the regulatory board, he/she shall
be removed from office and shall suffer the penalty of perpetual absolute disqualification from public office to addition
to the penalties prescribed in the preceding section of this Act;
244
 (c) The penalty of imprisonment ranging from four (4) years and one (1) day to six (6) years or a fine ranging from
Twenty thousand pesos (P20,000.00) to not more than Forty-nine thousand pesos (P49,000.00), or both imprisonment
and fine at the discretion of the court, shall be imposed upon the accomplices. The penalty of imprisonment ranging
from two (2) years and one (1) day to four (4) years or a fine ranging from Five thousand pesos (P5,000.00) to not more
than Nineteen thousand pesos (P19,000.00), or both imprisonment and fine at the discretion of the court, shall be
imposed upon the accessories.

Section 16. Penalties for Violation of Section 7 – Subparagraph (1) by Heads of Government Agencies or Officers of Private
Entities/Institutions – Any head of a government agency or officer(s) of a private firm/institution who violates Section 7 – subpar.
(1) of this Act shall be punished by imprisonment of not less than six (6) months and one (1) day to not more than six (6) years,
or a fine of not less than Fifty thousand pesos (P50,000.00) to not more than Five hundred thousand pesos (P500,000.00) or both
at the discretion of the court.

Section 17. Implementing Rules and Regulations – Within ninety (90) days after the approval of this Act, the Professional
Regulation Commission, together with representatives of the various Professional Regulatory Boards and accredited professional
organizations, the DBM, and the CHED shall prepare and promulgate the necessary rules and regulations needed to implement
the provisions of this Act.

Section 18. Transitory Provisions – The incumbent Commissioner and two (2) incumbent Associate Commissioners shall serve
as Chairperson and Commissioners respectively under the terms for which they have been appointed without need of new
appointments. The incumbent Executive Director shall likewise serve as Assistant Commissioner without need of new
appointment.

Section 19. Separability Clause – If any provision of this Act or the application of such provision to any person or circumstances
is declared invalid or unconstitutional, the remainder of this Act or application of such provisions to other persons or circumstance
shall not be affected by such declaration.

Section 20. Repealing Clause – Republic Act. No. 546, Presidential Decree No. 223, as amended by Presidential Decree No.
657, Republic Act No. 5181, and Executive Order No. 266, Series of 1995 are hereby repealed. Section 23 (h) of Republic Act
No. 7836, Section 4 (m & s). Section 23 of Republic Act No. 7920, and Section 29 of Republic Act No. 8050, insofar as it
requires completion of the requirements of the Continuing Professional Education (CPE) as a condition for the renewal of the
license are hereby repealed. All other laws, orders, rules and regulations or resolutions and all part/s thereof inconsistent with the
provisions of this Act are hereby repealed or amended accordingly.

Section 21. Effectivity – This Act shall take effect after fifteen (15) days following its publication in the Official Gazette or in
two (2) newspapers of general circulation, whichever is earlier.

Approved: December 05, 2000

(Sgd.)JOSEPH EJERCITO ESTRADA

President of the Philippines

An Act Modernizing The Professional Regulation Commission, Repealing For The Purpose Presidential Decree Numbered
Two Hundred And Twenty-Three, Entitled "Creating The Professional Regulation Commission And Prescribing Its Powers And
Functions," And For Other Purposes. (n.d.). Retrieved June 4, 2020, from
https://lawphil.net/statutes/repacts/ra2000/ra_8981_2000.html

245
 Library Bill of Rights

The American Library Association affirms that all libraries are forums for information and ideas, and that the following basic
policies should guide their services.

I. Books and other library resources should be provided for the interest, information, and enlightenment of all people of the
community the library serves. Materials should not be excluded because of the origin, age, background, or views of those
contributing to their creation.

II. Libraries should provide materials and information presenting all points of view on current and historical issues. Materials
should not be proscribed or removed because of partisan or doctrinal disapproval.

III. Libraries should challenge censorship in the fulfillment of their responsibility to provide information and enlightenment.

IV. Libraries should cooperate with all persons and groups concerned with resisting abridgment of free expression and free access
to ideas.

V. A person’s right to use a library should not be denied or abridged because of origin, age, background, or views.

VI. Libraries which make exhibit spaces and meeting rooms available to the public they serve should make such facilities
available on an equitable basis, regardless of the beliefs or affiliations of individuals or groups requesting their use.

VII. All people, regardless of origin, age, background, or views, possess a right to privacy and confidentiality in their library use.
Libraries should advocate for, educate about, and protect people’s privacy, safeguarding all library use data, including personally
identifiable information.

Adopted June 19, 1939, by the ALA Council; amended October 14, 1944; June 18, 1948; February 2, 1961; June 27, 1967;
January 23, 1980; January 29, 2019.

Inclusion of “age” reaffirmed January 23, 1996.

"Library Bill of Rights", American Library Association, June 30, 2006.

http://www.ala.org/advocacy/intfreedom/librarybill (Accessed June 4, 2020)

Document ID: 669fd6a3-8939-3e54-7577-996a0a3f8952

246
Name : Pre-test Score:
Date Taken : Pre: Post: Post-test Score:
Subject: Organization and Management

PRE-TEST POST-TEST
1. 51. 101. 1. 51. 101.
2. 52. 102. 2. 52. 102.
3. 53. 103. 3. 53. 103.
4. 54. 104. 4. 54. 104.
5. 55. 105. 5. 55. 105.
6. 56. 106. 6. 56. 106.
7. 57. 107. 7. 57. 107.
8. 58. 108. 8. 58. 108.
9. 59. 109. 9. 59. 109.
10. 60. 110. 10. 60. 110.
11. 61. 111. 11. 61. 111.
12. 62. 112. 12. 62. 112.
13. 63. 113. 13. 63. 113.
14. 64. 114. 14. 64. 114.
15. 65. 115. 15. 65. 115.
16. 66. 116. 16. 66. 116.
17. 67. 117. 17. 67. 117.
18. 68. 118. 18. 68. 118.
19. 69. 119. 19. 69. 119.
20. 70. 120. 20. 70. 120.
21. 71. 121. 21. 71. 121.
22. 72. 122. 22. 72. 122.
23. 73. 123. 23. 73. 123.
24. 74. 124. 24. 74. 124.
25. 75. 125. 25. 75. 125.
26. 76. 126. 26. 76. 126.
27. 77. 127. 27. 77. 127.
28. 78. 128. 28. 78. 128.
29. 79. 129. 29. 79. 129.
30. 80. 130. 30. 80. 130.
31. 81. 131. 31. 81. 131.
32. 82. 132. 32. 82. 132.
33. 83. 133. 33. 83. 133.
34. 84. 134. 34. 84. 134.
35. 85. 135. 35. 85. 135.
36. 86. 136. 36. 86. 136.
37. 87. 137. 37. 87. 137.
38. 88. 138. 38. 88. 138.
39. 89. 139. 39. 89. 139.
40. 90. 140. 40. 90. 140.
41. 91. 141. 41. 91. 141.
42. 92. 142. 42. 92. 142.
43. 93. 143. 43. 93. 143.
44. 94. 144. 44. 94. 144.
45. 95. 145. 45. 95. 145.
46. 96. 146. 46. 96. 146.
47. 97. 147. 47. 97. 147.
48. 98. 148. 48. 98. 148.
49. 99. 149. 49. 99. 149.
50. 100. 150. 50. 100. 150.
Name : Pre-test Score:
Date Taken : Pre: Post: Post-test Score:
Subject: Reference and Bibliography

PRE-TEST POST-TEST
1. 51. 101. 1. 51. 101.
2. 52. 102. 2. 52. 102.
3. 53. 103. 3. 53. 103.
4. 54. 104. 4. 54. 104.
5. 55. 105. 5. 55. 105.
6. 56. 106. 6. 56. 106.
7. 57. 107. 7. 57. 107.
8. 58. 108. 8. 58. 108.
9. 59. 109. 9. 59. 109.
10. 60. 110. 10. 60. 110.
11. 61. 111. 11. 61. 111.
12. 62. 112. 12. 62. 112.
13. 63. 113. 13. 63. 113.
14. 64. 114. 14. 64. 114.
15. 65. 115. 15. 65. 115.
16. 66. 116. 16. 66. 116.
17. 67. 117. 17. 67. 117.
18. 68. 118. 18. 68. 118.
19. 69. 119. 19. 69. 119.
20. 70. 120. 20. 70. 120.
21. 71. 121. 21. 71. 121.
22. 72. 122. 22. 72. 122.
23. 73. 123. 23. 73. 123.
24. 74. 124. 24. 74. 124.
25. 75. 125. 25. 75. 125.
26. 76. 126. 26. 76. 126.
27. 77. 127. 27. 77. 127.
28. 78. 128. 28. 78. 128.
29. 79. 129. 29. 79. 129.
30. 80. 130. 30. 80. 130.
31. 81. 131. 31. 81. 131.
32. 82. 132. 32. 82. 132.
33. 83. 133. 33. 83. 133.
34. 84. 134. 34. 84. 134.
35. 85. 135. 35. 85. 135.
36. 86. 136. 36. 86. 136.
37. 87. 137. 37. 87. 137.
38. 88. 138. 38. 88. 138.
39. 89. 139. 39. 89. 139.
40. 90. 140. 40. 90. 140.
41. 91. 141. 41. 91. 141.
42. 92. 142. 42. 92. 142.
43. 93. 143. 43. 93. 143.
44. 94. 144. 44. 94. 144.
45. 95. 145. 45. 95. 145.
46. 96. 146. 46. 96. 146.
47. 97. 147. 47. 97. 147.
48. 98. 148. 48. 98. 148.
49. 99. 149. 49. 99. 149.
50. 100. 150. 50. 100. 150.
Name : Pre-test Score:
Date Taken : Pre: Post: Post-test Score:
Subject: Cataloguing and Classification

PRE-TEST POST-TEST
1. 51. 101. 1. 51. 101.
2. 52. 102. 2. 52. 102.
3. 53. 103. 3. 53. 103.
4. 54. 104. 4. 54. 104.
5. 55. 105. 5. 55. 105.
6. 56. 106. 6. 56. 106.
7. 57. 107. 7. 57. 107.
8. 58. 108. 8. 58. 108.
9. 59. 109. 9. 59. 109.
10. 60. 110. 10. 60. 110.
11. 61. 111. 11. 61. 111.
12. 62. 112. 12. 62. 112.
13. 63. 113. 13. 63. 113.
14. 64. 114. 14. 64. 114.
15. 65. 115. 15. 65. 115.
16. 66. 116. 16. 66. 116.
17. 67. 117. 17. 67. 117.
18. 68. 118. 18. 68. 118.
19. 69. 119. 19. 69. 119.
20. 70. 120. 20. 70. 120.
21. 71. 121. 21. 71. 121.
22. 72. 122. 22. 72. 122.
23. 73. 123. 23. 73. 123.
24. 74. 124. 24. 74. 124.
25. 75. 125. 25. 75. 125.
26. 76. 126. 26. 76. 126.
27. 77. 127. 27. 77. 127.
28. 78. 128. 28. 78. 128.
29. 79. 129. 29. 79. 129.
30. 80. 130. 30. 80. 130.
31. 81. 131. 31. 81. 131.
32. 82. 132. 32. 82. 132.
33. 83. 133. 33. 83. 133.
34. 84. 134. 34. 84. 134.
35. 85. 135. 35. 85. 135.
36. 86. 136. 36. 86. 136.
37. 87. 137. 37. 87. 137.
38. 88. 138. 38. 88. 138.
39. 89. 139. 39. 89. 139.
40. 90. 140. 40. 90. 140.
41. 91. 141. 41. 91. 141.
42. 92. 142. 42. 92. 142.
43. 93. 143. 43. 93. 143.
44. 94. 144. 44. 94. 144.
45. 95. 145. 45. 95. 145.
46. 96. 146. 46. 96. 146.
47. 97. 147. 47. 97. 147.
48. 98. 148. 48. 98. 148.
49. 99. 149. 49. 99. 149.
50. 100. 150. 50. 100. 150.
Name : Pre-test Score:
Date Taken : Pre: Post: Post-test Score:
Subject: Indexing and Abstracting

PRE-TEST POST-TEST
1. 51. 101. 1. 51. 101.
2. 52. 102. 2. 52. 102.
3. 53. 103. 3. 53. 103.
4. 54. 104. 4. 54. 104.
5. 55. 105. 5. 55. 105.
6. 56. 106. 6. 56. 106.
7. 57. 107. 7. 57. 107.
8. 58. 108. 8. 58. 108.
9. 59. 109. 9. 59. 109.
10. 60. 110. 10. 60. 110.
11. 61. 111. 11. 61. 111.
12. 62. 112. 12. 62. 112.
13. 63. 113. 13. 63. 113.
14. 64. 114. 14. 64. 114.
15. 65. 115. 15. 65. 115.
16. 66. 116. 16. 66. 116.
17. 67. 117. 17. 67. 117.
18. 68. 118. 18. 68. 118.
19. 69. 119. 19. 69. 119.
20. 70. 120. 20. 70. 120.
21. 71. 121. 21. 71. 121.
22. 72. 122. 22. 72. 122.
23. 73. 123. 23. 73. 123.
24. 74. 124. 24. 74. 124.
25. 75. 125. 25. 75. 125.
26. 76. 126. 26. 76. 126.
27. 77. 127. 27. 77. 127.
28. 78. 128. 28. 78. 128.
29. 79. 129. 29. 79. 129.
30. 80. 130. 30. 80. 130.
31. 81. 131. 31. 81. 131.
32. 82. 132. 32. 82. 132.
33. 83. 133. 33. 83. 133.
34. 84. 134. 34. 84. 134.
35. 85. 135. 35. 85. 135.
36. 86. 136. 36. 86. 136.
37. 87. 137. 37. 87. 137.
38. 88. 138. 38. 88. 138.
39. 89. 139. 39. 89. 139.
40. 90. 140. 40. 90. 140.
41. 91. 141. 41. 91. 141.
42. 92. 142. 42. 92. 142.
43. 93. 143. 43. 93. 143.
44. 94. 144. 44. 94. 144.
45. 95. 145. 45. 95. 145.
46. 96. 146. 46. 96. 146.
47. 97. 147. 47. 97. 147.
48. 98. 148. 48. 98. 148.
49. 99. 149. 49. 99. 149.
50. 100. 150. 50. 100. 150.
Name : Pre-test Score:
Date Taken : Pre: Post: Post-test Score:
Subject: Selection and Acquisition

PRE-TEST POST-TEST
1. 51. 101. 1. 51. 101.
2. 52. 102. 2. 52. 102.
3. 53. 103. 3. 53. 103.
4. 54. 104. 4. 54. 104.
5. 55. 105. 5. 55. 105.
6. 56. 106. 6. 56. 106.
7. 57. 107. 7. 57. 107.
8. 58. 108. 8. 58. 108.
9. 59. 109. 9. 59. 109.
10. 60. 110. 10. 60. 110.
11. 61. 111. 11. 61. 111.
12. 62. 112. 12. 62. 112.
13. 63. 113. 13. 63. 113.
14. 64. 114. 14. 64. 114.
15. 65. 115. 15. 65. 115.
16. 66. 116. 16. 66. 116.
17. 67. 117. 17. 67. 117.
18. 68. 118. 18. 68. 118.
19. 69. 119. 19. 69. 119.
20. 70. 120. 20. 70. 120.
21. 71. 121. 21. 71. 121.
22. 72. 122. 22. 72. 122.
23. 73. 123. 23. 73. 123.
24. 74. 124. 24. 74. 124.
25. 75. 125. 25. 75. 125.
26. 76. 126. 26. 76. 126.
27. 77. 127. 27. 77. 127.
28. 78. 128. 28. 78. 128.
29. 79. 129. 29. 79. 129.
30. 80. 130. 30. 80. 130.
31. 81. 131. 31. 81. 131.
32. 82. 132. 32. 82. 132.
33. 83. 133. 33. 83. 133.
34. 84. 134. 34. 84. 134.
35. 85. 135. 35. 85. 135.
36. 86. 136. 36. 86. 136.
37. 87. 137. 37. 87. 137.
38. 88. 138. 38. 88. 138.
39. 89. 139. 39. 89. 139.
40. 90. 140. 40. 90. 140.
41. 91. 141. 41. 91. 141.
42. 92. 142. 42. 92. 142.
43. 93. 143. 43. 93. 143.
44. 94. 144. 44. 94. 144.
45. 95. 145. 45. 95. 145.
46. 96. 146. 46. 96. 146.
47. 97. 147. 47. 97. 147.
48. 98. 148. 48. 98. 148.
49. 99. 149. 49. 99. 149.
50. 100. 150. 50. 100. 150.
Name : Pre-test Score:
Date Taken : Pre: Post: Post-test Score:
Subject: Information Technology

PRE-TEST POST-TEST
1. 51. 101. 1. 51. 101.
2. 52. 102. 2. 52. 102.
3. 53. 103. 3. 53. 103.
4. 54. 104. 4. 54. 104.
5. 55. 105. 5. 55. 105.
6. 56. 106. 6. 56. 106.
7. 57. 107. 7. 57. 107.
8. 58. 108. 8. 58. 108.
9. 59. 109. 9. 59. 109.
10. 60. 110. 10. 60. 110.
11. 61. 111. 11. 61. 111.
12. 62. 112. 12. 62. 112.
13. 63. 113. 13. 63. 113.
14. 64. 114. 14. 64. 114.
15. 65. 115. 15. 65. 115.
16. 66. 116. 16. 66. 116.
17. 67. 117. 17. 67. 117.
18. 68. 118. 18. 68. 118.
19. 69. 119. 19. 69. 119.
20. 70. 120. 20. 70. 120.
21. 71. 121. 21. 71. 121.
22. 72. 122. 22. 72. 122.
23. 73. 123. 23. 73. 123.
24. 74. 124. 24. 74. 124.
25. 75. 125. 25. 75. 125.
26. 76. 126. 26. 76. 126.
27. 77. 127. 27. 77. 127.
28. 78. 128. 28. 78. 128.
29. 79. 129. 29. 79. 129.
30. 80. 130. 30. 80. 130.
31. 81. 131. 31. 81. 131.
32. 82. 132. 32. 82. 132.
33. 83. 133. 33. 83. 133.
34. 84. 134. 34. 84. 134.
35. 85. 135. 35. 85. 135.
36. 86. 136. 36. 86. 136.
37. 87. 137. 37. 87. 137.
38. 88. 138. 38. 88. 138.
39. 89. 139. 39. 89. 139.
40. 90. 140. 40. 90. 140.
41. 91. 141. 41. 91. 141.
42. 92. 142. 42. 92. 142.
43. 93. 143. 43. 93. 143.
44. 94. 144. 44. 94. 144.
45. 95. 145. 45. 95. 145.
46. 96. 146. 46. 96. 146.
47. 97. 147. 47. 97. 147.
48. 98. 148. 48. 98. 148.
49. 99. 149. 49. 99. 149.
50. 100. 150. 50. 100. 150.